SlideShare a Scribd company logo
SymantecTM Backup Exec 2010

    Command Line Applet
Symantec Legal Notice
Copyright © 2009 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, Backup Exec, and the
Symantec logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in
the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying,
distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be reproduced in
any form by any means without prior written authorization of Symantec Corporation and its
licensors, if any.
THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS,
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY
INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE, OR USE
OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS
SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be “commercial computer software” and
“commercial computer software documentation” as defined in FAR Sections 12.212 and DFARS
Section 227.7202.
Symantec Corporation
20330 Stevens Creek Boulevard
Cupertino, CA 95014
http://www.symantec.com




2                                                 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Table of Contents
         Updating scripts for use with this release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
         Command Line Applet requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
         Using the Command Line Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
         Using command line switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
              Switches used with all operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
              Backup job operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
              Operations and switches for administrating jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
              Restore job operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
              Operations and switches for viewing and responding to alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
              Operations and switches for error-handling rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
              Operations and switches for managing media and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
              Backup Exec services commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
              Logon account operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
              Report operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
              Operations for displaying network interface information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
              Database management operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
              Setting default options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
         Using job script files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
              Creating a backup job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
              Creating a restore job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
              Creating a catalog job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
              Creating a discovery job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
              Creating a duplicate backup job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
              Creating a test run job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
              Creating a copy job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
              Saving and launching the job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
         Using scripts and selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
              Creating a selection list script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

                                                                                                                                           3
Using Policy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
        Creating a policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
        Using job template script files within a policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
    Creating a backup job template script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
    Creating a duplicate backup job template script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
    Creating a synthetic full job template script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
    Using a schedule script with device and media operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
    Understanding job status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259




4                                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Symantec Backup Exec -
Command Line Applet

       The Backup Exec Command Line Applet is a convenient way to access some of the most
       useful features of Backup Exec from a command prompt. The Command Line Applet
       allows management of only one media server at a time, but allows for remote
       management of media servers within an enterprise. However, if the Central Admin
       Server Option (CASO) is installed, you can administer all servers managed by the central
       administration server.
       Backup Exec must be installed and running on a media server in order for the Command
       Line Applet to target it, but the Command Line Applet does not have to be run from a
       media server. The Command Line Applet uses functional command switches typed in a
       command prompt window to perform most Backup Exec functions and utilities.

       Note Backup Exec Command Line Applet is only backwards compatible for a previous
            release and dot releases of the same version of Backup Exec.



Updating scripts for use with this release
       This release of the Backup Exec Command Line Applet provides improved output from
       command switches and includes support for new features and capabilities in Backup
       Exec.
       Symantec strongly recommends that you use the latest release of the Command Line
       Applet. You may need to update existing job scripts to take advantage of the improved
       command switch output. While you update and test your job scripts with this release of
       Backup Exec Command Line Applet, you can continue to use the previous version of the
       Command Line Applet.




                                                                                          5
Command Line Applet requirements


Command Line Applet requirements
           The Backup Exec Command Line Applet works with a local or remote Backup Exec server
           installation. Minimum system requirements include:

           Command Line Applet requirements

           Operating System            You can find a list of compatible operating systems, platforms, and
                                       applications at the following URL:
                                       http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-1

           Processor                   Pentium system

           Memory                      Required 16 MB RAM

           Disk Space                  A minimum of 1 MB of hard disk space after Microsoft Windows is
                                       installed

           Other Hardware              DVD-ROM




Using the Command Line Applet
           The Backup Exec Command Line Applet is installed with Backup Exec. After installation,
           to run the applet on another computer, copy bemcmd.exe to a computer that meets the
           minimum requirements and is running Windows RPC services.
           If you copy bemcmd.exe to another computer, the following files must exist on that
           computer:
           ■   beclass.dll
           ■   becluster.dll
           ■   BECrypto.dll
           ■   besocket.dll
           ■   bestdutl.dll
           ■   libvxsigcomp2.dll
           ■   msvcp71.dll
           ■   msvcr71.dll
           ■   serdll.dll
           ■   vxcrypto.dll


6                                                  Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


      If these files do not already exist, copy them to the computer along with bemcmd.exe.
      To use the Command Line Applet, type bemcmd followed by a series of command
      switches in a command prompt window. The Command Line Applet will attempt to
      complete the requested task, and then return a value to the command prompt indicating
      success or failure.
      Backup Exec functions and utilities that you can run using the Command Line Applet
      include:
      ■   Run or cancel a previously created jobs.
      ■   Create and run jobs for local or remote file selections, including databases on
          Microsoft Exchange, SQL, Lotus Domino, Oracle, UNIX, and SharePoint installations.
      ■   Create selection lists.
      ■   Create protection policies that include job templates and rules.
      ■   Create, run, and monitor utility jobs.

      Note This release of the Command Line Applet does not support submission of verify or
           rewind jobs.

      ■   Set default options for all jobs.
      ■   Obtain job status and the number of scheduled, active, and completed jobs.
      ■   Create media sets and drive pools.
      ■   Perform drive utilities and get information about the status of drives.
      ■   Start and stop Backup Exec system services.
      ■   Retrieve information on and respond to job alerts.
      ■   Determine if the media server is available on the network.
      ■   View and print Backup Exec reports.

      Note The Command Line Applet can target clustered media servers. The only limitation
           is that the Command Line Applet can target a device pool, but not a specific device
           in that device pool.



Using command line switches
      To use the Command Line Applet on your computer, type the appropriate command line
      switch and any additional information required. For example, to run a previously created
      backup job named Operations Weekly, type the following at the command prompt:


                                                                                               7
Using command line switches


                bemcmd -o1 -j"Operations Weekly"
            In this example, -o1 is the operation to submit the backup job. The command line switch
            -j specifies the name of the backup job. Because the job name contains spaces, quotation
            marks are required around the job name.
            The job “Operations Weekly” was previously created through the Backup Exec
            administration console. By default, the backup will be done on the computer where the
            Command Line applet is executed.
            To run this same job on a remote computer named Genesis, type the following at the
            command prompt:
                bemcmd -cGenesis -o1 -j"Operations Weekly"
            The command line switch -c specifies the name of the media server where the job is to be
            run.
            When connecting to a remote server, if you are required to provide a user name and
            password, type the following at the command prompt, substituting the text appearing in
            italics with the correct names:
                bemcmd -cGenesis -nuser_name -ppassword -o1 -j"Operations
                Weekly"
            If the value contains a space or a colon, enclose the value with quotation marks. If the
            switch contains more than one letter a colon must appear immediately after the switch
            or the switch itself must be enclosed in quotation marks. Switches that consist of only a
            single character do no require a colon after the switch.
            In each of the previous examples, a -1 is returned if the job fails. You can also track the
            status of the job submission by including the Verbose Output command line switch -v.
            Substitute the text that appears in italics next to the command, such as job name, with
            a value, such as the correct job name.
            For commands using Job IDs, this version of Backup Exec uses a globally unique
            identifier (GUID) in a 16-byte hex string format for each job.

            Note Command line switches appearing in BOLD are required.




8                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Switches used with all operations
  The following command line switches can be used with all operations.

  Command line switches for all operations

  Item                           Description

  -?                             Displays help on all command line operations, usage, and special
                                 switches.

  -?operation number             Displays help about a command line operation.
  -ooperation number -?

  -cmedia server                 Specifies the name of the media server where the operation is to
                                 be performed. If a media server name is not specified, the local
                                 computer name is used by default.

  -llogfile                      Directs all output to a specified logfile and to the console. You
                                 must specify the logfile name where the output is to be written.

  -la:logfile                    Appends all output to the specified logfile and to the console. You
                                 must specify the logfile name where the output is to be written.

  -nuser name                    Specifies the user name credential for logging on to a remote
                                 Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current
                                 credential is used.

  -ppassword                     Specifies the password credential for logging on to a remote
                                 Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current
                                 password credential is used.

  -tBackup Exec server           Specifies the type of OS the server is running. The default is
  type                           Windows.
                                 To specify a NetWare server, type -tNW.
                                 To specify a Windows server, type -tNT.

  -v                             Displays information detailing what has occurred while running
                                 the Command Line Applet and the specified option. This
                                 command is useful when tracing the sequence of events using the
                                 command line applet.

  -w                             Waits for the job to complete before exiting the program. The
                                 commands with switch -w return a 1 if successful or -1 on failure.




                                                                                                       9
Using command line switches


            Command line switches for all operations (continued)

            Item                           Description

            --deprecation                  Displays commands that are deprecated in Backup Exec. Returns a
                                           1 if the command succeeds, a -1 if the command fails, or a 0 if the
                                           command partially succeeds.

            --category                     Displays category numbers that you append to the -? switch.



        Backup job operations and switches
            You can run a previously created job or submit a new backup job using the commands
            presented in the following table. You can also create a backup job script file that the
            Command Line Applet can use instead of command line switches.

            Backup job commands

            Operation    Additional           Function             Description
                         Switches

            -o1                               Run backup job       Runs a backup job that has been previously
                                                                   defined. Returns a job instance ID. Also
                                                                   returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                                   the command fails.

                         -jjob name or                             Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
                         -ijob ID                                  the previously defined job that Backup Exec
                                                                   should run.
                                                                   Note If there are jobs with the same name,
                                                                        only one of the jobs will run. To ensure
                                                                        that the correct job runs, you should
                                                                        use the job ID instead of the job name
                                                                        to specify which job will run.

                         -pr:priority                              Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                   options include:
                                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                                   ◆   High
                                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                                   ◆   Low
                                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                   as Medium.


10                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function        Description
            Switches

            -w                    Wait for job    Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                  completion      for the operation to complete before
                                                  returning.

-o2                               Create backup   Creates and runs a backup job for a specified
                                  job             list of files. This operation returns a job
                                                  instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command
                                                  succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

            -jjob name                            Specifies the name Backup Exec will assign to
                                                  this job. If you do not specify a name, a
                                                  default name is generated.

            -ddevice name                         Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec
                                                  should use for backup. When backing up a
                                                  remote server, the device name will be the
                                                  name of the remote server.

            -sd:device name                       Use this switch instead of the -d switch to
                                                  indicate that this device name should be
                                                  checked against the devices (and device pools)
                                                  on the target server, and the job should only
                                                  run if the device exists. If the device does not
                                                  exist, and if the -v (verbose) switch is used,
                                                  the following message appears: Device or
                                                  Device Pool specified does not exist.

            -sn:media                             Specifies a preferred server name or media
            server name or                        server pool name for the job.
            -pn:media
            server pool
            name




                                                                                                  11
Using command line switches


            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -pr:priority                            Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                options include:
                                                                ◆   Highest
                                                                ◆   High
                                                                ◆   Medium
                                                                ◆   Low
                                                                ◆   Lowest
                                                                If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                as Medium.




12                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function   Description
            Switches

            -sfile list or                   Required. Specifies a path to a group of files,
            -sf:file name                    the name of a file that contains a list (one per
            or                               line) of files, or an existing selection list name
            -sl:selection                    to be backed up.
            list name                        The list should be comma delimited.
                                             Selections that end with a backslash indicate
                                             the selection is a directory. Selections that do
                                             not end with a backslash indicate the
                                             selection is a file.
                                             To back up System State, type "server
                                             nameSystem?State*.*" after -s.
                                             Note To back up Shadow Copy Components
                                                  on a Windows 2003 computer, type
                                                  "server nameShadow?Copy
                                                  ?Components*.*" after -s.
                                             By default, subdirectories will be recursed; to
                                             skip subdirectories during backup, the
                                             characters /n should appear before the
                                             comma separating the entries, and the last
                                             quotation mark. Include a space between the
                                             list of files and the /n entry. For example,
                                             "c:winnt*.* /n".
                                             If Unix files are included in the selections,
                                             the characters /u should appear before the
                                             comma separating the entries, and the last
                                             quotation mark. If the sudirectories are
                                             skipped during backup, the /n characters
                                             must precede the /u characters. If the /n
                                             characters are in the entry, include a space
                                             between the list of files and the /n entry. For
                                             example, "c:winnt*.* /n/u".
                                             The order in which resource selections are
                                             specified is the order in which the resources
                                             will be backed up. Note the following about
                                             the order in which selections can be backed
                                             up:




                                                                                               13
Using command line switches


            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                                                                ◆   You can order resources within a server,
                                                                    but you cannot alternate selections across
                                                                    servers. For example, you can select C:
                                                                    and D: from Server A followed by
                                                                    selections from Server B. However, you
                                                                    cannot order selections as C: from Server
                                                                    A and then C: from Server B and then D:
                                                                    from both servers.
                                                                ◆   For any given server, System State or
                                                                    shadow copy components must be
                                                                    ordered last.

                        -mmedia set                             Specifies the name of the media set Backup
                                                                Exec should target.

                        -mp:media                               Specifies the media protection level:
                        protection                              ◆   0 = Overwrite
                        level
                                                                ◆   1 = Append to media, overwrite if not
                                                                    available
                                                                ◆   2 = Append to media, terminate if not
                                                                    available

                        -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                              job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                               replace a job that was created either through
                                                               the command line or the Backup Exec
                                                               administration console, as long as that job
                                                               has already been created and saved.

                        -w                    Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                              completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                returning.

                        -e or -ef:file                          Specifies a list of items or the name of a file
                        name                                    that contains a list of items to exclude from
                                                                the backup job.

                        -rl:                  List of server    Specifies the server name and logon account
                                              and logon         GUIDs. The list should be comma delimited.
                                              accounts




14                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function         Description
            Switches

            -rf:                  File name of     Specifies the name of the file that contains
                                  server and logon the server name and logon account GUIDs.
                                  accounts         The list should be comma delimited with a
                                                   blank line at the end of the list.

-o3                               Back up server   Creates and runs a backup job to back up the
                                  drive            specified drive on the media server. Returns a
                                                   job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the
                                                   command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                   fails.

            -jjob name                             Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                   assign to this job.

            -ddrive name                           Specifies the drive letter of the drive that
                                                   Backup Exec should backup. If no drive letter
                                                   is specified, the job will default to C: drive.
                                                   When backing up a remote server, the device
                                                   name will be the name of the remote server.

            -sn:media                              Specifies a preferred server name or media
            server name or                         server pool name for the job.
            -pn:media
            server pool
            name

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.




                                                                                                    15
Using command line switches

            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                              job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                               replace a job that was created either through
                                                               the command line or the Backup Exec
                                                               Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                               has already been created and saved.

                        -w                    Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                              completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                returning.

            -o6                               Back up         Creates and runs a backup job for Exchange
                                              Exchange Server Server. Returns a job instance ID. Also
                                                              returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                              the command fails.
                                                                Note The Agent for Microsoft Exchange
                                                                     Server must be enabled from the media
                                                                     server in order for this command to
                                                                     work.

                        -jjob name                              Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                                assign to this job.

                        -sg:storage                             Required. Specifies the storage group to back
                        group                                   up.

                        -sn:media                               Specifies a preferred server name or media
                        server name or                          server pool name for the job.
                        -pn:media
                        server pool
                        name

                        -pr:priority                            Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                options include:
                                                                ◆   Highest
                                                                ◆   High
                                                                ◆   Medium
                                                                ◆   Low
                                                                ◆   Lowest
                                                                If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                as Medium.


16                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function         Description
            Switches

            -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                  job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                   replace a job that was created either through
                                                   the Command Line Applet or the Backup Exec
                                                   Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                   has already been created and saved.

            -w                    Wait for job     Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                  completion       for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

-o8                               Back up SQL      Creates and runs a backup job for SQL server.
                                  server           Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if
                                                   the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.
                                                   Note The Agent for Microsoft SQL Server
                                                        must be enabled on the media server in
                                                        order for this command to work.

            -jjob name                             Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                   assign to this job.

            -db:database                           Specifies the name of the database to back
            name                                   up. Enter -db:*.* to back up the default
                                                   instance on the local machine.

            -ni:named                              Specifies the named instance to back up.
            instance

            -sn:media                              Specifies a preferred server name or media
            server name or                         server pool name for the job.
            -pn:media
            server pool
            name

            -svr:server name                       Specifies the name of the remote SQL server
                                                   to back up.




                                                                                                 17
Using command line switches

            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -pr:priority                            Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                options include:
                                                                ◆   Highest
                                                                ◆   High
                                                                ◆   Medium
                                                                ◆   Low
                                                                ◆   Lowest
                                                                If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                as Medium.

                        -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                              job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                               replace a job that was created either through
                                                               the command line or the Backup Exec
                                                               Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                               has already been created and saved.

                        -w                    Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                              completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                returning.

                        -lo:database                            Places a Microsoft SQL Server database in
                        mode                                    either standby mode or in a loading state.
                                                                Values are:
                                                                0 = None.
                                                                1 = Standby. Place database in standby mode.
                                                                2 = No recover. Place database in a loading
                                                                state.

            -o17                              Back up Lotus     Creates and runs a backup job of the Lotus
                                              Notes server      Notes server. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                                succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -jjob name                              Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                                assign to this job.

                        -ddrive name                            Required. Specifies the drive letter where
                                                                Lotus Notes is installed.




18                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function         Description
            Switches

            -tl:path                               Specifies the complete path to the
                                                   transaction log file.

            -sn:media                              Specifies a preferred server name or media
            server name or                         server pool name for the job.
            -pn:media
            server pool
            name

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                  job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                   replace a job that was created either through
                                                   the command line or the Backup Exec
                                                   Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                   has already been created and saved.

            -w                    Wait for job     Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                  completion       for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

-o18                              Back up Oracle   Creates and runs a backup job of the Oracle
                                  server           server. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds
                                                   or -1 if the command fails.
                                                   Note Only one SID can be specified per
                                                        command. Use -si to indicate the SID
                                                        name to back up.

            -jjob name                             Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                   assign to this job.

            -si:SID name                           Required. Specifies the SID name to back up.


                                                                                                    19
Using command line switches


            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -sn:media                               Specifies a preferred server name or media
                        server name or                          server pool name for the job.
                        -pn:media
                        server pool
                        name

                        -pr:priority                            Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                options include:
                                                                ◆   Highest
                                                                ◆   High
                                                                ◆   Medium
                                                                ◆   Low
                                                                ◆   Lowest
                                                                If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                as Medium.

                        -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                              job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                               replace a job that was created either through
                                                               the Command Line Applet or the Backup Exec
                                                               Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                               has already been created and saved.

                        -w                    Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                              completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                returning.

                        -ddevice name                           Specifies the name of the device that Backup
                                                                Exec should use for the alias backup.




20                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function        Description
            Switches

-o24                              Back up a       Creates and runs a backup job for the
                                  Microsoft       Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2003.
                                  SharePoint      Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if
                                  Portal Server   the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                  2003            command fails.
                                                  The Agent for Microsoft SharePoint must be
                                                  enabled on both the media server and the
                                                  server on which SharePoint Portal Server is
                                                  installed in order for this command to work.
                                                  You must specify either the -wb switch or the
                                                  -fm switch. If you specify either switch, the
                                                  other is optional

            -wb:web server                        Required. Specifies the name of a Web
            name                                  server that belongs to the farm.

            -fm:farm name                         Required. Specifies the SharePoint Portal
                                                  Server farm to back up.

            -cf                                   Includes the Configuration database in the
                                                  backup job.

            -ss                                   Includes the Single sign-on database in the
                                                  backup job.

            -ds                                   Includes the Document Library store in the
                                                  backup job.

            -ps:portal site                       Specifies a list portal sites to back up. This
            name                                  list should be comma delimited.
                                                  If you do not specify a list of portal sites, then
                                                  all portal sites in the farm are backed up.
                                                  You can display a list of portal sites if you use
                                                  the -o26 switch.




                                                                                                   21
Using command line switches


            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -ws:Windows                             Specifies a list of Windows SharePoint
                        SharePoint                              Services site name to back up. This list should
                        Services sites                          be comma delimited.
                                                                If you do not specify a list of Windows
                                                                SharePoint Services sites, then all Windows
                                                                SharePoint Services sites in the farm are
                                                                backed up.
                                                                You can display a list of Windows SharePoint
                                                                Services site names if you use the -o26
                                                                switch.

                        -dl:document                            Specifies a list of backward compatible
                        library names                           document libraries to back up. This list
                                                                should be comma delimited.
                                                                If you do not specify a list of backward
                                                                compatible document libraries, then all
                                                                backward compatible document libraries in
                                                                the farm are backed up.
                                                                You can display a list of document library
                                                                names if you use the -o26 switch.

                        -jjob name                              Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                                assign to this job.

                        -pr:priority                            Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                options include:
                                                                ◆   Highest
                                                                ◆   High
                                                                ◆   Medium
                                                                ◆   Low
                                                                ◆   Lowest
                                                                If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                as Medium.

                        -ddevice name                           Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec
                                                                should use for backup. When backing up a
                                                                remote server, the device name will be the
                                                                name of the remote server.




22                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function         Description
            Switches

            -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                  job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                   replace a job that was created either through
                                                   the command line or the Backup Exec
                                                   Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                   has already been created and saved.

            -w                    Wait for job     Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                  completion       for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a
                                                   run now job), the -w is ignored.

            -sn:media                              Specifies a preferred server name or media
            server name or                         server pool name for the job.
            -pn:media
            server pool
            name

-o28                              Use Oracle       Use RMAN to create and run a backup job for
                                  Recovery         an Oracle database. Returns a job instance ID.
                                  Manager          Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a
                                  (RMAN) to back   -1 if the command fails.
                                  up an Oracle
                                  database

            -svr:server name                       Required. Specifies the name of a server
                                                   on which Oracle runs.

            -sid:Oracle SID                        Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID.

            -a                                     Backup up all archived logs.

            -jjob name                             Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                   assign to this job.

            -ddevice name                          Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec
                                                   should use for backup. When backing up a
                                                   remote server, the device name will be the
                                                   name of the remote server.




                                                                                                     23
Using command line switches

            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -w                    Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                              completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a
                                                                run now job), the -w is ignored.

            -o52                              Back up a         Creates and runs a backup job for the
                                              Microsoft         Microsoft SharePoint Server 2007. Returns a
                                              SharePoint        job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the
                                              Server 2007       command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                                fails.
                                                                The Agent for Microsoft SharePoint must be
                                                                enabled on both the media server and the
                                                                server on which SharePoint server is
                                                                installed in order for this command to work.
                                                                You must specify either the -wb switch or the
                                                                -fm switch. If you specify either switch, the
                                                                other is optional

                        -wb:web server                          Required. Specifies the name of a web
                        name                                    server that belongs to the farm.

                        -fm:farm name                           Required. Specifies the SharePoint server
                                                                farm to back up.

                        -cf:                                    Includes the Configuration database in the
                                                                backup job.

                        -ss:                                    Includes the Single sign-on database in the
                                                                backup job.

                        -ca                                     Backs up the central administration site.

                        -wa:Web                                 Specifies the name of the Web application.
                        application                             You can list multiple names.
                        name

                        -sp: shared                             Specifies the name of the shared server
                        service                                 provider. You can list multiple names.
                        provider name
                        or -ssp shared
                        service
                        provider name


24                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function         Description
            Switches

            -si                                    Backs up the shared instance.

            -gs                                    Backs up the global settings.

            -jjob name or                          Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
            -ijob ID                               the previously defined job that Backup Exec
                                                   should run.
                                                   Note If there are jobs with the same name,
                                                        only one of the jobs will run. To ensure
                                                        that the correct job runs, you should
                                                        use the job ID instead of the job name
                                                        to specify which job will run.

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -ddevice name                          Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec
                                                   should use for backup. When backing up a
                                                   remote server, the device name will be the
                                                   name of the remote server.

            -r                    Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously
                                  job              defined job with this new one. You can
                                                   replace a job that was created either through
                                                   the command line or the Backup Exec
                                                   Administration Console, as long as that job
                                                   has already been created and saved.

            -w                    Wait for job     Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                  completion       for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a
                                                   run now job), the -w is ignored.




                                                                                                     25
Using command line switches


            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -e                                       Enables Backup Exec Granular Recovery
                                                                 Technology (GRT), which lets you restore
                                                                 individual items from tape.

                        -sn:media                                Specifies a preferred server name or media
                        server name or                           server pool name for the job.
                        -pn:media
                        server pool
                        name

            -o90                              Launch job         Executes a job based on the contents of a
                                              using job script   script file. Return values depend on the type
                                              file               of script. Returns a job instance ID. Also
                                                                 returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                                 the command fails.
                                                                 For more information about Backup Job
                                                                 Script Files, see “Using job script files” on
                                                                 page 127.

                        -fscript file                            Required. Specifies the name of the Backup
                                                                 Exec job script file.

                        -w                    Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                              completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                                 returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a
                                                                 run now job), the -w is ignored.

            -o99                              Manage an          Creates and maintains encryption keys.
                                              encryption key

                        -kkey name                               Required. Specifies the name of the
                                                                 encryption key.

                        -pp:pass phrase                          Required when creating a new key. Specifies
                                                                 a pass phrase for this key. For 128-bit AES
                                                                 encryption, the pass phrase must be at least
                                                                 eight characters. For 256-bit AES encryption,
                                                                 the pass phrase must be at least 16
                                                                 characters.




26                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Backup job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional            Function   Description
            Switches

            -em:encryption                   Specifies the encryption method to use.
            method                           Values are as follows:
                                             ◆   0 = None
                                             ◆   1 = Software
                                             ◆   2 = Hardware
                                             ◆   3 = Hardware if available, otherwise
                                                 software
                                             Use this switch with the -dk parameter to
                                             configure the default encryption method for
                                             new backup or duplicate backup set jobs. To
                                             specify the encryption method, you must
                                             first set a default encryption key. If you type 2
                                             or 3, the default key must be 256-bit
                                             encryption. If you enter the -dk parameter
                                             but not the -em parameter, then the
                                             encryption method defaults to software.

            -et:encryption                   Specifies the encryption type to use for this
            type (128 or                     key. Your choices are 128-bit AES or 256-bit
            256-bit)                         AES.
                                             The 256-bit AES encryption provides a
                                             stronger level of security than 128-bit AES
                                             encryption. However, backup jobs may
                                             process more slowly with 256-bit AES
                                             encryption than with 128-bit AES
                                             encryption.

            -kt:key type                     Specifies the key type for the encryption key.
                                             Enter 1 for a common key; otherwise, enter 0
                                             for a restricted key.
                                             If a key is common, any Backup Exec user can
                                             use the key to back up and restore data.
                                             If a key is restricted, any Backup Exec user
                                             can use the key to back up data, but only the
                                             key owner or a user who knows the pass
                                             phrase can use the key to restore the
                                             encrypted data.




                                                                                             27
Using command line switches

            Backup job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional            Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -dk:                                    Specifies the encryption key as the default
                                                                key for new backup or duplicate backup set
                                                                jobs.
                                                                To clear the default key, specify the -dk:
                                                                parameter with the key name “None.”

                        -d                                      Deletes an encryption key. If you do not
                                                                specify the -d switch, an encryption key will
                                                                be created.




            -o220                             Create selection Creates a list of resource selections to be used
                                              list             when creating a backup job.

                        -sselection                             Required. Specifies the name of the selection
                        name                                    list.

                        -ddescription                           A brief description of the selection list.

                        -fscript file                           Required. Specifies the selections to be
                                                                contained in this selection list. Format for
                                                                scripts is [MACHINE] MACHINE1=machine
                                                                name|logon GUID
                                                                Each path must be on a separate line. For
                                                                example:
                                                                PATH1=C:test*.*|{1950A99C-2423-451E-B9
                                                                77-225717870CEE}
                                                                PATH2=C:test2*.*
                                                                An example script is available in the
                                                                selectionscript.txt file in the
                                                                WINNTUTILSI386 directory on the Backup
                                                                Exec DVD.

                        -sn:media                               Specifies a preferred server name or media
                        server name or                          server pool name for the job.
                        -pn:media
                        server pool
                        name




28                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


  Backup job commands (continued)

  Operation    Additional           Function          Description
               Switches

               -pi:pool ID                            Specifies a preferred server pool ID for the
                                                      job.

  -o601                             Displays          Displays the live updates you have installed.
                                    installed hot
                                    fixes and service
                                    packs

  -o999                             Error code        Displays an error message for an error code.
                                    lookup

               -eerror code                           Specifies the error code for the error message
                                                      you want to display.



Operations and switches for administrating jobs
  Several command switches allow you to administer your jobs. These switches, which
  allow you to obtain information about the jobs, view job histories, and cancel a job,
  include:

  Job monitoring switches

  Operation    Additional           Function          Description
               Switches

  -o15                              Get job state     Displays one of many predefined job states if
                                                      the command was successful. Also returns a 1
                                                      if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                      command fails.

               -jjob name or                          Required. Specifies the name or the job ID
               -ijob ID                               that contains the job statuses to display.




                                                                                                      29
Using command line switches

            Job monitoring switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional          Function          Description
                         Switches

            -o16                             Dump job status Copies to the console the job information and
                                             for scheduled   descriptive headings for each item associated
                                             and active job  with the job ID. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                             succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                         -jjob name or                         Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
                         -ijob ID                              the job to cancel.

            -o20                             Cancel job        Cancels a job. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                         -jjob name or                         Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
                         -ijob ID                              the job to cancel.

            -o21                             Dump              Displays completed job status. Returns a 1 if
                                             completed job     the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                             status            command fails.

                         -j job name -ijob                     Specifies the job ID or job history ID that
                         ID or -hi:job                         contains the job statuses to display.
                         history ID

                         -e                                    Use this switch with -ijob ID to display
                                                               details for the last instance of the job.

            -o22                             Jobs on hold      Displays all the jobs that have the on hold
                                                               status. If you do not specify -j or -i only the
                                                               number of jobs on hold appears.

                         -i                                    Use this switch to display job IDs.

                         -j                                    Use this switch to display job names.

            -o23                             Query job         Displays information about all job states and
                                                               job types in the Job Monitor.

                         -sjob state                           Specifies the state of the job you want to
                                                               query.

                         -qjob type                            Specifies the type of job you want to query.

                         -i                                    Use this switch to display job IDs.


30                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Job monitoring switches (continued)

Operation    Additional          Function          Description
             Switches

             -j                                    Use this switch to display job names.

             -js:                                  Use this switch to display a list of available
                                                   job states that you can use with the -s switch.

             -jt:                                  Use this switch to display a list of available
                                                   job types that you can use with the -q switch.

             -dj:                                  Use this switch to display a list of jobs that
                                                   delete after the job completes.

-o30                             Dump job log      Copies to the console the job log name that is
                                 name of           associated with the specified job ID or job
                                 completed job     name. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds
                                                   or a -1 if the command fails.

             -jjob name or                         Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
             -ijob ID                              the job.

-o31                             Dump job log      Copies to the console the contents of the job
                                 contents          log specified on the command line. Returns a
                                                   1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.

             -ffile name                           Required. Specifies the job log name.

             -soutput style                        Specify a 0 for text output or 1 for HTML
                                                   output.

-o35                             Rename a job      Renames a job. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                   succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

             -ijob id            Rename job        Required. Instructs Backup Exec to rename
                                 associated with   the job associated with the job IDs.
                                 the job ID.

             -jjob name          Current name of Required. Instructs Backup Exec to rename
                                 the job to      the job.
                                 rename.

             -jn:new job name New name for         Required.Provides the new name for the job.
                              the job.


                                                                                                    31
Using command line switches

            Job monitoring switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional          Function            Description
                         Switches

            -o200                            Place job on hold Places the specified job on hold. Returns a 1 if
                                                               the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                               command fails.
                                                                 You must specify either the -j switch or the -f
                                                                 switch.

                         -jjob name                              Required. Specifies the name of the job to be
                                                                 placed on hold.

                         -ffilename                              Required.Specifies a file that contains a list
                                                                 of jobs (one per line) to place on hold.

            -o201                            Take job off hold Takes the specified job off hold. Returns a 1 if
                                                               the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                               command fails.
                                                                 You must specify either the -j switch or the -f
                                                                 switch.

                         -jjob name                              Required. Specifies the name of the job to be
                                                                 taken off hold.

                         -ffilename                              Required. Specifies a file that contains a list
                                                                 of jobs (one per line) to place on hold.

            -o202                            Delete              Deletes a scheduled job.
                                             scheduled job       You must specific the -j switch.

                         -jjob name or                           Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
                         -ijob ID                                the job to cancel.

                         -ds:                Delete the          If the scheduled job is not deleted, the
                                             selection list if   selection list is not deleted, and a -1 is
                                             no other jobs are   returned.
                                             using it            If the scheduled job is deleted, the selection
                                                                 list will be deleted, and a 1 is returned.
                                                                 If the selection list is not deleted, a 0 is
                                                                 returned.




32                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Job monitoring switches (continued)

Operation    Additional          Function           Description
             Switches

-o221                            Delete a backup Deletes the specified backup selection list.
                                 selection list

             -sselection                            Required. Specifies the name of the selection
             list name or                           list or filename to delete.
             -ffilename

-o222                            Exclude all
                                 selections in an
                                 existing
                                 selection list
                                 from backup.

             -e                                     Use this switch to exclude every entry in the
                                                    specified selection list from backup.

-o251                            List all backup    Displays all available backup selection lists.
                                 selection lists.   Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                    the command fails.

-o280                            List preferred     Lists all existing preferred server
                                 server group       configurations.

-o281                            Create preferred Lets you create a new preferred server
                                 server group     configuration. Preferred server
                                                  configurations give you more control over
                                                  your backup jobs by letting you specify a
                                                  preferred server from which Backup Exec
                                                  backs up replicated data.

-o282                            Delete preferred Deletes the selected preferred server
                                 server group     configuration. You can delete a preferred
                                                  server configuration if you no longer need it.

-o283                            Set default      Designates a default preferred server
                                 preferred server configuration for all of your backup jobs that
                                 group            contain the appropriate replication data.
                                                  When you designate a default preferred
                                                  server configuration, it is not applied to
                                                  existing selection lists. It is considered the
                                                  default preferred server configuration for any
                                                  subsequent selection lists you create.



                                                                                                    33
Using command line switches

            Job monitoring switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional          Function          Description
                         Switches

            -o290                            List resources in Lets you view any servers and sites that make
                                             preferred server up the preferred server configuration.
                                             group

            -o291                            Add resource to Lets you add a server or site to the preferred
                                             preferred server server group. You must specify the type of
                                             group            resource that you want to add.

                         -i:group id or                        Specifies the ID or name of the preferred
                         -g:group name                         server configuration to which you want to
                                                               add a resource. You can specify either the
                                                               group ID or the group name.

                         -r:resource                           Specifies the resource you want to add to the
                                                               preferred server group.

                         -rt:resource                          Required. Specifies the type of resource you
                         type                                  are adding to the preferred server
                                                               configuration.
                                                               Resource types include:
                                                               1 = Site
                                                               2 = Server
                                                               3 = Exchange 2010 forest
                                                               4 = Exchange 2010 DAG

            -o292                            Remove           Lets you remove a server or site from the
                                             resources from preferred server configuration.
                                             preferred server
                                             group

            -o312                            Disable error     Disables an error-handling rule.
                                             handling rule

                         -irule ID                             Required.Specifies the ID of the rule being
                                                               disabled.




34                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Job monitoring switches (continued)

Operation    Additional          Function         Description
             Switches

-o506                            Dump job         Displays job, selection, and schedule
                                 information      information stored on this server. Also
                                                  returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                  the command fails.

             -jjob name                           Specifies the name of the job that contains
                                                  information that you want to be dumped.

             -ddisplay type      Display type of Specifies the type of job information to
                                 job information display. Enter one of the following values:
                                                  1 = Display only the job information. Do not
                                                  display the selection list or schedule
                                                  information.
                                                  2 = Display only the selection list
                                                  information. Do not display the job or
                                                  schedule information.
                                                  3 = Display only the schedule information. Do
                                                  not display the job or selection list
                                                  information.
                                                  If you do not use the -d switch, all job
                                                  information is displayed.

-o507                            Dump selection   Displays the contents of the specified
                                 lists            selection list. If a selection list is not
                                                  specified, all selection lists will be dumped.

             -sselection                          Specifies the name of the selection list.
             list name

-o509                            Dump policy      Displays the contents of the specified policy.
                                 information      If a policy is not specified, all policies will be
                                                  dumped.

             -ipolicy ID                          Required. Specifies the GUID for the policy.
                                                  To find the ID for a policy, use operation
                                                  -o263 to display the policies on a computer.

             -j                                   Instructs Backup Exec to display policy name.




                                                                                                       35
Using command line switches


        Restore job operations and switches
            You can run a previously created restore job or launch a restore job script file through the
            following command line switches:

            Restore job commands

            Operation   Additional         Function          Description
                        Switches

            -o7                            Run a restore job Runs a restore job that has been previously
                                                             defined for a media server. Returns a job
                                                             instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command
                                                             succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -jjob name or                        Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of
                        -ijob ID                             the previously defined job that Backup Exec
                                                             should run.

                        -pr:priority                         Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                             options include:
                                                             ◆   Highest
                                                             ◆   High
                                                             ◆   Medium
                                                             ◆   Low
                                                             ◆   Lowest
                                                             If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                             as Medium.

                        -w                 Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                           completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                             returning.

            -o27                           Restore           Creates and runs a restore job of a Microsoft
                                           Microsoft         SharePoint Portal Server 2003 through a
                                           SharePoint        server farm.
                                           Portal Server
                                           2003 job

                        -fm:farm name                        Required. Specifies the SharePoint Portal
                                                             Server farm to restore.

                        -cf                                  Includes the Configuration database in the
                                                             restore job.




36                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Restore job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional             Function   Description
            Switches

            -ss:                              Includes the Single sign-on database in the
                                              restore job.

            -ds:                              Includes the Document Library store in the
                                              restore job.

            -ps:portal site                   Specifies a list of portal sites to restore. This
            name                              list should be comma delimited.
                                              You can display a list of portal sites if you use
                                              the -o26 switch.

            -ws:Windows                       Specifies a list of Windows SharePoint
            SharePoint                        Services sites to restore. This list should be
            Services sites                    comma delimited.
                                              You can display a list of Windows SharePoint
                                              Services sites if you use the -o26 switch.

            -dl:document                      Specifies a list of backward compatible
            library names                     document libraries to restore. This list should
                                              be comma delimited.
                                              You can display a list of document libraries if
                                              you use the -o26 switch.

            -ne:no earlier                    Specifies the earliest date range to perform a
            than date                         point-in-time restore.

            -nl:no later                      Specifies the latest date range to perform a
            than date                         point-in-time restore.

            -jjob name                        Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                              assign to this job.




                                                                                                  37
Using command line switches


            Restore job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional             Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -pr:priority                             Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                 options include:
                                                                 ◆   Highest
                                                                 ◆   High
                                                                 ◆   Medium
                                                                 ◆   Low
                                                                 ◆   Lowest
                                                                 If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                 as Medium.

                        -w                     Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                               completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                 returning.

            -o29                               Use Oracle      Use RMAN to create and run a restore for an
                                               Recovery        Oracle database.
                                               Manager
                                               (RMAN) to
                                               restore an
                                               Oracle database

                        -svr:server name                         Required. Specifies the name of a server
                                                                 on which Oracle runs.

                        -sid:Oracle SID                          Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID.

                        -act:logon                               Specifies the logon account name to log on to
                        account name                             connect to the server on which Oracle runs.
                                                                 You should specify this switch if the current
                                                                 logon account name is not valid to log on to
                                                                 the server.

                        -tb:tablespace                           Specifies a list of tablespace names to restore.
                        names                                    This list should be comma delimited.

                        -ne:no earlier                           Specifies the earliest date range to perform a
                        than date                                point-in-time restore.

                        -nl:no later                             Specifies the latest date range to perform a
                        than date                                point-in-time restore.



38                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Restore job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional             Function         Description
            Switches

            -jjob name                              Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                    assign to this job.

            -pr:priority                            Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                    options include:
                                                    ◆   Highest
                                                    ◆   High
                                                    ◆   Medium
                                                    ◆   Low
                                                    ◆   Lowest
                                                    If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                    as Medium.

            -r                     Recover using    Recovers up to the last committed
                                   redo logs        transaction that is available from online and
                                                    archived redo logs.

            -ro                    Open database    Ensures that the database is opened as soon
                                   after recovery   as the recovery is finished.

            -w                     Wait for job     Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                   completion       for the operation to complete before
                                                    returning.

-o36                               Create a SQL     Creates and runs a restore job of a SQL server.
                                   server restore
                                   job

            -db:named                               Required. Specifies the named instance of
            instance and                            SQL server the databases are in. Enter
            database name                           the named instance and database name
                                                    in the serverinstance+database format.
                                                    You should separate the multiple names with
                                                    a comma. You can specify *.* to restore all
                                                    databases in the instance.
                                                    Note Database names are case sensitive.

            -dt:backup date                         Restores the most recent backup job no later
                                                    than the specified date.




                                                                                                     39
Using command line switches

            Restore job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional             Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -jjob name                               Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                                 assign to this job.

                        -pr:priority                             Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                 options include:
                                                                 ◆   Highest
                                                                 ◆   High
                                                                 ◆   Medium
                                                                 ◆   Low
                                                                 ◆   Lowest
                                                                 If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                 as Medium.

            -o38                               Search catalog    Searches the catalog for protected resources.

                        -vn:volume name                          Specifies the name of the volume that you
                                                                 want to search.

                        -mn:media name                           Specifies the name of the media that you
                                                                 want to search.

                        -ne:no earlier                           Specifies the earliest date range to perform a
                        than date                                point-in-time search.

                        -nl:no later                             Specifies the latest date range to perform a
                        than date                                point-in-time search.

                        -fn:filename                             Specifies the type of file by which you want to
                                                                 search. You can use a type of filename such as
                                                                 doc.

                        -pa:path name                            Specifies the path by which you want to
                                                                 search.

                        -sn:server name                          Specifies the server name by which you want
                                                                 to search.

                        -d                                       Search by directories only.

                        -s                                       Include subdirectories in the search.



40                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Restore job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional             Function           Description
            Switches

-o39                               Create a restore   Runs a restore of NTFS volumes that include
                                   job of NTFS        system state and shadow copy components.
                                   volumes

            -pa:selection                             Required. Specifies the selection to restore.
            path                                      You must enter the path name in the
                                                      serverpathfile format.
                                                      You can enter multiple paths, however, the
                                                      list should be comma delimited. For example,
                                                      pa:"server1path1file1,
                                                      server2path2file2"
                                                      You can use a pipe to specify multiple
                                                      selections under the same server. For
                                                      example,
                                                      -pa:"server1path1file1|path2file2|path
                                                      3file3"
                                                      You can use a plus sign to specify multiple
                                                      files under the same path. For example,
                                                      -pa:"server1path1file1+file2+file3"
                                                      You can specify *.type to restore the same
                                                      type of file to be restored. For example,
                                                      -pa:"serverpath1*.doc".
                                                      To restore everything under a directory, use
                                                      use *.* as the filename, or end the path with .
                                                      If the selection is a directory, but the
                                                      selection text does not end with , the folder
                                                      name will be specified as the filename. The
                                                      file will be restored instead of the directory.

            -ne:no earlier                            Specifies the earliest date range to perform a
            than date                                 point-in-time restore.

            -nl:no later                              Specifies the latest date range to perform a
            than date                                 point-in-time restore.




                                                                                                      41
Using command line switches


            Restore job commands (continued)

            Operation   Additional             Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -pr:priority                             Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                                 options include:
                                                                 ◆   Highest
                                                                 ◆   High
                                                                 ◆   Medium
                                                                 ◆   Low
                                                                 ◆   Lowest
                                                                 If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                                 as Medium.

                        -w                     Wait for job      Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                               completion        for the operation to complete before
                                                                 returning.

            -o54                               Restore           Creates and runs a restore job of a Microsoft
                                               Microsoft         SharePoint Server 2007 through a server
                                               SharePoint        farm.
                                               Server 2007 job

                        -fm:farm name                            Required. Specifies the SharePoint server
                                                                 farm to restore.

                        -cf                                      Includes the Configuration database in the
                                                                 restore job.

                        -ss:                                     Includes the Single sign-on database in the
                                                                 restore job.

                        -ca                                      Restores the central administration site.

                        -wa:Web                                  Specifies the name of the Web application.
                        application                              You can list multiple names.
                        name

                        -sp: shared                              Specifies the name of the shared server
                        service                                  provider. You can list multiple names.
                        provider name
                        or -ssp shared
                        service
                        provider name



42                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Restore job commands (continued)

Operation   Additional             Function            Description
            Switches

            -gs                                        Restores the global settings.

            -ne:no earlier                             Specifies the earliest date range to perform a
            than date                                  point-in-time restore.

            -pw:                   Preserve            Enter 1 to preserve the existing IIS web site
                                   existing Internet   and application pool for the specified
                                   Information         SharePoint web application. Enter 0 to create
                                   Services (IIS)      a new IIS web site and application pool with
                                   web site and        settings from the backup.
                                   application pool

            -nl:no later                               Specifies the latest date range to perform a
            than date                                  point-in-time restore.

            -j job name                                Specifies the name that Backup Exec will
                                                       assign to this job.

            -pr:priority                               Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                       options include:
                                                       ◆   Highest
                                                       ◆   High
                                                       ◆   Medium
                                                       ◆   Low
                                                       ◆   Lowest
                                                       If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                       as Medium.

            -w                     Wait for job        Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                   completion          for the operation to complete before
                                                       returning.




                                                                                                        43
Using command line switches


            Restore job commands (continued)

            Operation      Additional          Function           Description
                           Switches

            -o90                               Launch job         Executes a job based on the contents of a
                                               using job script   script file. Return values depend on the type
                                               file               of script. Returns a job instance ID. Also
                                                                  returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                                  the command fails.
                                                                  For more information about Backup Job
                                                                  Script Files, see “Using job script files” on
                                                                  page 127.

                           -fscript file                          Required. Specifies the name of the Backup
                                                                  Exec script file. If the job is a scheduled job
                                                                  (not a run now job), the -w is ignored.

                           -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                               completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                                  returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a
                                                                  run now job), the -w is ignored.

            See also:
                   “Using job script files” on page 127


        Operations and switches for viewing and responding to alerts
            Alerts are events that require administrator attention. Several command switches allow
            you to view and respond to alerts. These include:

            Managing alerts switches

            Operation      Additional          Function           Description
                           Switches

            -o40                               Get number of      Displays the number of alerts on the
                                               alerts             computer. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                                  succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                           -i                  Dump alert IDs     Displays all the alert IDs on the screen.

                           -tl:                Show titles        Displays titles of alerts.




44                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Managing alerts switches (continued)

Operation    Additional          Function         Description
             Switches

             -jserver name                        Displays alerts generated from the specified
                                                  server only.

             -h                                   Displays history alerts.

             -s                                   Displays the name of the server that
                                                  generated the alert.

             -d                                   Displays the date the alert was generated.

-o42                             Dump alert text Dumps the alert title and message to the
                                                 console. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds
                                                 or a -1 if the command fails.

             -ialert ID or -a                     Required. Use -i to display a specific alert or
                                                  -a to display active alerts.

             -w                  Wait for alert   Instructs the Command Line Applet to
                                 response         prompt for a response to the alert.

-o43                             Get number of    Displays the number of non-critical
                                 information      (information only alerts) on the computer.
                                 only alerts      Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a
                                                  -1 if the command fails.

             -i                  Dump all alert   If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs
                                 IDs              will be displayed on the screen.

             -tl:                Show titles      Displays alert titles.

             -jserver name                        Displays alerts generated from the specified
                                                  server only.

             -s                                   Displays the name of the server that
                                                  generated the alert.

             -d                                   Displays the date the alert was generated.




                                                                                                    45
Using command line switches

            Managing alerts switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional          Function            Description
                         Switches

            -o44                             Get number of       Displays the number of user intervention
                                             user                alerts on the computer. Also returns a 1 if the
                                             intervention        command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                             (critical) alerts   fails.

                         -i                  Dump all alert      If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs
                                             IDs                 will be displayed on the screen.

                         -tl:                Show titles         Displays alert titles.

                         -jserver name                           Displays alerts generated from the specified
                                                                 server only.

                         -s                                      Displays the name of the server that
                                                                 generated the alert.

                         -d                                      Displays the date the alert was generated.

            -o45                             Clear all           Clears all current information only alerts.
                                             information         Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                             only alerts         the command fails.

            -o46                             Respond to alert Allows you to respond to an alert. Returns 1 if
                                                              the command succeeds, 0 if the alert was
                                                              already responded to, or -1 if the command
                                                              fails.

                         -ialert ID                              Required. Specifies the alert ID that you
                                                                 want to respond to.

                         -rresponse or -w                        Required. Specifies a response. Responses
                                                                 are OK, YES, NO, CANCEL, RETRY,or IGNORE
                                                                 or instructs the Command Line Applet to
                                                                 prompt for a response.

                         -arespond to                            Specifies an OK response to informative
                         all                                     alerts. If you specify the -a switch you cannot
                         informative                             use the -w switch.
                         alerts




46                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Managing alerts switches (continued)

Operation    Additional          Function          Description
             Switches

-o47                             Get all warning   Displays the number of warning alerts on the
                                 alerts            computer. Also returns a 1 if the command
                                                   succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

             -i                  Dump all alert    If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs
                                 IDs               display on the screen.

             -tl:                Show titles       Displays alert titles.

             -jserver name                         Displays alerts generated from the specified
                                                   server only.

             -s                                    Displays the name of the server that
                                                   generated the alert.

             -d                                    Displays the date the alert was generated.

-o48                             Get all error     Displays the number of error alerts on the
                                 alerts            computer. Also returns a 1 if the command
                                                   succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

             -i                  Dump all alert    If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs
                                 IDs               display on the screen.

             -tl:                Show titles       Displays alert titles.

             -jserver name                         Displays alerts generated from the specified
                                                   server only.

             -s                                    Displays the name of the server that
                                                   generated the alert.

             -d                                    Displays the date the alert was generated.

-o49                             List alert        Displays alert categories. Returns a 1 if the
                                 categories        command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                   fails.

             -i                  Dump all alert    If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs
                                 IDs               will be displayed on the screen.




                                                                                                    47
Using command line switches


            Managing alerts switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional          Function           Description
                         Switches

                         -j                  Display alert      Displays alert names on screen.
                                             category name

                         -ac:                Display event      Displays the alert category on screen.
                                             category

            -o50                             Dump alert         Displays the configuration for alerts on
                                             configuration      screen. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds
                                                                or a -1 if the command fails.

                         -ialert                                Required. Specifies an alert ID to display
                         category ID                            configuration information for.

            -o51                             Set alert          Modifies the alert configuration.
                                             configuration

                         -ialert                                Required. Specifies an alert ID to display
                         category ID                            configuration information for.

                         -e or -d            Enable alert or    Enables or disables the specified alert for
                                             disable alert      reporting by Backup Exec. Some alerts types,
                                                                such as error and attention required, are
                                                                always enabled.

                         -no: or -nn:        Enable             Enables or disables the sending of a
                                             notification or    notification when the alert occurs. Recipients
                                             disable            must be configured to use this option.
                                             notification

                         -jl: or -nj:        Enable inclusion Sends the job log or disables the inclusion of
                                             of job log or     the job log to the alert recipient that is
                                             disable inclusion configured for notification.
                                             of job log

                         -s or -ns:          Enable sending     Enables or disables the sending of alert
                                             of SNMP            notifications through SNMP.
                                             notifications or
                                             disable sending
                                             of SNMP
                                             notifications




48                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


  Managing alerts switches (continued)

  Operation    Additional          Function            Description
               Switches

               -rl: or -nr:        Enable event        Enables or disables the logging of events in
                                   logging or          the Windows event log.
                                   disable event
                                   logging

               -ac:timeout or      Set time for        Sets the time in days, hours, or minutes for
               -na:                automatic           Backup Exec to automatically clear the alert
                                   clearing of alert   or disables the automatic clearing of alerts.
                                   or disable          Set the time as D=days, H=hours, or
                                   automatic alert     M=minutes.
                                   clearing            The length of time entered cannot be more
                                                       than seven days.

               -ar:response        Set the             Sets the automatic response for an alert. The
                                   automatic           possible responses are Yes, No, and Cancel.
                                   response for an
                                   alert.

  -o150                            Dump                Displays the recipients that have defined
                                   notification        notification methods. Returns a 1 if the
                                   recipients          command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                       fails.



Operations and switches for error-handling rules
  Backup Exec has system-defined error-handling rules that determine how job errors are
  handled. They apply to all backup jobs and are defined based on the cause of the failure.
  The rules can be configured to automatically perform operations such as retry, pause, or
  cancel a job after a failure occurs. Error-handling rules are disabled by default.

  Error-Handling Rules switches

  Operation    Additional          Function            Description
               Switches

  -o310                            Display             Displays the error-handling rules.
                                   error-handling
                                   rules




                                                                                                       49
Using command line switches

            Error-Handling Rules switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional           Function          Description
                         Switches

            -o311                             Enable error
                                              handling rule

                         -irule ID                              Required. ID of the rule that is to be enabled.

                         -mr:maximum                            Indicates that the job should be retried and
                         retries                                the number of times the job is to be retried.
                                                                The range for maximum retries is 1 to 99.

                         -ri:retry                              Indicates that the job should be retried and
                         interval                               the number of minutes to wait before the job
                                                                is retried. The range for the retry interval is 1
                                                                to 1,440.

                         -pj:                 Pause job on      Indicates the job is to be paused until the user
                                              error             has taken action to clear the error. If this
                                                                switch is absent, the job will be cancelled
                                                                until its next scheduled run.

                         -cj:                 Cancel job on     Indicates the job is to be cancelled if an error
                                              error             occurs.

                         -no:notes                              Specifies miscellaneous information for the
                                                                error-handling rule.

            -o312                             Disable error     Disables the specified error-handling rule.
                                              handling rule

                         -irule ID                              Required. Specifies the error-handling rule
                                                                that is to be disabled.




50                                                       Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Operations and switches for managing media and devices
  Through the Command Line Applet, you can manage the storage devices attached to your
  media server, manage media in these devices, launch utility operations, and obtain the
  status of your media server. You can also use commands to stop and start Backup Exec
  system services and create logon accounts for accessing systems. The device and media
  management switches available include:

  Device and media management switches

  Operation   Additional         Function           Description
              Switches

  -o62                           Is drive paused    Returns a 1 if the drive is paused, a 0 if the
                                                    drive is not paused, and a -1 if the command
                                                    fails.

              -ddrive name or                       Required. Specifies the name or the ID of the
              -idrive ID                            drive.

  -o63                           Get number of      Displays the number of managed drives.
                                 drives             Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                    the command fails.

              -i                                    Displays drive IDs for all drives.

              -j                                    Displays names for all drives.

  -o64                           Get number of      Displays the number of managed drives that
                                 drives available   are online and not paused. Drives that are
                                                    being used are considered online and are
                                                    included in the number displayed. Returns a
                                                    1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                    command fails.

              -i                                    Displays drive IDs for all drives.

              -j                                    Displays names for all drives.

  -o65                           Get number of      Displays the number of managed drives that
                                 drives paused      are paused. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                    succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

              -i                                    Displays drive IDs for all drives.

              -j                                    Displays names for all drives.



                                                                                                     51
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o66                            Get number of      Displays the number of managed drives that
                                            drives offline     are offline. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -i                                     Displays drive IDs for all drives.

                        -j                                     Displays names for all drives.

            -o67                            Dump drive         Displays general properties of a drive.
                                            properties         Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                               the command fails.

                        -ddrive name or                        Required. Specifies the name or the ID of the
                        -idrive ID                             drive.

            -o68                            Query devices

            -o69                            Get number of      Displays the number of media sets. Returns a
                                            media sets         1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                               command fails.

                        -i                                     Displays the media set IDs for all media sets.

                        -j                                     Displays the names of all media sets.

            -o70                            Dump media set Displays properties of the media set. Returns
                                            properties     a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                           command fails.

                        -imedia set ID                         Required. Specifies the media set ID or
                        or -jmedia set                         media set name.
                        name

            -o71                            Dump media       Displays properties of the media label.
                                            label properties Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                             the command fails.

                        -imedia set ID                         Required. Specifies the media set ID or
                        or -jmedia set                         media set name.
                        name




52                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

-o78                            Set robotic        Sets properties for a robotic library.
                                library
                                properties

            -drobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library to
            library                                target for this operation.

            -nd:new robotic                        Specifies the name for the robotic library.
            library name

            -ps:pause or                           Enter 1 to pause the robotic library;
            resume drive                           otherwise, enter 0 to resume.

            -e:enable or                           Enter 1 to enable the robotic library;
            disable                                otherwise, enter 0 to disable the robotic
            robotic                                library.
            library

            -es:enable or                          Enter 1 to enable the startup initilization;
            disable                                otherwise, enter 0 to disable the startup
            startup                                initilization.
            initialization

            -er:enable or                          Enter 1 to enable the removable storage;
            disable                                otherwise, enter 0 to disable the removable
            startup                                storage.
            initialization

            -eb:enable or                          Enter 1 to enable bar code rules; otherwise,
            disable bar                            enter 0 to disable bar code rules.
            code rules

            -sb:slot base                          Specifies the starting slot. Some robotic
                                                   libraries have slots starting at "0"; others
                                                   start at "1".

-o79                            Set device         Sets properties for a device.
                                properties

            -ddevice name                          Required. Specifies the device to target for
                                                   this operation.




                                                                                                  53
Using command line switches


            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -ndnew device                          Specifies the name for the device.
                        name

                        -ps:pause or                           Enter 1 to pause the device; otherwise, enter
                        resume device                          0 to resume.

                        -e:enable or                           Enter 1 to enable the device; otherwise, enter
                        disable device                         0 to disable the device.

                        -m:enable or                           Enter 1 to enable compression; otherwise,
                        disable                                enter 0 to disable compression.
                        compression

                        -bkblock size                          Specifies the size of the blocks of data written
                                                               to the device.

                        -bfbuffer size                         Specifies the amount of data sent to the
                                                               device on each read or write request. The
                                                               buffer size must be an even multiple of the
                                                               block size.

                        -bcbuffer count                        Specifies the number of buffers allocated for
                                                               this device.

                        -hwhigh water                          Specifies the number of buffers to be filled
                        count                                  before data is first sent to the device, and any
                                                               time after that if the device underruns.

                        -rsRead single                         Specifies that this device read only one block
                        block mode                             of data at a time.

                        -wsWrite single                        Specifies that this device write only one block
                        block mode                             of data at a time.

                        -rpRead SCSI                           Specifies that this device read data without
                        pass-through                           going through a Microsoft tape device API.
                        mode                                   Selecting this check box allows the data to
                                                               pass directly through the device and allows
                                                               more detailed information if device errors
                                                               occur.




54                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -wpWrite SCSI                          Specifies that his device write data without
            pass-through                           going through the Microsoft tape device API.
            mode                                   Selecting this check box allows data to pass
                                                   directly through the device driver and allows
                                                   more detailed information if device errors
                                                   occur.

            -r                                     Resets the preferred configuration settings to
                                                   the default.

            -s                                     Resets the cleaning statistics.

-o80                            Import drive       Imports a list of backup tapes. Returns job ID
                                slots              and 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.

            -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library to
            library                                target for this operation.

            -ai:                                   Instructs Backup Exec to auto inventory all
                                                   slots.

            -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slots in the robotic library to
                                                   target. This list should be comma delimited.
                                                   If no slots are specified, then all will be
                                                   targeted by default.

            -fschedule file                        Schedules the job. If -fschedule file
                                                   represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                   job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                   See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                   media operations” on page 256.




                                                                                                   55
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                               options include:
                                                               ◆   Highest
                                                               ◆   High
                                                               ◆   Medium
                                                               ◆   Low
                                                               ◆   Lowest
                                                               If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                               as Medium.

                        -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                            completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                               returning.

            -o81                            Export drive       Exports a list of backup tapes. Returns the job
                                            slots              ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if
                                                               the command fails.

                        -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library to
                        library                                target for this operation.

                        -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slots in the robotic library to
                                                               target. This list should be comma delimited.
                                                               If no slots are specified, then all will be
                                                               targeted by default.

                        -fschedule file                        Schedules the job. If -fschedule file
                                                               represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                               job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                               See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                               media operations” on page 256.




56                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

            -x                                     Specifies the export of expired media only.

            -xc                                    Includes cleaning media in the export of
                                                   expired media.

            -xi                                    Imports new media to the slot after the
                                                   export expired media operation completes.

-o82                            Designate          Designates a slot to be a cleaning slot.
                                cleaning slot      Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                   the command fails.

            -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library and
            library and                            the slot in the robotic library to target for this
            -sslot number                          operation.

-o83                            Reset slot to be   Designates a slot to be a non-cleaning slot.
                                non-cleaning       Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                slot               the command fails.

            -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library and
            library and                            the slots in the robotic library to target for
            -sslot number                          this operation.

-o84                            Get number of      Displays the number of managed robots.
                                robots             Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                   the command fails.


                                                                                                    57
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -i                                     Displays the robot IDs.

            -o85                            Dump robot         Displays property information for the
                                            properties         specified robotic library. Returns a 1 if the
                                                               command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                               fails.

                        -irobot ID or                          Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
                        -drobot name                           robotic library to display properties for.
                                                               If both -i and -d are provided, the -d
                                                               parameter is used.

            -o86                            Dump slot          Displays the slot information with header
                                            content            descriptions.

                        -irobot ID or                          Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
                        -drobot name                           robotic library to display properties for.
                                                               If both -i and -d are provided, the -d
                                                               parameter is used.

                        -sslot numbers                         List the slot number to display information
                                                               for. The list should be comma delimited. If
                                                               the slot number is not specified, the contents
                                                               of all slots for the robotic library are
                                                               displayed.

            -o87                            Dump robot         Displays partition information for the
                                            partitions         specified robotic library.

                        -jrobot name                           Required. Specifies the name of the robotic
                                                               library for which to display partition
                                                               information.

            -o100                           Create cleaning    Creates and runs a cleaning job on the
                                            job                specified drive. Returns the job ID and a 1 if
                                                               the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                               command fails.

                        -ddrive name                           Required. Specifies the name of the robotic
                                                               library drive you want to target.




58                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -fschedule file                        Schedules the job. If -fschedule file
                                                   represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                   job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                   See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                   media operations” on page 256.

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

-o101                           Create media set Creates a media set with the specified name.
                                                 Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                 the command fails.

            -mmedia set                            Required. Specifies the name of the new
            name                                   media set.

            -op:overwrite                          Specifies the overwrite protection period for
            protection                             the new media set. Enter the length of time in
            period                                 hours.
                                                   Enter the value -1 to set the overwrite
                                                   protection level to infinite.

            -ap:append                             Specifies the append period for the new
                                                   media set. Enter the length of time in hours.




                                                                                                    59
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o102                           Create drive pool Creates a drive pool with the specified name
                                                              and assigns the given drives to it.
                                                               Returns a 1 if the command succeeds, a 0 if
                                                               one or more specified drives cannot be found,
                                                               or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -dp:drive pool                         Required. Specifies the name of the new
                                                               drive pool.

                        -ddrives                               Specifies a list of drives to add to the drive
                                                               pool. The list should be comma delimited.

            -o103                           Create inventory Creates an inventory job on a specified
                                            job for robotic  robotic library.
                                            library          Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                             succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. When
                                                             using this command, you must also use the
                                                             -arobotic library switch, which
                                                             inventories all slots and drives on a specified
                                                             robotic library.

                        -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library to
                        library                                target for this operation.

                        -jjob name                             Specifies a name for the job.

                        -fschedule file                        Schedules the job. If -fschedule file
                                                               represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                               job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                               See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                               media operations” on page 256.

                        -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slots in the robotic library to
                                                               target. This list should be comma delimited.
                                                               If no slots are specified, then all will be
                                                               targeted by default.




60                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

-o104                           Lock library       Locks the specified robotic library door.
                                door               Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                   succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. When
                                                   using this command, you must also use the
                                                   -arobotic library switch.

            -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library to
            library                                target for this operation.

            -fschedule file                        Schedules the job. If -fschedule file
                                                   represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                   job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                   See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                   media operations” on page 256.

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.



                                                                                                    61
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                            completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                               returning.

            -o105                           Unlock library     Unlocks the specified robotic library door.
                                            door               Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. When
                                                               using this command, you must also use the
                                                               -arobotic library switch.

                        -arobotic                              Required. Specifies the robotic library to
                        library                                target for this operation.

                        -fschedule file                        Schedule the job. If -fschedule file
                                                               represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                               job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                               See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                               media operations” on page 256.

                        -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                               options include:
                                                               ◆   Highest
                                                               ◆   High
                                                               ◆   Medium
                                                               ◆   Low
                                                               ◆   Lowest
                                                               If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                               as Medium.

                        -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                            completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                               returning.




62                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

-o106                           Set media          Specifies the media overwrite level and
                                overwrite          overwrite options.
                                protection         Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                period             the command fails. When using this
                                                   command, you must also use the -o1 and -o0
                                                   switches.
                                                   If no switches are specified, the default
                                                   overwrite level is 1=None.

            -ol:overwrite                          Required. Specifies the overwrite level; for
            level                                  example, -o1:4.
                                                   Overwrite Levels include:
                                                   1 = None
                                                   2 = None with prompt
                                                   3 = Partial
                                                   4 = Partial with prompt
                                                   5 = Full

            -oo:recyclable                         Required. Specifies the overwrite options; for
                                                   example, -o0:0.
                                                   Overwrite options include:
                                                   0 = Use scratch media first
                                                   1 = Use recyclable media first




                                                                                                  63
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o111                           Erase media        Erases the tape in the specified drive
                                                               according to the specified erase type (-e).
                                                               Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails.
                                                               Note If you use -m, you can only erase
                                                                    backup-to-disk media. If you use -s, you
                                                                    can only erase robotic libraries. You
                                                                    cannot use both switches.

                        -ddevice name                          Required. Specifies the drive name you want
                        <loader or                             to target. If -s is used, -ddrive name will be
                        drive>                                 the name of the robotic library.

                        -eerase type                           Required. Specifies the erase type. Erase
                                                               types are:
                                                               1 = quick erase
                                                               3 = long erase

                        -jjob name                             Specifies a name for the job.

                        -fschedule file                        Schedule the job. If -fschedule file
                                                               represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                               job), then the -w option is ignored.
                                                               See “Using a schedule script with device and
                                                               media operations” on page 256.

                        -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slot numbers containing the
                                                               media to be erased. If this switch is used, -d
                                                               will represent the robotic library name.

                        -mn:media name                         Specifies the new name of the media.

                        -mmedia name                           Required. Specifies the backup-to-disk folder
                                                               to erase. You must specify the media in the
                                                               backup-to-disk folder to erase.




64                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

-o112                           Retension media Retensions the tape in the specified drive.
                                                   Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                   succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails.

            -ddrive name                           Required. Specifies the drive name. If -s is
                                                   used, -ddrive name will be the name of the
                                                   robotic library.

            -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slot numbers containing the
                                                   media to be retensioned.

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.




                                                                                                    65
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o113                           Label media        Labels the tape in the specified drive.
                                                               Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -dlibrary name                         Required. Specifies the name of the robotic
                                                               library.

                        -mmedia name                           Required. Specifies the media name.

                        -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slot numbers containing the
                                                               media to be labeled.

                        -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                               options include:
                                                               ◆   Highest
                                                               ◆   High
                                                               ◆   Medium
                                                               ◆   Low
                                                               ◆   Lowest
                                                               If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                               as Medium.

                        -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                            completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                               returning.

            -o114                           Format media       Formats the tape in the specified drive.
                                                               Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -ddrive name                           Required. Specifies the drive name. If -s is
                                                               used, -ddrive name will be the name of the
                                                               robotic library.

                        -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slot numbers containing the
                                                               media to be formatted.




66                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority is set to
                                                   medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.

-o115                           Eject media        Ejects the tape in the specified drive. Returns
                                from drive         the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds,
                                                   or a -1 if the command fails.

            -ddrive name                           Required. Specifies the drive name.

            -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                   options include:
                                                   ◆   Highest
                                                   ◆   High
                                                   ◆   Medium
                                                   ◆   Low
                                                   ◆   Lowest
                                                   If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                   as Medium.

            -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait
                                completion         for the operation to complete before
                                                   returning.




                                                                                                      67
Using command line switches


            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o116                           Create a backup Creates a Backup Folder. Backup Exec allows
                                            folder          you to create virtual devices called Backup
                                                            Folders on the hard disk. These Backup
                                                            Folders are used as destination devices for
                                                            backup jobs. When you direct a backup job to
                                                            a Backup Folder, the data is saved on disk as
                                                            backup files. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                            succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -r                                     Makes the backup folder being created into a
                                                               removable backup-to-disk folder. Otherwise,
                                                               the folder will be a fixed (non-removable)
                                                               folder.

                        -ffolder name                          Specifies the folder name.
                                                               When you create a Backup Folder, Backup
                                                               Exec initially assigns a name and path to it.
                                                               You can rename a Backup Folder as long as
                                                               you use a unique name. Renaming a Backup
                                                               Folder changes the way it appears in Backup
                                                               Exec, but does not change the location of the
                                                               Backup Folder on the disk.

                        -sfile size                            Specifies the maximum size for each
                                                               backup-to-disk file contained in this folder.
                                                               The file size can be from 1 MB to 4096 GB.
                                                               The default is 1 GB.

                        -nbackup sets                          Specifies the maximum number of backup
                                                               sets to be written to each backup-to-disk file
                                                               in this folder. The maximum number can
                                                               range from 1 to 8192. The default is 100.

                        -pdisk space                           Specifies the amount of disk space to reserve
                        reserve                                on the disk. When this threshold is reached,
                                                               Backup Exec cannot submit jobs for
                                                               processing that are targeted to this
                                                               backup-to-disk folder, but jobs that are
                                                               running will finish.




68                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -edevice                               Specifies the device setting for the
            setting                                backup-to-disk folder.
                                                   Devices settings include:
                                                   0 = Auto detect settings. Backup Exec
                                                   automatically detect the preferred settings
                                                   for this device.
                                                   1 = Buffered reads. The device allows buffered
                                                   reads, which is the reading of large blocks of
                                                   data.
                                                   2 = Buffered writes. The device allows
                                                   buffered writes, which is the writing of large
                                                   blocks of data.

            -mconcurrent                           Specifies the number of concurrent
            jobs                                   operations that you want to allow to this
                                                   folder. This number can range from 1 to 16.

            -ddirectory                            Specifies the location for the folder. If you use
                                                   the -r switch in the command, the device that
                                                   you specify must be a drive letter followed by
                                                   a colon, such as "C:".
                                                   Backup jobs submitted to a Backup Folder
                                                   cannot span disks. If the size of a backup job
                                                   exceeds the amount of free space on the disk
                                                   where the Backup Folder is located, the job
                                                   will fail. Make sure that there is sufficient
                                                   free space on a disk for a backup job before
                                                   submitting it. Use the software data
                                                   compression option to maximize the amount
                                                   of data that can be stored on a disk.
                                                   If the backup job fails because of insufficient
                                                   disk space, the data backed up before the job
                                                   fails can still be restored.

-o117                           Inventory a        Creates an inventory job on a specified
                                stand-alone        stand-alone drive. Displays the job instance
                                drive              ID. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a
                                                   -1 if the command fails.

            -ddrive name                           Required. Specifies the drive name.




                                                                                                    69
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -jjob name                             Specifies a name for the job.

                        -fschedule file                        Schedules the job. If -fschedule file
                                                               represents a scheduled job (not a run now
                                                               job), then the -w switch is ignored.

                        -pr:priority                           Specifies the priority for the job. Priority
                                                               options include:
                                                               ◆   Highest
                                                               ◆   High
                                                               ◆   Medium
                                                               ◆   Low
                                                               ◆   Lowest
                                                               If this switch is absent, the priority will be set
                                                               as Medium.

                        -x                                     Uses media auxiliary memory for inventory,
                                                               which allows the media to be identified
                                                               without having to be mounted.

                        -w                  Wait for job       Instructs the Command Line Applet to
                                            completion         prompt for a response.

            -0118                           Delete             Deletes a list of backup-to-disk folders.
                                            backup-to-disk
                                            folders

                        -ffolder name                          Required. Specifies the name of the
                                                               backup-to-disk folders to delete.

            -o119                           Set                Sets properties for a backup-to-disk folder.
                                            backup-to-disk
                                            properties

                        -ffolder name                          Required. Specifies the name of the
                                                               backup-to-disk folder to target for this
                                                               operation.




70                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -smaximum                              Specifies the maximum size for each
            backup-to-disk                         backup-to-disk file contained in this folder,
            file size                              and then select either MB or GB as the unit of
                                                   size. The file size can be from 1 MB to 4096
                                                   GB. The default is 1 GB.

            -qmaximum                              Specifies the maximum number of backup
            number of                              sets to be written to each backup-to-disk file
            backup sets                            in this folder. The maximum number can
                                                   range from 1 to 8192. The default is 100.

            -kreserve disk                         Specifies the amount of disk space to reserve
            size                                   on the disk. When this threshold is reached,
                                                   Backup Exec cannot submit jobs for
                                                   processing that are targeted to this
                                                   backup-to-disk folder, but jobs that are
                                                   running will finish. The backup-to-disk
                                                   status displays Low Disk Space.

            -edevice                               Specifies the device setting for the
            setting                                backup-to-disk folder.
                                                   Devices settings include:
                                                   0 = Auto detect settings. Backup Exec
                                                   automatically detect the preferred settings
                                                   for this device.
                                                   1 = Buffered reads. The device allows buffered
                                                   reads, which is the reading of large blocks of
                                                   data.
                                                   2 = Buffered writes. The device allows
                                                   buffered writes, which is the writing of large
                                                   blocks of data.

            -mnumber of                            Specifies the number of concurrent
            concurrent ops                         operations that you want to allow to this
                                                   folder. This number can range from 1 to 16.

-o120                           Delete media set Deletes the specified media set. Returns 1 if
                                                 the command is successful or -1 if it failed.

            -mmedia set                            Required. Specifies the name of the media
                                                   set.



                                                                                                    71
Using command line switches


            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o121                           Delete drive pool Deletes the specified drive pool. Returns a 1 if
                                                              the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                              command fails.

                        -dp:drive pool                         Required. Specifies the name of the drive
                                                               pool.

            -o122                           Create media       This operation is only available if the Central
                                            server pool        Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                                               Creates a media server pool with the specified
                                                               name. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds
                                                               or a -1 if the command fails.

                         -nm:pool name                         Required. Specifies the name of the media
                                                               server pool.

                        -pd:pool                               Specifies a description for the media server
                        description                            pool.

                        -si:server IDs or                      Specifies the media server IDs or names to
                        -sn:server names                       add to the media server pool.

            -o123                           Delete media       This operation is only available if the Central
                                            server pool        Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                                               Deletes the media server pool with the
                                                               specified name. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.
                                                               Note Use only one of the required switches
                                                                    for this command.

                        -ipool IDs or                          Required. Specifies the IDs or the names of
                        -nm:pool names                         the media server pool to be deleted.

            -o124                           Rename a media     This operation is only available if the Central
                                            server pool or     Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                            set a new media    Renames the specified media server pool or
                                            pool description   specifies a new media pool description.
                                                               Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                               the command fails.
                                                               Note Use only one of the required switches
                                                                    for this command.



72                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -ipool ID or                           Required. Specifies the ID of the media
            -onm:old pool                          server pool or the name of the media server
            name                                   pool to be renamed.

            -nm:new pool                           Specifies the new name of the media server
            name                                   pool.

            -pd:pool                               Specifies a description of the media server
            description                            pool.

-o125                           Get media          This operation is only available if the Central
                                server pools       Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                                   Displays the media server pools. Returns a 1
                                                   if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.

            -i                                     Instructs Backup Exec to display the media
                                                   server pool ID.

            -j                                     Instructs Backup Exec to display the media
                                                   server pool name.

            -si:server ID or                       Instructs Backup Exec to only display the
            -sn:server name                        media server pools associated with the media
                                                   server ID or media server name specified.

-o126                           Add a media        This operation is only available if the Central
                                server to a        Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                media server       Adds a media server to the specified media
                                pool               server pool. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                   succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

            -pi:pool ID or                         Required. Specifies the ID of the media
            -pn:pool name                          server pool or the name of the media server
                                                   pool.

            -si:server IDs or                      Specifies the media server IDs or names to
            -sn:server names                       add to the media server pool.




                                                                                                 73
Using command line switches


            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o127                           Remove a media     This operation is only available if the Central
                                            server from a      Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                            media server       Removes a media server from the specified
                                            pool               media server pool. Returns a 1 if the
                                                               command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                               fails.

                        -pi:pool ID or                         Required. Specifies the ID of the media
                        -pn:pool name                          server pool or the name of the media server
                                                               pool.

                        -si:server IDs or                      Specifies the media server IDs or names to
                        -sn:server names                       remove from the media server pool.

            -o128                           Get media          This operation is only available if the Central
                                            servers in a       Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed.
                                            media server       Displays the media servers in the media
                                            pool               server pools. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                        -pipool ID or                          Required. Specifies the ID of the media
                        -pn:pool name                          server pool or the name of the media server
                                                               pool.

                        -i                                     Instructs Backup Exec to display the media
                                                               server ID.

                        -j                                     Instructs Backup Exec to display the media
                                                               server name.

            -o129                           Delete media

                        -m: media label                        Specifies the label name of the media that
                        name                                   you want to delete. The media must be in the
                                                               Retired Media set before you can delete it.

            -o130                           Move media         Moves the specified media. Returns a 1 if the
                                                               command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                               fails.

                        -i or -jmedia                          Required. Specifies the ID of the media or the
                        name                                   media server name to be moved.



74                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -ms:media set                          Required. Specifies the media set ID to which
            ID                                     you want to move the media.

-o131                           Rename media       Renames the specified media. Returns a 1 if
                                                   the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.

            -imedia ID                             Required. Specifies the name of the media to
                                                   be renamed.

            -mn:media name                         Required. Specifies the new name of the
                                                   media.

-o132                           List media label Lists the media labels contained in a specified
                                                 media set. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                 succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

            -imedia set ID                         Required. Specifies the ID of the media or the
            or -jmedia set                         media set name to be moved.
            name

-o133                           Create media       Creates a media vault with the specified
                                vault              name to track media stored in specific sites.
                                                   Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                   the command fails.

            -vn:vault name                         Required. Specifies the name of the media
                                                   vault.

            -vd:vault                              Specifies a description for the media vault.
            description

-o134                           Delete media       Deletes the specified media vault. Returns a 1
                                vault              if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.

            -ivault ID or                          Required. Specifies the ID of the media vault
            -vn: vault name                        or the name of the media vault to be deleted.




                                                                                                  75
Using command line switches


            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

            -o135                           Create robotic     Creates a partition consisting of one or more
                                            library            slots on the specified robotic library. Returns
                                            partitions         a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                               command fails.

                        -irobot ID or                          Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
                        -drobot name                           robotic library on which the partitions will be
                                                               created.

                        -sslot numbers                         Specifies the slots in the robotic library to
                                                               include in the partition. This list should be
                                                               comma delimited. If no slots are specified,
                                                               then all will be targeted by default.

            -o136                           Get list of media Displays the managed media vaults. Returns
                                            vaults            a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                              command fails.

                        -i                                     Displays the IDs for all media vaults.

                        -j                                     Displays the names of all managed media
                                                               vaults.

            -o137                           Add media to a     Adds media to the specified media vault.
                                            media vault        Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                               the command fails.

                        -imedia set ID                         Required. Specifies the ID of the media or the
                        or -jmedia set                         media set name to be moved.
                        name

                        -mv:media vault                        Required. Specifies the ID of the media vault
                        ID or -vnmedia                         or the name of the media vault that the media
                        vauilt name                            will be added to.

            -o140                           Get number of      Displays the managed media servers. Returns
                                            media servers      a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                               command fails.

                        -i                                     Displays the media server IDs for all media
                                                               servers.




76                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -j                                     Displays the names of all managed media
                                                   servers.

-o531                           Dump physical      Outputs the properties for a specified
                                disk properties    physical disk on a storage array. Returns a 1 if
                                                   the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                   command fails.

            -si:storage                            Specifies the ID or the name of the storage
            array ID or                            array. You must separate multiple entries
            -sn:storage                            with a comma.
            array name

            -pi:physical                           Specifies the ID or the name of the physical
            disk ID or                             disk on the storage array. You must separate
            -pn:physical                           multiple entries with a comma.
            disk name

            -pl:enclosuresl                       Specifies the enclosure that the physical disk
            ot                                     is in and the slot that the physical disk
                                                   occupies. Enter the name of the enclosure
                                                   and slot in the enclosure1slot1 format. You
                                                   must separate multiple names with a comma.

            -hot:                                  Enter 1 to view the properties of a hot spare;
                                                   otherwise, enter a 0.

            -cf:                                   Enter 1 to view the properties of a physical
                                                   disk that is configured for use with a storage
                                                   array; otherwise, enter a 0.

            -ucf:                                  Enter 1 to view the properties of a physical
                                                   disk that is unconfigurable; otherwise, enter
                                                   a 0.

-o532                           Dump storage     Outputs the properties for a specified storage
                                array properties array. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds
                                                 or a -1 if the command fails.

            -sa:                                   Lists all the storage arrays.




                                                                                                    77
Using command line switches

            Device and media management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional          Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -si:storage                            Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
                        array ID or                            storage array. You must separate multiple
                        -sn:storage                            entries with a comma.
                        array name

                        -vd:                                   Lists all the virtual disks.

                        -vi:virtual disk                       Specifies the ID or the name of the virtual
                        ID or                                  disk on the storage array. You must separate
                        -vn:virtual                            multiple entries with a comma.
                        disk name

            -o533                           Configure a        Configures a storage array for use with the
                                            storage array      Backup Exec Storage Provisioning Option.

                        -si:storage                            Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
                        array ID or                            storage array.
                        -sn:storage
                        array name

                        -pl:enclosuresl                       Required. Enter the enclosure number and
                        ot or                                  the slot number of the physical disks that you
                        -hl:enclosures                        want to configure.
                        lot or                                 You can specify the enclosure number and
                        -uhl:enclosures                       the slot number to do the following:
                        lot
                                                               ◆   Use -pl: to add a physical disk to create a
                                                                   disk group. You must specify at least three
                                                                   physical disks to create a disk group.
                                                               ◆   Use -hl: to add a hot spare.
                                                               ◆   Use -uhl: to remove a hot spare. The
                                                                   physical disk becomes available.
                                                               Enter the name in the enclosure1slot1
                                                               format. You must separate the multiple
                                                               names with a comma.
                                                               You must use at least one switch. You can use
                                                               all of the switches in the same operation.

                        -vn:number of                          Specifies the number of virtual disks that you
                        virtual disks                          want to create for this disk group.




78                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Device and media management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional          Function           Description
            Switches

            -ms:media                              Specifies the name of the media server.
            server name

-o534                           Configure a       Configures a virtual disk on a storage array to
                                virtual disk on a use with Backup Exec. Returns a 1 if the
                                storage array     command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                  fails.

            -vi:virtual disk                       Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
            ID or                                  virtual disk on the storage array.
            -vn:virtual
            disk name

-o535                           Rename a          Renames a virtual disk or a storage array.
                                virtual disk or a Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                storage array     the command fails. You must specify either a
                                                  storage array or a virtual disk to rename; you
                                                  cannot specify both.

            -si:storage                            Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
            array ID or                            storage array.
            -sn:storage
            array name

            -vi:virtual disk                       Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
            ID or                                  virtual disk on the storage array.
            -vn:virtual
            disk name

            -nn:new device                         Required.Provides the new name for the
            name                                   device.

-o536                           Detect a new       Runs a scan operation to find new storage
                                storage array      arrays, virtual disks, or physical disks.




                                                                                                79
Using command line switches


        Backup Exec services commands
            Several command line switches allow you to monitor and manage the Backup Exec
            services. These commands include:

            Backup Exec service switches

            Operation    Additional        Function          Description
                         Switches

            -o107                          Set wizards as    Sets the registry so that the startup wizards
                                           run               do not run. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                             succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

                         -dv:<0-1>                           Enter a 0 to specify that the startup wizards
                                                             have not been run and should display. Enter a
                                                             1 to specify that the startup wizards have
                                                             been run and should not display.

            -o500                          Is Backup Exec Checks if the Backup Exec server is available.
                                           server available Returns 1 if the Backup Exec Server is
                                                            available on the network, 0 if the server is not
                                                            available, or -1 if the command fails.

                         -cserver_name                       Required. Specifies the name of the media
                                                             server.

            -o501                          Are Backup Exec Checks if the Backup Exec system services are
                                           system services running. Returns 1 if the Backup Exec
                                           running         services are running on the computer. If the
                                                           system services are not running, a 0 is
                                                           displayed. If the command fails, a -1 is
                                                           displayed.

            -o502                          Start Backup      Starts all Backup Exec services on the
                                           Exec system       specified computer. Returns a 1 if all services
                                           services          start, a 0 if any services fail, or a -1 if the
                                                             command fails.

            -o503                          Stop Backup       Stops all Backup Exec services on the
                                           Exec system       specified computer. Returns 1 if all services
                                           services          stop, a 0 if any services fail, or a -1 if the
                                                             command fails.




80                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

  Backup Exec service switches (continued)

  Operation    Additional           Function          Description
               Switches

  -o504                             Dump Backup       Copies to the console each Backup Exec
                                    Exec system       system service name and status. Returns a 1
                                    services status   if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                      command fails.

  -o505                             Dump Backup       Outputs properties for a specified Backup
                                    Exec server       Exec server. Returns a 1 if the command
                                    properties        succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

  -o530                             Dump server       Outputs the Backup Exec server type. Server
                                    type              types are:
                                                      0 = stand-alone media server
                                                      1 = central administration server
                                                      2 = managed media server
                                                      3 = unknown server type



Logon account operations and switches
  The following switch and subswitches enable you to create and modify logon accounts
  used for accessing specific systems:

  Logon Account switches

  Operation    Additional           Function          Description
               Switches

  -o210                             Create logon      Creates a logon account for accessing specific
                                    account           systems being backed up or restored. This
                                                      operation returns a logon account ID and a 1
                                                      if the command succeeds or a -1 if the
                                                      command fails.

               -nl:user name                          Required. Specifies the user name for this
                                                      logon account.

               -pl:password                           Specifies the password for this logon account.

               -daccount name                         Required. Provides a name for this logon
                                                      account.



                                                                                                    81
Using command line switches


            Logon Account switches (continued)

            Operation    Additional          Function          Description
                         Switches

                         -pa:account                           Specifies if the logon account is restricted or
                         type                                  common.

                         -dl:                                  Specifies the logon account as the default
                                                               account to use to browse, make sections, or
                                                               restore data on your local and remote
                                                               resources.
                                                               When you use this switch to set a logon
                                                               account as the default, the default only
                                                               applies to the specified user. Use -o211 to
                                                               display the default logon account or log in to
                                                               Backup Exec when you are logged in as the
                                                               specified user.

            -o211                            Dump logon        Displays the logon account information on
                                             accounts          the console. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                               succeeds or a -1 if the command fails.

            -o212                            Delete logon      Deletes the specified logon account. Returns
                                             account           1 if the command is successful or -1 if it
                                                               failed.

                         -ilogon account                       Required. Specifies the GUID, the user name,
                         GUID or -nl:user                      or the account name of the logon account to
                         name or -d                            be deleted.
                         account name

            -o213                            Modify logon      Modifies properties for a specific logon
                                             account           account. The changes apply immediately and
                                                               all resources that use the Backup Exec logon
                                                               account are automatically updated. Changes
                                                               made to a Backup Exec logon account are
                                                               applied immediately. Returns 1 if the
                                                               command is successful or -1 if it failed.

                         -ilogon account                       Required. Specifies the GUID, the user name,
                         GUID or -nl:user                      or the account name of the logon account to
                         name or -d                            be modified.
                         account name

                         -pw:password                          Specifies the current password for this logon
                                                               account.



82                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Logon Account switches (continued)

Operation    Additional          Function   Description
             Switches

             -pl:password                   Specifies the new password for this logon
                                            account.

             -daccount name                 Required. Provides a name for this logon
                                            account.

             -pa:account                    Specifies if the logon account is restricted or
             type                           common. Enter 1 for a common key;
                                            otherwise, enter 0 for a restricted key.

             -dl:                           Specifies the logon account as the default
                                            account to use to browse, make sections, or
                                            restore data on your local and remote
                                            resources.
                                            When you use this switch to set a logon
                                            account as the default, the default only
                                            applies to the specified user. Use -o211 to
                                            display the default logon account or log in to
                                            Backup Exec when you are logged in as the
                                            specified user.




                                                                                             83
Using command line switches


        Report operations and switches
            The following switch and subswitches allow you to view and manage Backup Exec reports
            from the command line:

            Report switches

            Operation    Additional      Function          Description
                         Switches

            -o400                        Display report    Displays the report on the screen.

                         -i                                Lists all available report IDs.

                         -rreport ID                       Specifies the report ID to view.

                         -j                                Lists available parameter names.

                         -ps:paramstr                      Specifies parameters and values to use in the
                                                           form ’@param1name=value, =value...,
                                                           @param2name=value, =value...’.

            -o401                        Print report      Prints the report on the default printer.

                         -i                                Lists all available report IDs.

                         -rreport ID                       Specifies the report ID to view.

                         -j                                Lists available parameter names.

                         -ps:paramstr                      Specifies parameters and values to use in the
                                                           form ’@param1name=value, =value...,
                                                           @param2name=value, =value...’.

            -o402                        Copy report to    Copies the report to a selected file format.
                                         selected file
                                         format

                         -i                                Lists all available report IDs.

                         -rreport ID                       Specifies the report ID to view.

                         -j                                Lists available parameter names.




84                                                  Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


  Report switches (continued)

  Operation    Additional         Function        Description
               Switches

               -ps:paramstr                       Specifies parameters and values to use in the
                                                  form ’@param1name=value, =value...,
                                                  @param2name=value, =value...’.

               -ffilename                         Fully qualified filename for the storage
                                                  location of the output file. Not valid for -ft:1
                                                  (HTML) file types.

               -ddirectory                        Fully qualified directory name for storage
                                                  location of output files. Only valid for -ft:1
                                                  (HTML) file types.

               -ft:format                         Use:
                                                  ◆   -ft:1 for HTML file type.
                                                  ◆   -ft:2 for XML file type.
                                                  ◆   -ft:3 for Microsoft Excel file type.
                                                  ◆   -ft:4 for Comma Separated Variables (CSV)
                                                      type.
                                                  ◆   -ft:5 for Adobe Portable Document Format
                                                      (PDF)

  -o403                           Insert report   Adds a report to the available file list.

               -i or -ffilename                   Required. Lists all available report IDs or the
                                                  fully qualified filename for storage location
                                                  of report file.




Operations for displaying network interface information
  The command line operation -o510 lets you view information about the available
  network interface cards that you can specify as the default for every Backup Exec job.
  You can use this command line operation when you create a backup job script file, a
  restore job script file, and a backup job template script file.




                                                                                                     85
Using command line switches


            Backup Exec supports versions 4 and 6 of the Internet Protocol (IP), which are commonly
            referred to as IPv4 and IPv6. You can use IPv4 and IPv6 in backup and restore networks.
            Support for IPv6 is dependent upon operating system support for the protocol, as well as
            proper network configuration. You can use Backup Exec in a mixed IPv4/IPv6
            environment or an IPv4-only environment.
            Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address for a computer anywhere that you can enter a computer
            name in Backup Exec, except in the following locations:
            ■   User-defined selections
            ■   Clusters
                Microsoft Windows does not support an IPv6 address as a clustered resource.
            A Remote Agent that supports IPv6 can be backed up or restored using IPv6 only from a
            media server that is IPv6-compliant.
            The command line operation -o510 provides the following information:

            Network interface information

            Item                               Description

            Friendly Name                      The name of a network interface card that can connect the
                                               media server to the network you want to use for the
                                               backup network.

            MAC Address                        The Media Access Control (MAC) address

            Description                        The adapter description

            Type                               The adapter type

            Available                          Indicates if the network interface card is available. If the
                                               value is 1, then the network interface card is available and
                                               usable. If the value is 0, then the network interface card is
                                               not available and not usable.

            Subnet Prefix 1                    The subnet prefix of the network interface card.

            IP Address 1                       The IP address of the network interface card.

            Number of Objects                  The number of network interface cards that were found.

            Return Value                       The command returns a 1 if the command succeeds, or a
                                               -1 if the command fails.




86                                                 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Database management operations and switches
  The following switch and subswitches allow you to manage databases that use Backup
  Exec:

  Database management switches

  Operation   Additional         Function         Description
              Switches

  -o25                           Manage a        Attach, delete, and rename a Microsoft
                                 Microsoft       SharePoint server farms.
                                 SharePoint
                                 Server Farm

              -wb:web server                     Required. Specifies the name of a Web
              name                               server that belongs to the farm.

              -fm:farm name                      Specifies the SharePoint server farm to
                                                 manage.
                                                 If you attempt to attach to a new farm and
                                                 you do not specify a farm name, Backup Exec
                                                 defaults to Server Farm x.

              -a                                 Attaches to a new server farm

              -d                                 Deletes a server farm.

              -nf:new farm                       Renames an existing farm.
              name

              -e                                 Enter 1 to enable the specified Web server in
                                                 the farm; otherwise, enter 0 to disable the
                                                 specified Web server.

              -r                                 Replaces a previously defined Microsoft
                                                 SharePoint server farm with a new server
                                                 farm.

  -o26                           Lists Microsoft Displays a the components of the specified
                                 SharePoint 2003 Microsoft SharePoint 2003 server farm.
                                 server farms    When you specify additional switches,
                                                 displays only the applicable components of
                                                 the specified server.

              -wb:web server                     Type the name of a Web server that belongs
              name                               to the farm.


                                                                                                 87
Using command line switches


            Database management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional         Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -i: logon                             Specifies the logon account ID to use to
                        account or -act:                      display remote SharePoint servers, or
                        account name                          specifies the logon account name to logon to
                                                              connect to the remote server on which
                                                              SharePoint runs. You should specify this
                                                              switch if the current logon account name is
                                                              not valid to log on to the server.

                        -fm:farm name                         Displays components of a specified server
                                                              farm.

                        -cf:                                  Displays configuration database component
                                                              names.

                        -ss:                                  Displays Single-sign on database component
                                                              names.

                        -ds:                                  Displays Document Library store component
                                                              names.

                        -ps:portal site                       Displays the portal sites and the components
                        name                                  in the server farms.
                                                              When you specify the name of a portal site,
                                                              which also requires the -fm switch, displays
                                                              only the components of the specified portal
                                                              site.

                        -ws:Windows                           Displays the Windows SharePoint Services
                        SharePoint                            sites and the components in the server farms.
                        Services site                         When you specify the name of a Windows
                                                              SharePoint Services site, which also requires
                                                              the -fm switch, displays only the components
                                                              of the specified Windows SharePoint Services
                                                              site.

                        -dl:document                          Displays the full name of the backward
                        library names                         compatible document library names.




88                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Database management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional         Function         Description
            Switches

                                               Specifies a list of backward compatible
                                               document libraries to back up. This list
                                               should be comma delimited.
                                               If you do not specify a list of backward
                                               compatible document libraries, then all
                                               backward compatible document libraries in
                                               the farm are backed up.
                                               You can display a list of document library
                                               names if you use the -o26 switch.

-o32                           List Oracle     Displays a list of Oracle instance information.
                               instance
                               information

            -svr:server name                   Required. Specifies the name of a server
                                               on which Oracle runs.

            -sid:Oracle SID                    Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID.

            -act:logon                         Specifies the logon account name to log on to
            account name                       connect to the server on which Oracle runs.
                                               You should specify this switch if the current
                                               logon account name is not valid to log on to
                                               the server.

            -tb:tablespace                     Displays tablespace names.
            names

            -a                                 Displays all archived logs.

-o53                           Lists Microsoft Displays a the components of the specified
                               SharePoint 2007 Microsoft SharePoint 2007 server farm.
                               server farms    When you specify additional switches,
                                               displays only the applicable components of
                                               the specified server.

            -wb:web server                     Type the name of a Web server that belongs
            name                               to the farm.




                                                                                             89
Using command line switches


            Database management switches (continued)

            Operation   Additional         Function           Description
                        Switches

                        -i: logon                             Specifies the logon account ID to use to
                        account ID or                         display remote SharePoint servers, or
                        -act: account                         specifies the logon account name to logon to
                        name                                  connect to the remote server on which
                                                              SharePoint runs. You should specify this
                                                              switch if the current logon account name is
                                                              not valid to log on to the server.

                        -fm:farm name                         Displays components of a specified server
                                                              farm.

                        -cf:                                  Displays configuration database component
                                                              names.

                        -ss:                                  Displays Single-sign on database component
                                                              names.

                        -ca                                   Displays the central administration site
                                                              name.

                        -wa:Web                               Displays information about the Web
                        application                           application. You can list multiple names.
                        name

                        -sp: shared                           Displays information about the shared server
                        service                               provider. You can list multiple names.
                        provider name
                        or -ssp shared
                        service
                        provider name

                        -si                                   Displays the search instance.

                        -gs                                   Displays the global settings.

            -o32                           List Oracle        Displays a list of Oracle instance information.
                                           instance
                                           information

                        -svr:server name                      Required. Specifies the name of a server
                                                              on which Oracle runs.



90                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Database management switches (continued)

Operation   Additional         Function    Description
            Switches

            -sid:Oracle SID                Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID.

            -act:logon                     Specifies the logon account name to log on to
            account name                   connect to the server on which Oracle runs.
                                           You should specify this switch if the current
                                           logon account name is not valid to log on to
                                           the server.

            -tb:tablespace                 Displays tablespace names.
            names

            -a                             Displays all archived logs.




                                                                                       91
Using command line switches


        Setting default options
            The command line switch -o300 allows you to set default options to be used for Backup
            Exec operations. After setting the default options, you can use the -o301 switch to
            retrieve the value of the default options set. To retrieve the value using the -o301
            operation, specify the option name or file name after the command. If you do not specify
            an option name or file name, all the default options set will be retrieved. To retrieve a list
            of available default options and the values, use the -o301 operation with the -f switch.
            The default options can be set through a series of -do parameters and the use of a -dv
            parameter followed by the default value.
            For example, to set the job priority default to high using the -do parameter, enter:
                -o300 -do:DO_JOB_PRIORITY -dv:3
            You can also set the default options through the use of the -f parameter followed by the
            name of a file. Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a file that contains all the
            default options. Each entry must be typed on separate line and include the name of the
            parameter typed in capital letters and then followed by an equal (=) or a colon (:) sign.
            The value for the entry must follow the equal sign and contain no quotes unless they are
            part of the value itself.
            For example, to set the job priority default to high and set the default backup to full using
            the -f parameter, create a text file that contains the following parameters:
                DO_JOB_PRIORITY=3
                DO_BACKUP_TYPE=0
            After you complete the file, enter:
                -o300 -f:filename




92                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


The default parameters set through the -o300 switch can be overridden when creating an
individual job. The following default options can be set using the -o300 switch:

Default option parameters

Option Name                 Function                   Description

General Default Options

DO_GENERAL_                 Display progress           Enter 1 to display the percent
ENABLESTATS                 indicators for backup jobs complete number and gauge while a
                                                       backup job is processing; otherwise,
                                                       enter 0. These indicators allow you to
                                                       monitor the progress of the job.
                                                       Backup jobs may take a little longer to
                                                       complete when this option is set
                                                       because the target device must be
                                                       scanned to determine the amount of
                                                       data to be backed up.
                                                       Note Due to the time required to scan
                                                            the target device, selecting this
                                                            option when backing up remote
                                                            devices is not recommended.

DO_GENERAL_                 Inventory all drives on    Enter 1 to inventory all of the media
STARTUPINVENTORY            Backup Exec services       in the storage devices when Backup
                            startup                    Exec services are starting; otherwise,
                                                       enter 0. Depending on the number of
                                                       storage devices attached to the system,
                                                       this process may take a few minutes. If
                                                       you are using a robotic library, all of
                                                       the robotic library’s slots are
                                                       inventoried.




                                                                                             93
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                    Description

            Job Default Options

            DO_JOB_PRIORITY                Set job priority            Specifies the priority for the job. If
                                                                       another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                                       same time as this job, the priority
                                                                       determines which job runs first.
                                                                        If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                                       will be Medium. Priority options
                                                                       include:
                                                                       ◆   0 = Low
                                                                       ◆   1 = Lowest
                                                                       ◆   2 = Medium
                                                                       ◆   3 = High
                                                                       ◆   4 = Highest

            DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL              Limit availability to a     Enter 1 to enable the availability
                                           daily time window           window, which specifies when the
                                                                       selection list is available for backup
                                                                       each day; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL_DATE         First available date for    Enter the first date when the selection
                                           availability window         list should be available to be backed
                                                                       up. Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                       format.

            DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL_             Begin time for              Enter the earliest time when the
            BEGINTIME                      availability window         selection list is available for backup.
                                                                       Enter the time in 24-hour format. For
                                                                       example, enter 21:30:00 to specify 9:30
                                                                       PM.

            DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL_             End time for availability   Enter the latest time when the
            ENDTIME                        window                      selection list is available for backup.
                                                                       Enter the time in 24-hour format. For
                                                                       example, enter 23:00:00 to specify
                                                                       11:00 PM.

            DO_JOB_                        Run job only if the         Enter 1 to run the job only if the
            RUNJOBIFPRESUCCESS             pre-job command is          pre-job command is successful;
                                           successful.                 otherwise, enter 0. If the pre-job
                                                                       command is not successful, the job
                                                                       does not run, and is marked as failed.


94                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                    Description

DO_JOB_                        Run post-job command        Enter 1 to run the post-job command
RUNPOSTIFJOBFAILS              even if the job fails.      even if the job fails; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_JOB_RUNPOST                 Run post-job command if Enter 1 to run the post-job command
                               pre-job command is      only if the pre-job command is
                               successful              successful; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_JOB_CMDTIMEOUT              Specify time interval for   Specifies the amount of time before or
                               command                     after the job in which the pre- or
                                                           post-command should run.

DO_JOB_FAILIFCMDFAILS          Mark job as failed if       Enter 1 to have the job marked as
                               either command fails        failed if either the pre-job or post-job
                                                           command fails; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_JOB_RUNPOSTAFTER            Run post-command after Enter 1 to run the post-command after
                               job verification completes the job verification completes;
                                                          otherwise, enter 0.

DO_JOB_RUNON                   Specifies where the         Enter one of the following options:
                               command is to be run        ◆   0 = On this media server
                                                           ◆   1 = On each server backed up or
                                                               restored to

DO_JOB_                        Cancel the job if not       Specifies the amount of time Backup
CANCELTHRESHOLD                completed within the        Exec should wait for the job to
                               specified time.             complete before cancelling the job.
                                                           This value should be provided in
                                                           minutes.

DO_JOB_                        Set default device for job Specifies the drive pool or stand-alone
DEVICEGUID                                                drive to be used for processing the
                                                          backup.

DO_JOB_                        Set the default media set Specifies the media set for the job.
MEDIASETGUID




                                                                                                      95
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                  Description

            Backup Default Options

            DO_BACKUP_TYPE                 Select default backup     Specifies the backup method to be
                                           method                    used. Methods are:
                                                                     ◆   0 = Full
                                                                     ◆   1 = Copy
                                                                     ◆   2 = Differential – changed files
                                                                     ◆   3 = Incremental – changed files
                                                                     ◆   4 = Daily
                                                                     ◆   5 = Working set
                                                                     ◆   6 = Incremental – modified time
                                                                     ◆   7 = Differential – modified time
                                                                     ◆   8 = Full – modified time
                                                                     If 5 is entered as the value, a value
                                                                     must also be entered for DO_BACKUP_
                                                                     LASTACCCESSEDDAYS

            DO_BACKUP_                     Enable single instance  Enter 1 to ensure that only one
            SINGLEBACKUPNTFS               backup for NTFS volumes instance of the backing file for NTFS
                                                                   volumes will be backed up regardless
                                                                   of the number of single instance store
                                                                   (SIS) links that point to it; otherwise,
                                                                   enter 0.

            DO_BACKUP_                     Set last access date      Note If 5 was entered as the value for
            LASTACCESSEDDAYS                                              DO_BACKUPT_TYPE, the
                                                                          DO_BACKUP_
                                                                          LASTACCESSEDDAYS entry
                                                                          must be completed.
                                                                     Enter the number of days during
                                                                     which files that you want to include in
                                                                     the backup were last accessed. For
                                                                     example, to specify a working set
                                                                     backup to include all files last accessed
                                                                     within 30 days, type:
                                                                         -do:DO_BACKUP_
                                                                         LASTACCESSEDDAYS -dv:30




96                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                    Description

DO_BACKUP_                     Set media overwrite         Specify one of the following values:
MEDIAOVERWRITE                 protection                  ◆   0 = Overwrite
                                                           ◆   1 = Append, overwrite if no media
                                                               available
                                                           ◆   2 = Append, no overwrite

DO_BACKUP_                     Set compression method Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
COMPRESSIONTYPE                                       corresponds with the type of
                                                      compression to use. Options include:
                                                           ◆   0 = Hardware compression
                                                           ◆   1 = Software compression
                                                           ◆   2 = Hardware if available,
                                                               otherwise software
                                                           ◆   3 = None

DO_BACKUP_COLLECTINFO          Collect additional          Enter 1 to collect information about
                               information for synthetic   files and directories that have been
                               backup and for true         moved, renamed, or newly installed
                               image restore               since the last backup job. These files
                                                           and directories are included in the
                                                           backup. Otherwise, enter 0.

DO_BACKUP_AUTOVERIFY           Verify after backup         Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
                                                           automatically perform a verify
                                                           operation to make sure the media can
                                                           be read after the backup has been
                                                           completed; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                           Verifying all backups is recommended.

DO_BACKUP_                     Calculate checksums         Enter 1 if the checksums are to be
INSERTCHECKSUMS                                            calculated for each data stream written
                                                           to tape, and then written in a separate
                                                           stream immediately following the data
                                                           stream. If 0 is entered, backup
                                                           performance may be improved, but
                                                           there will be no way to verify the
                                                           integrity of the data on the tape.




                                                                                                    97
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                 Description

            DO_BACKUP_                     Back up local mount      Enter 1 to back up mount points that
            TRAVERSEPOINTS                 points                   direct a file or directory to a local disk
                                                                    or directory path; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                    Using this option allows you to back up
                                                                    data that is linked to local files, but
                                                                    stored on another device without
                                                                    having to actually select the data.

            DO_BACKUP_HSM                  Back up data in remote   Enter 1 to back up data that has been
                                           storage                  migrated from primary storage to
                                                                    secondary storage; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                    When using this option, the data will
                                                                    not be recalled to its original location;
                                                                    it will be backed up directly to the
                                                                    backup media.
                                                                    This option should not be used if:
                                                                    ◆    A single device containing one
                                                                        drive is used for secondary storage
                                                                        and backups because Remote
                                                                        Storage and Backup Exec will
                                                                        compete for use of the drive.
                                                                    ◆   You want to run a backup of the
                                                                        entire system because Backup Exec
                                                                        attempts to access all data that has
                                                                        been migrated to secondary
                                                                        storage and this may take a
                                                                        considerable amount of time.

            DO_BACKUP_                     Use change journal       Enter 1 to use Windows NTFS Change
            USECHANGEJOURNAL                                        Journal to determine which files have
                                                                    been modified since the last full
                                                                    backup; otherwise, enter 0. This option
                                                                    can only be used with NTFS volumes
                                                                    and only when the backup method
                                                                    selected is either DIFFERENTIAL -
                                                                    Using modified time or
                                                                    INCREMENTAL - Using modified
                                                                    time.




98                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                    Description

DO_BACKUP_                     Back up open files if Open Enter a number from 0 to 3 to specify
OPENFILEMETHOD                 File Option is not         how to back up open files if the Open
                               available                  File Option is not available. Values
                                                          include:
                                                           ◆   0 = Never
                                                           ◆   1 = With a lock
                                                           ◆   2 = Without a lock
                                                           ◆   3 = If closed within x seconds

DO_BACKUP_                     Back up open file if closed If 3 was entered for the value for
OPENFILESKIPSECS               within x seconds            DO_BACKUP_OPENFILEMETHOD,
                                                           enter a number from 1 to 999 to
                                                           specify the number of seconds Backup
                                                           Exec is to wait for an open file to close
                                                           before continuing the backup. If the
                                                           files do not close during the specified
                                                           interval, they are skipped.

DO_BACKUP_GRTPATH              If Backup Exec Granular     Enter the path to an NTFS volume on
                               Recovery Technology         the local media server where Backup
                               (GRT) is enabled for        Exec can stage temporary data. Backup
                               backup, enter a path on     Exec deletes the data when the backup
                               the NFTS volume of the      completes.
                               local media server where    At least 1 GB of disk space is required.
                               Backup Exec can stage
                               temporary data

Restore Default Options

DO_RESTORE_                    Restore over existing files Enter 1 to overwrite files on the target
EXISTINGMETHOD                                             device that have the same name as
                                                           files that are being restored; otherwise,
                                                           enter 0.

DO_RESTORE_CORRUPT             Restore corrupt files       Enter 1 to allow Backup Exec to restore
                                                           corrupted files during the restore
                                                           process; otherwise, enter 0 to allow
                                                           Backup Exec to automatically exclude
                                                           corrupt files from the restore process.




                                                                                                   99
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                  Description

            DO_RESTORE_                    Restore junction points   Enter 0 if you want to restore the
            JUNCMETHOD                     method                    information for the junction points
                                                                     and the files and directories to which
                                                                     they are linked, overwriting existing
                                                                     junction points on your system.
                                                                     Enter 1 if you want to restore files and
                                                                     directories backed up from junction
                                                                     point links while retaining the
                                                                     system’s current junction points.

            DO_RESTORE_TEMPPATH            Path on media server for Type the path on the media server
                                           staging temporary        where you want to stage temporary
                                           restore data             restore data when using Backup Exec
                                                                    Granular Recovery Technology (GRT)
                                                                    to restore individual items from tape.

            Network and Security Default Options

            DO_NIC_                                                  Enter 1 to enable selection of Windows
            ENABLEDSHARESELECTION                                    user shares; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_NIC_AGENTPORTRANGE                                    Enter a port range to allow remote
                                                                     agents to use a range of ports for
                                                                     communications.

            DO_NIC_                                                  Enter 1 display the 32-bit number that
            AUTOOBTAINSUBNET                                         determines the subnet to which the
                                                                     network interface card belongs;
                                                                     otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_NIC_                                                  Enter 1 to select the name of the
            ANYAVAILABLE                                             network interface card that connects
                                                                     the media server to the network you
                                                                     want to use for the backup network;
                                                                     otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_NIC_PROTOCOL                                          Enter one of the following values to
                                                                     select the protocol you want to use:
                                                                     ◆   0 = any available protocol
                                                                     ◆   1 = Use IPv4
                                                                     ◆   2 = Use IPv6




100                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                  Description

DO_NIC_MACADDRESS                                        Enter 1 to display the Media Access
                                                         Control (MAC) address, Adapter type,
                                                         Description, IP addresses, and subnet
                                                         prefixes of the network interface you
                                                         selected for the backup network;
                                                         otherwise, enter 0.

DO_NIC_SUBNETADDRESS                                     Enter a subnet address to ensure that
                                                         the data from a remote system you
                                                         select for backup is backed up or
                                                         restored over any available network.

DO_ENCRYPTION_TYPE             Specify the encryption    Enter a number from 0 through 3 to
                               method to use             specify the encryption type.
                                                         Selections are as follows:
                                                         ◆   0 = None
                                                         ◆   1 = Software
                                                         ◆   2 = Hardware
                                                         ◆   3 = Hardware if available.
                                                             Otherwise, use software.
                                                         To set an encryption type, you must
                                                         first set a default encryption key by
                                                         using -o99. If you set the encryption
                                                         type to 2 or 3, the default key must be
                                                         256-bit encryption.

DO_SAV_                        Set Symantec ThreatCon Enter a number from 0 through 4 to
THREATLEVELTRIGGER             Level                  specify the Symantec ThreatCon Level
                                                      at which backup jobs should run
                                                      immediately.
                                                         Selections are as follows:
                                                         ◆   0 = Disabled
                                                         ◆   2 = Level 2: Elevated
                                                         ◆   3 = Level 3: High
                                                         ◆   4 = Level 4: Extreme

Trial Job Default Options

DO_TRIAL_                      Check logon credentials   Enter 1 to verify that the logon
CHECKCREDENTIALS               for trial run job         account is correct for the volumes
                                                         being backed up; otherwise, enter 0.


                                                                                                101
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                     Description

            DO_TRIAL_                      Check media capacity for Enter 1 to test whether enough tape is
            CHECKCAPACITY                  trial run job            available to complete the job;
                                                                    otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                        Note During the test run job, the
                                                                             number of scheduled jobs in the
                                                                             queue is not checked; therefore,
                                                                             jobs that are scheduled before
                                                                             the test run job may use the
                                                                             media that was available when
                                                                             the test run job was performed.

            DO_TRIAL_CHECKMEDIA            Check media for trial run Enter 1 to test whether the media is
                                           job                       online and overwritable for a trial run
                                                                     job; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_TRIAL_                      Select method for         Enter 0 if you want to determine job
            DETERMINESIZEMETHOD            determining trial run job size from a previous job history, or
                                           size                      enter a 1 if you want to perform a
                                                                     pre-scan.

            DO_TRIAL_                      Place job on hold if trial   Enter 1 to have the scheduled job
            HOLDONFAILURE                  job fails                    placed on hold if any failures are
                                                                        detected during the test run;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

            Advanced Open File Options

            DO_OPENFILE_METHOD                                          Enter one of the following values:
                                                                        ◆   0 = None
                                                                        ◆   1 = Use the Advanced Open File
                                                                            Option




102                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                    Description

DO_OPENFILE_                   Specify the open file       Enter a number from 0 through 4 to
CONFIGURATION=0-4              technology to back up       specify the open file technology to
                               open files                  back up open files. Selections include:
                                                           ◆   0 = Do not use the open file
                                                               technology
                                                           ◆   1 = Automatically select open file
                                                               technology
                                                           ◆   2 = Use Microsoft Volume Shadow
                                                               Copy Service
                                                           ◆   3 = Use VERITAS Volume Snapshot
                                                               Provider
                                                           ◆   4= Use VERITAS Storage
                                                               Foundation for Windows
                                                               FlashSnap Option

DO_SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=          Specify the snapshot        Enter a number from 0 through 3 to
0-3                            provider for the selected   specify the snapshot provider for the
                               volume                      selected volume. Selections include:
                                                           ◆   0 = Automatic - Allows VSS to
                                                               select the snapshot provider
                                                           ◆   1 = System - Use Microsoft
                                                               software shadow copy provider
                                                           ◆   2 = Software - Use VERITAS
                                                               Storage Foundation for Windows
                                                           ◆   3 = Use technology provided by
                                                               hardware manufacturer

DO_USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_          Process logical volumes     Enter 1 to process logical volumes for
SNAPSHOT=0 or 1                for backup one at a time    backup one at a time; otherwise, enter
                                                           0.

DO_SELECTIONLIST_CREATE Specify separate                   ◆   Enter a number from 0 through 2
                        selection lists for                    to specify separate selection lists
                        resources or computers                 for resources or computers.
                                                               Selections include:
                                                           ◆   0 = Single backup selection list for
                                                               all selections
                                                           ◆   1 = Separate backup selection list
                                                               for each computer
                                                           ◆   2 = Separate backup selection list
                                                               for each resource


                                                                                                 103
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                 Description

            Advanced Disk-based Backup Default Options

            DO_DISKBACKUP_OFFHOST          Use offhost backup to    Enter 1 if you want to enable offhost
                                           move backup processing   backup; otherwise, enter 0. If you enter
                                           from the remote          1, an offhost backup of all volumes is
                                           computer to the media    performed if all requirements are met.
                                           server

            DO_DISKBACKUP_                 Specify snapshot         Enter one of the following values:
            SNAPSHOT                       provider                 ◆   Automatic - Use hardware if
                                                                        available; otherwise use software.
                                                                        Select this option to enable VSS to
                                                                        select the best provider for the
                                                                        selected volume.
                                                                    ◆   Software - Use Veritas Storage
                                                                        Foundation for Windows.
                                                                    ◆   Hardware - Use technology
                                                                        provided by hardware
                                                                        manufacturer:
                                                                    If you select Software or Hardware as
                                                                    the snapshot provider, then the
                                                                    following information applies:
                                                                    ◆   The provider must support
                                                                        transportable snaps.
                                                                    ◆   If multiple volumes are selected,
                                                                        then all volumes must be
                                                                        snappable by the same type of
                                                                        provider.
                                                                    Software and hardware providers
                                                                    cannot both be used to snap different
                                                                    volumes in the same job. You must
                                                                    either create another job, or make sure
                                                                    that the following option is selected:
                                                                    Process logical volumes for offhost
                                                                    backup one at a time.




104                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                  Description

DO_DISKBACKUP_OFFHOST_ Specify the job             Enter one of the following values:
NOTSUPPORTED           disposition, if any, of the ◆ 0 = Continue the backup job
                       selected resources do not      (offhost backup is not used)
                       support offhost backup
                                                   ◆  1 = Fail the backup job (further
                                                      selections are not backed up after
                                                      failure occurs)

DO_DISKBACKUP_PROCESS          Process logical volumes Enter 1 if you want to enable the
                               for offhost backup one at backup of multiple volumes in one job.
                               a time                    This method creates a snapshot of
                                                         only one logical volume at a time.
                                                         Otherwise, enter 0.
                                                         To ensure database integrity, or if a
                                                         volume contains mount points,
                                                         multiple volumes may need to be
                                                         snapped at one time.
                                                         After the logical volume is snapped
                                                         and backed up, the snapshot is deleted
                                                         before the next logical volume is
                                                         snapped. This option increases the
                                                         ability to meet the minimum quiet
                                                         time that is needed to complete a
                                                         snapshot.
                                                         A logical volume can comprise
                                                         multiple physical volumes. A single
                                                         logical volume can encompass all of
                                                         the volumes on which databases
                                                         reside.

Job Log Default Options

DO_LOG_SUMMARYLEVEL            Select summary level for Enter one of the following values for
                               job log                  the job log summary level:
                                                         ◆   0 = Summary only
                                                         ◆   1 = Summary and directories
                                                         ◆   2 = Summary, directories, and files
                                                         ◆   3 = Summary, directories, files, and
                                                             details.




                                                                                                 105
Using command line switches

            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                  Description

            DO_LOG_FILEBASE                Specify job log name      Specify a job log name FILENAME#.txt.
                                                                     The # starts at 00. The default is
                                                                     BEX#.txt.

            DO_LOG_ATTACH                  Attach job log as html    Enter 1 to attach the job logs in an
                                                                     html format when an email
                                                                     notification is sent; otherwise, enter 0.

            SQL Default Options

            DO_SQL_BACKUPMETHOD            Select the SQL backup     Select the backup method to be used
                                           method                    for SQL databases by entering one of
                                                                     the following values:
                                                                     ◆   0 = full
                                                                     ◆   1 = log
                                                                     ◆   2 = log no truncate
                                                                     ◆   3 = differential

            DO_SQL_                        Consistency check before Select a consistency check to run
            CHECKBEFOREBACKUP              backup                   before a backup.
                                                                     Values are as follows:
                                                                     ◆   0 = none
                                                                     ◆   1 = full
                                                                     ◆   2 = full with indexes
                                                                     ◆   3 = physical

            DO_SQL_                        Continue with backup if   Enter 1 if you want the backup job to
            CONTINUEIFCHECKFAILS           consistency check fails   continue if the consistency check fails;
                                                                     otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_SQL_                        Consistency check after   Select a consistency check to run after
            CHECKAFTERBACKUP               backup                    a backup. Values are:
                                                                     ◆   0 = none
                                                                     ◆   1 = full
                                                                     ◆   2 = full with indexes
                                                                     ◆   3 = physical




106                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                   Description

DO_SQL_ CHECKSUM               Use checksums on           Enter 1 if you want to have SQL 2005
                               backup (SQL 2005 only)     add checksums to the SQL 2005
                                                          database data that is backed up by
                                                          Backup Exec; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_SQL_KEEPSNAPSHOTS           Specifies the number of    Enter the number of database
                               database snapshots to      snapshots to keep on disk. As the
                               keep                       threshold is met, older database
                                                          snapshots are deleted, which are then
                                                          replaced with new shapshots.
                                                          Database snapshots continue to grow
                                                          as the SQL 2005 database is updated. If
                                                          you limit the number of snapshots,
                                                          you minimize both the disk space and
                                                          SQL Server processing time that is
                                                          required when the snapshots are
                                                          updated.

DO_SQL_CREATECOPIES            Create on-disk copies of   Enter 1 if you want to create an
                               SQL backups to be placed   on-disk copy of the SQL database that
                               on the SQL server where    is backed up; otherwise, enter 0. If you
                               the database is located    enter 1, you can simultaneously back
                                                          up a SQL database to storage media
                                                          and write a copy of the database to a
                                                          disk path you specify with the
                                                          DO_SQL_SAVEPATH option.

DO_SQL_SAVEPATH                Specify the path in which Enter the path for the on-disk copy of
                               to save on-disk copies of the SQL backup. To use this option,
                               SQL backups               you must enter 1 for
                                                         DO_SQL_CREATECOPIES.

DO_SQL_RESTOREMETHOD           SQL restore method         Select the default restore method for
                                                          SQL databases. Values include:
                                                          ◆   0 = no recover
                                                          ◆   1 = recover
                                                          ◆   2 = standby




                                                                                                107
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                  Description

            DO_SQL_REPLACE                 Replace database or       Enter 1 if you want to replace a
                                           filegroups                Microsoft SQL Server database or
                                                                     filegroup, even if another database or
                                                                     filegroup with the same name already
                                                                     exists on the server. Otherwise, enter
                                                                     0.

            DO_SQL_                        Consistency check after   Select a consistency check to run after
            CHECKAFTERRESTORE              restore                   a restore. Values include:
                                                                     ◆   0 = none
                                                                     ◆   1 = full
                                                                     ◆   2 = full with indexes
                                                                     ◆   3 = physical

            DO_SQL_                        Enable filegroup support Enter 1 if you want to enable filegroup
            ENABLEFGSUPPORT                                         support; otherwise, enter 0.

            Exchange Default Options

            DO_XCH_ENABLE                  Enable Exchange support Enter 1 if you want to enable Exchange
                                                                   support; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_XCH_BACKUPMETHOD            Exchange backup method Select the default backup method to
                                                                  use for Exchange databases. Values
                                                                  include:
                                                                     ◆   0 = full
                                                                     ◆   1 = copy
                                                                     ◆   2 = differential
                                                                     ◆   3 = incremental

            DO_XCH_                        Exchange mailbox          Select the default method for backing
            MBOXBACKUPMETHOD               backup method             up Exchange mailboxes. Values are:
                                                                     ◆   0 = full
                                                                     ◆   1 = copy
                                                                     ◆   2 = differential
                                                                     ◆   3 = incremental

            DO_XCH_                        Enable single instance    Enter 1 if you want to enable single
            SINGLEINSTANCEBACKUP           backup for message        instance backup for message
                                           attachments               attachments; otherwise, enter 0.



108                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                   Description

DO_XCH_NOLOSS                  No loss restore            Enter 1 to restore without deleting
                                                          existing job logs; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_XCH_PUBLIC                  Restore public folder      Enter 1 to restore a public folder;
                                                          otherwise, enter 0.

DO_XCH_PRIVATE                 Restore private            Enter 1 to restore private mailboxes;
                               mailboxes                  otherwise, enter 0.

DO_XCH_LOGPATH                 Select temporary location Enter the temporary location for log
                               for log and patch files   and patch files.

DO_XCH_                        Automatically recreate     Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
AUTOCREATEMAILBOX              user accounts and          automatically recreate user accounts
                               mailboxes                  and mailboxes if they do not already
                                                          exist on the server; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_XCH_ENABLE_                 Use Granual Recovery       Enter 1 to enable the restore of
GRANULAR_RESTORE               Technology to enable the   individual mailboxes, mail messages,
                               restore of individual      and folders from Information Store
                               mailboxes, mail            backups; otherwise, enter 0.
                               messages, and public       Incremental backups are supported
                               folders                    with policy-based jobs only.

DO_XCH_OVERWRITE               Restore over existing      Enter 1 to restore over existing
                               messages and folders       messages and folders when you restore
                                                          individual mail messages and folders.
                                                          Otherwise, enter 0.

Microsoft SharePoint Default Options

DO_SPPS2_BACKUPMETHOD                                     Select the default method for backing
                                                          up SharePoint databases. Values
                                                          include:
                                                          ◆   0 = Full - Back up entire database
                                                          ◆   1 = Differential - Backup up
                                                              database changes only

DO_SPPS2_ENABLE_                                          Enter 1 to enable the restore of
GRANULAR_RESTORE                                          individual documents from database
                                                          backups; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                                   109
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                    Description

            DO_SPPS2_PRE_DBCC                                          Enter 1 to perform a consistency check
                                                                       before the backup of Microsoft SQL
                                                                       databases Microsoft SharePoint uses;
                                                                       otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_SPPS2_CONT_ON_DBCC_ Continue with backup job Enter 1 to continue with the backup
            ERROR                  even if consistency check operation even if the consistency
                                   fails                     check fails; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_SPPS2_RECNT_DB_ON_          Bring restore databases     Enter 1 to bring the databases online
            RESTORE                        online                      after a restore job; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_SPPS2_RECONNECT             Reconnect previous          Enter 1 to re-establish the link
                                           database links              between the restored databases and
                                                                       their corresponding sites when you
                                                                       restore portal sites or Windows
                                                                       SharePoint Services sites; otherwise,
                                                                       enter 0. You must set the
                                                                       DO_SPPS2_RECNT_DB_ON_RESTORE
                                                                       value to 1 in order to use this option.

            DO_SPPS2_OVERWRITE             Restore over existing       Enter 1 if you want to replace existing
                                           documents                   documents with documents of the
                                                                       same name in the restore job;
                                                                       otherwise, enter 0.

            Microsoft Active Directory Default Options

            DO_AD_RECREATE                 Recreate deleted options    Enter 1 if you want to recreate deleted
                                           that cannot be restored     objects; otherwise, enter 0.
                                           from the Active Directory   You should enter 1 if both of the
                                           Deleted Objects container   following have occurred:
                                                                       ◆   The object’s tombstone lifetimes
                                                                           have passed.
                                                                       ◆   The objects were purged from the
                                                                           Active Directory Deleted Objects
                                                                           container.




110                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                  Description

DO_AD_RESTORE                  Use Backup Exec           Enter 1 to enable the restore of
                               Granular Recovery         individual objects from Active
                               Technology (GRT) to       Directory backups. With this option,
                               enable the restore of     you can restore of individual items
                               individual objects from   from full backups of the Active
                               the Active Directory      Directory or ADAM/ AD LDS.
                               backups                   Otherwise, enter 0.
                                                         Symantec recommends that if you
                                                         select this option, you should select a
                                                         backup-to-disk folder on a local NTFS
                                                         volume as the destination device.
                                                         If data must be restored from a tape,
                                                         then the media server must stage the
                                                         restore of the entire database to a
                                                         temporary path to extract individual
                                                         items.

DO_AD_CONSISTENCY_             Checks snapshots for      Enter 1 to enable the consistency
CHECK                          data corruption           check. This option applies only to
                                                         snapshots that are performed by the
                                                         Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy
                                                         Services (VSS). You must have
                                                         Windows 2008 to use this option.
                                                         Otherwise, enter 0.

DO_AD_CONSISTENCY_             Enables the backup job to Enter 1 to enable the backup job to
CHECK_FAILS                    continue even if the      continue even if the consistency check
                               consistency check fails   fails. Otherwise, enter 0.
                                                         You may want the job to continue if a
                                                         backup of the database in its current
                                                         state is better than no backup at all. Or
                                                         you may want the job to continue if
                                                         you back up a large database that may
                                                         have only a small problem.




                                                                                                111
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                  Description

            Lotus Domino Default Options

            DO_DOMINO_                     Lotus Domino backup       Select the default method for backing
            BACKUPMETHOD                   method                    up Lotus Domino databases. Values
                                                                     include:
                                                                     ◆   0 = full
                                                                     ◆   1 = differential
                                                                     ◆   2 = incremental

            DO_DOMINO_                     Mark archive logs for     Enter 1 to mark archive logs for
            RECYCLELOGS                    recycling                 recycling; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_DOMINO_                     Seconds to wait for       Specify the number of seconds for the
            SECONDSTOWAIT                  database                  restore process to wait for a database
                                                                     that is in use by entering a value from
                                                                     0 to 999.

            DO_DOMINO_                     Database identification   Select the default option for handling
            RECOVEROPTION                                            database IDs during a restore. Values
                                                                     include:
                                                                     ◆   0 = retain original IDs
                                                                     ◆   1 = assign new database ID
                                                                     ◆   2 = assign new database ID and
                                                                         replica ID

            Oracle Default Options




112                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                   Description

DO_ORACLE_                     Select backup method       Select the default method to back up
BACKUPMETHOD                                              Oracle databases.
                                                          Values are as follows:
                                                          ◆   0 = Full - Back up selections. This
                                                              method is the equivalent of the
                                                              Oracle RMAN Incremental: Level 0
                                                              backup. Select this method to
                                                              perform a full backup of Oracle
                                                              selections.
                                                          ◆   1 = Differential - Back up changes
                                                              since last full. This method is the
                                                              equivalent of the Oracle RMAN
                                                              Cumulative Incremental: Level 1
                                                              backup. Select this method to back
                                                              up all database changes since the
                                                              last full backup. A full backup is
                                                              performed of all archived redo logs
                                                              since log files are never partially
                                                              backed up.
                                                          ◆   2 = Incremental - Back up changes
                                                              since last full or incremental. This
                                                              method is the equivalent of the
                                                              Oracle RMAN Incremental: Level 1
                                                              backup. Select this method to back
                                                              up all database changes since the
                                                              last full or incremental backup. A
                                                              full backup is performed of all
                                                              archived redo logs since log files
                                                              are never partially backed up.

DO_ORACLE_DELETELOGS           Delete backed up archive Enter 1 to have Backup Exec delete the
                               log files                archived log files automatically after
                                                        the backup job. Otherwise, enter 0.

DO_ORACLE_DONT_                Do not back up archive      Enter 1 to have Backup Exec skip any
REBACKUP_LOGS                  log files that have already archived log files that were backed up
                               been backed up              previously; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_ORACLE_                     Perform the backup         Enter 1 to have Backup Exec take the
BACKUPOFFLINE                  offline                    database offline before you start the
                                                          backup job; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                                 113
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                  Description

            NetWare SMS Default Options

            DO_SMS_                        Back up compressed files Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
            BACKUPASEXPANDED               in decompressed form     decompress, or expand, compressed
                                                                    files as they are backed up; otherwise,
                                                                    enter 0.

            DO_SMS_                        Restore volume            Enter 1 to restore NetWare volume
            RESTOREVOLRESTRICT             restrictions              restrictions; otherwise, enter 0.

            Linux, Unix, and Macintosh Default Options

            DO)UNIXMAC_                    Preserve change time      Enter 1 to prevent the Remote Agent
            PRESERVETIME                                             from changing an object’s (files and
                                                                     directories) attributes when a backup
                                                                     occurs; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_UNIXMAC_FOLLOW_             Follow local mount points Enter 1 to have Backup Exec follow
            LOCALMOUNT                                               local mount points during backup jobs;
                                                                     otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_UNIXMAC_FOLLOW_             Follow remote mount       Enter 1 to have Backup Exec follow
            REMOTEMOUNT                    points                    remote mount points during backup
                                                                     jobs; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_UNIXMAC_SOFTLINKED          Back up contents of       Enter 1 to back up the contents of
                                           soft-linked directories   directories that are linked with soft
                                                                     links. You must also select the
                                                                     directory that contains the soft link.
                                                                     Otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_UNIXMAC_LOCK_               Lock remote files         Enter 1 if the Remote Agent requires
            REMOTEFILES                                              exclusive access to the files on remote
                                                                     systems that are connected through
                                                                     the Network File System; otherwise,
                                                                     enter 0.




114                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                 Description

NDMP Default Options

DO_NDMP_NETAPP_                Backup method for        Enter a number 0 through 9 to specify
BACKUPMETHOD                   NDMP resources           the backup level. Level 0 provides a full
                                                        backup. Levels 1 through 9 provide
                                                        various levels of incremental backups.
                                                        Level 1 backup method backs up new
                                                        or modified files since the level 0
                                                        backup, level 2 backup method backs
                                                        up new or modified files since the level
                                                        1 backup, and so on.

DO_NDMP_NETAPP_                Back up Access Control   Enter 1 to back up NetApp Access
BACKUP_CONTROLLISTS            Lists                    Control Lists; otherwise, enter 0. This
                                                        option applies to NetApp filers only.

DO_NDMP_NETAPP_                Disable file history     Enter 1 to prevent the generation of
DISABLEHISTORY                                          file history data; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                        File history is used to optimize
                                                        recovery of selected subsets of data
                                                        from the backup image. File history
                                                        generation and processing increase the
                                                        backup time. To improve backup time,
                                                        enter 0 for this option. If file history is
                                                        made unavailable and you must later
                                                        restore data, restore the entire backup
                                                        image.

DO_NDMP_RESTORE_               Restore Access Control   Enter 1 to restore NetApp Access
CONTROLLISTS                   Lists                    Control Lists; otherwise, enter 0.

DO_NDMP_NETAPP_                Enable Direct Access     Enter 1 to have Backup Exec use Direct
DIRECTRECOVERY                 Recovery                 Access Recovery (DAR) during the
                                                        restore job; otherwise, enter 0. With
                                                        DAR-enabled recovery, Backup Exec
                                                        can specify the exact location of a file
                                                        in a backup data stream. The NDMP
                                                        server can then read the data
                                                        applicable to the single file being
                                                        restored. DAR reduces the amount of
                                                        information that is processed and
                                                        significantly reduces recovery time. If
                                                        DAR is not available, the restore may
                                                        take significantly longer.


                                                                                                 115
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                    Description

            DO_NDMP_NETAPP_                Restore without writing     Enter 1 to test the validity of the data
            RESTORE_WITHOUT_               data to disk (Verify data   that you selected for the restore job;
            WRITING                        without doing a restore)    otherwise, enter 0. Backup Exec does
                                                                       not restore the data. For NetApp/IBM
                                                                       filers, you should use this option to
                                                                       verify data instead of Backup Exec's
                                                                       verify backup job option.

            DO_NDMP_EMC_BACKUP_            Backup method               Enter a number 0 through 9 to specify
            METHOD                         (EMC)                       the backup level. Level 0 provides a full
                                                                       backup. Levels 1 through 9 provide
                                                                       various levels of incremental backups.
                                                                       Level 1 backup method backs up new
                                                                       or modified files since the level 0
                                                                       backup. Level 2 backup method backs
                                                                       up new or modified files since the level
                                                                       1 backup, and so on.

            DO_NDMP_EMC_BACKUP_            Backup Type                 Enter one of the following values:
            TYPE                                                       ◆   0 = VBB (EMC only)
                                                                       ◆   1 = Dump

            DO_NDMP_EMC_SNAPSURE           Back up with integrated     Enter 1 to enable Backup Exec to
                                           checkpoints (SnapSure)      create a backup set that uses the EMC
                                                                       SnapSure feature; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                       This feature applies only to EMC.
                                                                       For more information about SnapSure,
                                                                       see your EMC documentation.

            DO_NDMP_EMC_                   Disable file history (EMC) Enter 1 to prevent the generation of
            DISABLEHISTORY                                            file history data otherwise; enter 0.
                                                                       File history allows for the recovery of
                                                                       selected subsets of data from the
                                                                       backup history. File history is used to
                                                                       optimize recovery of selected subsets
                                                                       of data from the backup image. File
                                                                       history generation and processing
                                                                       increase the backup time. To improve
                                                                       backup time, enter 0 for this option. If
                                                                       file history is made unavailable and
                                                                       you must later restore data, restore the
                                                                       entire backup image.



116                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                Description

DO_NDMP_EMC_                   Enable tape silvering   Enter 1 to enable Backup Exec to
TAPESILVERING                                          create a backup set that you can use to
                                                       replicate data by using tape silvering;
                                                       otherwise, enter 0.
                                                       This feature applies only to EMC.
                                                       For more information about tape
                                                       silvering, see your EMC
                                                       documentation.



DO_NDMP_EMC_                   Enable Direct Access    Enter 1 to have Backup Exec use Direct
DIRECTRECOVERY                 Recovery                Access Recovery (DAR) during the
                                                       restore job; otherwise, enter 0. With
                                                       DAR-enabled recovery, Backup Exec
                                                       can specify the exact location of a file
                                                       in a backup data stream. The NDMP
                                                       server can then read the data
                                                       applicable to the single file being
                                                       restored. DAR reduces the amount of
                                                       information that is processed and
                                                       significantly reduces recovery time. If
                                                       DAR is not available, the restore may
                                                       take significantly longer.

DO_NDMP_NETAPP_                Restores data with      Enter 1 to restore the data with its
PRESERVETREE                   original directory      original directory structure intact.
                               structure intact        Enter 0 to restore all data in the
                                                       directories and subdirectories to the
                                                       path you specify in the File Redirection
                                                       dialog box.
                                                       This option affects restore jobs for
                                                       NetApp/IBM data only.

DO_NDMP_EMC_                   Restores data with      Enter 1 to restore the data with its
PRESERVETREE                   original directory      original directory structure intact.
                               structure intact        Enter 0 to restore all data in the
                                                       directories and subdirectories to the
                                                       path you specify in the File Redirection
                                                       dialog box.
                                                       This option affects restore jobs for
                                                       EMC data only.




                                                                                              117
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                 Description

            Storage Provisioning Default Options

            DO_SPO_MAXBACKUPSETS           Maximum number of        Enter the maximum number of backup
                                           backup sets per file     sets to write to a file on a virtual disk.
                                                                    The value can be between one and
                                                                    8192. The default value is 100.
                                                                    If you specify fewer rather than more
                                                                    backup sets in a file, Backup Exec may
                                                                    be able to reclaim disk space faster. For
                                                                    example, you specify 100 backup sets
                                                                    per file. Backup Exec cannot reclaim
                                                                    any disk space until the overwrite
                                                                    protection period expires for all of the
                                                                    backup sets. If you specify one backup
                                                                    set per file, Backup Exec can reclaim
                                                                    disk space as soon as the overwrite
                                                                    protection period expires for that set.

            DO_SPO_MAXFILESIZE             Maximum size for files   Type the maximum size for each file
                                                                    that this virtual disk contains. The file
                                                                    size can be from 1 MB to 4194304 MB.
                                                                    The default is 4 GB.
                                                                    Note 1024 MB is equal to 1 GB.

            DO_SPO_MAXCONCURRENT Allow x concurrent jobs            Enter the number of concurrent
                                                                    operations that you want to allow to
                                                                    this virtual disk.
                                                                    The value can be between one and 16.

            DO_SPO_THRESHOLD1              Threshold 1              Enter the low disk space threshold at
                                                                    which you want Backup Exec to send
                                                                    the first of three alerts. The default
                                                                    threshold is 75%, which is a
                                                                    percentage of the total available disk
                                                                    space on this virtual disk. The value
                                                                    can be between one and 100.
                                                                    The amount you enter must be equal
                                                                    to or less than threshold 2.




118                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                  Description

DO_SPO_THRESHOLD2              Threshold 2               Enter the low disk space threshold at
                                                         which you want Backup Exec to send
                                                         the second of three alerts. The default
                                                         threshold is 85%, which is a
                                                         percentage of the total available disk
                                                         space on this virtual disk. The value
                                                         can be between 1 and 100.
                                                         The amount you enter must be equal
                                                         to or less than threshold three, but
                                                         greater than or equal to threshold 1.

DO_SPO_THRESHOLD3              Threshold 3               Enter the low disk space threshold at
                                                         which you want Backup Exec to send
                                                         the last of three alerts. The default
                                                         threshold is 95%, which is a
                                                         percentage of the total available disk
                                                         space on this virtual disk. The value
                                                         can be between 1 and 100.
                                                         The amount you enter must be greater
                                                         than or equal to threshold 2.

Schedule Default Option

DO_SCHEDULE_DELETION           Job deletion for run once Enter one of the following values:
                               jobs                      ◆  0 = Delete the job if the job
                                                            successfully completes
                                                         ◆   1 = Delete the job after the job
                                                             completes
                                                         ◆   2 = Do not delete the job

Job Status and Recovery Default Options

DO_STATUSRECOVERY_             Time before job status    Enter the number of seconds before
STALLED                        becomes stalled           the statuses of active jobs are changed
                                                         to Stalled when the Backup Exec
                                                         engine service fails to respond.




                                                                                                119
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                   Description

            DO_STATUSRECOVERY_             Time before job status     Enter the number of seconds before
            RECOVERED                      becomes recovered          jobs are failed and then recovered by
                                                                      Backup Exec. A custom error-handling
                                                                      rule named Recovered Jobs is applied
                                                                      to recovered jobs. If this rule is
                                                                      disabled, then any other error-
                                                                      handling rules that are enabled will
                                                                      apply to the recovered jobs. If there are
                                                                      no error-handling rules that apply to
                                                                      the job, then the job fails.

            Catalog Default Options

            DO_CAT_MEDIA_                  Request all media in the   Enter 1 to catalog media starting with
            INSEQUENCE                     sequence for catalog       the lowest known tape number in the
                                           operations                 tape family. For example, if you don’t
                                                                      have tape one, the catalog begins with
                                                                      tape two. Otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_CAT_USECATALOGS             Use storage media-based Enter 1 to use the catalog information
                                           catalogs                from the media; otherwise, enter 0.

            DO_CAT_TRUNCATEFLAG            Truncate catalogs          Enter 1 to retain only the header
                                                                      information and to remove all file and
                                                                      directory details after the specified
                                                                      number of days; otherwise, enter 0. If
                                                                      you select this option, you must enter
                                                                      a value for DO_CAT_TRUNCATEDAYS.

            DO_CAT_TRUNCATEDDAYS           Amount of days before      Enter the amount of days before file
                                           truncating catalogs        and directory details are removed from
                                                                      the catalogs. The value can be between
                                                                      1 and 999.

            DO_CAT_REMOVEFLAG              Remove unused catalogs Enter 1 to remove unused catalogs
                                                                  after a specified number of days;
                                                                  otherwise, enter 0. If you select this
                                                                  option, you must enter a value for
                                                                  DO_CAT_REMOVEDAYS.

            DO_CAT_REMOVEDAYS              Amount of days before      Enter the amount of days before
                                           removing unused            unused catalogs are removed. The
                                           catalogs                   value can be between 1 and 999.



120                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                  Description

DO_CAT_PATH                    Set catalog path          Specify a path on the volume for the
                                                         catalog files.

Media Default Options

DO_MEDIA_B2DLOCATION           Backup-to-Disk default    Specify a path on the volume for the
                               folder location           Backup-to-Disk folder.

DO_MEDIA_                      Set media overwrite       Enter one of the following values:
OVERWRITELEVEL                 protection level          ◆   1 = None
                                                         ◆   2 = None with prompt
                                                         ◆   3 = Partial
                                                         ◆   4 = Partial with prompt
                                                         ◆   5 = Full

DO_MEDIA_                      Set the media overwrite   Enter one of the following values:
OVERWRITEOPTIONS               options                   ◆   0 = Overwrite scratch media before
                                                             overwriting recyclable media
                                                             contained in the targeted media set
                                                         ◆   1 = Overwrite recyclable media
                                                             contained in the targeted media set
                                                             before overwriting scratch media

DO_MEDIA_DEFAULTVAULT Specify the default media Enter the default vault that you want
                      vault                     media moved to when a job is run to
                                                move media to a vault or to export
                                                media.

Intelligent Disaster Recovery Default Options

DO_DISASTER_DATAPATH           Disaster recovery data    Specify a path where a copy of the DR
                               path                      files for the protected computers will
                                                         be stored.

DO_DISASTER_                   Alternate disaster        Specify an alternate data path where a
ALTERNATEPATH                  recovery data path        second copy of the DR files can be
                                                         stored.




                                                                                                121
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                 Description

            Backup-to-Disk Default Options

            DO_B2D_MAXBACKUPSETS           Maximum number of        Type the maximum number of backup
                                           backup sets per          sets to be written to each
                                           backup-to-disk file      backup-to-disk file. The maximum
                                                                    number can range from 1 to 8192. The
                                                                    default is 100. Fewer backup sets in a
                                                                    backup-to-disk file may allow the
                                                                    overwrite protection period to expire
                                                                    sooner, and the disk space to be
                                                                    reclaimed faster.

            DO_B2D_MAXFILESIZE             Maximum size for         Type the maximum size for each
                                           backup-to-disk files     backup-to-disk file. The file size can be
                                                                    from 1 MB to 4194304 MB. The default
                                                                    is 4 GB.
                                                                    Note 1024 MB is equal to 1 GB.

            DO_B2D_ALLOCATEMAXSIZE Allocate the maximum             Enter 1 to create the backup-to-disk
                                   size when creating the           file at the maximum size to reduce disk
                                   backup-to-disk file              fragmentation; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                    This default does not apply to
                                                                    removable backup-to-disk folders.

            DO_B2D_CONCURRENTJOBS Allow concurrent jobs for Type the number of concurrent
                                  this backup-to-disk folder operations that you want to allow to
                                                             this folder. This number can range
                                                             from 1 to 16.

            DO_B2D_RESERVESIZE             Disk space reserve       Enter an amount of disk space to
                                                                    reserve on a backup-to-disk folder.
                                                                    When this threshold is reached,
                                                                    Backup Exec cannot submit jobs for
                                                                    processing that are targeted to this
                                                                    backup-to-disk folder, but jobs that are
                                                                    running will finish.

            DO_B2D_FOLDERLOCATION          Specify backup-to-disk   Type the default path for new
                                           folder location          backup-to-disk folders.




122                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches


Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                  Description

DB2 Default Options

DO_DB2_BACKUPMETHOD            Select backup method      Specifies the backup method to be
                                                         used for DB2 backup jobs.
                                                         Methods are as follows:
                                                         ◆   0 = Full - Back up selections. Select
                                                             this method to perform a full
                                                             backup of DB2 selections.
                                                         ◆   1 = Differential - Back up changes
                                                             since last full backup.
                                                         ◆   2 = Incremental - Back up changes
                                                             since last full or incremental
                                                             backup.

DO_DB2_BACKUPOFFLINE           Perform backups offline   Enter 1 if you want Backup Exec to
                                                         take the database offline before you
                                                         start the backup job; otherwise, enter
                                                         0. If you enter 1, Backup Exec brings
                                                         the database online after the backup
                                                         job is complete.

DO_DB2_QUIESCE                 Quiesce the database      Enter 1 if you want Backup Exec to
                               before offline backup     force users off the database before it
                                                         brings the database offline for the
                                                         backup job. Otherwise, enter 0.

Database Maintenance Default Options

DO_DB_GROOM                    Remove old data from the Enter 1 if you want Backup Exec to
                               Backup Exec database     automatically delete old data from its
                                                        database, using specified criteria.
                                                        Otherwise, enter 0.

DO_DB_TIME                     Time to perform database Enter the time you want to perform
                               maintenance              database maintenance. All the
                                                        maintenance occurs once a day at the
                                                        time you specify.




                                                                                                  123
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                 Description

            DO_DB_ENABLE_                  Keep job history         Select one of the following options for
            JOBHISTORYDAYS                                          keeping job history data:
                                                                    ◆   0 = Keep job history for data on
                                                                        media that have current overwrite
                                                                        protection periods.
                                                                    ◆   1 = Keep job history for a specified
                                                                        number of days. This option is used
                                                                        with the
                                                                        DO_DB_JOBHISTORYDAYS option.

            DO_DB_JOBHISTORYDAYS           Number of days to keep   Enter the number of days for job
                                           job history data         history data to remain on the Backup
                                                                    Exec database.

            DO_DB_                         Number of days to keep   Enter the number of days for alert
            ALERTHISTORYDAYS               alert history data       history data to remain on the Backup
                                                                    Exec database.

            DO_DB_JOBLOGDAYS               Number of days to keep   Enter the number of days for job logs
                                           job logs                 to remain on the Backup Exec
                                                                    database.

            DO_DB_REPORTDAYS               Number of days to keep   Enter the number of days for report
                                           report data              data to remain on the Backup Exec
                                                                    database.

            DO_DB_AUDITLOGDAYS             Number of days to keep   Enter the number of days for audit
                                           audit logs               logs to remain on the Backup Exec
                                                                    database.

            DO_DB_CONSISTENCY              Perform database         Enter 1 if you want to perform a
                                           consistency check        database consistency check; otherwise,
                                                                    enter 0.

            DO_DB_COMPACT                  Compact the Backup Exec Enter 1 if you want to compact the
                                           database                Backup Exec database; otherwise,
                                                                   enter 0.

            DO_DB_DUMP                     Dump contents of Backup Enter 1 if you want to dump the
                                           Exec database           contents of the Backup Exec database
                                                                   to the Backup Exec data directory so
                                                                   that it can be backed up; otherwise,
                                                                   enter 0.


124                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using command line switches

Default option parameters (continued)

Option Name                    Function                   Description

Reports

DO_REPORTS_                    Use company logo image Enter 1 if you want to use a company
COMPANYLOGO                    file                   logo in the report header; otherwise,
                                                      enter 0.

DO_REPORTS_IMAGEFILE           Specify image file path    Type the path to the logo that you want
                                                          to use in all custom reports.

DO_REPORTS_                    Specify the color to use   Type the numbers that correspond to
BANNERCOLOR                    for the report banner      the values for red, green, and blue that
                                                          you want to use for the banner color.
                                                          Use the following format:
                                                          <value for red>. <value for green>,
                                                          <value for blue>
                                                          Values can range from 0 through 255

DO_REPORTS_FOOTERTEXT Specify text to appear in           Type the text you want to appear in the
                      the report footer                   report footer.

DO_REPORTS_FOOTERTIME          Include time in footer     Enter 1 if you want to include the time
                                                          the report ran in the report footer;
                                                          otherwise, enter 0.

LiveUpdate

DO_LU_ENABLED                  Lets you schedule          Enter 1 to have Backup Exec download
                               automatic updates, and     and install all updates that are
                               then choose the            available without prompting you first.
                               frequency of the updates   Enter 2 to have Backup Exec alert you
                                                          when updates are available. Updates
                                                          are not downloaded or installed.
                                                          Enter O to disable automatic updates.




                                                                                                125
Using command line switches


            Default option parameters (continued)

            Option Name                    Function                   Description

            DO_LU_FREQUENCY                Lets you select the        Enter O to have Backup Exec check for
                                           frequency with which       new updates only on the date and time
                                           Backup Exec checks for     that you specify.
                                           updates                    Enter 1 to have Backup Exec check for
                                                                      new updates every day at the time you
                                                                      specify.
                                                                      Enter 2 to have Backup Exec check for
                                                                      new updates once a week on the day
                                                                      and time that you specify.
                                                                      Enter 3 to have Backup Exec check for
                                                                      new updates once a month at the time
                                                                      you specify.

            DO_LU_DAY                      Lets you select the day on Enter one of the following:
                                           which you want Backup ◆ 0 = Sunday
                                           Exec to check for updates
                                                                      ◆  1 = Monday
                                                                      ◆   2 = Tuesday
                                                                      ◆   3 = Wednesday
                                                                      ◆   4 = Thursday
                                                                      ◆   5 = Friday
                                                                      ◆   6 = Saturday

            DO_LU_DATE                     Lets you enter the         Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY
                                           specific date on which     format. For example, enter
                                           you want Backup Exec to    12/13/2010 to run the job on
                                           check for updates          December 13, 2010.

            DO_LU_TIME                     Lets you enter the time at Enter the time in 24 hour format. For
                                           which you want Backup example, enter 21:30:00 to run the
                                           Exec to check for updates. job at 9:30 PM.




126                                                   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Using job script files
        A job script file is a text (.txt) file that the Command Line applet can use with command
        line switch -o90 to create and launch jobs. The job script file can contain all of the
        switches you would normally specify on the command line when using the Command
        Line Applet as well as additional switches that you set when creating the job script file.
        The job script file can also be used in conjunction with some of the switches.
        Sample script files are included in the UTILS directory on the installation DVD. To
        activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//) at the beginning of
        the line. The following are the sample script files included:
        ■   Backup jobs - bjscript.txt
        ■   Restore jobs - rjscript.txt
        ■   Catalog jobs - catalogscript.txt
        ■   Discovery resource jobs - discoveryscript.txt
        ■   Duplicate backup jobs - djscript.txt
        ■   Test run jobs - testrunscript.txt
        ■   Copy job - cjscript.txt


     Creating a backup job script file
        Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a backup job script file that contains the
        following sections, and entries for each section:
        ■   [General]
        ■   [Backup_Options]
        ■   [Media_Options]
        ■   [Miscellaneous]
        ■   [Schedule]
        ■   [Machine]
        ■   [Selections]
        ■   [Media_Server]
        Each entry included for the various sections must be typed in capital letters and be
        immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
        follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
        itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Backups and
        the job type is backup, the script file for the [General] section would appear as:


                                                                                                     127
Using job script files


                   [General]
                   JOB_TYPE=Backup
                   JOB_NAME=Workstation Backups
              All possible entries for a Backup Job Script File are described in the following table. In
              creating a script file, you would not want to include all entries.

              Possible backup job script file entries

              Section       Entry                                    Description

              [General]

                            JOB_TYPE=job type                        This entry must be completed with a
                                                                     value of Backup.

                            JOB_PRIORITY=priority                    Enter the priority for the job. If
                                                                     another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                                     same time as this job, the priority
                                                                     determines which job runs first.
                                                                     If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                                     will be Medium. Options are:
                                                                     ◆   Lowest
                                                                     ◆   Low
                                                                     ◆   Medium
                                                                     ◆   High
                                                                     ◆   Highest

                            JOB_NAME=job name                        Type the name of the backup job.

                            SERVER=server name                       Type the name of the Backup Exec
                                                                     server where the operation is to be
                                                                     performed. If a server is not specified,
                                                                     the local server is used by default.

                            USERNAME=username                        Type the user name for logging into a
                                                                     remote Backup Exec server. If a user
                                                                     name is not specified, the current user
                                                                     name is used.

                            PASSWORD=password                        Enter the password for logging into a
                                                                     remote Backup Exec server. If a
                                                                     password is not specified, the current
                                                                     password is used.



128                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

[Backup_Options]

              BK_SET_NAME=backup set name             Type the name of the backup set to be
                                                      used by the job.

              BK_METHOD=0 - 9, 11                     Enter a number from 0 through 9 or 11
                                                      that corresponds to the backup
                                                      method you want. Methods are:
                                                      ◆   0 = Full
                                                      ◆   1 = Copy
                                                      ◆   2 = Differential – changed files
                                                      ◆   3 = Incremental – changed files
                                                      ◆   4 = Daily
                                                      ◆   5 = Working set
                                                      ◆   6 = Incremental – modified time
                                                      ◆   7 = Differential – modified time
                                                      ◆   8 = Full – modified time
                                                      ◆   9 = Archive - Delete files after
                                                          successful copy backup
                                                      ◆   11 = Synthetic full backup
                                                      If 5 is entered as the value, a value
                                                      must also be entered for
                                                      WORKING_SET_DAYS.

              DEVICE_NAME=device name                 Type the name of the device to be used
                                                      for the backup.

              DEVICE_ID=device GUID                   Type the GUID of the device to use for
                                                      the backup.




                                                                                              129
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            OPEN_FILES_METHOD=0 - 3                     Enter a number from 0 through 3 to
                                                                        specify how to back up open files.
                                                                        Selections include:
                                                                        ◆   0 = Never
                                                                        ◆   1 = If closed within a specified
                                                                            number of seconds. If this method
                                                                            is selected, use the flag
                                                                            OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME to set the
                                                                            number of seconds for Backup Exec
                                                                            to wait; otherwise, the value set for
                                                                            default options will be used.
                                                                        ◆   2 = With a lock
                                                                        ◆   3 = Without a lock
                                                                        Note If 1 is entered as the value,
                                                                             Backup Exec will wait the
                                                                             number of seconds specified in
                                                                             OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME for the
                                                                             file to close before continuing
                                                                             the backup. If the files do not
                                                                             close during the specified
                                                                             interval, they are skipped.

                            OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME=#                       Specifies the number of seconds
                                                                        Backup Exec is to wait for a file to close
                                                                        before continuing with the backup.

                            RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to retension the media before
                                                                        backup; otherwise, enter 0.

                            PRESERVE_TREE_ON_ARCHIVE=                   Enter 1 to retain the directory
                            0 or 1                                      structure of the files that were backed
                                                                        up in an archive job on the hard drive;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                            SINGLE_INSTANCE_FOR_NTFS=0 or 1             Enter 1 if single instance store is
                                                                        being used, and you want to ensure
                                                                        that only one instance of a file for
                                                                        NTFS volumes will be backed up
                                                                        regardless of the number of single
                                                                        instance store (SIS) links that point to
                                                                        it. Otherwise, enter 0.




130                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              REMOTE_AGENT_PRIORITY=#                 Select the number of CPU cycles the
                                                      media server will use to maintain
                                                      optimal server performance while
                                                      Remote Agent backups are running.
                                                      The higher the priority, the more the
                                                      protected server’s CPU processing
                                                      power is used during backup
                                                      operations.
                                                      Note Allocating fewer CPU cycles to a
                                                           backup job results in slower
                                                           backup performance.
                                                      This entry contains the following
                                                      options:
                                                      ◆   MEDIUM. Select this option to
                                                          allocate the default number of CPU
                                                          cycles the protected server will use
                                                          during a Remote Agent backup.
                                                      ◆   LOW. Select this option to allocate
                                                          fewer server CPU cycles to the
                                                          backup job.
                                                      ◆   LOWEST. Select this option to
                                                          allocate the fewest number of CPU
                                                          cycles to the backup job.

              SAV_THREATLEVELTRIGGER=0, 2 - 4         Select the ThreatCon level at which
                                                      you want automatic backups to run.
                                                      You can select from the following:
                                                      ◆   0 = Disabled
                                                      ◆   2 = Elevated
                                                      ◆   3 = High
                                                      ◆   4 = Extreme




                                                                                            131
Using job script files

              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            WORKING_SET_DAYS=#                          Note If 5 was entered as the value for
                                                                             the BK_METHOD=# entry, the
                                                                             WORKING_SET_DAYS entry
                                                                             must be completed and included
                                                                             in the Backup Job Script File.
                                                                        Enter the number of days during
                                                                        which files that you want to include in
                                                                        the backup were last accessed. For
                                                                        example, if you want to specify for a
                                                                        working set backup to include all files
                                                                        last accessed within 30 days, type
                                                                        WORKING_SET_DAYS=30.

                            BACKUP_LOCAL_MOUNT_POINTS=                  Enter a value of 1 to back up mount
                            0 or 1                                      points, which direct a file or directory
                                                                        to a local disk or directory path. Using
                                                                        this command allows you to back up
                                                                        data that is linked to local files, but is
                                                                        stored on another device without
                                                                        having to actually select the device.

                            BACKUP_REMOTE_STORAGE_HSM=                  Enter a value of 1 to back up data that
                            0 or 1                                      has been migrated from primary
                                                                        storage to secondary storage. The data
                                                                        will not be recalled to its original
                                                                        location; it will be backed up directly to
                                                                        the backup media.
                                                                        This command should not be used if:
                                                                        ◆   A single device is used for
                                                                            secondary storage and backups and
                                                                            it contains one drive because
                                                                            Remote Storage and Backup Exec
                                                                            will compete for use of the drive.
                                                                        ◆   You want to run a backup of your
                                                                            entire system because Backup Exec
                                                                            attempts to access all data that has
                                                                            been migrated to secondary
                                                                            storage and this may take a
                                                                            considerable amount of time.

              [AOFO]




132                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              USE_OPEN_FILE_OPTION=0 or 1             Enter 1 to enable the Advanced Open
                                                      File Option (AOFO) for the backup job.
                                                      Enter 0 to disable AOFO. If you do not
                                                      enable this option, jobs saved before
                                                      you installed the Advanced Open File
                                                      Option continue to use the previous
                                                      settings for backing up files.

              OPEN_FILE_CONFIGURATION=1-4             Lets you select the open file
                                                      configuration you want to use for the
                                                      Advanced Open File Option.
                                                      You have the following options:
                                                      ◆   1 = Automatically select open file
                                                          technology
                                                      ◆   2 = Symantec Volume Snapshot
                                                          Provider (Windows 2000 only)
                                                          You can only use VSP on computers
                                                          that have Windows 2000/XP 32-bit.
                                                      ◆   3 = Veritas Storage Foundation for
                                                          Windows FlashSnap Option
                                                          (Windows 2000 and 2003 only)
                                                          You can only use Veritas Storage
                                                          Foundation on computers that
                                                          have Windows 2000/2003.
                                                      ◆   4 = Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy
                                                          Service (Windows 2003 and later)
                                                          Allows third-party hardware and
                                                          software vendors to create
                                                          snapshot add-ins for use with
                                                          Microsoft’s technology.
                                                          See your software documentation
                                                          for information about VSS Writers
                                                          that may be provided by the
                                                          application software vendor.
                                                          If you turn off Active Directory,
                                                          Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy
                                                          Service (VSS) is not available. Jobs
                                                          that require VSS fail.




                                                                                             133
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=0-3                       Indicates the snapshot provider to use
                                                                        for jobs.
                                                                        You have the following options:
                                                                        ◆   0 = Automatic - Allow VSS to select
                                                                            the snapshot provider
                                                                            The order in which a snapshot
                                                                            provider is selected is hardware
                                                                            provider, software provider, and
                                                                            then the system provider.
                                                                        ◆   1 = System - Use Microsoft
                                                                            Software Shadow Copy Provider
                                                                        ◆   2 = Software - Use Veritas Storage
                                                                            Foundation for Windows
                                                                        ◆   3 = Hardware - Use technology
                                                                            provided by hardware
                                                                            manufacturer
                                                                        If you select Software or Hardware,
                                                                        then the following information
                                                                        applies:
                                                                        ◆   If multiple volumes are selected,
                                                                            then all volumes must be
                                                                            snappable by the same type of
                                                                            provider.
                                                                        ◆   Software and hardware providers
                                                                            cannot both be used to snap
                                                                            different volumes in the same job.
                                                                            You must either create another job,
                                                                            or select the option Process logical
                                                                            volumes for backup one at a time.




134                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_SNAPSHOT=0 or Enables the backup of multiple
              1                               volumes in one job, while creating a
                                              snapshot of only one logical volume at
                                              a time. To ensure database integrity, or
                                              if a volume contains mount points,
                                              multiple volumes may need to be
                                              snapped at one time. A volume with
                                              mount points to other volumes is
                                              considered a logical volume for
                                              snapshot purposes. Therefore, that
                                              volume and the mount point volumes
                                              will be snapped together
                                              simultaneously.
                                                      If this option is not selected, then a
                                                      snapshot for all volumes in the backup
                                                      job is created simultaneously. All
                                                      volumes must meet the minimum
                                                      quiet time.
                                                      This option is only available for
                                                      Symantec Volume Snapshot Provider
                                                      (VSP) and Microsoft Volume Shadow
                                                      Copy Service (VSS) jobs for logical
                                                      volumes.

[Exchange]

              EXCHANGE_METHOD=0 - 3                   If you are backing up an Exchange
                                                      server, use this entry. Enter a number
                                                      from 0 through 3 that corresponds to
                                                      the backup method you want for the
                                                      Exchange database. Methods are:
                                                      ◆   0 = Backup All
                                                      ◆   1 = Backup Copy
                                                      ◆   2 = Backup Log Differential
                                                      ◆   3 = Backup Log Incremental

              EXCHANGE_ENABLE_GRANULAR_               Enter 1 to enable the restore of
              RESTORE=0 or 1                          individual documents from database
                                                      backups. This option is only available
                                                      when performing full backups;
                                                      otherwise enter 0.




                                                                                             135
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            EXCHANGE_CONTINUOUS_                        Enter 1 to enable continuous backup of
                            PROTECTION=0 or 1                           Exchange transaction logs with
                                                                        Backup Exec Continuous Protection
                                                                        Server; otherwise, enter 0.

                            EXCHANGE_MBOX_METHOD=0 - 3                  If you are backing up an Exchange
                                                                        server, use this entry. Enter a number
                                                                        from 0 through 3 that corresponds to
                                                                        the backup method you want for the
                                                                        Exchange database. Methods are:
                                                                        ◆   0 = Full - Back up messages. Reset
                                                                            archive bit.
                                                                        ◆   1 = Copy - Back up messages.
                                                                        ◆   2 = Differential - Back up changed
                                                                            messages.
                                                                        ◆   3 = Incremental - Back up changed
                                                                            messages. Reset archive bit.

                            EXCHANGE_SINGLE_INSTANCE=0 or 1             Enter 1 to back up only a single copy of
                                                                        all identical message attachments;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                            EXCHANGE_CONSISTENCY_                       Enter 1 to perform a consistency check
                            CHECK=0 or 1                                and determine if possible data
                                                                        corruption exists when using the
                                                                        Backup Exec - Advanced Disk-based
                                                                        Backup Option (ADBO) or the
                                                                        Advanced Open File Option (AOFO);
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                            EXCHANGE_CONTINUE=0 or 1                    Enter 1 to continue the backup job
                                                                        even if the consistency check fails;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                            EXCHANGE_RECOVERY_POINTS_                   Enter the interval in days, hours, or
                            INTERVAL=xD (days) or xH (hours)            minutes for making recovery points
                            or xM (minutes)                             when continuously backing up
                                                                        Exchange transaction logs with
                                                                        Backup Exec Continuous Protection
                                                                        Server.




136                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

[SharePoint Portal Server]

              SPPS2_METHOD=0 or 3                     If you are backing up a SharePoint
                                                      Portal Server. Enter a number 0 or 3
                                                      that corresponds to the backup
                                                      method you want for the SharePoint
                                                      Portal Server.
                                                      ◆   0 = Full - Back up entire database.
                                                      ◆   3 = Differential - Back up database
                                                          changes only. Select this to back up
                                                          only the changes made to the
                                                          database since the last full backup.
                                                      Note The differential backup method
                                                           cannot be used to back up Index
                                                           databases or Document
                                                           Libraries. The Full backup
                                                           method will be used to back up
                                                           these resources.

              SPPS2_ENABLE_GRANULAR_RESTORE=0 Enter 1 to enable the restore of
              or 1                            individual documents from database
                                              backups. This option is only available
                                              when performing full backups;
                                              otherwise, enter 0.

              SPPS2_PRE_DBCC=0 or 1                   Enter 1 to run a full consistency check
                                                      (including indexes) of the Microsoft
                                                      SQL databases used by Microsoft
                                                      SharePoint before backing up the
                                                      databases; otherwise, enter 0.

              SPPS2_CONT_ON_CC_FAILURE=0 or 1         Enter 1 to continue with the backup
                                                      operation even if the consistency
                                                      check fails; otherwise, enter 0.

              SPPS2_RELEASE_LOCK= 0 or 1              Enter 1 to release the lock on the
                                                      SharePoint farm topology before
                                                      backing up data; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                             137
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            SPPS3_FARMx=Farm name                       Change x to the lowest number that is
                                                                        not already used, and specify the name
                                                                        of the Microsoft SharePoint 2007
                                                                        Portal 2 server farm that you want to
                                                                        back up. You should start with the
                                                                        number 1 and continue sequentially.

                            SPPS3_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Required. Specifies the Web server
                                                             name that belongs to the server farm.

                            SPPS3_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to include the Configuration
                                                                        database in the backup; otherwise,
                                                                        enter 0.

                            SPPS3_SSOx=0 or 1                           Enter 1 to include the Single Sign-on
                                                                        database in the backup; otherwise,
                                                                        enter 0.

                            SPPS3_CAx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include the central
                                                                        administration site in the backup;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                            SPPS3_WAxNAMEy=Web application              Specify the name of the Web
                            name                                        application. You can list multiple
                                                                        names.

                            SPPS3_SSPxNAMEy=Shared service              Specify the name of the shared server
                            provider name                               provider. You can list multiple names.

                            SPPS3_SIx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include the shared instance
                                                                        in the backup; otherwise, enter 0.

                            SPPS3_GSx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include the global settings
                                                                        in the backup; otherwise enter 0.




138                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                  Description

[SQL Server]

               SQL_METHOD=0 - 3                       If you are backing up a SQL server, use
                                                      this entry. Enter a number from 0
                                                      through 2 that corresponds to the
                                                      backup method you want for the SQL
                                                      database. Methods are:
                                                      ◆   0 = Backup All
                                                      ◆   1 = Backup Log
                                                      ◆   2 = Backup Log No Truncate
                                                      ◆   3 = Differential

[Lotus Domino Server]

               LOTUS_DOMINO_METHOD=0 - 3              If you are backing up a Lotus Domino
                                                      server, use this entry. Enter a number
                                                      from 0 through 2 that corresponds to
                                                      the backup method you want for the
                                                      Lotus Domino database. Methods are:
                                                      ◆   0 = Full
                                                      ◆   1 = Differential
                                                      ◆   2 = Incremental

               LOTUS_DOMINO_RECYCLE_LOGS=             If you are backing up a Lotus Domino
               0 or 1                                 server, use this entry to indicate that
                                                      the Lotus Domino server will reuse the
                                                      transaction log after it has been
                                                      backed up.
                                                      ◆   1 = Recycle logs
                                                      ◆   0 = Do not recycle logs

               NW_BK_MIGRATED=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to back up migrated NetWare
                                                      SMS files; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                      This switch can only be used with
                                                      versions prior to Backup Exec 10.x.




                                                                                               139
Using job script files

              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            NW_BK_DECOMPRESS_FILES=                     If you are backing up NetWare shares
                            0 or 1                                      or volumes, include this entry in the
                                                                        Backup Job Script File. If you want to
                                                                        back up compressed files in
                                                                        decompressed form, enter 1 as the
                                                                        value; otherwise, enter 0.

                            OVERWRITE_JOB=0 or 1                        Enter 1 as the value if you want
                                                                        Backup Exec to overwrite a duplicate
                                                                        job if one exists; otherwise, enter 0.

                            CONTINUE_ON_DBCC=0 or 1                     Enter 1 if you are backing up a SQL
                                                                        server, have specified that a database
                                                                        consistency check is to be performed
                                                                        before the backup, and want the job to
                                                                        continue if the pre-backup database
                                                                        consistency check failed.

                            PRE_BK_DBCC=0 - 3                           If you are backing up a SQL server,
                                                                        include this entry. Enter a value from 0
                                                                        to 3 that corresponds to an option for
                                                                        performing a pre-backup database
                                                                        consistency check. Options are:
                                                                        ◆   0 = None
                                                                        ◆   1 = No Index
                                                                        ◆   2 = Full
                                                                        ◆   3 = Physical only

                            POST_BK_DBCC=0 or 3                         If you are backing up a SQL server
                                                                        include this entry. Enter a value from 0
                                                                        to 3 that corresponds to an option for
                                                                        performing a post-backup database
                                                                        consistency check. Options are:
                                                                        ◆   0 = None
                                                                        ◆   1 = No Index
                                                                        ◆   2 = Full
                                                                        ◆   3 = Physical only




140                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

[SQL log]

              SQL_STANDBY_OPTION=0 or 1               Select the Standby value to put the
                                                      database in standby mode when the
                                                      job log backup completes. Select the
                                                      No Recover value to put the database
                                                      in a loading state when the job log
                                                      backup completes. Users cannot
                                                      connect to or query the database while
                                                      it is in a loading state. Values are:
                                                      ◆   0 = Standby
                                                      ◆   1 = No Recover

[Offhost provider]

              OFFHOST_PROVIDER=0 or 3                 Enter a value from 0 to 3 that
                                                      corresponds to the snapshot provider
                                                      options for an offhost backup jobs.
                                                      Options are:
                                                      ◆   0 = Disable offhost backup
                                                      ◆   1 = Automatic – Use hardware if
                                                          available
                                                      ◆   2 = Software – Use VERITAS
                                                          Storage Foundation for Windows
                                                      ◆   3 = Hardware – Use technology
                                                          provided by hardware
                                                          manufacturer

              OFFHOST_DISPOSITION=0 or 1              Enter 1 to allow the backup job to
                                                      complete even if any of the volumes
                                                      selected do not support offhost
                                                      backup; otherwise, to fail the backup
                                                      job, enter 0.

              OFFHOST_SINGLESNAP=0 or 1               Enter 1 to process logical volumes for
                                                      offhost backup one at a time;
                                                      otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                              141
Using job script files

              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            USE_OPEN_FILE_OPTION=0 or 1                 Enter 1 as the value if you want to use
                                                                        the Advanced Open File Option if
                                                                        available; otherwise, enter 0. If
                                                                        Advanced OFO is unavailable, the
                                                                        OPEN_FILES_METHOD specified will
                                                                        be used.

                            OPEN_FILE_CONFIGURATION=1-4                 Enter a number from 1 through 4 to
                                                                        specify the open file technology to
                                                                        back up open files. Selections include:
                                                                        ◆   1 = Automatically select open file
                                                                            technology
                                                                        ◆   2 = Use Microsoft Volume Shadow
                                                                            Copy Service
                                                                        ◆   3 = Use VERITAS Volume Snapshot
                                                                            Provider
                                                                        ◆   4 = Use VERITAS Storage
                                                                            Foundation for Windows
                                                                            FlashSnap Option

                            SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=0-3                       Enter a number from 0 through 3 to
                                                                        specify the best provider for the
                                                                        selected volume. Selections include:
                                                                        ◆   0 = Automatic - Allows VSS to
                                                                            select the snapshot provider
                                                                        ◆   1 = System - Use Microsoft
                                                                            software shadow copy provider
                                                                        ◆   2 = Software - Use VERITAS
                                                                            Storage Foundation for Windows
                                                                        ◆   3 = Use technology provided by
                                                                            hardware manufacturer

                            USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_SNAPSHOT=0 or Enter 1 if you want to process logical
                            1                               volumes for backup one at a time;
                                                            otherwise, enter 0.

              [Data Encryption Setting]

                            ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name                Specify a name for the encryption key.




142                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3                   Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                      corresponds with the type of
                                                      encryption to use.
                                                      The following options are available:
                                                      ◆   0 = None
                                                      ◆   1 = Software
                                                      ◆   2 = Hardware
                                                      ◆   3 = Hardware if available,
                                                          otherwise software
                                                      If 2 or 3 are entered, the default
                                                      encryption key must be 256-bit
                                                      encryption.

[Media Options]

              MEDIA_SET=Media Set Name                Enter the name of the media set to be
                                                      used for the backup.

              MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media Password           If the media has a password, specify
                                                      the password.

              APPEND=0 or 1                           To append the job to the media set
                                                      specified in the MEDIA_SET entry or
                                                      overwrite if no appendable media is
                                                      available, enter 1 as the value.
                                                      If you want the job to overwrite the
                                                      media set specified in the MEDIA_SET
                                                      entry, enter 0 as the value.
                                                      If you do not enter a value, by default
                                                      the job will be an overwrite job.

              APPEND_NO_OVERWRITE=0 or 1              If you want the job to either append to
                                                      the media set specified in the
                                                      MEDIA_SET entry, or if no appendable
                                                      media is available then to terminate,
                                                      enter 1. To have the job append to the
                                                      media set, or overwrite if no
                                                      appendable media is available, enter 0.




                                                                                             143
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            VERIFY=0 or 1                               Enter 1 as the value to have Backup
                                                                        Exec automatically perform a verify
                                                                        operation to make sure the media can
                                                                        be read once the backup has been
                                                                        completed; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                        Verifying all backups is recommended.

                            COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 - 3                      Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                                        corresponds with the type of
                                                                        compression to use. Options include:
                                                                        ◆   0 = Hardware compression
                                                                        ◆   1 = Software compression
                                                                        ◆   2 = Hardware if available,
                                                                            otherwise software
                                                                        ◆   3 = None
                                                                        Note To use the default Backup Exec
                                                                             compression type, do not
                                                                             include this entry in the script.

                            CHECKSUM=0 or 1                             Enter 1 as the value if checksums are
                                                                        to be calculated for each data stream
                                                                        written to tape, and then written in a
                                                                        separate stream immediately following
                                                                        the data stream. If 0 is entered as the
                                                                        value, backup performance may be
                                                                        improved, but there will be no way to
                                                                        verify the integrity of the data on the
                                                                        tape.

                            EJECT_MEDIA=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to eject the media when the job
                                                                        completes; otherwise, enter 0.

                            WORM_MEDIA=0 or 1                           Enter 1 to use write once, read many
                                                                        (WORM) media for this backup job;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

              [Miscellaneous]

                            PRE_JOB_COMMAND=command                     Specify a .exe or batch file command
                                                                        that is to run on the media server
                                                                        before the backup operation starts.




144                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              POST_JOB_COMMAND=command                Specify a .exe or batch file command
                                                      that is to run after the backup
                                                      operation completes.

              COMMAND_RUN_POST_IF_                    Enter 1 to execute the post-job
              PRE_SUCCESS=0 or 1                      command only if the pre-job command
                                                      is successful; otherwise, enter 0.

              COMMAND_RUN_JOB_IF_PRE_SUCCESS=         Enter 1 to execute the job only if the
              0 or 1                                  pre-job command is successful;
                                                      otherwise, enter 0.

              COMMAND_RUN_POST_                       Enter 1 to execute the post-job
              IF_JOB_FAILS=0 or 1                     command even if the job fails;
                                                      otherwise, enter 0.

              COMMAND_FAIL_JOB_IF_FAILS=              Enter 1 to allow the pre- and post-job
              0 or 1                                  commands to be successful only if
                                                      completed with a return code of zero.
                                                      Otherwise, enter 0.
                                                      An return code of zero returned to the
                                                      operating system by the pre- or
                                                      post-job command is interpreted by
                                                      Backup Exec to mean the job
                                                      completed successfully. A non-zero
                                                      return code is interpreted by Backup
                                                      Exec to mean the job ended with an
                                                      error.
                                                      After checking the return codes,
                                                      Backup Exec continues processing
                                                      according to selections you made for
                                                      running the pre- and post-job
                                                      commands.
                                                      If you enter 0, the success of the pre-
                                                      and post-job commands is not
                                                      determined based on the return code.

              COMMAND_AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#              Enter the number of minutes Backup
                                                      Exec should wait before cancelling a
                                                      command that did not complete.




                                                                                               145
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            COMMAND_RUN_OPTION=0 or 1                   Enter 0 to run the command on this
                                                                        media server or 1 to run the command
                                                                        on each server being backed up.

                            USE_JOB_DEFAULTS=0 or 1                     Enter 1 to use the job defaults from the
                                                                        Backup Exec Administration Console
                                                                        for this job. All other options will be
                                                                        overwritten. Enter 0 if you do not want
                                                                        to use the job defaults.

                            PRINT_LOG_FILE=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to include the job log with a
                                                                        notification to an email or printer
                                                                        recipient; otherwise, enter 0.

                            NIC_ENABLED=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to use the MAC address
                                                                        specified with the NIC_ADDRESS
                                                                        entry, or the name specified with the
                                                                        NIC_NAME entry.
                                                                        Enter 0 to clear previous settings for
                                                                        the network interface, and to use any
                                                                        available network adapter.
                                                                        “Operations for displaying network
                                                                        interface information” on page 85

                            NIC_ADDRESS=00-00-00-00-00-00               Enter the Media Access Control (MAC)
                                                                        address for the network interface you
                                                                        selected.
                                                                        To use this setting, NIC_ENABLED
                                                                        must be set to 1.

                            NIC_NAME=name                               Type the name of a network interface
                                                                        card when NIC_ENABLED=1.

                            NIC_PROTOCOL=0 - 2                          Enter 0 to use any available Internet
                                                                        Protocol. Enter 1 to use IPv4. Enter 2
                                                                        to use IPv6.
                                                                        “Operations for displaying network
                                                                        interface information” on page 85

                            NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=0 or 1                   Enter 0 to use any available subnet
                                                                        prefix. Enter 1 to use a specific subnet
                                                                        prefix.



146                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              NIC_SUBNET=00.000.00.000                Specify a subnet prefix when
                                                      NIC_ENABLED=1 and
                                                      NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=1.

              NIC_ANY_AVAILABLE=0 or 1                Enter 1 to use any available network
                                                      interface card. Enter 0 to use only the
                                                      network interface card that you
                                                      specify.

[Schedule]

Note You must enter values when you select to use either SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL,
     SCHED_DAYSOF MNTH, SCHED_DAYSOF WEEK, or DATE before the job is created.

              SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY              Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                      format, that the schedule becomes
                                                      effective.

              SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                      format for this job.

              SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                  Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                      in HH:MM:SS format.

              SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS         Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                      format for the job to restart on each
                                                      run day. For example, if you have set
                                                      up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                      can also set it up to run every four
                                                      hours on its run day by entering
                                                      SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                      0.

              SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X                 Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                      job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                      the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                      SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

              SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                 Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                      format, from which the interval is
                                                      calculated.




                                                                                            147
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                         Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                        the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                        string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                        32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                        example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                        15th of the month, type:
                                                                           SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

                            SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                          Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                                        slash, and the week of the month you
                                                                        want the job to run in a comma
                                                                        delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                                        for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                                        Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                                        For the week of the month, values can
                                                                        be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                                        week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                                        fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                                        For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                                        for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                                        type:
                                                                         SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY               Enter a specific date when the job
                                                                        should run. For this field, x is a
                                                                        number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                                        to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                                        to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                                        August, type:
                                                                        SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                        SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

                            SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY               Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                                        when the job should not run. For this
                                                                        field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                                        allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                                        For example, to prevent the job from
                                                                        running on the first and 25th of
                                                                        August, type:
                                                                        SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                        SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002



148                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                         Enter the start date for the job in
                                                      MM/DD/YYYY format.

              TIME=hh:mm:ss                           Enter the start time for the job in
                                                      hh:mm:ss format.
                                                      Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                           must be separated by colons.

              RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                    Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run
                                                      immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                      Note This entry should be used only if
                                                           no other entries are specified
                                                           under the schedule section. If no
                                                           other scheduling options have
                                                           been selected and this entry is
                                                           not set, the default value is 1.

              AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                      Enter the number of minutes after
                                                      which the job is cancelled if it is not
                                                      completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                      the job when the job is queued, not
                                                      when the job begins.

              HOLD=0 or 1                             Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                      schedule the job on hold; otherwise,
                                                      enter 0.

              DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3                  Enter a number from 0 to 2 that
                                                      corresponds to job deletion. Options
                                                      include:
                                                      ◆   0 = Do not delete the job
                                                      ◆   1 = Delete the job after the job
                                                          completes
                                                      ◆   2 = Delete the job if the job
                                                          successfully completes

[Machine]

              MACHINEx=machine name|logon GUID Specify the logon account used to log
                                               on to remote machines and back up
                                               remote data and databases.




                                                                                                149
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                      Description

              [Selections]

                             PATHx=string                               Specify which files or directories get
                                                                        backed up. For example,
                                                                        PATH1=Myserver1Myshare1Mydir
                                                                        1*.*
                                                                        or
                                                                        PATH2=Myserver2Myshare2Mydir
                                                                        2*.*
                                                                        Selections that end with a backslash
                                                                        indicate the selection is a directory.
                                                                        Selections that do no end with a
                                                                        backslash indicate the selection is a
                                                                        file. For example,
                                                                        PATH1=c:example (indicates that
                                                                        example is the name of a file on drive
                                                                        C.
                                                                        PATH2=c:example (indicates that
                                                                        example is a directory on drive C.
                                                                        The order in which resource selections
                                                                        are specified is the order in which the
                                                                        resources will be backed up.
                                                                        To back up System State, use the string
                                                                        server nameSystem?State*.*
                                                                        Note To back up Shadow Copy
                                                                             Components on a Windows 2003
                                                                             computer, type
                                                                             "server nameShadow?Copy
                                                                             ?Components*.*" after -s.
                                                                        To use a separate logon account for
                                                                        backup selections, type a comma after
                                                                        PATHx=string. Then, type the logon
                                                                        account that you want to use for that
                                                                        selection.

                             INCLUDEx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include this item in the
                                                                        backup job; otherwise, enter 0.

                             SUBDIRSx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include all subdirectories;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.




150                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              UNIXx=x                                 Change x to the number that
                                                      corresponds to the path that contains
                                                      the Unix files or directories to be
                                                      backed up. Enter a 1 if it is a Unix
                                                      selection.

              EV_SERVERx=Enterprise Vault             Change x to a unique number and
              server name                             specify the name of the Enterprise
                                                      Vault Server to back up.

              EV_PREFIXx=Enterprise Vault             Change x to the unique number that
              selection prefix                        corresponds to the Enterprise Vault
                                                      Server that you want to back up. Then
                                                      specify the Enterprise Vault selection
                                                      prefix.

              EV_DIRECTORYx=Enterprise Vault          Change x to the unique number that
              directory                               corresponds to the Enterprise Vault
                                                      Server that you want to back up. Then
                                                      specify the directory that contains the
                                                      file that you want to back up.

              EV_FILEx=Enterprise Vault file          Change x to the unique number that
                                                      corresponds to the Enterprise Vault
                                                      server that you want to back up. Then
                                                      specify the file that you want to back
                                                      up.
                                                      You can back up the following:
                                                      ◆   Enterprise Vault sites
                                                      ◆   Audit databases
                                                      ◆   FSA Reporting databases
                                                      ◆   Directory databases
                                                      ◆   Monitoring databases

              EXCHANGEx=Exchange Server name          Change x to a unique number and
                                                      specify the name of the Exchange
                                                      Server to back up.




                                                                                           151
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            EXCH2ROOT?=Exchange Server name             Specifies the name of the Exchange
                                                                        server that contains this selection.
                                                                        Change ? to a number that
                                                                        corresponds to the number of the
                                                                        selection. The selections must be in a
                                                                        sequential order. Increase the number
                                                                        by one for each new selection. For
                                                                        example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                                        the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                                        the selections are out of sequence,
                                                                        they are not processed.
                                                                        Each selection must specify at least
                                                                        the server name and the storage group.
                                                                        See the example in
                                                                        “EXCH2DB?=Exchange Server
                                                                        database name.”

                            EXCH2SG?=Exchange Server storage Specifies the name of the Exchange
                            group name                       Server storage group that you want to
                                                             back up, or that contains the database
                                                             you want to back up.
                                                                        Change ? to the same number used to
                                                                        identify the selection for the Exchange
                                                                        Server.
                                                                        See the example in
                                                                        “EXCH2DB?=Exchange Server
                                                                        database name.”




152                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              EXCH2DB?=Exchange Server                Specifies the name of the Exchange
              database name                           Server database you want to back up.
                                                      Change ? to the same number used to
                                                      identify the selection for the Exchange
                                                      Server and storage group.
                                                      In the following example,
                                                      SERVER_NAME is an Exchange server
                                                      name, and it is the same server in all of
                                                      the selections. The first selection
                                                      backs up the First Storage Group, the
                                                      second selection backs up the Mailbox
                                                      database in the Second Storage Group,
                                                      and the third selection backs up the
                                                      Users database in the Second Storage
                                                      Group.
                                                      EXCH2ROOT1=SERVER_NAME
                                                      EXCH2SG1=First Storage Group


                                                      EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME
                                                      EXCH2SG2=Second Storage Group
                                                      EXCH2DB2=Mailboxes


                                                      EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME
                                                      EXCH2SG3=Second Storage Group
                                                      EXCHDB3=Users

              EXCH2010_SERVERx=Exchange 2010          Specifies the name of the Exchange
              Server name                             2010 server you want to back up.
                                                      Change x to a unique number to
                                                      identify the Exchange 2010 server.
                                                      To back up an Exchange 2010 server,
                                                      you should use either
                                                      EXCH2010_SERVER or
                                                      EXCH2010_DAG, but not both.




                                                                                             153
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            EXCH2010_DAGx=Exchange 2010      Specifies the name of the Exchange
                            Database Availability Group name 2010 Database Availability Group
                                                             (DAG) you want to back up.
                                                                        Change x to a unique number to
                                                                        identify the DAG.
                                                                        To back up an Exchange 2010 Server,
                                                                        you should use either
                                                                        EXCH2010_SERVER or
                                                                        EXCH2010_DAG, but not both.

                            EXCH2010_DBx=Exchange 2010                  Specifies the name of the Exchange
                            database name                               2010 database that you want to back
                                                                        up. It refers to the Exchange 2010
                                                                        server or Database Availability Group
                                                                        (DAG) that you want to back up.
                                                                        Change x to the unique number that
                                                                        corresponds to the Exchange 2010
                                                                        server or DAG that you want to back
                                                                        up.
                                                                        EXCH2010_DB is required for
                                                                        Exchange 2010 backups.

                            SQL2S? =SERVER_NAME                         Specifies the name of the SQL server
                                                                        that contains this selection.
                                                                        Change ? to a number that
                                                                        corresponds to the number of the
                                                                        selection. The selections must be in a
                                                                        sequential order. Increase the number
                                                                        by one for each new selection. For
                                                                        example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                                        the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                                        the selections are out of sequence,
                                                                        they are not processed. See the
                                                                        example in “SQL2NI?=SQL server
                                                                        named instance name.”

                            SQL2DB?=SQL server database name Specifies the name of the SQL server
                                                             database to back up. Type *.* to back up
                                                             all the databases. Change ? to a
                                                             number that corresponds to the
                                                             number of the selection.




154                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              SQL2NI?=SQL server named instance Specifies the named instance on the
              name                              SQL server to back up.
                                                      Change ? to the same number used to
                                                      identify the selection for the SQL
                                                      server. For example, to back up the
                                                      named instance ONE, the named
                                                      instance TWO, and the SQL server
                                                      itself, the entries would be:
                                                      SQL2S1=SERVER_NAME
                                                      SQL2NI1=ONE


                                                      SQL2S2=SERVER_NAME
                                                      SQL2NI2=TWO


                                                      SQL2S3=SERVER_NAME

              LNSERVER?=SERVER_NAME                   Specifies the name of the Lotus Notes
                                                      server that contains this selection.
                                                      Change ? to a number that
                                                      corresponds to the number of the
                                                      selection. The selections must be in a
                                                      sequential order. Increase the number
                                                      by one for each new selection. For
                                                      example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                      the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                      the selections are out of sequence,
                                                      they are not processed. See the
                                                      example in “LNDRIVE?=Drive
                                                      letter.”




                                                                                            155
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            LNDRIVE?=Drive letter                       Change ? to the same number used to
                                                                        identify the selection for the Lotus
                                                                        Notes server.
                                                                        In the following example,
                                                                        SERVER_NAME is a Lotus Notes server
                                                                        name, and it is the same server in all of
                                                                        the selections. To back up the D drive
                                                                        and the E drive on the Lotus Notes
                                                                        server SERVER_NAME, the entries
                                                                        would be:
                                                                        LNSERVER1=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        LNDRIVE1=D


                                                                        LNSERVER2=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        LNDRIVE2=E

                            ORCLSRV?=SERVER_NAME                        Specifies the name of the Oracle server
                                                                        that contains this selection.
                                                                        Change ? to a number that
                                                                        corresponds to the number of the
                                                                        selection. The selections must be in a
                                                                        sequential order. Increase the number
                                                                        by one for each new selection. For
                                                                        example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                                        the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                                        the selections are out of sequence,
                                                                        they are not processed. See the
                                                                        example name in “ORCLSID?=System
                                                                        identifier for database.”




156                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              ORCLSID?=System identifier for          Specifies the SID (System Identifier)
              database                                for the Oracle database to back up.
                                                      Change ? to the same number used to
                                                      identify the selection for the Oracle
                                                      server.
                                                      In the following example,
                                                      SERVER_NAME is an Oracle server
                                                      name, and it is the same server in all of
                                                      the selections. To back up the
                                                      databases SID1 and SID2 on the Oracle
                                                      server, the entries would be:
                                                      ORCLSRV1=SERVER_NAME
                                                      ORCLSID1=SID1


                                                      ORCLSRV2=SERVER_NAME
                                                      ORCLSID2=SID2

              SPPS2_FARMx=farm name                   Change x to the lowest number that is
                                                      not already used, and specify the name
                                                      of the Microsoft SharePoint 2003
                                                      Portal server farm that you want to
                                                      back up. For example,
                                                      SPPS2_FARM1=farm name. You
                                                      should start with number 1 and
                                                      continue sequentially.
                                                      The order in which the farm names are
                                                      specified is the order in which the
                                                      farms will be backed up.

              SPPS2_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Specify the name of a Web server
                                               that belongs to the farm.
                                                      Note This item is not required if the
                                                           farm name is specified.

              SPPS2_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to include the Configuration
                                                      database in the backup job; otherwise,
                                                      enter 0 or leave it blank.

              SPPS2_SSOx=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to include the Single sign-on
                                                      database in the backup job; otherwise,
                                                      enter 0 or leave it blank.



                                                                                              157
Using job script files

              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            SPPS2_DLSx=0 or 1                           Enter 1 to include the Document
                                                                        Library store in the backup job;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0 or leave it blank.

                            SPPS2_PORTALxNAMEy=portal site              Specify the name of the portal site
                            name                                        belongs to the farm. Since each farm
                                                                        may have more than one portal, you
                                                                        must use the same format that you
                                                                        specify for SPPS2_FARMx.
                                                                        For example:
                                                                        SPPS2_FARM1=farm name
                                                                        SPP2_PORTAL1NAME1=portal1
                                                                        SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal2

                            SPPS2_TEAM_SITExNAMEy=Windows               Specify the name of the Windows
                            SharePoint services site name               SharePoint services site that
                                                                        belongs to the farm. Since each farm
                                                                        may have more than one Windows
                                                                        SharePoint services site, you must
                                                                        use the same format that you specify
                                                                        for SPPS2_FARMx.
                                                                        For example:
                                                                        SPPS2_FARM1=farm name
                                                                        SPP2_TEAM_SITE1NAME1=team
                                                                        site1
                                                                        SPP2_TEAM_SITE1NAME2=team
                                                                        site2

                            SPPS2_DOC_SITExNAMEy=document               Specify the name of the backward
                            libary                                      compatible document library that
                                                                        belongs to the farm. Since each farm
                                                                        may have more than one document
                                                                        library, you must use the same format
                                                                        that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx.
                                                                        For example:
                                                                        SPPS2_FARM1=farm name
                                                                        SPP2_DOC_SITE1NAME1=document
                                                                        libary1
                                                                        SPP2_DOC_SITE1NAME2=document
                                                                        library2



158                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              APATHx=String                           Specify which files or directories are
                                                      backed up and aliased when running
                                                      an alias backup. The order in which
                                                      resource selections are specified is the
                                                      order in which the resources will be
                                                      backed up.
                                                      Change x to a unique number for each
                                                      device aliasing backup selection.
                                                      An alias backup allows you to specify a
                                                      share to back up, and then specify
                                                      another share from which the backup
                                                      will appear to have originated. This
                                                      type of backup is useful when the
                                                      location of the data to be backed up is
                                                      temporary. For example, a share may
                                                      be cloned and placed on another
                                                      device while it is backed up in order to
                                                      off-load traffic from a busy device. If a
                                                      temporary share is backed up, the
                                                      restore path for the share may not
                                                      exist if a restore becomes necessary.
                                                      Instead, you can specify an alias to a
                                                      location where you want the share to
                                                      appear to have been backed up from.
                                                      For example:
                                                      APATH1=MachineAC$*.*
                                                      AINCLUDE1=1
                                                      ASUBDIRS1=1
                                                      AALIAS1=MachineBD$
                                                      indicates that MachineAC$*.* and
                                                      all its subdirectories should be backed
                                                      up and aliased as MachineBD$.
                                                      Alias jobs support both UNC and local
                                                      devices. However, both the target and
                                                      the source must be the same, either
                                                      both UNC or both local devices. You
                                                      cannot mix them.
                                                      Note The schedule option
                                                           RUN_IMMEDIATE=1 must be
                                                           included or the alias selection
                                                           will be ignored.



                                                                                             159
Using job script files


              Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                       Description

                            AINCLUDEx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include this item in the
                                                                        backup job when running an alias
                                                                        backup; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                        Change x to a unique number for each
                                                                        alias backup selection.

                            ASUBDIRSx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include all subdirectories
                                                                        when running an alias backup;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                        Change x to a unique number for each
                                                                        device aliasing backup selection.

                            AALIASx=String                              Specify the share from which the
                                                                        backup will appear to have originated,
                                                                        when running an alias backup.
                                                                        Change x to a unique number for each
                                                                        device aliasing backup selection.
                                                                        For example:
                                                                        AALIAS1=MachineBD$
                                                                        See also the example for
                                                                        APATHx=String

              [Media_server]

                            PREFERRED_SERVER_NAME=Media                 This operation is only available if the
                            server name                                 Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                                                        installed.
                                                                        Specify the preferred media server on
                                                                        which backup jobs run.

                            PREFERRED_SERVER=Media server               This operation is only available if the
                            GUID                                        Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                                                        installed.
                                                                        Specify the GUID for the preferred
                                                                        media server on which backup jobs
                                                                        run.




160                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible backup job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                   Description

              MEDIA_SERVER_POOL_NAME=Media            This operation is only available if the
              server pool name                        Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                                      installed.
                                                      Specify the media server pool to use
                                                      for the backup job.

              MEDIA_SERVER_POOL=Media server          This operation is only available if the
              pool GUID                               Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                                      installed.
                                                      Specify the media server pool to use
                                                      for the backup job.




                                                                                             161
Using job script files


         Creating a restore job script file
              Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a restore job script file that contains entries
              for the restore job options. The restore job script file has similar entries, or values, as
              those used in the backup job script file. Sections of a Restore Job Script include:
              ■    [General]
              ■    [Restore_Options]
              ■    [Selections]
              ■    [Schedule]
              Each entry included in the restore job script file must be typed in capital letters and
              immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
              follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
              itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Restore and
              the job type is restore, the script file would appear as:
                   [General]
                   JOB_TYPE=Restore
                   JOB_NAME=Workstation Restore
              All possible entries for a restore job script file are described in the following table. When
              creating a script file, do not include all entries

              Note The Job History GUID is required for bemcmd -o90 restores. To obtain the Job
                   History GUID, first use -o23 and /or -o506 to obtain the Job Instance GUID. Then
                   use the Job Instance GUID with -o21 to obtain the Job History GUID.


              Possible restore job script file entries

              Section        Entry                                    Description

              [General]

                             JOB_TYPE=Job type                        This field must be completed with a
                                                                      value of Restore.

                             JOB_NAME=Job name                        Type the name of the restore job.

                             SERVER=Server name                       Type the name of the media server
                                                                      where the operation is to be
                                                                      performed. If a server is not specified,
                                                                      the local server is used by default.




162                                                      Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               USERNAME=User name                      Type the user name for logging into
                                                       the system being restored. If a user
                                                       name is not specified, the current user
                                                       name is used.

               PASSWORD=Password                       Type the password for logging into the
                                                       system being restored. If a password is
                                                       not specified, the current password is
                                                       used.

               JOB_PRIORITY=Priority                   Enter the priority for the job. If
                                                       another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                       same time as this job, the priority set
                                                       determines which job runs first.
                                                       If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                       will be Medium. Options are:
                                                       ◆   Lowest
                                                       ◆   Low
                                                       ◆   Medium
                                                       ◆   High
                                                       ◆   Highest

[Restore Options]

               RESTORE_CORRUPT_FILES=0 or 1            Enter 1 if you do not want Backup Exec
                                                       to automatically exclude corrupt files
                                                       from the restore process; otherwise,
                                                       enter 0.

               RESTORE_EXISTING=0, 1, or 3             Enter a number to specify how Backup
                                                       Exec should treat existing files:
                                                       0 = Skip if file exists
                                                       1 = Restore over existing
                                                       3 = Skip if existing file is more recent




                                                                                              163
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             RESTORE_SECURITY=0 - 2                       Enter a number from 0 through 2 to
                                                                          specify the security information:
                                                                          ◆   0 = Restore all information for files
                                                                              and directories
                                                                          ◆   1 = Restore file level security
                                                                          ◆   2 = Restore all information except
                                                                              security for files and directories

                             RESTORE_PRESERVE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to restore the data with its
                                                                          original directory structure intact.
                                                                          Enter 0 to restore all data (including
                                                                          the data in subdirectories) to the path
                                                                          specified in SHARE_REDIRECT_PATH.

                             DEVICE_NAME=Device name                      Type the name of the device, such as a
                                                                          drive or backup-to-disk folder,
                                                                          containing the data to be restored.

                             SHARE_REDIRECT_DRIVE=Drive                   Type a destination drive, other than
                             letter                                       where the data was originally backed
                                                                          up, to which the data is to be restored.

                             SHARE_REDIRECT_PATH=Path name                Type the target path on the drive
                                                                          specified in
                                                                          SHARE_REDIRECT_DRIVE.
                                                                          To retain the original directory
                                                                          structure, make sure that the value for
                                                                          RESTORE_PRESERVE=1.

                             SHARE_REDIRECT_SERVER_                       Type the GUID of the Backup Exec
                             ACCOUNT=GUID                                 logon account to use to access the
                                                                          SharePoint data. To obtain the GUID,
                                                                          use operation -o211 to display the
                                                                          logon account information.

                             SHARE_REDIRECT_PATH_                         Type the GUID of the Backup Exec
                             ACCOUNT=GUID                                 logon account to use to access the path
                                                                          to which you want to redirect the
                                                                          restore. To obtain the GUID, use
                                                                          operation -o211 to display the logon
                                                                          account information.




164                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               SQL_REDIRECT_SERVER=                    If you are redirecting SQL data, type
               SQL Server name                         the name of the SQL server where the
                                                       data is to be restored.

               SQL_REDIRECT_INSTANCE=                  If you are redirecting SQL data to a
               Instance name                           named instance, specify the instance
                                                       name. Otherwise, the data is restored
                                                       to the default instance.

               SQL_REDIRECT_DATABASE=                  If you are redirecting this restore to a
               Database name                           different database on the target server,
                                                       specify the target database name. If
                                                       you are restoring a differential or log
                                                       backup, and the associated database
                                                       backup was restored to a renamed
                                                       database, the new database name must
                                                       be entered.

               SQL_REDIRECT_SERVER_                    Type the GUID of the Backup Exec
               ACCOUNT=GUID                            logon account that stores the
                                                       credentials of a Windows user account.
                                                       The Windows user account must have
                                                       been granted the System
                                                       Administrator role on the SQL
                                                       instance. To obtain the GUID, use
                                                       operation -o211 to display the logon
                                                       account information.

               SQL_REDIRECT_                           Type the GUID of the Backup Exec
               ACCOUNT=GUID                            logon account that stores the
                                                       credentials of the SQL user account if
                                                       you are using SQL Server
                                                       Authentication. To obtain the GUID,
                                                       use operation -o211 to display the
                                                       logon account information.

               XCH_REDIRECT_SERVER=Exchange            If you are redirecting Exchange data,
               Server name                             specify the Exchange server where the
                                                       data is to be restored.




                                                                                            165
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             XCH_REDIRECT_SERVER_                         Type the GUID of the Backup Exec
                             ACCOUNT=GUID                                 logon account that stores the
                                                                          credentials of a Windows user account.
                                                                          To obtain the GUID, use operation
                                                                          -o211 to display the logon account
                                                                          information.

                             XCH_REDIRECT_MAILBOX=Exchange                If you are redirecting an Exchange
                             mailbox name                                 mailbox, specify the name of the target
                                                                          mailbox. The mailbox must already
                                                                          exist before you can restore to it.

                             XCH_REDIRECT_MAILBOX_                        Type the GUID of the logon account
                             ACCOUNT=GUID                                 that has rights to the target mailbox.
                                                                          To obtain the GUID, use operation
                                                                          -o211 to display the logon account
                                                                          information.

                             SP_REDIRECT_SETS_SERVER=                     Specify whether server sets or
                             Server/Documents                             document sets are being restored.

                             SP_REDIRECT_DRIVE=Drive name                 Enter the name of the local drive or
                                                                          the UNC path to which you want to
                                                                          redirect the restore. If you type a UNC
                                                                          path, use the format server
                                                                          nameshare name.

                             SP_REDIRECT_PATH=Path                        Type the folder location on the drive to
                                                                          which you want to redirect the restore.

                             SP_REDIRECT_SERVER=server name             Type the name of the computer to
                                                                          which you want to redirect the restore.
                                                                          Use the format server name.

                             SP_REDIRECT_WORKGROUP=                       Type the name of the workspace to
                             Workspace name                               which you want to redirect the restore.
                                                                          Note You must type an entry in this
                                                                               field, even if you are restoring
                                                                               the data to the original
                                                                               workspace. You cannot redirect
                                                                               the restore to a different folder
                                                                               in the workspace.




166                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               SP_REDIRECT_SERVER_                     Type the GUID of the Backup Exec
               ACCOUNT=GUID                            logon account to use it to access the
                                                       SharePoint data. To obtain the GUID,
                                                       use operation -o211 to display the
                                                       logon account information.

               RESTORE_RSM_DATA=0 or 1                 Enter 1 to restore the Removable
                                                       Storage database; otherwise, enter 0.

               RESTORE_DISK_QUOTA=0 or 1               Enter 1 to restore disk quota data;
                                                       otherwise, enter 0. Disk quotas track
                                                       and control disk usage on a per user,
                                                       per volume basis; the values can be
                                                       restored to the limits that were set
                                                       before the backup.

               RESTORE_TERMINAL_SERVICES=              Enter 1 to restore the Terminal
               0 or 1                                  Services database, which contains
                                                       licensing data for client licenses;
                                                       otherwise, enter 0.

               RESTORE_WMI=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to restore the Windows
                                                       Management Instrumentation (WMI)
                                                       respository, which provides support
                                                       for monitoring and controlling system
                                                       resources and provides a consistent
                                                       view of your managed environment;
                                                       otherwise, enter 0.

               RESTORE_CLUSTER_DB=0 or 1               Enter 1 to restore the cluster
                                                       configuration; otherwise, enter 0.

               RESTORE_FORCE_RECOVERY=                 Enter 1 to force the recovery of the
               0 or 1                                  cluster quorum even if other nodes are
                                                       online the and/or disk signatures do
                                                       not match option; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                             167
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             RESTORE_PRIMARY_REPLICA=0 or 1               Enter 1 if all the domain controllers in
                                                                          the domain are being restored and you
                                                                          want to designate this server as the
                                                                          primary arbitrator. If you enter 0,
                                                                          replication may not function.
                                                                          Use this option when you perform a
                                                                          restore of a domain controller in a
                                                                          domain that does not have any other
                                                                          domain controllers.

                             RESTORE_REGISTRY=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to restore registry information
                                                                          if it exists in the selected data;
                                                                          otherwise, enter 0.

                             RESTORE_PNP_MERGE=0 or 1                     Enter 1 to merge existing hardware
                                                                          configuration and registry services
                                                                          with the data to be restored when
                                                                          restoring registry information;
                                                                          otherwise, enter 0.

                             RESTORE_JUNCSASDIRS=0 or 1                   Enter 1 to preserve existing junction
                                                                          points and restore files and directories
                                                                          from backup media. Enter 0 to restore
                                                                          junction points, files and directories
                                                                          from backup media.

                             PRE_JOB_COMMAND=Command                      Specify a .exe or batch file command to
                                                                          run on the media server before the
                                                                          restore operation starts.

                             POST_JOB_COMMAND=Command                     Specify a .exe or batch file command to
                                                                          run after the restore operation
                                                                          completes.

                             COMMAND_RUN_POST_IF_                         Enter 1 to execute the post-job
                             PRE_SUCCESS=0 or 1                           command only if the pre-job command
                                                                          is successful; otherwise, enter 0.

                             COMMAND_RUN_JOB_IF_PRE_SUCCESS=              Enter 1 to execute the job only if the
                             0 or 1                                       pre-job command is successful;
                                                                          otherwise, enter 0.




168                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               COMMAND_RUN_POST_                       Enter 1 to execute the post-job
               IF_JOB_FAILS=0 or 1                     command even if the job fails;
                                                       otherwise, enter 0.

               COMMAND_FAIL_JOB_IF_FAILS=              Enter 1 to allow the pre- and post-job
               0 or 1                                  commands to be successful only if
                                                       completed with a return code of zero.
                                                       Otherwise, enter 0.
                                                       An return code of zero returned to the
                                                       operating system by the pre- or
                                                       post-job command is interpreted by
                                                       Backup Exec to mean the job
                                                       completed successfully. A non-zero
                                                       return code is interpreted by Backup
                                                       Exec to mean the job ended with an
                                                       error.
                                                       After checking the return codes,
                                                       Backup Exec continues processing
                                                       according to selections you made for
                                                       running the pre- and post-job
                                                       commands.
                                                       If you enter 0, the success of the pre-
                                                       and post-job commands is not
                                                       determined based on the return code.

               COMMAND_AUTO_CANCEL_                    Enter the number of minutes Backup
               TIME=#                                  Exec should wait before cancelling a
                                                       command that did not complete.

               COMMAND_RUN_OPTION=0 or 1               Enter 0 to run the command on this
                                                       media server or 1 to run the command
                                                       on each server being restored to.

               SQL_DATABASE_RECOVER=0 - 3              Enter one of the following values for
                                                       recovering the database:
                                                       ◆   0 = Create a standby database
                                                       ◆   1 = Recover the database
                                                       ◆   2 = Do not recover the database




                                                                                             169
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             SQL_REPLACE_DATABASE=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to replace a database or file
                                                                          group, even if another database or
                                                                          filegroup with the same name already
                                                                          exists on the server; otherwise, enter
                                                                          0.

                             SQL_AUTOMASTER=0 or 1                        Enter 1 to enable Backup Exec to stop
                                                                          SQL so that the master can be restored;
                                                                          otherwise, enter NO.
                                                                          If you enter 1, all existing users are
                                                                          logged off, and the master is put into
                                                                          single-user mode.

                             SQL_POSTRESTORE_DBCC=0 - 3                   Enter one of the following values for
                                                                          performing a consistency check after
                                                                          restore:
                                                                          ◆   0 = None
                                                                          ◆   1 = Full check, excluding indexes
                                                                          ◆   2 = Full check, including indexes
                                                                          ◆   3 = Physical check only

                             SQL_DEFAULT_DRIVE=Drive letter               Enter the drive letter for an alternate
                                                                          drive to which SQL database files will
                                                                          be restored.

                             SQL_USE_ALLDEFAULT=0 or 1                    Enter 1 to restore all SQL Server
                                                                          database files to the alternate drive
                                                                          specified in SQL_DEFAULT_DRIVE
                                                                          even if the drive where they originally
                                                                          resided exists.
                                                                          Enter 0 to restore SQL database files to
                                                                          the alternate drive specified in
                                                                          SQL_DEFAULT_DRIVE only when the
                                                                          drive where they originally resided
                                                                          does not exist.

                             SQL_USE_DEFAULT_INSTDIR=0 or 1               Enter 1 to restore all database files to
                                                                          the target instance’s data location;
                                                                          otherwise, enter 0.




170                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               SQL_POINTINTIME=MM/DD/YYYY,             Enter the date and time to restore
               HH:MM:SS                                transactions for a transaction log up to
                                                       and including a point in time in the
                                                       transaction log. After the point in
                                                       time, recovery from the transaction log
                                                       is stopped.

               SQL_LOGMARK_NAME=Named                  Enter the named transaction to
               transaction                             include in the recovery of the
                                                       transaction log. Recovery will be
                                                       stopped after this named transaction
                                                       is restored.

               SQL_LOGMARK_INCLUDE=0 or 1              Enter 1 to restore transactions from a
                                                       transaction log up to a named
                                                       transaction in the transaction log.
                                                       After the named transaction, recovery
                                                       from the transaction log is stopped.
                                                       Otherwise, enter 0.

               SQL_LOGMARK_TIME=MM/DD/YYYY,HH: Enter the date and time after which
               MM:SS                           the restore operation is to search for
                                               the named transaction.

               SPPS2_RECNT_DB_ON_                      Enter 1 to bring the databases online
               RESTORE=0 or 1                          after a restore job; otherwise, enter 0.

               SPPS2_RECONNECT=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to re-establish the link
                                                       between the restored databases and
                                                       their corresponding sites; otherwise,
                                                       enter 0.

               SPPS2_RELEASE_LOCK=0 or 1               Enter 1 to release the lock on the
                                                       SharePoint farm topology before
                                                       restoring data; otherwise, enter 0.

               XCH_AUTOCREATE_MAILBOX=0 or 1           Enter 1 if you are restoring Exchange
                                                       data and want Backup Exec to
                                                       automatically recreate user accounts
                                                       and mailboxes; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                             171
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             XCH_OVERWRITE=0 or 1                         Enter 1 if you are restoring Exchange
                                                                          data and you want Backup Exec to
                                                                          overwrite an existing item with the
                                                                          message or folder. A new object ID is
                                                                          not created for the message or folder;
                                                                          only the contents and properties are
                                                                          replaced. Otherwise, enter 0.

                             ESE_NOLOSS_RESTORE=0 or 1                    Enter 1 to preserve the existing
                                                                          transaction logs on the Exchange 2000
                                                                          or later server. Enter 0 to purge some
                                                                          or all of the existing transaction logs,
                                                                          depending on the value of
                                                                          ESE_RECOVERY_POINTINTIME.
                                                                          If you enter 1, transaction logs from
                                                                          the storage media are then restored
                                                                          and added to the existing set of
                                                                          transaction logs on the Exchange
                                                                          server. When the restore operation
                                                                          finishes, Exchange automatically
                                                                          updates its databases with the
                                                                          uncommitted transactions found in
                                                                          the existing and newly-restored
                                                                          transaction logs. This option is
                                                                          selected by default.




172                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               ESE_RECOVERY_POINTINTIME=MM/DD/Y Enter a date and time to restore
               YYY,HH:MM:SS                     Exchange 2000 and later transactions
                                                from the transaction log. Transaction
                                                logs after this time are skipped.
                                                       Transactions up to and including this
                                                       date and time are restored provided all
                                                       of the following conditions are met:
                                                       ◆   The ESE_NOLOSS_RESTORE value
                                                           is set to 0.
                                                       ◆   The backup set that is being
                                                           restored is from a continuous
                                                           protection backup.
                                                       ◆   The value is a valid date and time.
                                                       Note If the ESE_NO_LOSS_RESTORE
                                                            value is set to 0 but the other
                                                            conditions are not met, the
                                                            value of
                                                            ESE_RECOVERY_POINTINTIME
                                                            is ignored and a loss restore job
                                                            runs.




                                                                                            173
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             ESE_TEMPLOG_PATH=Path                        Enter a location where the associated
                                                                          log and patch files are to be kept until
                                                                          the database is restored. The default
                                                                          location is temp. If storage groups are
                                                                          being restored, a subdirectory in temp
                                                                          is created for each storage group. The
                                                                          log and patch files for each storage
                                                                          group are kept in the corresponding
                                                                          subdirectory.
                                                                          After the Exchange 2000 or later
                                                                          database is restored, the log and patch
                                                                          files in the temporary location are
                                                                          applied to the database, and then the
                                                                          current log files are applied. After the
                                                                          restore is complete, the log and patch
                                                                          files are automatically deleted from
                                                                          the temporary location (including any
                                                                          subdirectories).
                                                                          Make sure the temporary location for
                                                                          log and patch files is empty before you
                                                                          start a restore job. If a restore job fails,
                                                                          check the temporary location
                                                                          (including subdirectories) to make sure
                                                                          any previous log and patch files from a
                                                                          previous restore job were deleted.

                             ESE_COMMIT_AFTER=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to enable the Exchange 2000
                                                                          or later restore operation to replay log
                                                                          files and roll back any uncompleted
                                                                          transactions if your selection contains
                                                                          the last backup set to be restored. If
                                                                          you enter 0, the database is left in an
                                                                          intermediate state and is not yet
                                                                          usable.
                                                                          If this option is selected when an
                                                                          intermediate backup is being applied,
                                                                          you cannot continue to restore
                                                                          backups. You must restart the restore
                                                                          operation from the beginning.




174                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               ESE_MOUNT_AFTER=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to mount the Exchange 2000
                                                       or later database so that it is available
                                                       to users; otherwise, enter 0. This
                                                       checkbox is only available if
                                                       EXE_LASTSET is set to 1.

               ESE_DISMOUNT_BEFORE=0 or 1              Enter 1 to automatically take the
                                                       Exchange 2000 or later database
                                                       offline before the restore job runs;
                                                       otherwise, enter 0.

               LOTUS_WAIT_MSECS=x                      Specify the number of seconds for the
                                                       restore process to wait for a database
                                                       that is in use. When a Lotus database
                                                       is restored it must first be taken
                                                       offline. This will ensure that the
                                                       database is not being accessed, closed,
                                                       or deleted while the restore operation
                                                       is being processed. If the database is
                                                       still in use and cannot be taken offline
                                                       after the specified wait time, the
                                                       restore will fail.

               LOTUS_DBRECOVER_OPTION=0 - 3            Enter one of the following options for
                                                       recovering a Lotus Domino database:
                                                       ◆   0 = Retain original IDs
                                                       ◆   1 = Assign new database IDs
                                                       ◆   2 = Assign new database IDs and
                                                           replica IDs

               LOTUS_POINTINTIME=MM/DD/YYYY,HH: Enter a date and time from which to
               MM:SS                            restore the Lotus Domino database.

               RESTORE_VOL_RESTRICT=0 or 1             Enter 1 if you are restoring NetWare
                                                       data and want to restore volume
                                                       restrictions; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                              175
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             NIC_ENABLED=0 or 1                           Enter 1 to use the MAC address
                                                                          specified with the NIC_ADDRESS
                                                                          entry, or the name specified with the
                                                                          NIC_NAME entry.
                                                                          Enter 0 to clear previous settings for
                                                                          the network interface, and to use any
                                                                          available network adapter.
                                                                          “Operations for displaying network
                                                                          interface information” on page 85

                             NIC_ADDRESS=00-00-00-00-00-00                Enter the Media Access Control (MAC)
                                                                          address for the network interface you
                                                                          selected.
                                                                          To use this setting, NIC_ENABLED
                                                                          must be set to 1.

                             NIC_NAME=name                                Type the name of a network interface
                                                                          card when NIC_ENABLED=1.

                             NIC_PROTOCOL=0 - 2                           Enter 0 to use any available Internet
                                                                          Protocol. Enter 1 to use IPv4. Enter 2
                                                                          to use IPv6.
                                                                          “Operations for displaying network
                                                                          interface information” on page 85

                             NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=0 or 1                    Enter 0 to use any available subnet
                                                                          prefix. Enter 1 to use a specific subnet
                                                                          prefix.

                             NIC_SUBNET=00.000.00.000                     Specify a subnet prefix when
                                                                          NIC_ENABLED=1 and
                                                                          NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=1.

                             NIC_ANY_AVAILABLE=0 or 1                     Enter 1 to use any available network
                                                                          interface card. Enter 0 to use only the
                                                                          network interface card that you
                                                                          specify.




176                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files

Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

[Selections]

               JOBHISTORY_GUID=Job History GUID Required or SELECTIONx is required.
                                                Specifies the GUID of the backup job
                                                that has already run. To obtain the Job
                                                History GUID, first use -o23 and /or
                                                -o506 to obtain the Job Instance GUID.
                                                Then use the Job Instance GUID with
                                                -o21 to obtain the Job History GUID.

               SELECTIONx=file selection to            Required or JOBHISTORY_GUID is
               restore                                 required. Specifies the file selection to
                                                       restore. If you specify the file
                                                       selection, use the following format:
                                                       machinenamepath1file1+file2+
                                                       file3|path2filex+filey+filez
                                                       Note You must use the SELECTIONx
                                                            to restore encrypted backup
                                                            jobs.

               START_DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                   Specifies the earliest date range to
                                                       perform a point-in-time restore.
                                                       Enter the start date in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                       format for this job.

               END_DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                     Specifies the latest date range to
                                                       perform a point-in-time restore.
                                                       Enter the end date in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                       format for this job.

[Schedule]

               SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                       format for this job.

               SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                  Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                       in HH:MM:SS format.




                                                                                              177
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS              Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                                          format for the job to restart on each
                                                                          run day. For example, if you have set
                                                                          the job up to run every seven days, you
                                                                          can also set it up to run every four
                                                                          hours on its run day by entering
                                                                          SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                                          0.

                             SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X                      Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                                          job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                                          the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                                          SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

                             SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                      Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                          format the interval is calculated from.

                             SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                   Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                          format that the schedule becomes
                                                                          effective.

                             SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                          Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                          the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                          string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                          32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                          example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                          15th of the month, type:
                                                                             SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

                             SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                           In a comma delimited string, enter the
                                                                          day of the week, a forward slash, and
                                                                          the week of the month you want the
                                                                          job to run. Enter a value of 1-7 for the
                                                                          day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                                          Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                                          For the week of the month, values can
                                                                          be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                                          week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                                          fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                                          For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                                          for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                                          type:
                                                                          SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3


178                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                   Description

               SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY           Enter a specific date when the job
                                                       should run. For this field, x is a
                                                       number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                       to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                       if you want the job to run the first and
                                                       15th of August, type:
                                                       SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                       SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

               SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY           Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                       when the job should not run. For this
                                                       field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                       allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                       For example, if you do not want the job
                                                       to run on the first and 25th of August,
                                                       type:
                                                       SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                       SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002

               DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                         Enter the start date for the job in
                                                       MM/DD/YYYY format.

               TIME=hh:mm:ss                           Enter the start time for the job in
                                                       hh:mm:ss format.
                                                       Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                            must be separated by colons.

               RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                    Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run
                                                       immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                       Note This entry should be used only if
                                                            no other entries are specified
                                                            under the schedule section. If no
                                                            other scheduling options have
                                                            been selected and this entry is
                                                            not set, the default value is 1.

               HOLD=0 or 1                             Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                       schedule the job on hold; otherwise,
                                                       enter 0.




                                                                                                 179
Using job script files


              Possible restore job script file entries (continued)

              Section        Entry                                        Description

                             AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                           Enter the number of minutes after
                                                                          which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                                          completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                                          the job when the job is queued, not
                                                                          when the job begins.

                             DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3                       Enter a number from 0 to 2 that
                                                                          corresponds to job deletion. Options
                                                                          include:
                                                                          ◆   0 = Do not delete the job
                                                                          ◆   1 = Delete the job after the job
                                                                              completes
                                                                          ◆   2 = Delete the job if the job
                                                                              successfully completes




180                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Creating a catalog job script file
   Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a catalog job script file that contains entries
   for the catalog job options. The catalog job script file has similar entries, or values, as
   those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Catalog Job Script include:
   ■   [General]
   ■   [Catalog_Options]
   ■   [Schedule]
   Each entry included in the catalog job script file must be typed in capital letters and
   immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
   follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
   itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Catalog and
   the job type is catalog, the script file would appear as:
       [General]
       JOB_TYPE=Catalog
       JOB_NAME=Workstation Catalog
   All possible entries for a catalog job script file are described in the following table. When
   creating a script file, do not include all entries.

   Possible catalog job script file entries

   Section        Entry                                   Description

   [General]

                  JOB_TYPE=Job type                       This entry must be completed with a
                                                          value of Catalog.

                  JOB_PRIORITY=Priority                   Enter the priority for the job. If
                                                          another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                          same time as this job, the priority
                                                          determines which job runs first.
                                                          If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                          will be Medium. Options are:
                                                          ◆   Lowest
                                                          ◆   Low
                                                          ◆   Medium
                                                          ◆   High
                                                          ◆   Highest




                                                                                                  181
Using job script files

              Possible catalog job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            JOB_NAME=Job name                            Type the name of the catalog job. If a
                                                                         name is not provided, one will
                                                                         automatically be generated.

                            SERVER=Server name                           Type the name of the Backup Exec
                                                                         server where the operation is to be
                                                                         performed. If a server is not specified,
                                                                         the local server is used by default.

                            USERNAME=Username                            Type the user name for logging into a
                                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a user
                                                                         name is not specified, the current user
                                                                         name is used.

                            PASSWORD=Password                            Enter the password for logging into a
                                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a
                                                                         password is not specified, the current
                                                                         password is used.

              [Catalog_Options]

                            MEDIA_ID=Media ID                            Specifies the ID of the media to be
                                                                         cataloged. The format of the media ID
                                                                         should be in the following format:
                                                                         MEDIA_ID={GUID}

                            MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media password                If the media has a password, specify
                                                                         the password.

              [Schedule]

                            SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                   Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                         format, that the schedule becomes
                                                                         effective.

                            SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                     Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                                         format for this job.

                            SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                       Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                                         in HH:MM:SS format.




182                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible catalog job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                    Description

              SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS          Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                       format for the job to restart on each
                                                       run day. For example, if you have set
                                                       up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                       can also set it up to run every four
                                                       hours on its run day by entering
                                                       SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                       0.

              SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x                  Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                       job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                       the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                       SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

              SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                  Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                       format, from which the interval is
                                                       calculated.

              SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                      Enter the days of the month you want
                                                       the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                       string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                       32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                       example, to run the job on the first and
                                                       15th of the month, type:
                                                          SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

              SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                       Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                       slash, and the week of the month you
                                                       want the job to run in a comma
                                                       delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                       for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                       Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                       For the week of the month, values can
                                                       be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                       week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                       fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                       For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                       for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                       type:
                                                       SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3




                                                                                              183
Using job script files


              Possible catalog job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter a specific date when the job
                                                                         should run. For this field, x is a
                                                                         number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                                         to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                                         to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                                         August, type:
                                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

                            SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                                         when the job should not run. For this
                                                                         field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                                         allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                                         For example, to prevent the job from
                                                                         running on the first and 25th of
                                                                         August, type:
                                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002

                            DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                              Enter the start date for the job in
                                                                         MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule
                                                                         values are not entered, then the
                                                                         DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and
                                                                         TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used
                                                                         to set the

                            TIME=hh:mm:ss                                Enter the start time for the job in
                                                                         hh:mm:ss format.
                                                                         Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                                              must be separated by colons.

                            RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                         Enter 1 to run the catalog job
                                                                         immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                         Note This entry should be used only if
                                                                              no other entries are specified
                                                                              under the schedule section.If no
                                                                              other scheduling options have
                                                                              been selected and this entry is
                                                                              not set, the default value is 1.




184                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible catalog job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                    Description

              AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                       Enter the number of minutes after
                                                       which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                       completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                       the job when the job is queued, not
                                                       when the job begins. To specify hours,
                                                       enter a value divisible by 60.

              HOLD=0 or 1                              Enter 1 if you want the job to be
                                                       submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0.

              DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 2                   Enter a number from 0 to 2 that
                                                       corresponds to job deletion. Options
                                                       include:
                                                       ◆   0 = Do not delete the job
                                                       ◆   1 = Delete the job after the job
                                                           completes
                                                       ◆   2 = Delete the job if the job
                                                           successfully completes




                                                                                              185
Using job script files


         Creating a discovery job script file
              Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a discovery job script file that contains
              entries for the discovery job options. The discovery job script file has similar entries, or
              values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Discovery Job Script
              include:
              ■    [General]
              ■    [Discovery_Options]
              ■    [Selections]
              ■    [Schedule]
              Each entry included in the discovery job script file must be typed in capital letters and
              immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
              follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
              itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Resource
              Discovery and the job type is discovery, the script file would appear as:
                   [General]
                   JOB_TYPE=Discovery
                   JOB_NAME=Workstation Resource Discovery
              All possible entries for a discovery job script file are described in the following table.
              When creating a script file, do not include all entries.

              Possible discovery job script file entries

              Section       Entry                                      Description

              [General]

                            JOB_TYPE=Job type                          This entry must be completed with a
                                                                       value of Discovery.




186                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible discovery job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                      Description

              JOB_PRIORITY=Priority                      Enter the priority for the job. If
                                                         another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                         same time as this job, the priority
                                                         determines which job runs first.
                                                         If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                         will be Medium. Options are:
                                                         ◆   Lowest
                                                         ◆   Low
                                                         ◆   Medium
                                                         ◆   High
                                                         ◆   Highest

              JOB_NAME=Job name                          Type the name of the discovery job. If a
                                                         name is not provided, one will
                                                         automatically be generated.

              SERVER=Server name                         Type the name of the Backup Exec
                                                         server where the operation is to be
                                                         performed. If a server is not specified,
                                                         the local server is used by default.

              USERNAME=Username                          Type the user name for logging into a
                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a user
                                                         name is not specified, the current user
                                                         name is used.

              PASSWORD=Password                          Enter the password for logging into a
                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a
                                                         password is not specified, the current
                                                         password is used.

[Discovery_Options]

              DISCOVER_ADMINISTRATIVE_SHARES=0 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
              or 1                             new administrative network shares or
                                               volumes; otherwise, enter 0.

              DISCOVER_USER_SHARES=0 or 1                Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
                                                         new user-defined shares; otherwise,
                                                         enter 0.




                                                                                                 187
Using job script files


              Possible discovery job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            DISCOVER_SQL_DATABASES=0 or 1                Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
                                                                         new SQL databases; otherwise, enter 0.

                            DISCOVER_EXCHANGE_DATABASES=0                Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
                            or 1                                         new Exchange databases; otherwise,
                                                                         enter 0.
                                                                         Backup Exec searches for Information
                                                                         Store, Exchange Directory, or Storage
                                                                         Groups; it does not discover individual
                                                                         databases under storage groups.

                            DISCOVER_DOMINO_DATABASES=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
                                                             new Lotus Domino databases;
                                                             otherwise, enter 0.

                            DISCOVER_SYSTEMSTATE=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
                                                                         new System State resources;
                                                                         otherwise, enter 0.

                            DISCOVER_SHAREPOINT=0 or 1                   Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for
                                                                         new SharePoint servers; otherwise,
                                                                         enter 0.

                            NOTIFY_SEPARATE=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to have Backup Exec send
                                                                         separate notifications when each new
                                                                         resource is found; otherwise, enter 0.

                            NOTIFY_INCLUDE_PREVIOUS=0 or 1               Enter 1 to have Backup Exec send a
                                                                         notification that includes all resources
                                                                         previously found during resource
                                                                         discovery jobs; otherwise, enter 0.




188                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible discovery job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                     Description

[Selections]

               DOMAINx                                   Specifies the domains you want
                                                         Backup Exec to search for new
                                                         resources. You can also specify the
                                                         logon account GUID for the domain. If
                                                         logon account credentials are not
                                                         entered, the current logged on user’s
                                                         default logon account is used. Each
                                                         entry must be comma delimited string.
                                                         For example,
                                                         DOMAIN1, DOMAIN2
                                                         or
                                                          DOMAIN1=domain1,
                                                         {10011001-1001-1001-0101-01010101
                                                         01}

               EXCLUDEx                                  Specifies the domains you want to
                                                         exclude from the discovery job. If you
                                                         specify multiple domains, the list must
                                                         be in a comma delimited string.

[Schedule]

               SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                         format, that the schedule becomes
                                                         effective.

               SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                  Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                         format for this job.

               SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                    Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                         in HH:MM:SS format.

               SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS           Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                         format for the job to restart on each
                                                         run day. For example, if you have set
                                                         up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                         can also set it up to run every four
                                                         hours on its run day by entering
                                                         SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                         0.



                                                                                               189
Using job script files


              Possible discovery job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x                      Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                                         job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                                         the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                                         SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

                            SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                      Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                         format, from which the interval is
                                                                         calculated.

                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                          Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                         the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                         string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                         32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                         example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                         15th of the month, type:
                                                                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

                            SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                           Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                                         slash, and the week of the month you
                                                                         want the job to run in a comma
                                                                         delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                                         for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                                         Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                                         For the week of the month, values can
                                                                         be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                                         week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                                         fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                                         For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                                         for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                                         type:
                                                                          SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter a specific date when the job
                                                                         should run. For this field, x is a
                                                                         number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                                         to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                                         to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                                         August, type:
                                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002




190                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible discovery job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                      Description

              SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY              Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                         when the job should not run. For this
                                                         field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                         allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                         For example, to prevent the job from
                                                         running on the first and 25th of
                                                         August, type:
                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002

              DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                            Enter the start date for the job in
                                                         MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule
                                                         values are not entered, then the
                                                         DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and
                                                         TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used
                                                         to set the

              TIME=hh:mm:ss                              Enter the start time for the job in
                                                         hh:mm:ss format.
                                                         Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                              must be separated by colons.

              RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to run the discovery job
                                                         immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                         Note This entry should be used only if
                                                              no other entries are specified
                                                              under the schedule section. If no
                                                              other scheduling options have
                                                              been selected and this entry is
                                                              not set, the default value is 1.

              AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                         Enter the number of minutes after
                                                         which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                         completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                         the job when the job is queued, not
                                                         when the job begins. To specify hours,
                                                         enter a value divisible by 60.

              HOLD=0 or 1                                Enter 1 if you want the job to be
                                                         submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                                191
Using job script files


         Creating a duplicate backup job script file
              Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a duplicate backup job script file that
              contains entries for the duplicate backup job options. The duplicate backup job script file
              has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a
              Duplicate Backup Job Script include:
              ■    [General]
              ■    [Setcopy_Options]
              ■    [Selections]
              ■    [Schedule]
              Each entry included in the duplicate backup job script file must be typed in capital letters
              and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
              follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
              itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Duplicate
              Backup and the job type is setcopy, the script file would appear as:
                   [General]
                   JOB_TYPE=SetCopy
                   JOB_NAME=Workstation Duplicate Backup
              All possible entries for a duplicate backup job script file are described in the following
              table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries.

              Possible duplicate job script file entries

              Section       Entry                                      Description

              [General]

                            JOB_TYPE=Job type                          This entry must be completed with a
                                                                       value of Setcopy.




192                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                      Description

              JOB_PRIORITY=Priority                      Enter the priority for the job. If
                                                         another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                         same time as this job, the priority
                                                         determines which job runs first.
                                                         If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                         will be Medium. Options are:
                                                         ◆   Lowest
                                                         ◆   Low
                                                         ◆   Medium
                                                         ◆   High
                                                         ◆   Highest

              JOB_NAME=Job name                          Type the name of the duplicate job. If a
                                                         name is not provided, one will
                                                         automatically be generated.

              JOB_DESCRIPTION=Description                Type a description of the information
                                                         you are backing up.

              PREFERRED_SOURCE_DEVICE_GUID=              Enter the GUID of the device used as
              Source device guid                         the destination device for the original
                                                         backup job. Use operation -o63 to
                                                         display managed drives.

              SERVER=Server name                         Type the name of the Backup Exec
                                                         server where the operation is to be
                                                         performed. If a server is not specified,
                                                         the local server is used by default.

              USERNAME=Username                          Type the user name for logging into a
                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a user
                                                         name is not specified, the current user
                                                         name is used.

              PASSWORD=Password                          Enter the password for logging into a
                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a
                                                         password is not specified, the current
                                                         password is used.




                                                                                                 193
Using job script files


              Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

              [Setcopy_Options]

                            DEVICE_NAME=Device name                      Type the name of the device to be used
                                                                         for the duplicate job.

                            MEDIA_SET_GUID=Media set GUID                Enter the GUID of the media set to be
                                                                         used for the duplicate job. Use
                                                                         operation -o69 to display media sets.

                            OVERWRITE_MEDIA=0 or 1                       Enter 1 as the value if you want
                                                                         Backup Exec to overwrite the media;
                                                                         otherwise, enter 0.

                            APPEND_OVERWRITE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to append this backup to the
                                                                         media set. If there is no appendable
                                                                         media available, the job is appended to
                                                                         overwritable media that will then be
                                                                         added to the media set; otherwise
                                                                         enter 0.

                            APPEND_TERMINATE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to append to this backup to the
                                                                         media set. If there is no appendable
                                                                         media available, the job is terminated;
                                                                         otherwise, enter 0.

                            EJECT _MEDIA_AFTER_COMPLETES=0 or Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
                            1                                 automatically eject the media in the
                                                              drive when the operation completes.

                            CHECKSUM=0 or 1                              Enter 1 as the value if checksums are
                                                                         to be calculated for each data stream
                                                                         written to tape, and then written in a
                                                                         separate stream immediately following
                                                                         the data stream. If 0 is entered as the
                                                                         value, backup performance may be
                                                                         improved, but there will be no way to
                                                                         verify the integrity of the data on the
                                                                         tape.

                            RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to retension the media before
                                                                         backup; otherwise, enter 0.




194                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued)

Section        Entry                                     Description

               MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media password             If the media has a password, specify
                                                         the password.

               AUTO_VERIFY=0 or 1                        Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
                                                         automatically perform a verify
                                                         operation to make sure the media can
                                                         be read after the backup has been
                                                         completed; otherwise, enter 0.

               COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 or 1                   Enter 1 to select hardware
                                                         compression; otherwise, enter 0.

               ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name              Specify a name for the encryption key.

               ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3                     Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                         corresponds with the type of
                                                         encryption to use.
                                                         Options are as follows:
                                                         ◆   0 = None
                                                         ◆   1 = Software
                                                         ◆   2 = Hardware
                                                         ◆   3 = Hardware if available,
                                                             otherwise software
                                                         If 2 or 3 are entered, the default
                                                         encryption key must be 256-bit
                                                         encryption.

[Selections]

               JOBHISTORY_GUID=Job History GUID Specifies the backup job that has
                                                already run to obtain the Job History
                                                GUID, first use -o23 and /or -o506 to
                                                obtain the Job Instance GUID. Then
                                                use the Job Instance GUID with -o21 to
                                                obtain the Job History GUID.

[Schedule]

               SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                         format, that the schedule becomes
                                                         effective.



                                                                                                195
Using job script files


              Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                     Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                                         format for this job.

                            SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                       Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                                         in HH:MM:SS format.

                            SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS              Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                                         format for the job to restart on each
                                                                         run day. For example, if you have set
                                                                         up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                                         can also set it up to run every four
                                                                         hours on its run day by entering
                                                                         SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                                         0.

                            SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x                      Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                                         job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                                         the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                                         SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

                            SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                      Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                         format, from which the interval is
                                                                         calculated.

                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                          Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                         the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                         string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                         32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                         example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                         15th of the month, type:
                                                                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15




196                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                      Description

              SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                         Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                         slash, and the week of the month you
                                                         want the job to run in a comma
                                                         delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                         for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                         Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                         For the week of the month, values can
                                                         be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                         week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                         fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                         For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                         for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                         type:
                                                         SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

              SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY              Enter a specific date when the job
                                                         should run. For this field, x is a
                                                         number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                         to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                         to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                         August, type:
                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

              SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY              Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                         when the job should not run. For this
                                                         field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                         allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                         For example, to prevent the job from
                                                         running on the first and 25th of
                                                         August, type:
                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002

              DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                            Enter the start date for the job in
                                                         MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule
                                                         values are not entered, then the
                                                         DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and
                                                         TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used
                                                         to set the




                                                                                                197
Using job script files


              Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            TIME=hh:mm:ss                                Enter the start time for the job in
                                                                         hh:mm:ss format.
                                                                         Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                                              must be separated by colons.

                            RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                         Enter 1 to run the duplicate backup job
                                                                         immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                         Note This entry should be used only if
                                                                              no other entries are specified
                                                                              under the schedule section. If no
                                                                              other scheduling options have
                                                                              been selected and this entry is
                                                                              not set, the default value is 1.

                            AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                           Enter the number of minutes after
                                                                         which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                                         completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                                         the job when the job is queued, not
                                                                         when the job begins. To specify hours,
                                                                         enter a value divisible by 60.

                            HOLD=0 or 1                                  Enter 1 if you want the job to be
                                                                         submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0.

                            DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3                       Enter a number from 0 to 2 that
                                                                         corresponds to job deletion. Options
                                                                         include:
                                                                         ◆   0 = Do not delete the job
                                                                         ◆   1 = Delete the job after the job
                                                                             completes
                                                                         ◆   2 = Delete the job if the job
                                                                             successfully completes




198                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Creating a test run job script file
   Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a test run backup job script file that contains
   entries for the test run job options. The test run backup job script file has similar entries,
   or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Test Run Job Script
   include:
   ■    [General]
   ■    [TestRun_Options]
   ■    [Schedule]
   Each entry included in the test run job script file must be typed in capital letters and
   immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
   follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
   itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Test Run and
   the job type is TestRun, the script file would appear as:
        [General]
        JOB_TYPE=TestRun
        JOB_NAME=Workstation Test Run
   All possible entries for a test run job script file are described in the following table. When
   creating a script file, do not include all entries..

   Possible test run job script file entries

   Section        Entry                                    Description

   [General]

                  JOB_TYPE=Job type                        This entry must be completed with a
                                                           value of TestRun.

                  JOB_PRIORITY=Priority                    Enter the priority for the job. If
                                                           another job is scheduled to run at the
                                                           same time as this job, the priority
                                                           determines which job runs first.
                                                           If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                           will be Medium. Options are:
                                                           ◆   Lowest
                                                           ◆   Low
                                                           ◆   Medium
                                                           ◆   High
                                                           ◆   Highest


                                                                                                   199
Using job script files


              Possible test run job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            JOB_NAME=Job name                            Type the name of the test run job. If a
                                                                         name is not provided, one will
                                                                         automatically be generated.

                            SERVER-Server name                           Type the name of the Backup Exec
                                                                         server where the operation is to be
                                                                         performed. If a server is not specified,
                                                                         the local server is used by default.

                            USERNAME=Username                            Type the user name for logging into a
                                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a user
                                                                         name is not specified, the current user
                                                                         name is used.

                            PASSWORD=Password                            Enter the password for logging into a
                                                                         remote Backup Exec server. If a
                                                                         password is not specified, the current
                                                                         password is used.

              [TestRun_Options]

                            JOBINSTANCE_GUID=Job GUID                    Specifies the job ID of the existing job
                                                                         to use for the test run job.

                            CREDENTIALS_CHECK=0 or 1                     Enter 1 to verify that the logon
                                                                         account is correct for the resources
                                                                         being backed up; otherwise, enter 0.

                            MEDIA_CAPACITY_CHECK=0 or 1                  Enter 1 to test whether enough tape is
                                                                         available to complete the job;
                                                                         otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                         Note During the test run job, the
                                                                              number of scheduled jobs in the
                                                                              queue is not checked; therefore,
                                                                              jobs that are scheduled before
                                                                              the test run job may use the
                                                                              media that was available when
                                                                              the test run job was performed.

                            MEDIA_CHECK=0 or 1                           Enter 1 to test whether the media is
                                                                         online and overwritable for a trial run
                                                                         job; otherwise, enter 0.




200                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible test run job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                     Description

              JOBSIZE_METHOD=0 or 1                     Enter 0 if you want to determine job
                                                        size from a previous job history, or
                                                        enter a 1 if you want to perform a
                                                        pre-scan.

              HOLD_ON_FAILURE=0 or 1                    Enter 1 to have the scheduled job
                                                        placed on hold if any failures are
                                                        detected during the test run;
                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

[Schedule]

              SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                        format, that the schedule becomes
                                                        effective.

              SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                  Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                        format for this job.

              SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                    Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                        in HH:MM:SS format.

              SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS           Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                        format for the job to restart on each
                                                        run day. For example, if you have set
                                                        up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                        can also set it up to run every four
                                                        hours on its run day by entering
                                                        SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                        0.

              SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x                   Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                        job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                        the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                        SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

              SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                   Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                        format, from which the interval is
                                                        calculated.




                                                                                               201
Using job script files


              Possible test run job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                          Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                         the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                         string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                         32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                         example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                         15th of the month, type:
                                                                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

                            SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                           Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                                         slash, and the week of the month you
                                                                         want the job to run in a comma
                                                                         delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                                         for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                                         Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                                         For the week of the month, values can
                                                                         be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                                         week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                                         fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                                         For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                                         for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                                         type:
                                                                          SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter a specific date when the job
                                                                         should run. For this field, x is a
                                                                         number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                                         to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                                         to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                                         August, type:
                                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                         SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

                            SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                                         when the job should not run. For this
                                                                         field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                                         allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                                         For example, to prevent the job from
                                                                         running on the first and 25th of
                                                                         August, type:
                                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                         SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002



202                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible test run job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                     Description

              DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                           Enter the start date for the job in
                                                        MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule
                                                        values are not entered, then the
                                                        DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and
                                                        TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used
                                                        to set the

              TIME=hh:mm:ss                             Enter the start time for the job in
                                                        hh:mm:ss format.
                                                        Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                             must be separated by colons.

              RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to run the test run job
                                                        immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                        Note This entry should be used only if
                                                             no other entries are specified
                                                             under the schedule section. If no
                                                             other scheduling options have
                                                             been selected and this entry is
                                                             not set, the default value is 1.

              AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                        Enter the number of minutes after
                                                        which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                        completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                        the job when the job is queued, not
                                                        when the job begins. To specify hours,
                                                        enter a value divisible by 60.

              HOLD=0 or 1                               Enter 1 if you want the job to be
                                                        submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0.

              DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3                    Enter a number from 0 to 2 that
                                                        corresponds to job deletion. Options
                                                        include:
                                                        ◆   0 = Do not delete the job
                                                        ◆   1 = Delete the job after the job
                                                            completes
                                                        ◆   2 = Delete the job if the job
                                                            successfully completes




                                                                                               203
Using job script files


         Creating a copy job script file
              Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a copy job backup job script file that contains
              entries for the copy job options. The copy job backup job script file has similar entries, or
              values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Copy Job Script include:
              ■    [General]
              ■    [Job]
              ■    [Selection List]
              ■    [Policy]
              ■    [Login Account]
              ■    [Configuration]
              Each entry included in the copy job script file must be typed in capital letters and
              immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
              follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
              itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Copy and the
              job type is Copy, the script file would appear as:
                   [General]
                   JOB_TYPE=Copy
                   JOB_NAME=Workstation Copy
              All possible entries for a copy job script file are described in the following table. When
              creating a script file, do not include all entries..

              Possible copy job script file entries

              Section         Entry                                  Description

              [General]

                              JOB_TYPE=Job type                      This entry must be completed with a
                                                                     value of Copy.

              [Job]

                              JOB_NAME=Job name                      Type the name of the copy job. If a
                                                                     name is not provided, one will
                                                                     automatically be generated.




204                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


Possible copy job script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                 Description

              SERVERx=Server name                   Type the destination server where you
                                                    want to copy the job. If a server is not
                                                    specified, the local server is used by
                                                    default.

              LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login              Type the login account name for
              account name                          logging into the destination server. If a
                                                    user name is not specified, the current
                                                    user name is used.

              OVERWRITE_JOB=0 or 1                  Enter 1 as the value if you want
                                                    Backup Exec to overwrite the job that
                                                    has the same name; otherwise, enter 0.

              OVERWRITE_LOGIN_ACCOUNT=0 or 1        Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                    overwrite a logon account that has the
                                                    same account name; otherwise, enter
                                                    0.

[Selection List]

              SELECTION_LIST_NAMEx=selection        Type the name of the selection list to
              list name to be copied                be copied.

              SERVERx=Server name                   Type the destination server where you
                                                    want to copy the selection list. If a
                                                    server is not specified, the local server
                                                    is used by default.

              LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login              Type the login account name for
              account name                          logging into the destination server. If a
                                                    user name is not specified, the current
                                                    user name is used.

              OVERWRITE_SELECTION=0 or 1            Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                    overwrite a selection list that has the
                                                    same name; otherwise, enter 0.

[Policy]

              POLICY_NAMEx=policy name to be        Type the name of the policy to be
              copied                                copied.




                                                                                           205
Using job script files


              Possible copy job script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                        Description

                            SERVERx=Server name                          Type the destination server where you
                                                                         want to copy the policy. If a server is
                                                                         not specified, the local server is used
                                                                         by default.

                            LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login                     Type the login account name for
                            account name                                 logging into the destination server. If a
                                                                         user name is not specified, the current
                                                                         user name is used.

                            OVERWRITE_POLICY=0 or 1                      Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                                         overwrite a policy that has the same
                                                                         name; otherwise, enter 0.

              [Login Account

                            ACCOUNT_NAMEx=login account                  Type the name of the logon account to
                            name                                         be copied.

                            SERVERx=Server name                          Type the destination server where you
                                                                         want to copy the logon account. If a
                                                                         server is not specified, the local server
                                                                         is used by default.

                            OVERWRITE_ACCOUNT=0 or 1                     Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                                         overwrite a logon account that has the
                                                                         same name; otherwise, enter 0.

              [Configuration]

                            DEFAULT_JOB_OPTIONS=0 or 1                   Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                                         overwrite the default job options;
                                                                         otherwise, enter 0.

                            DEFAULT_SCHEDULE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                                         overwrite the default schedule options;
                                                                         otherwise, enter 0.

                            ERROR_HANDLING _RULES=0 or 1                 Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                                         overwrite the default error handling
                                                                         rules; otherwise, enter 0.




206                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using job script files


  Possible copy job script file entries (continued)

  Section       Entry                                     Description

                ALERT_CONFIGURATION=0 or 1                Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                          overwrite the default alert options;
                                                          otherwise, enter 0.

                SERVERx=Server name                       Type the destination server where you
                                                          want to copy the configuration
                                                          information. If a server is not
                                                          specified, the local server is used by
                                                          default.

                LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login                  Type the login account name for
                account name                              logging into the destination server. If a
                                                          user name is not specified, the current
                                                          user name is used.



Saving and launching the job script file
  After creating the job script file, save it as a plain text file. When launching the job script
  file, specify the directory where the file resides along with the filename.
  To launch a script file, type the following at the command prompt:
      bemcmd -o90 -f"drive letterdirectoryscript name"
  For example, suppose you created a directory for your scripts called Scripts and named a
  script for differential backups of workstations DIFFBKWORK. To launch this script with
  the verbose command, type:
      bemcmd -o90 -v -f”c:scriptsdiffbkwork.txt”




                                                                                                 207
Using scripts and selection lists


Using scripts and selection lists
             Selection lists provide a quick and easy way of selecting files that you back up often.
             After you choose devices, directories and files, you can save the selections as a selection
             list script that you can use in regularly scheduled operations or once-only operations.
             A sample selection script file (selectionscript.txt) is included in the UTILS directory on
             the installation DVD. To activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes
             (//) in the line. The selection list script is used with command -o220 to create a selection
             list.


         Creating a selection list script file
             Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a selection list script file that contains all
             data selections for the backup job. Each entry included in the selection list script file
             must be typed in capital letters and must be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign.
             The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or
             quotes unless they are part of the value itself.
             All possible entries for a selection list script file are described in the following table. Do
             not include all entries in a script file.

             Values for selection list script

             Section        Entry                                    Description

             [Machine]

                            MACHINEx=machine name,logon GUID Specify the logon account used to log
                                                             on to remote machines and back up
                                                             remote data and databases.

             [Selections]

                            SCRIPT_PRIORITY=priority                 Enter the priority for the script.
                                                                     If a priority is not entered, the priority
                                                                     will be Medium. Options are:
                                                                     ◆   Lowest
                                                                     ◆   Low
                                                                     ◆   Medium
                                                                     ◆   High
                                                                     ◆   Highest




208                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using scripts and selection lists


Values for selection list script (continued)

Section       Entry                            Description

              PATHx=String                     Specify which files or directories get
                                               backed up. For example,
                                               PATH1=MyserverMyshareMydir*.
                                               *
                                               The order in which resource selections
                                               are specified is the order in which the
                                               resources will be backed up. Please
                                               note the following about the order in
                                               which selections can be backed up:
                                               ◆   You can order resources within a
                                                   server, but you cannot alternate
                                                   selections across servers. For
                                                   example, you can select C: and D:
                                                   from Server A followed by
                                                   selections from Server B. However,
                                                   you cannot order selections as C:
                                                   from Server A and then C: from
                                                   Server B and then D: from both
                                                   servers.
                                               ◆   For any given server, system state
                                                   or shadow copy components must
                                                   be last.
                                               To use a separate logon account for
                                               backup selections, type a comma after
                                               PATHx=string. Then, type the logon
                                               account that you want to use for that
                                               selection.

              INCLUDEx=0 or 1                  Enter a value of 1 if you want to
                                               include this item in the backup job;
                                               otherwise, enter 0.

              SUBDIRSx-0 or 1                  Enter a value of 1 if you want to
                                               include all subdirectories; otherwise,
                                               enter 0.

              EV_SERVERx=Enterprise Vault      Change x to a unique number and
              server name                      specify the name of the Enterprise
                                               Vault Server to back up.




                                                                                        209
Using scripts and selection lists


             Values for selection list script (continued)

             Section       Entry                                        Description

                           EV_PREFIXx=Enterprise Vault                  Change x to the unique number that
                           selection prefix                             corresponds to the Enterprise Vault
                                                                        Server that you want to back up. Then
                                                                        specify the Enterprise Vault selection
                                                                        prefix.

                           EV_DIRECTORYx=Enterprise Vault               Change x to the unique number that
                           directory                                    corresponds to the Enterprise Vault
                                                                        Server that you want to back up. Then
                                                                        specify the directory that contains the
                                                                        file that you want to back up.

                           EV_FILEx=Enterprise Vault file               Change x to the unique number that
                                                                        corresponds to the Enterprise Vault
                                                                        server that you want to back up. Then
                                                                        specify the file that you want to back
                                                                        up.
                                                                        You can back up the following:
                                                                        ◆   Enterprise Vault sites
                                                                        ◆   Audit databases
                                                                        ◆   FSA Reporting databases
                                                                        ◆   Directory databases
                                                                        ◆   Monitoring databases

                           EXCHANGEx=Exchange Server name               Change x to a unique number and
                                                                        specify the name of the Exchange
                                                                        Server you want to back up.




210                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using scripts and selection lists


Values for selection list script (continued)

Section       Entry                                 Description

              EXCH2ROOTx=Exchange Server name       Specifies the name of the Exchange
                                                    server that contains this selection.
                                                    Change x to a number that
                                                    corresponds to the number of the
                                                    selection. The selections must be in a
                                                    sequential order. Increase the number
                                                    by one for each new selection. For
                                                    example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                    the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                    the selections are out of sequence,
                                                    they are not processed.
                                                    Each selection must specify at least
                                                    the server name and the storage group.
                                                    See the example in
                                                    “EXCH2DBx=Exchange Server
                                                    database name.”

              EXCH2SGx=Exchange Server storage Specifies the name of the Exchange
              group name                       Server storage group that you want to
                                               back up, or that contains the database
                                               you want to back up.
                                                    Change x to the same number used to
                                                    identify the selection for the Exchange
                                                    Server.
                                                    See the example in
                                                    “EXCH2DBx=Exchange Server
                                                    database name.”




                                                                                           211
Using scripts and selection lists

             Values for selection list script (continued)

             Section       Entry                                        Description

                           EXCH2DBx=Exchange Server                     Specifies the name of the Exchange
                           database name                                Server database you want to back up.
                                                                        Change x to the same number used to
                                                                        identify the selection for the Exchange
                                                                        Server and storage group.
                                                                        In the following example,
                                                                        SERVER_NAME is an Exchange server
                                                                        name, and it is the same server in all of
                                                                        the selections. The first selection
                                                                        backs up the First Storage Group, the
                                                                        second selection backs up the Mailbox
                                                                        database in the Second Storage Group,
                                                                        and the third selection backs up the
                                                                        Users database in the Second Storage
                                                                        Group.
                                                                        EXCH2ROOT1=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        EXCH2SG1=First Storage Group


                                                                        EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        EXCH2SG2=Second Storage Group
                                                                        EXCH2DB2=Mailboxes


                                                                        EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        EXCH2SG3=Second Storage Group
                                                                        EXCHDB3=Users

                           EXCH2010_SERVERx=Exchange 2010               Specifies the name of the Exchange
                           Server name                                  2010 server you want to back up.
                                                                        Change x to a unique number to
                                                                        identify the Exchange 2010 server.
                                                                        To back up an Exchange 2010 server,
                                                                        you should use either
                                                                        EXCH2010_SERVER or
                                                                        EXCH2010_DAG, but not both.




212                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using scripts and selection lists


Values for selection list script (continued)

Section       Entry                                Description

              EXCH2010_DAGx=Exchange 2010      Specifies the name of the Exchange
              Database Availability Group name 2010 Database Availability Group
                                               (DAG) you want to back up.
                                                   Change x to a unique number to
                                                   identify the DAG.
                                                   To back up an Exchange 2010 Server,
                                                   you should use either
                                                   EXCH2010_SERVER or
                                                   EXCH2010_DAG, but not both.

              EXCH2010_DBx=Exchange 2010           Specifies the name of the Exchange
              database name                        2010 database that you want to back
                                                   up. It refers to the Exchange 2010
                                                   server or Database Availability Group
                                                   (DAG) that you want to back up.
                                                   Change x to the unique number that
                                                   corresponds to the Exchange 2010
                                                   server or DAG that you want to back
                                                   up.
                                                   EXCH2010_DB is required for
                                                   Exchange 2010 backups.

              SQL2S?=SERVER_NAME                   Specifies the name of the SQL server
                                                   that contains this selection.
                                                   Change ? to a number that
                                                   corresponds to the number of the
                                                   selection. The selections must be in
                                                   sequential order. Increase the number
                                                   by one for each new selection. For
                                                   example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                   the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                   the selections are out of sequence,
                                                   they are not processed. See the
                                                   example in “SQL2NI?=SQL server
                                                   named instance name.”




                                                                                          213
Using scripts and selection lists


             Values for selection list script (continued)

             Section       Entry                                        Description

                           SQL2NI?=SQL server named instance Specifies the named instance on the
                           name                              SQL server to back up.
                                                                        Change ? to the same number used to
                                                                        identify the selection for the SQL
                                                                        server. For example, to back up the
                                                                        named instance ONE, the named
                                                                        instance TWO, and the SQL server
                                                                        itself, the entries would be:
                                                                        SQL2S1=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        SQL2NI1=ONE


                                                                        SQL2S2=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        SQL2NI2=TWO


                                                                        SQL2S3=SERVER_NAME

                           SQL2DB?=SQL server database name Specifies the name of the SQL server
                                                            database to back up. Type *.* to back up
                                                            all the databases. Change ? to a
                                                            number that corresponds to the
                                                            number of the selection.

                           LNSERVER?=SERVER_NAME                        Specifies the name of the Lotus Notes
                                                                        server that contains this selection.
                                                                        Change ? to a number that
                                                                        corresponds to the number of the
                                                                        selection. The selections must be in
                                                                        sequential order. Increase the number
                                                                        by one for each new selection. For
                                                                        example, the first selection would be 1,
                                                                        the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                                                        the selections are out of sequence,
                                                                        they are not processed. See the
                                                                        example in “LNDRIVE?=Drive
                                                                        letter.”




214                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using scripts and selection lists


Values for selection list script (continued)

Section       Entry                            Description

              LNDRIVE?=DRIVE_LETTER            Change ? to the same number used to
                                               identify the selection for the Lotus
                                               Notes server.
                                               In the following example,
                                               SERVER_NAME is a Lotus Notes server
                                               name, and it is the same server in all of
                                               the selections. To back up the D drive
                                               and the E drive on the Lotus Notes
                                               server SERVER_NAME, the entries
                                               would be:
                                               LNSERVER1=SERVER_NAME
                                               LNDRIVE1=D


                                               LNSERVER2=SERVER_NAME
                                               LNDRIVE2=E

              ORCLSRV?=SERVER_NAME             Specifies the name of the Oracle server
                                               that contains this selection.
                                               Change ? to a number that
                                               corresponds to the number of the
                                               selection. The selections must be in
                                               sequential order. Increase the number
                                               by one for each new selection. For
                                               example, the first selection would be 1,
                                               the second selection would be 2, etc. If
                                               the selections are out of sequence,
                                               they are not processed. See the
                                               example name in “ORCLSID?=System
                                               identifier for database.”




                                                                                      215
Using scripts and selection lists


             Values for selection list script (continued)

             Section       Entry                                        Description

                           ORCLSID?=System identifier for               Specifies the SID (System Identifier)
                           database                                     for the Oracle database you want to
                                                                        back up.
                                                                        Change ? to the same number used to
                                                                        identify the selection for the Oracle
                                                                        server.
                                                                        In the following example,
                                                                        SERVER_NAME is an Oracle server
                                                                        name, and it is the same server in all of
                                                                        the selections. To back up the
                                                                        databases SID1 and SID2 on the Oracle
                                                                        server, the entries would be
                                                                        ORCLSRV1=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        ORCLSID1=SID1


                                                                        ORCLSRV2=SERVER_NAME
                                                                        ORCLSID2=SID2

                           SPPS2_FARMx=Farm name                        Change x to the lowest number that is
                                                                        not already used, and specify the name
                                                                        of the Microsoft SharePoint 2003
                                                                        Portal server farm that you want to
                                                                        back up. For example,
                                                                        SPPS2_FARM1=farm name. You
                                                                        should start with number 1 and
                                                                        continue sequentially.
                                                                        The order in which the farm names are
                                                                        specified is the order in which the
                                                                        farms will be backed up.

                           SPPS2_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Required. Specifies the Web server
                                                            name that belongs to the server farm.

                           SPPS2_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to include the Configuration
                                                                        database in the backup; otherwise,
                                                                        enter 0.

                           SPPS2_SSOx=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to include the Single Sign-on
                                                                        database in the backup; otherwise,
                                                                        enter 0.




216                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using scripts and selection lists

Values for selection list script (continued)

Section       Entry                            Description

              SPPS2_DLSx=0 or 1                Enter 1 to include the Document
                                               Library store in the backup; otherwise,
                                               enter 0.

              SPPS2_PORTALxNAMEy=Portal name   Specify the name of the Portal Site
                                               that belongs to the farm. Since each
                                               farm may have more than one portal,
                                               you must use the same format that you
                                               specify for SPPS2_FARMx.
                                               For example:
                                               SPPS2_FARM1=farm name
                                               SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal1
                                               SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal

              SPPS2_TEAM_SITExNAMEy=Windows    Specify the name of the Windows
              SharePoint services site name    SharePoint services site that belongs
                                               to the farm. Since each farm may have
                                               more than one Windows SharePoint
                                               services site, you must use the same
                                               format that you specify for
                                               SPPS2_FARMx.
                                               For example:
                                               SPPS2_FARM1=farm name
                                               SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal1
                                               SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal

              SPPS2_DOC_SITExNAMEy=document    Specify the name of the backward
              library                          compatible document library that
                                               belongs to the farm. Since each farm
                                               may have more than one document
                                               library, you must use the same format
                                               that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx.
                                               For example:
                                               SPPS2_FARM1=farm name
                                               SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal1
                                               SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal




                                                                                    217
Using scripts and selection lists

             Values for selection list script (continued)

             Section          Entry                                     Description

                              SPPS3_FARMx=Farm name                     Change x to the lowest number that is
                                                                        not already used, and specify the name
                                                                        of the Microsoft SharePoint 2007
                                                                        Portal 2 server farm that you want to
                                                                        back up. You should start with the
                                                                        number 1 and continue sequentially.




                              SPPS3_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Required. Specifies the Web server
                                                               name that belongs to the server farm.

                              SPPS3_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1                    Enter 1 to include the Configuration
                                                                        database in the backup; otherwise,
                                                                        enter 0.

                              SPPS3_SSOx=0 or 1                         Enter 1 to include the Single Sign-on
                                                                        database in the backup; otherwise,
                                                                        enter 0.

                              SPPS3_CAx=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to include the central
                                                                        administration site in the backup;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                              SPPS3_WAxNAMEy=Web application            Specify the name of the Web
                              name                                      application. You can list multiple
                                                                        names.

                              SPPS3_SSPxNAMEy=Shared service            Specify the name of the shared server
                              provider name                             provider. You can list multiple names.

                              SPPS3_SIx=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to include the shared instance
                                                                        in the backup; otherwise, enter 0.

                              SPPS3_GSx=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to include the global settings
                                                                        in the backup; otherwise, enter 0.

             Note Alias selections will be ignored unless RUN_IMMEDIATE=1 in the [Schedule] section of
                  backup job or backup job template.

             [Availability]




218                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using scripts and selection lists

Values for selection list script (continued)

Section       Entry                            Description

              USEWINDOW=0 or 1                 Enter 1 to specify when the selection
                                               list will be available for backup each
                                               day; otherwise, enter 0.

              EFFECTIVEDATE=MM/DD/YYYY         Enter the beginning date when the
                                               selection list should be available to be
                                               backed up in MM/DD/YYYY format.
                                               The list will be available every day
                                               from this date onward.

              STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS               Enter the earliest time when the
                                               selection list will be available for
                                               backup in HH:MM:SS format.

              ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                 Enter the latest time when the
                                               selection list will be available for
                                               backup in HH:MM:SS format.

[Media_server]

              PREFERRED_SERVER_NAME=Media      This operation is only available if the
              server name                      Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                               installed.
                                               Specify the preferred media server on
                                               which backup jobs run.

              PREFERRED_SERVER=Media server    This operation is only available if the
              GUID                             Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                               installed.
                                               Specify the preferred media server on
                                               which backup jobs run.

              MEDIA_SERVER_POOL_NAME==Media    This operation is only available if the
              server pool name                 Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                               installed.
                                               Specify the media server pool to use
                                               for the backup job.




                                                                                      219
Using scripts and selection lists


             Values for selection list script (continued)

             Section       Entry                                        Description

                           MEDIA_SERVER_POOL=Media server               This operation is only available if the
                           pool GUID                                    Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is
                                                                        installed.
                                                                        Specify the media server pool to use
                                                                        for the backup job.




220                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using Policy Commands


Using Policy Commands
      You can create policies that enable you to manage backup jobs and strategies. Policies
      contain job templates, which are job attributes that define how and when Backup Exec
      processes a job. Templates specify the devices, settings, and schedule for a job, but do not
      include the selections to be backed up. The policy switches available include:

      Policy Commands

      Operation   Additional         Function          Description
                  Switches

      -o260                          Create new        Executes a policy based on the contents of a
                                     policy            file. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a
                                                       -1 if the command fails.

                  -fpolicy file                        Required. Specifies the name of the policy
                                                       script file to be executed.

      -o261                          Delete a policy   Deletes the specified policy. Returns 1 if the
                                                       command is successful or -1 if it failed.

                  -ipolicy ID or                       Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the
                  -j:policy name                       policy to be deleted.



      -o262                          Update a policy   Update an existing policy.

                  -jpolicy name                        Required. Specifies the name of the policy to
                                                       apply to the selection list.

                  -fpolicy file                        Required. Specifies the name of the policy
                                                       script file to be executed.

      -o263                          Get number of     Displays the number of policies created on a
                                     policies          computer. Returns a 1 if the command
                                                       succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. If -tl: or
                                                       -r is specified, -i or -j is required

                  -i                                   Instructs Backup Exec to display policy IDs.

                  -j                                   Instructs Backup Exec to display policy name.

                  -tl:                                 Instructs Backup Exec to display templates
                                                       for the specified policy ID or policy name.




                                                                                                      221
Using Policy Commands


           Policy Commands (continued)

           Operation    Additional       Function          Description
                        Switches

                        -r                                 Instructs Backup Exec to display templates
                                                           rules for the specified policy ID or policy
                                                           name.

           -o264                         Apply policy to   Applies the specified policy to selection lists.
                                         selection lists   The selection list IDs or names must be
                                                           separated by a comma. Returns a 1 if the
                                                           command succeeds or a -1 if the command
                                                           fails.

                        -ipolicy ID or                     Required. Specifies the ID or name of the
                        -j:policy name                     policy to apply to the selection list.

                        -si:selection                      Required. Specifies the selection list IDs or
                        list IDs or                        names to apply to the policy.
                        -sj:selection
                        list names

                        -ffilename                         Specifies a file that contains a lists of
                                                           selection lists (one per line).

           -o265                         Remove policy     Removes the specified policy from a script.
                                         from script       Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if
                                                           the command fails.

                        -ipolicy ID or                     Required. Specifies the ID or name of the
                        -j:policy name                     policy to remove from the script.

                        -si:selection                      Required. Specifies the selection list IDs or
                        list IDs or                        names to remove from the script.
                        -sj:selection
                        list names

                        -ffilename                         Specifies a file that contains a lists of
                                                           selection lists (one per line).




222                                                 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using Policy Commands


Creating a policy
  Command line switch -o260 creates a policy by reading a policy script file, such as the
  example script file policy.txt. The policy contains a set of required and optional entries
  for creating a policy.
  The FILEx entries specify the names of separate template script files and the TYPEx
  entries specify the type of template.
  A sample policy script file (policy.txt) is included in the UTILS directory on the
  installation DVD. To activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//)
  at the beginning of the line.
  Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a policy that contains three sections, and
  entries for each section. The sections of a policy file are:
  ■    [General]
  ■    [Templates]
  ■    [Rules]

  Policy file values

  Section        Entry                                   Description

  [General]

                 NAME                                    Required. Specifies the name of the
                                                         policy being created.

                 DESCRIPTION                             Specifies a description of the policy
                                                         being created.

  [Template]

                 NAMEx=Name of template                  Required. Specifies the name of the
                                                         template. Multiple entries can be
                                                         entered. For example, NAME1=,
                                                         NAME2=ID, and so on.

                 FILEx=Name of job template file         Required. Specifies the name of a file
                                                         that contains a job template.
                                                         Note The FILEx entry is not required
                                                              for Export media templates.




                                                                                                 223
Using Policy Commands


           Policy file values (continued)

           Section       Entry                             Description

                         TYPEx=Template type               Required. Specifies the type of
                                                           template specified by the FILEx entry.
                                                           Values for TYPEx are:
                                                           ◆   0 = Backup template
                                                           ◆   1 = Duplicate backup sets template
                                                           ◆   2 = Export media template
                                                           ◆   3 = Synthetic full template

           [Rules]

                         RULE_FIRST_TEMPLATEx=Name of      Specifies the name of the template in
                         first template                    the [Template} section with the
                                                           highest precedence.

                         RULE_SECOND_TEMPLATEx=Name of     Specifies the name of the template in
                         second template                   the [Template} section with the lowest
                                                           precedence.




224                                            Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using Policy Commands


Policy file values (continued)

Section       Entry                         Description

              RULE_TYPEx=0 - 8, 10, or 11   Specifies rules for handling the
                                            template job start times.
                                            Rules to handle conflicting job start
                                            times include:
                                            ◆   0 - If start times conflict, <First
                                                Template> supersedes <Second
                                                Template>.
                                            ◆   7 - If start times conflict, <First
                                                Template> will start and upon
                                                completion, starts <Second
                                                Template>
                                            Rules to link jobs together:
                                            ◆   1 - After <First Template> starts,
                                                also start <Second Template>
                                            ◆   2 - After <First Template>
                                                completes, start <Second
                                                Template>.
                                            ◆   3 - If <First Template> successfully
                                                completes, start <Second
                                                Template>.
                                            ◆   4 - If <First Template> fails, start
                                                <Second Template>.
                                            Rules to duplicate backup sets:
                                            ◆   5 - After <First Template>
                                                completes, start <Second
                                                Template> to duplicate the backup
                                                sets.
                                            ◆   6 - After <First Template>
                                                completes, start <Second
                                                Template> to duplicate the backup
                                                sets.




                                                                                       225
Using Policy Commands


           Policy file values (continued)

           Section       Entry                          Description

                                                        Rules to limit when jobs run:
                                                        ◆   8 - <First Template> must
                                                            complete at least once before any
                                                            other templates will be allowed to
                                                            start.
                                                        ◆   11 - Run <First Template> only
                                                            once.
                                                        Rules to export media:
                                                        ◆   10 - After <First Template>
                                                            completes, start <Second
                                                            Template> to export media.




226                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using Policy Commands


Using job template script files within a policy
  When creating a policy, you can define or create a job template script files to use with the
  policy. A job template script file includes the destination, settings, and schedule options.
  After the policy is created, you can use -o264 with a selection script to quickly create jobs
  based on the job templates. When using -o264, a policy and selection lists can only be
  associated with each other once. To use the same policy and selection lists to create
  another job, run -o265 before using -o264.
  Sample script files are included in the UTILS directory on the installation DVD. To
  activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//) at the beginning of
  the line.
  Examples of the template script files are given in the following files:
  ■   Backup template - bjtemplatescript.txt
  ■   Duplicate backup sets template - djtemplatescript.txt
  ■   Synthetic full backup job template - sftemplatescript.txt

  Note The duplicate backup sets template cannot be set to run now.

  Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a job template script file that contains all
  settings and options for a job, except for the data selections.
  Each entry included in the job template script file must be typed in capital letters and
  must be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must
  immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces unless they are part of the value
  itself. For example, to specify in the script that the backup method is working set and
  that the device name is Backup-to-Disk Folder 1, the script should appear as:
      BK_METHOD=1
      DEVICE_NAME="Backup-to-Disk Folder 1"




                                                                                               227
Creating a backup job template script file


Creating a backup job template script file
             Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a backup job template script file that
             contains the following sections, and entries for each section:
             ■    [Backup_Options]
             ■    [Miscellaneous]
             ■    [Schedule]
             Each entry included for the various sections must be typed in capital letters and be
             immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
             follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
             itself. All possible entries for a duplicate backup template job script file are described in
             the following table. In creating a script file, you would not want to include all entries.

             Possible backup job template script file entries

             Section       Entry                                       Description

             [Backup_Options]

                           BK_SET_NAME=backup set name                 Type the name of the backup set to be
                                                                       used by the job.

                           BK_METHOD=0 - 9, 11                         Enter a number from 0 through 9 and
                                                                       11 that corresponds to the backup
                                                                       method you want. Methods are:
                                                                       ◆   0 = Full
                                                                       ◆   1 = Copy
                                                                       ◆   2 = Differential – changed files
                                                                       ◆   3 = Incremental – changed files
                                                                       ◆   4 = Daily
                                                                       ◆   5 = Working set
                                                                       ◆   6 = Incremental – modified time
                                                                       ◆   7 = Differential – modified time
                                                                       ◆   8 = Full – modified time
                                                                       ◆   9 = Archive - Delete files after
                                                                           successful copy backup
                                                                       ◆   11 = Synthetic full backup
                                                                       If 5 is entered as the value, a value
                                                                       must also be entered for
                                                                       WORKING_SET_DAYS.




228                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              BACKUP_LOCAL_MOUNT_POINTS=                        Enter a value of 1 to back up mount
              0 or 1                                            points, which direct a file or directory
                                                                to a local disk or directory path. Using
                                                                this command allows you to back up
                                                                data that is linked to local files, but is
                                                                stored on another device without
                                                                having to actually select the device.

              BACKUP_REMOTE_STORAGE_HSM=                        Enter a value of 1 to back up data that
              0 or 1                                            has been migrated from primary
                                                                storage to secondary storage. The data
                                                                will not be recalled to its original
                                                                location; it will be backed up directly to
                                                                the backup media.
                                                                This command should not be used if:
                                                                ◆   A single device is used for
                                                                    secondary storage and backups and
                                                                    it contains one drive because
                                                                    Remote Storage and Backup Exec
                                                                    will compete for use of the drive.
                                                                ◆   You want to run a backup of your
                                                                    entire system because Backup Exec
                                                                    attempts to access all data that has
                                                                    been migrated to secondary
                                                                    storage and this may take a
                                                                    considerable amount of time.




                                                                                                        229
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           COLLECT_INFO_FOR_SYNTHETIC_BK=0                  When you select this option, Backup
                           or 1                                             Exec compares path names, file names,
                                                                            modified times, and other attributes
                                                                            with those from the previous full and
                                                                            incremental backups. If any of these
                                                                            attributes are new or changed, then
                                                                            the file or directory is backed up.
                                                                            Note This option displays only for
                                                                                 templates.
                                                                            Enter 1 to have Backup Exec do the
                                                                            following:
                                                                            ◆   Collect the information that is
                                                                                required to detect files and
                                                                                directories that have been moved,
                                                                                renamed, or newly installed since
                                                                                the last backup.
                                                                            ◆   Include those files and directories
                                                                                in the backup jobs.
                                                                            Enter 0 to have Backup Exec skip the
                                                                            files and directories that have
                                                                            unchanged archive bits.
                                                                            Backup jobs that have this option
                                                                            selected require more disk space, and
                                                                            take more time to run, than backups
                                                                            that do not.
                                                                            You must select this option for the
                                                                            baseline and incremental backup
                                                                            template in the synthetic backup
                                                                            policy.

                           DEVICE_NAME=device name                          Type the name of the device to be used
                                                                            for the backup.




230                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              OPEN_FILES_METHOD=0 - 3                           Enter a number from 0 through 3 to
                                                                specify how to back up open files.
                                                                Selections include:
                                                                ◆   0 = Never
                                                                ◆   1 = If closed within a specified
                                                                    number of seconds. If this method
                                                                    is selected, use the flag
                                                                    OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME to set the
                                                                    number of seconds for Backup Exec
                                                                    to wait; otherwise, the value set for
                                                                    default options will be used.
                                                                ◆   2 = With a lock
                                                                ◆   3 = Without a lock
                                                                Note If 1 is entered as the value,
                                                                     Backup Exec will wait the
                                                                     number of seconds specified in
                                                                     OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME for the
                                                                     file to close before continuing
                                                                     the backup. If the files do not
                                                                     close during the specified
                                                                     interval, they are skipped.

              OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME=#                             Specifies the number of seconds
                                                                Backup Exec is to wait for a file to close
                                                                before continuing with the backup.

              RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to retension the media before
                                                                backup; otherwise, enter 0.

              PRESERVE_TREE_ON_ARCHIVE=                         Enter 1 to retain the directory
              0 or 1                                            structure of the files that were backed
                                                                up in an archive job on the hard drive;
                                                                otherwise, enter 0.

              SINGLE_INSTANCE_FOR_NTFS=0 or 1                   Enter 1 if single instance store is
                                                                being used, and you want to ensure
                                                                that only one instance of a file for
                                                                NTFS volumes will be backed up
                                                                regardless of the number of single
                                                                instance store (SIS) links that point to
                                                                it. Otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                                        231
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           REMOTE_AGENT_PRIORITY=#                          Select the number of CPU cycles the
                                                                            media server will use to maintain
                                                                            optimal server performance while
                                                                            Remote Agent backups are running.
                                                                            The higher the priority, the more the
                                                                            protected server’s CPU processing
                                                                            power is used during backup
                                                                            operations.
                                                                            Note Allocating fewer CPU cycles to a
                                                                                 backup job results in slower
                                                                                 backup performance.
                                                                            This entry contains the following
                                                                            options:
                                                                            ◆   MEDIUM. Select this option to
                                                                                allocate the default number of CPU
                                                                                cycles the protected server will use
                                                                                during a Remote Agent backup.
                                                                            ◆   LOW. Select this option to allocate
                                                                                fewer server CPU cycles to the
                                                                                backup job.
                                                                            ◆   LOWEST. Select this option to
                                                                                allocate the fewest number of CPU
                                                                                cycles to the backup job.

                           WORKING_SET_DAYS=#                               Note If 5 was entered as the value for
                                                                                 the BK_METHOD=# entry, the
                                                                                 WORKING_SET_DAYS entry
                                                                                 must be completed and included
                                                                                 in the Backup Job Script File.
                                                                            Enter the number of days during
                                                                            which files that you want to include in
                                                                            the backup were last accessed. For
                                                                            example, if you want to specify for a
                                                                            working set backup to include all files
                                                                            last accessed within 30 days, type
                                                                            WORKING_SET_DAYS=30.




232                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              EXCHANGE_METHOD=0 - 3                             If you are backing up an Exchange
                                                                server, use this entry. Enter a number
                                                                from 0 through 3 that corresponds to
                                                                the backup method you want for the
                                                                Exchange database. Methods are:
                                                                ◆   0 = Backup All
                                                                ◆   1 = Backup Copy
                                                                ◆   2 = Backup Log Differential
                                                                ◆   3 = Backup Log Incremental

              EXCHANGE_ENABLE_GRANULAR_                         Enter 1 to enable the restore of
              RESTORE=0 or 1                                    individual documents from database
                                                                backups. This option is only available
                                                                when performing full backups;
                                                                otherwise enter 0.

              EXCHANGE_MBOX_METHOD=0 - 3                        If you are backing up an Exchange
                                                                server, use this entry. Enter a number
                                                                from 0 through 3 that corresponds to
                                                                the backup method you want for the
                                                                Exchange database. Methods are:
                                                                ◆   0 = Full - Back up messages. Reset
                                                                    archive bit.
                                                                ◆   1 = Copy - Back up messages.
                                                                ◆   2 = Differential - Back up changed
                                                                    messages.
                                                                ◆   3 = Incremental - Back up changed
                                                                    messages. Reset archive bit.

              EXCHANGE_SINGLE_INSTANCE=0 or 1                   Enter 1 to back up only a single copy of
                                                                all identical message attachments;
                                                                otherwise, enter 0.

              EXCHANGE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK=0 or Enter 1 to perform a consistency check
              1                               and determine if possible data
                                              corruption exists when using the
                                              Backup Exec - Advanced Disk-based
                                              Backup Option (ADBO) or the
                                              Advanced Open File Option (AOFO);
                                              otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                                      233
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           EXCHANGE_CONTINUE=0 or 1                         Enter 1 to continue the backup job
                                                                            even if the consistency check fails;
                                                                            otherwise, enter 0.

                           EXCHANGE_CONTINUOUS_                             Enter 1 to enable continuous backup of
                           PROTECTION=0 or 1                                Exchange transaction logs with
                                                                            Backup Exec Continuous Protection
                                                                            Server; otherwise, enter 0.

                           EXCHANGE_RECOVERY_POINTS_                        Enter the interval in days, hours, or
                           INTERVAL=xD (days) or xH (hours)                 minutes for making recovery points
                           or xM (minutes)                                  when continuously backing up
                                                                            Exchange transaction logs with
                                                                            Backup Exec Continuous Protection
                                                                            Server.

                           SPPS2_METHOD=0 or 3                              If you are backing up a SharePoint
                                                                            Portal Server. Enter a number 0 or
                                                                            3that corresponds to the backup
                                                                            method you want for the SharePoint
                                                                            Portal Server.
                                                                            ◆   0 = Full - Back up entire database.
                                                                            ◆   3 = Differential - Back up database
                                                                                changes only. Select this to back up
                                                                                only the changes made to the
                                                                                database since the last full backup.
                                                                            Note The differential backup method
                                                                                 cannot be used to back up Index
                                                                                 databases or Document
                                                                                 Libraries. The Full backup
                                                                                 method will be used to back up
                                                                                 these resources.

                           SPPS2_ENABLE_GRANULAR_RESTORE=0 Enter 1 to enable the restore of
                           or 1                            individual documents from database
                                                           backups. This option is only available
                                                           when performing full backups;
                                                           otherwise, enter 0.




234                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              SPPS2_PRE_DBCC=0 or 1                             Enter 1 to run a full consistency check
                                                                (including indexes) of the Microsoft
                                                                SQL databases used by Microsoft
                                                                SharePoint before backing up the
                                                                databases; otherwise, enter 0.

              SPPS2_CONT_ON_CC_FAILURE=0 or 1                   Enter 1 to continue with the backup
                                                                operation even if the consistency
                                                                check fails; otherwise, enter 0.

              SPPS2_RELEASE_LOCK=0 or 1                         Enter 1 to release the lock on the
                                                                SharePoint farm topology before
                                                                backing up data; otherwise, enter 0.

              SQL_METHOD=0 - 3                                  If you are backing up a SQL server, use
                                                                this entry. Enter a number from 0
                                                                through 2 that corresponds to the
                                                                backup method you want for the SQL
                                                                database. Methods are:
                                                                ◆   0 = Backup All
                                                                ◆   1 = Backup Log
                                                                ◆   2 = Backup Log No Truncate
                                                                ◆   3 = Differential

              LOTUS_DOMINO_METHOD=0 - 2                         If you are backing up a Lotus Domino
                                                                server, use this entry. Enter a number
                                                                from 0 through 2 that corresponds to
                                                                the backup method you want for the
                                                                Lotus Domino database. Methods are:
                                                                ◆   0 = Full
                                                                ◆   1 = Differential
                                                                ◆   2 = Incremental

              LOTUS_DOMINO_RECYCLE_LOGS=                        If you are backing up a Lotus Domino
              0 or 1                                            server, use this entry to indicate that
                                                                the Lotus Domino server will reuse the
                                                                transaction log after it has been
                                                                backed up.
                                                                ◆   1 = Recycle logs
                                                                ◆   0 = Do not recycle logs




                                                                                                       235
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           NW_BK_MIGRATED=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to back up migrated NetWare
                                                                            SMS files; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                            This switch can only be used with
                                                                            versions prior to Backup Exec 10.x.

                           NW_BK_DECOMPRESS_FILES=                          If you are backing up NetWare shares
                           0 or 1                                           or volumes, include this entry in the
                                                                            Backup Job Script File. If you want to
                                                                            back up compressed files in
                                                                            decompressed form, enter 1 as the
                                                                            value; otherwise, enter 0.

                           OVERWRITE_JOB=0 or 1                             Enter 1 as the value if you want
                                                                            Backup Exec to overwrite a duplicate
                                                                            job if one exists; otherwise, enter 0.

                           CONTINUE_ON_DBCC=0 or 1                          Enter 1 if you are backing up a SQL
                                                                            server, have specified that a database
                                                                            consistency check is to be performed
                                                                            before the backup, and want the job to
                                                                            continue if the pre-backup database
                                                                            consistency check failed.

                           PRE_BK_DBCC=0 - 3                                If you are backing up a SQL server,
                                                                            include this entry. Enter a value from 0
                                                                            to 3 that corresponds to an option for
                                                                            performing a pre-backup database
                                                                            consistency check. Options are:
                                                                            ◆   0 = None
                                                                            ◆   1 = No Index
                                                                            ◆   2 = Full
                                                                            ◆   3 = Physical only




236                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              POST_BK_DBCC=0- 3                                 If you are backing up a SQL server
                                                                include this entry. Enter a value from 0
                                                                to 3 that corresponds to an option for
                                                                performing a post-backup database
                                                                consistency check. Options are:
                                                                ◆   0 = None
                                                                ◆   1 = No Index
                                                                ◆   2 = Full
                                                                ◆   3 = Physical only

              SQL_STANDBY_OPTION=0 or 1                         Select the Standby value to put the
                                                                database in standby mode when the
                                                                job log backup completes. Select the
                                                                No Recover value to put the database
                                                                in a loading state when the job log
                                                                backup completes. Users cannot
                                                                connect to or query the database while
                                                                it is in a loading state. Values are:
                                                                ◆   0 = Standby
                                                                ◆   1=No Recover

              USE_OPEN_FILE_OPTION=0 or 1                       Enter 1 as the value if you want to use
                                                                the Advanced Open File Option if
                                                                available; otherwise, enter 0. If
                                                                Advanced OFO is unavailable, the
                                                                OPEN_FILES_METHOD specified will
                                                                be used.

              OPEN_FILE_CONFIGURATION=1-4                       Enter a number from 1 through 4 to
                                                                specify the open file technology to
                                                                back up open files. Selections include:
                                                                ◆   1 = Automatically select open file
                                                                    technology
                                                                ◆   2 = Use Microsoft Volume Shadow
                                                                    Copy Service
                                                                ◆   3 = Use VERITAS Volume Snapshot
                                                                    Provider
                                                                ◆   4 = Use VERITAS Storage
                                                                    Foundation for Windows
                                                                    FlashSnap Option




                                                                                                      237
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=0-3                            Enter a number from 0 through 3 to
                                                                            specify the best provider for the
                                                                            selected volume. Selections include:
                                                                            ◆   0 = Automatic - Allows VSS to
                                                                                select the snapshot provider
                                                                            ◆   1 = System - Use Microsoft
                                                                                software shadow copy provider
                                                                            ◆   2 = Software - Use VERITAS
                                                                                Storage Foundation for Windows
                                                                            ◆   3 = Use technology provided by
                                                                                hardware manufacturer

                           USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_SNAPSHOT=0 or Enter 1 if you want to process logical
                           1                               volumes for backup one at a time;
                                                           otherwise, enter 0.

                           OFFHOST_PROVIDER=0 - 3                           Enter a value from 0 to 3 that
                                                                            corresponds to the snapshot provider
                                                                            options for an offhost backup jobs.
                                                                            Options are:
                                                                            ◆   0 = Disable offhost backup
                                                                            ◆   1 = Automatic – Use hardware if
                                                                                available
                                                                            ◆   2 = Software – Use VERITAS
                                                                                Storage Foundation for Windows
                                                                            ◆   3 = Hardware – Use technology
                                                                                provided by hardware
                                                                                manufacturer

                           OFFHOST_DISPOSITION=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to allow the backup job to
                                                                            complete even if any of the volumes
                                                                            selected do not support offhost
                                                                            backup; otherwise, to fail the backup
                                                                            job, enter 0.

                           OFFHOST_SINGLESNAP=0 or 1                        Enter 1 to process logical volumes for
                                                                            offhost backup one at a time;
                                                                            otherwise, enter 0.

                           ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name                     Specify a name for the encryption key.




238                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file

Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3                             Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                                corresponds with the type of
                                                                encryption to use.
                                                                Options are as follows:
                                                                ◆   0 = None
                                                                ◆   1 = Software
                                                                ◆   2 = Hardware
                                                                ◆   3 = Hardware if available,
                                                                    otherwise software
                                                                If 2 or 3 are entered, the default
                                                                encryption key must be 256-bit
                                                                encryption.

              SAV_THREATLEVELTRIGGER=0, 2 - 4                   Select the ThreatCon level at which
                                                                you want automatic backups to run.
                                                                You can select from the following:
                                                                ◆   0 = Disabled
                                                                ◆   2 = Elevated
                                                                ◆   3 = High
                                                                ◆   4 = Extreme

[Media Options]

              MEDIA_SET=Media Set Name                          Enter the name of the media set to be
                                                                used for the backup.

              MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media Password                     If the media has a password, specify
                                                                the password.

              APPEND=0 or 1                                     To append the job to the media set
                                                                specified in the MEDIA_SET entry or
                                                                overwrite if no appendable media is
                                                                available, enter 1 as the value.
                                                                If you want the job to overwrite the
                                                                media set specified in the MEDIA_SET
                                                                entry, enter 0 as the value.
                                                                If you do not enter a value, by default
                                                                the job will be an overwrite job.




                                                                                                       239
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           APPEND_NO_OVERWRITE=0 or 1                       If you want the job to either append to
                                                                            the media set specified in the
                                                                            MEDIA_SET entry, or if no appendable
                                                                            media is available then to terminate,
                                                                            enter 1. To have the job append to the
                                                                            media set, or overwrite if no
                                                                            appendable media is available, enter 0.

                           VERIFY=0 or 1                                    Enter 1 as the value to have Backup
                                                                            Exec automatically perform a verify
                                                                            operation to make sure the media can
                                                                            be read once the backup has been
                                                                            completed; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                            Verifying all backups is recommended.

                           COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 - 3                           Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                                            corresponds with the type of
                                                                            compression to use. Options include:
                                                                            ◆   0 = Hardware compression
                                                                            ◆   1 = Software compression
                                                                            ◆   2 = Hardware if available,
                                                                                otherwise software
                                                                            ◆   3 = None
                                                                            Note To use the default Backup Exec
                                                                                 compression type, do not
                                                                                 include this entry in the script.

                           CHECKSUM=0 or 1                                  Enter 1 as the value if checksums are
                                                                            to be calculated for each data stream
                                                                            written to tape, and then written in a
                                                                            separate stream immediately following
                                                                            the data stream. If 0 is entered as the
                                                                            value, backup performance may be
                                                                            improved, but there will be no way to
                                                                            verify the integrity of the data on the
                                                                            tape.

                           EJECT_MEDIA=0 or 1                               Enter 1 to eject the media when the job
                                                                            completes; otherwise, enter 0.




240                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

[Miscellaneous]

              PRE_JOB_COMMAND=command                           Specify a .exe or batch file command
                                                                that is to run on the media server
                                                                before the backup operation starts.

              POST_JOB_COMMAND=command                          Specify a .exe or batch file command
                                                                that is to run after the backup
                                                                operation completes.

              COMMAND_RUN_POST_IF_                              Enter 1 to execute the post-job
              PRE_SUCCESS=0 or 1                                command only if the pre-job command
                                                                is successful; otherwise, enter 0.

              COMMAND_RUN_JOB_IF_PRE_SUCCESS=                   Enter 1 to execute the job only if the
              0 or 1                                            pre-job command is successful;
                                                                otherwise, enter 0.

              COMMAND_RUN_POST_                                 Enter 1 to execute the post-job
              IF_JOB_FAILS=0 or 1                               command even if the job fails;
                                                                otherwise, enter 0.

              COMMAND_FAIL_JOB_IF_FAILS=                        Enter 1 to allow the pre- and post-job
              0 or 1                                            commands to be successful only if
                                                                completed with a return code of zero.
                                                                Otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                An return code of zero returned to the
                                                                operating system by the pre- or
                                                                post-job command is interpreted by
                                                                Backup Exec to mean the job
                                                                completed successfully. A non-zero
                                                                return code is interpreted by Backup
                                                                Exec to mean the job ended with an
                                                                error.
                                                                After checking the return codes,
                                                                Backup Exec continues processing
                                                                according to selections you made for
                                                                running the pre- and post-job
                                                                commands.
                                                                If you enter 0, the success of the pre-
                                                                and post-job commands is not
                                                                determined based on the return code.



                                                                                                         241
Creating a backup job template script file

             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           COMMAND_AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                       Enter the number of minutes Backup
                                                                            Exec should wait before cancelling a
                                                                            command that did not complete.

                           COMMAND_RUN_OPTION=0 or 1                        Enter 0 to run the command on this
                                                                            media server or 1 to run the command
                                                                            on each server being backed up.

                           NIC_ENABLED=0 or 1                               Enter 1 to use the MAC address
                                                                            specified with the NIC_ADDRESS
                                                                            entry, or the name specified with the
                                                                            NIC_NAME entry.
                                                                            Enter 0 to clear previous settings for
                                                                            the network interface, and to use any
                                                                            available network adapter.
                                                                            “Operations for displaying network
                                                                            interface information” on page 85

                           NIC_ADDRESS=00-00-00-00-00-00                    Enter the Media Access Control (MAC)
                                                                            address for the network interface you
                                                                            selected.
                                                                            To use this setting, NIC_ENABLED
                                                                            must be set to 1.

                           NIC_NAME=name                                    Type the name of a network interface
                                                                            card when NIC_ENABLED=1.

                           NIC_PROTOCOL=0 - 2                               Enter 0 to use any available Internet
                                                                            Protocol. Enter 1 to use IPv4. Enter 2
                                                                            to use IPv6.
                                                                            “Operations for displaying network
                                                                            interface information” on page 85

                           NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=0 or 1                        Enter 0 to use any available subnet
                                                                            prefix. Enter 1 to use a specific subnet
                                                                            prefix.

                           NIC_SUBNET=00.000.00.000                         Specify a subnet prefix when
                                                                            NIC_ENABLED=1 and
                                                                            NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=1.




242                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a backup job template script file


Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                             Description

              NIC_ANY_AVAILABLE=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to use any available network
                                                                interface card. Enter 0 to use only the
                                                                network interface card that you
                                                                specify.

[Schedule]

Note You must enter values when you select to use either SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL,
     SCHED_DAYSOF MNTH, SCHED_DAYSOF WEEK, or DATE before the job is created.

              SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                        Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                format, that the schedule becomes
                                                                effective.

              SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                          Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                                format for this job.

              SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                            Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                                in HH:MM:SS format.

              SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS                   Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                                format for the job to restart on each
                                                                run day. For example, if you have set
                                                                up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                                can also set it up to run every four
                                                                hours on its run day by entering
                                                                SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                                0.

              SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X                           Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                                job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                                the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                                SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

              SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                           Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                format, from which the interval is
                                                                calculated.




                                                                                                      243
Creating a backup job template script file


             Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                            Description

                           SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                              Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                            the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                            string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                            32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                            example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                            15th of the month, type:
                                                                               SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

                           SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                               Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                                            slash, and the week of the month you
                                                                            want the job to run in a comma
                                                                            delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                                            for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                                            Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                                            For the week of the month, values can
                                                                            be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                                            week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                                            fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                                            For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                                            for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                                            type:
                                                                            SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

                           SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                    Enter a specific date when the job
                                                                            should run. For this field, x is a
                                                                            number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                                            to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                                            to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                                            August, type:
                                                                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

                           SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                    Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                                            when the job should not run. For this
                                                                            field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                                            allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                                            For example, to prevent the job from
                                                                            running on the first and 25th of
                                                                            August, type:
                                                                            SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                            SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002



244                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a duplicate backup job template script file


       Possible backup job template script file entries (continued)

       Section       Entry                                            Description

                     DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                                  Enter the start date for the job in
                                                                      MM/DD/YYYY format.

                     TIME=hh:mm:ss                                    Enter the start time for the job in
                                                                      hh:mm:ss format.
                                                                      Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                                           must be separated by colons.

                     RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                             Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run
                                                                      immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                      Note This entry should be used only if
                                                                           no other entries are specified
                                                                           under the schedule section. If no
                                                                           other scheduling options have
                                                                           been selected and this entry is
                                                                           not set, the default value is 1.

                     AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                               Enter the number of minutes after
                                                                      which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                                      completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                                      the job when the job is queued, not
                                                                      when the job begins.

                     HOLD=0 or 1                                      Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                                      schedule the job on hold; otherwise,
                                                                      enter 0.




Creating a duplicate backup job template script file
       Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a duplicate backup job template script file
       that contains entries for the duplicate backup template job options. The duplicate
       backup job template script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other
       job script file. Sections of a Duplicate Backup Job Script include:
       ■   [General]
       ■   [Setcopy_Options]
       ■   [Schedule]




                                                                                                                245
Creating a duplicate backup job template script file


             Each entry included in the duplicate backup job script file must be typed in capital letters
             and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
             follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
             itself. All possible entries for a duplicate backup template job script file are described in
             the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries.

             Possible duplicate job template script file entries

             Section       Entry                                        Description

             [General]

                           BACKUP_SET_DESCRIPTION=                      Type a description of the information
                           Description                                  you are duplicating.

                           PREFERRED_SOURCE_DEVICE_GUID=                Enter the GUID of the device used as
                           Source device guid                           the destination device for the original
                                                                        backup job. Use operation -o63 to
                                                                        display managed drives.

             [Setcopy_Options]

                           DEVICE_NAME=Device name                      Type the name of the device to be used
                                                                        for the duplicate job.

                           MEDIA_SET_GUID=Media set GUID                Enter the GUID of the media set to be
                                                                        used for the duplicate job. Use
                                                                        operation -o69 to display media sets.

                           OVERWRITE_MEDIA=0 or 1                       Enter 1 as the value if you want
                                                                        Backup Exec to overwrite the media;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.

                           APPEND_OVERWRITE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to append this backup to the
                                                                        media set. If there is no appendable
                                                                        media available, the job is appended to
                                                                        overwritable media that will then be
                                                                        added to the media set; otherwise
                                                                        enter 0.

                           APPEND_TERMINATE=0 or 1                      Enter 1 to append to this backup to the
                                                                        media set. If there is no appendable
                                                                        media available, the job is terminated;
                                                                        otherwise, enter 0.




246                                                         Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a duplicate backup job template script file


Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                           Description

              EJECT _MEDIA_AFTER_COMPLETES=0 or Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
              1                                 automatically eject the media in the
                                                drive when the operation completes.

              WRITE_CHECKSUMS=0 or 1                          Enter 1 as the value if checksums are
                                                              to be calculated for each data stream
                                                              written to tape, and then written in a
                                                              separate stream immediately following
                                                              the data stream. If 0 is entered as the
                                                              value, backup performance may be
                                                              improved, but there will be no way to
                                                              verify the integrity of the data on the
                                                              tape.

              RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to retension the media before
                                                              backup; otherwise, enter 0.

              MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media password                   If the media has a password, specify
                                                              the password.

              AUTO_VERIFY=0 or 1                              Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
                                                              automatically perform a verify
                                                              operation to make sure the media can
                                                              be read after the backup has been
                                                              completed; otherwise, enter 0.

              COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 or 1                         Enter 1 to select hardware
                                                              compression; otherwise, enter 0.

              ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name                    Specify a name for the encryption key.




                                                                                                     247
Creating a duplicate backup job template script file


             Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                           Description

                           ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3                           Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                                           corresponds with the type of
                                                                           encryption to use.
                                                                           Options are as follows:
                                                                           ◆   0 = None
                                                                           ◆   1 = Software
                                                                           ◆   2 = Hardware
                                                                           ◆   3 = Hardware if available,
                                                                               otherwise software
                                                                           If 2 or 3 are entered, the default
                                                                           encryption key must be 256-bit
                                                                           encryption.

             [Schedule]

                           SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                      Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                           format, that the schedule becomes
                                                                           effective.

                           SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                        Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                                           format for this job.

                           SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                          Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                                           in HH:MM:SS format.

                           SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS                 Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                                           format for the job to restart on each
                                                                           run day. For example, if you have set
                                                                           up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                                           can also set it up to run every four
                                                                           hours on its run day by entering
                                                                           SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                                           0.

                           SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x                         Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                                           job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                                           the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                                           SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

                           SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                         Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                           format, from which the interval is
                                                                           calculated.


248                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a duplicate backup job template script file


Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                           Description

              SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                             Enter the days of the month you want
                                                              the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                              string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                              32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                              example, to run the job on the first and
                                                              15th of the month, type:
                                                                    SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

              SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                              Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                              slash, and the week of the month you
                                                              want the job to run in a comma
                                                              delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                              for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                              Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                              For the week of the month, values can
                                                              be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                              week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                              fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                              For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                              for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                              type:
                                                                  SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

              SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                   Enter a specific date when the job
                                                              should run. For this field, x is a
                                                              number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                              to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                              to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                              August, type:
                                                              SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                              SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002

              SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                   Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                              when the job should not run. For this
                                                              field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                              allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                              For example, to prevent the job from
                                                              running on the first and 25th of
                                                              August, type:
                                                              SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                              SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002



                                                                                                     249
Creating a duplicate backup job template script file


             Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued)

             Section       Entry                                           Description

                           DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                                 Enter the start date for the job in
                                                                           MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule
                                                                           values are not entered, then the
                                                                           DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and
                                                                           TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used
                                                                           to set the

                           TIME=hh:mm:ss                                   Enter the start time for the job in
                                                                           hh:mm:ss format.
                                                                           Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                                                must be separated by colons.

                           RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                            Enter 1 to run the duplicate backup job
                                                                           immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                           Note This entry should be used only if
                                                                                no other entries are specified
                                                                                under the schedule section. If no
                                                                                other scheduling options have
                                                                                been selected and this entry is
                                                                                not set, the default value is 1.

                           AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                              Enter the number of minutes after
                                                                           which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                                           completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                                           the job when the job is queued, not
                                                                           when the job begins. To specify hours,
                                                                           enter a value divisible by 60.

                           RUN_ACCORDING_RULE=0 or 1                       Enter 1 to run the job based on a
                                                                           template rule. For example, with the
                                                                           After <Template A> completes, start
                                                                           <Template B> rule, <Temaplate B> will
                                                                           run whenever <Template A>
                                                                           completes. Otherwise, enter 0.

                           HOLD=0 or 1                                     Enter 1 if you want the job to be
                                                                           submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0.




250                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a synthetic full job template script file


Creating a synthetic full job template script file
        Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a backup job script file that contains the
        following sections, and entries for each section:
        ■   [General]
        ■   [Synthetic_Options]
        ■   [Schedule]
        Each entry included for the various sections must be typed in capital letters and be
        immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
        follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
        itself. All possible entries for a Backup Job Script File are described in the following table.
        In creating a script file, you would not want to include all entries.

        Possible synthetic full template script file entries

        Section       Entry                                            Description

        [General]

                      BACKUP_SET_DESCRIPTION=                          Type a description of the information
                      Description                                      you are duplicating.

                      PREFERRED_SOURCE_DEVICE_GUID=                    Enter the GUID of the device used as
                      Source device guid                               the destination device for the original
                                                                       backup job. Use operation -o63 to
                                                                       display managed drives.

        [Synthetic_Options]

                      DEVICE_NAME=device name                          Type the name of the device to be used
                                                                       for the backup.

                      MEDIA_SET=Media Set Name                         Enter the name of the media set to be
                                                                       used for the backup.

                      OVERWRITE_MEDIA=0 or 1                           Enter 1 as the value if you want
                                                                       Backup Exec to overwrite the media;
                                                                       otherwise, enter 0.




                                                                                                             251
Creating a synthetic full job template script file


              Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                            Description

                            APPEND_OVERWRITE=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to append this backup to the
                                                                             media set. If there is no appendable
                                                                             media available, the job is appended to
                                                                             overwritable media that will then be
                                                                             added to the media set; otherwise
                                                                             enter 0.

                            APPEND_TERMINATE=0 or 1                          Enter 1 to append to this backup to the
                                                                             media set. If there is no appendable
                                                                             media available, the job is terminated;
                                                                             otherwise, enter 0.

                            EJECT _MEDIA_AFTER_COMPLETES=0 or Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
                            1                                 automatically eject the media in the
                                                              drive when the operation completes.

                            WRITE_CHECKSUM=0 or 1                            Enter 1 as the value if checksums are
                                                                             to be calculated for each data stream
                                                                             written to tape, and then written in a
                                                                             separate stream immediately following
                                                                             the data stream. If 0 is entered as the
                                                                             value, backup performance may be
                                                                             improved, but there will be no way to
                                                                             verify the integrity of the data on the
                                                                             tape.

                            RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1                           Enter 1 to retension the media before
                                                                             backup; otherwise, enter 0.

                            WORM_MEDIA=0 or 1                                Enter 1 to use write once, read many
                                                                             (WORM) media for this backup job;
                                                                             otherwise, enter 0.

                            MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media Password                    If the media has a password, specify
                                                                             the password.

                            AUTO_VERIFY=0 or 1                               Enter 1 to have Backup Exec
                                                                             automatically perform a verify
                                                                             operation to make sure the media can
                                                                             be read after the backup has been
                                                                             completed; otherwise, enter 0.




252                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a synthetic full job template script file


Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                            Description

              COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 - 3                           Enter a number from 0 to 3 that
                                                               corresponds with the type of
                                                               compression to use. Options include:
                                                               ◆   0 = Hardware compression
                                                               ◆   1 = Software compression
                                                               ◆   2 = Hardware if available,
                                                                   otherwise software
                                                               ◆   3 = None
                                                               Note To use the default Backup Exec
                                                                    compression type, do not
                                                                    include this entry in the script.

[Schedule]

Note You must enter values when you select to use either SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL,
     SCHED_DAYSOF MNTH, SCHED_DAYSOF WEEK, or DATE before the job is created.

              SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                       Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                               format, that the schedule becomes
                                                               effective.

              SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                         Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                               format for this job.

              SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                           Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                               in HH:MM:SS format.

              SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS                  Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                               format for the job to restart on each
                                                               run day. For example, if you have set
                                                               up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                               can also set it up to run every four
                                                               hours on its run day by entering
                                                               SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                               0.

              SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X                          Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                               job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                               the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                               SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.




                                                                                                      253
Creating a synthetic full job template script file


              Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued)

              Section       Entry                                            Description

                            SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                          Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                             format, from which the interval is
                                                                             calculated.

                            SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                              Enter the days of the month you want
                                                                             the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                                             string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                                             32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                                             example, to run the job on the first and
                                                                             15th of the month, type:
                                                                                   SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

                            SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                               Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                                             slash, and the week of the month you
                                                                             want the job to run in a comma
                                                                             delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                                             for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                                             Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                                             For the week of the month, values can
                                                                             be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                                             week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                                             fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                                             For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                                             for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                                             type:
                                                                                 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3

                            SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                    Enter a specific date when the job
                                                                             should run. For this field, enter a
                                                                             number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                                             to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                                             to run the job on the first and 15th of
                                                                             August, type:
                                                                             SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                             SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002




254                                                          Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Creating a synthetic full job template script file


Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued)

Section       Entry                                            Description

              SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                    Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                               when the job should not run. For this
                                                               field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                               allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                               For example, to prevent the job from
                                                               running on the first and 25th of
                                                               August, type:
                                                               SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                               SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002

              DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                                  Enter the start date for the job in
                                                               MM/DD/YYYY format.

              TIME=hh:mm:ss                                    Enter the start time for the job in
                                                               hh:mm:ss format.
                                                               Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                                    must be separated by colons.

              RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                             Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run
                                                               immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                               Note This entry should be used only if
                                                                    no other entries are specified
                                                                    under the schedule section. If no
                                                                    other scheduling options have
                                                                    been selected and this entry is
                                                                    not set, the default value is 1.

              AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=#                               Enter the number of minutes after
                                                               which the job is canceled if it is not
                                                               completed. Backup Exec starts timing
                                                               the job when the job is queued, not
                                                               when the job begins.

              HOLD=0 or 1                                      Enter 1 as the value if you want to
                                                               schedule the job on hold; otherwise,
                                                               enter 0.




                                                                                                         255
Using a schedule script with device and media operations


Using a schedule script with device and media operations
             Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a schedule script file that contains all
             settings and options for a device and media operation, such as cleaning a robotic library
             drive, that can be scheduled as a recurring job.
             Each entry included in the schedule script file must be typed in capital letters and must
             be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately
             follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value
             itself.
             All possible entries for a schedule script file are described in the following table. Do not
             include all entries in the script file.
             The following values are in the schedule script file:

             Values for schedule script file

             Section       Entry                                     Description

             [Schedule]

                           SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS                  Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS
                                                                     format for this job.

                           SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS                    Enter the latest time this job can start
                                                                     in HH:MM:SS format.

                           SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS           Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS
                                                                     format for the job to restart on each
                                                                     run day. For example, if you have set
                                                                     up the job to run every seven days, you
                                                                     can also set it up to run every four
                                                                     hours on its run day by entering
                                                                     SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0
                                                                     0.

                           SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X                   Enter the interval in days in which the
                                                                     job is to run. For example, if you want
                                                                     the job to run every seven days, enter
                                                                     SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7.

                           SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY                   Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                                     format, from which the interval is
                                                                     calculated.




256                                                    Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Using a schedule script with device and media operations


Values for schedule script file (continued)

Section       Entry                                            Description

              SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY                       Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY
                                                               format, that the schedule becomes
                                                               effective.

              SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x                              Enter the days of the month you want
                                                               the job to run in a comma delimited
                                                               string. The value is 1 through 32 with
                                                               32 being the last day of the month. For
                                                               example, to run the job on the first and
                                                               15th of the month, type:
                                                                  SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15

              SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x                               Enter the day of the week, a forward
                                                               slash, and the week of the month you
                                                               want the job to run in a comma
                                                               delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7
                                                               for the day of the week with 1 equaling
                                                               Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on.
                                                               For the week of the month, values can
                                                               be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second
                                                               week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the
                                                               fourth week, and 5 for the last week.
                                                               For example, to run the job on Sunday
                                                               for the first three weeks of the month,
                                                               type:

                                                                  SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1
                                                                  /3

              SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY                    Enter a specific date when the job
                                                               should run. For this field, x is a
                                                               number starting at 1, which allows you
                                                               to specify multiple dates. For example,
                                                               if you want the job to run on the first
                                                               and 15th of August, type:
                                                               SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                               SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002




                                                                                                      257
Using a schedule script with device and media operations


             Values for schedule script file (continued)

             Section       Entry                                       Description

                           SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY               Enter a specific date, such as a holiday,
                                                                       when the job should not run. For this
                                                                       field, x is a number starting at 1, which
                                                                       allows you to specify multiple dates.
                                                                       For example, if you want to prevent the
                                                                       job from running on the first and 25th
                                                                       of August, type:
                                                                       SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002
                                                                       SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002

                           DATE=MM/DD/YYYY                             Enter the start date for the job in
                                                                       MM/DD/YYYY format.
                                                                       Note The start date month, day, and
                                                                            year must be separated by
                                                                            forward slashes.

                           TIME=hh:mm:ss                               Enter the start time for the job in
                                                                       hh:mm:ss format.
                                                                       Note The hour, minutes, and seconds
                                                                            must be separated by colons.

                           RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1                        Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run
                                                                       immediately; otherwise, enter 0.
                                                                       Note This entry should be used only if
                                                                            no other entries are specified
                                                                            under the schedule section. If no
                                                                            other scheduling options have
                                                                            been selected and this entry is
                                                                            not set, the default value is 1.

                           AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=XMINUTES/HOURS             Enter a number and select either
                                                                       MINUTES or HOURS to specify to
                                                                       cancel a job if not completed with the
                                                                       selected time.

                           HOLD=0 or 1                                 Enter 1 if you want the job to be
                                                                       submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0.




258                                                        Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Understanding job status messages


Understanding job status messages
       The Command Line Applet displays job statuses as numeric values. Descriptions of
       possible job status return values are:

       Possible job statuses

       Job Status Code                       Description

       JOB_STATE_CANCELED = 1                The job has been terminated because it was
                                             canceled.

       JOB_STATE_COMPLETED = 2               The job has completed and is waiting for final
                                             disposition.

       JOB_STATE_SUCCESS_WITH_               The job has completed successfully with some
       EXCEPTIONS = 3                        exceptions.

       JOB_STATE_DISPATCHED = 4              The job has been dispatched.

       JOB_STATE_HOLD = 5                    The job is on hold.

       JOB_STATE_ERROR = 6                   The job has completed with an error.

       JOB_STATE_INVALID SCHEDULE = 7        The schedule for the task is invalid. The job will
                                             never run.

       JOB_STATE_NOT_IN_WINDOW = 10          The job’s scheduled time window closed before the
                                             job could be dispatched. There may not have been
                                             an available device during the time window.

       JOB_STATE_READY_BUT_PAUSED = 11       The job is ready, but the media server is paused.

       JOB_STATE_PENDING = 12                The job is in a transitional state.

       JOB_STATE_RECOVERED = 13              During startup, Backup Exec detected that a job was
                                             active when the server was shut down, and that the
                                             Checkpoint restart option was not enabled for this
                                             job. The job history log has been marked
                                             JOB_STATE_RECOVERED, and the job has been
                                             scheduled to restart immediately.




                                                                                                  259
Understanding job status messages

            Possible job statuses (continued)

            Job Status Code                      Description

            JOB_STATE_RESUMED = 15               During startup, Backup Exec detected that a job was
                                                 active when the server was shut down, and that the
                                                 Checkpoint restart option was enabled for this job.
                                                 The job history log has been marked
                                                 JOB_STATE_RESUMED, the job has been scheduled
                                                 to restart immediately, and the job flag has been set
                                                 to indicate checkpoint restart.

            JOB_STATE_ACTIVE = 16                The job is currently running on the server.

            JOB_STATE_READY = 17                 The job is eligible for dispatch.

            JOB_STATE_SCHEDULED = 18             The job has a due date in the future.

            JOB_STATE_SUCCESS = 19               The job has been completed successfully.

            JOB_STATE_SUPERCEDED = 20            The job is ready, but another higher precedence task
                                                 is eligible to run.

            JOB_STATE_THRESHOLD_AUTO_            The job was canceled because it was not completed
            ABORT = 21                           within the number of hours or minutes that were set
                                                 for the Enable automatic cancellation option on the
                                                 job schedule.

            JOB_STATE_TO_BE_SCHEDULED = 22       The job needs to have the due date calculated.

            JOB_STATE_LINKED_JOB = 23            The job is linked to another job, and will not start
                                                 until that job is finished.




260                                             Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Index
        A                                                          for SQL server, 235
            ADBO, offhost backup, 105                          backup-to-disk folders
            agent switches, 87                                     creating, 68
            alert configuration, setting, 48                       deleting, 70
            alert switches, 44                                     viewing properties, 70
            alerts                                             bemcmd command, 7
                display, 44                                    bjscript.txt, 127
                respond to, 46                                 bjtemplatescript.txt, 227
                view text, 45
                                                           C
            alias backup, in backup job script file, 159
                                                               catalog job
            AOFO, setting default options, 102
                                                                   creating using script file, 181
        B                                                          script file, creating and using, 181
            Backup Exec Command Line Applet,                   catalog job script file, creating, 181
             about, 5                                          catalogscript.txt, 127
            Backup Exec services                               cleaning job, creating, 58
               commands, 80                                    cleaning slot, designating, 57
               managing, 80                                    command line applet, using, 6
            backup job                                         command line switches
               alias backup in script file, 159                    administrating jobs, 29
               creating, 11                                        backup job, 10
               creating using script file, 127, 251                restore job, 36
               running previously created job, 10                  used with all operations, 9
               script file, creating and using, 127
                                                           D
               switches, 10
                                                               default options
            backup job script file
                                                                  Active Directory, 110
               creating, 127, 251
                                                                  ADBO, 104
               using for alias backup, 159
                                                                  AOFO, 102
            backup job switches, 10
                                                                  backup-to-disk, 122
            backup job template script
                                                                  catalog, 120
               batch file commands, 241
                                                                  database maintenance, 123
               Exchange server settings, 233
                                                                  DB2, 123
               Lotus Domino server settings, 235
                                                                  display progress indicators for job, 93
               media options, 239
                                                                  Exchange server, 108
               NetWare server settings, 236
                                                                  for backup jobs, 96
               open file settings, 231
                                                                  for restore jobs, 99
               SharePoint Portal Server settings, 234
                                                                  IDR, 121
               SQL server settings, 235
                                                                  job default options, 94
            backup selection list, deleting, 33
                                                                  job log, 105
            backup template script
                                                                  job status and recovery, 119
               contents, 228
                                                                  Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh, 114
               creating, 228
                                                                  Lotus Domino, 112
               for Exchange server, 233
                                                                  media, 121
               for Lotus Domino server, 235
                                                                  Microsoft SharePoint, 109
               for NetWare, 236
                                                                  NDMP, 115
               for SharePoint Portal Server, 234

                                                                                                      261
NetWare SMS, 114                           I
              network and security, 100                      inventory job
              Oracle server, 112                                robotic library, 60
              reports, 125                                      stand-alone drive, 69
              schedule, 119
                                                         J
              setting, 92
                                                             job
              setting general options, 93
                                                                 administrating, 29
              setting job priority, 94
                                                                 canceling, 29
              setting startup inventory option, 93
                                                             job log, copying to console, 31
              SQL server, 106
                                                             job monitor switches, 29
              storage provisioning, 118
                                                             job priority, specifying, 10, 25
              trial job, 101
                                                             job status messages, 259
          device management switches, 51
          devices, managing, 51                          L
          discovery job                                      label media, 66, 75
              creating using script file, 186                logon account switches, 81
              script file, creating and using, 186           Lotus Domino Agent
          discovery job script file                             backup job script method, using, 139,
              creating, 186                                        235
              setting discovery options, 187                    setting default options, 112
              setting general options, 186                      using for backup, 18
              setting schedule options, 189              M
              specifying domains, 189                        media
          discoveryscript.txt, 127                              erasing, 64
          djscript.txt, 127                                     formatting, 66
          djtemplatescript.txt, 227                             label, 75
          drive pool                                            labeling, 66
              creating, 60                                      moving, 74
              deleting, 72                                      renaming, 75
          duplicate backup job, creating using script           retension tape, 65
            file, 192                                        media management switches, 51
          duplicate backup template script                   media options
              creating, 245                                     backup job template script, 239
              setting device and media options, 194             default, 121
              setting general options, 192                   media overwrite protection period,
          duplicate job script file, creating, 192            setting, 63
      E                                                      media protection level, setting for backup
          eject media job, 67                                 job, 14
          encryption keys, creating and                      media server pool
            maintaining, 26                                     adding server to, 73
          error-handling rules switches, 49                     creating, 72
          Exchange server                                       deleting, 72
              restore job script file entries, 165              displaying ID, 73
          Exchange Server, backing up, 16                       removing server from, 74
                                                                renaming, 72
      G
                                                             media sets
          global command line switches, 9
                                                                creating, 59
                                                                deleting, 71


262                                                     Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
media vault                                    script file
              adding media to, 76                              about, 127
              creating, 75                                     backup, 228
              deleting, 75                                     duplicate backup job, 245
              displaying, 76                                   restore job, 44
            media, managing, 51                                saving and launching, 207
            move media, 74                                     synthetic full, 251
                                                               updating for this release, 5
        O
                                                           selection lists
            offhost backup, choosing single volume
                                                               creating, 28
              snap, 105
                                                               creating using script file, 208
            online help, 9
                                                               script file
            Oracle Agent, backing up, 19
                                                                   using in command line applet, 208
        P                                                          values for, 208
            policy job                                     server drive, backing up, 15
                creating using script file, 221            sftemplatescript.txt, 227
                template script files, 227                 SQL 7.0
            policy values, 223                                 backing up, 18
            pre/post commands                                  placing in standby mode or load
                restore job script file, 168                     state, 18
                using backup job template script           SQL Server
                  file, 241                                    backing up, 17
            priority, specifying for backup job, 12            restoring, 39
            properties                                     storage array
                physical disk on storage array, 77             configure, 78
                storage array, 77                              configure virtual disk, 79
        R                                                      detect, 79
            rename media, 75                                   rename, 79
            report switches, 84                            Storage Provisioning Option
            requirements, 6                                    default options, 118
            restore job                                    synthetic full job template script,
                creating using script file, 162              creating, 251
                running previously created, 36         T
                script file, creating and using, 162       templates
            restore job script file                            backup script, 228
                creating, 162                                  duplicate backup job script, 245
                running, 36                                    synthetic full job script, 251
            rjscript.txt, 127                                  using script files, 227
            RMAN                                           test run job
                restoring Oracle database, 38                  creating using script file, 199, 204
                using for backup job, 23                       script file, creating and using, 199, 204
            robotic library partitions, creating, 76       test run script file, 199, 204
        S                                                  testrunscript.txt, 127
            schedule script file                       V
               using with device and media                 virtual disk
                 operations, 256                               configure, 79
               values, 256                                     rename, 79



Index                                                                                             263
264   Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
Ad

More Related Content

What's hot (18)

Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2
Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2
Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments   Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
EMC
 
Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...
Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...
Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237
Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237
Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere EnvironmentsUsing EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
EMC
 
Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1
Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1
Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1
jackdowning
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624
End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624
End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Db2 deployment guide
Db2 deployment guideDb2 deployment guide
Db2 deployment guide
bupbechanhgmail
 
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Sap setup guide
Sap setup guideSap setup guide
Sap setup guide
Arnaldo Aguilar
 
White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...
White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...
White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...
EMC
 
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]
gerdev
 
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guideV sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide
gerdev
 
Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...
Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...
Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2
Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2
Ibm tivoli storage manager for aix installation guide 6.2
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments   Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Techbook : Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
EMC
 
Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...
Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...
Ibm tivoli workload scheduler for z os best practices end-to-end and mainfram...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237
Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237
Getting started with ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.3 sg247237
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere EnvironmentsUsing EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
Using EMC Symmetrix Storage in VMware vSphere Environments
EMC
 
Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1
Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1
Deploying IBM Sametime 9 on AIX 7.1
jackdowning
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring 6.1 sg247188
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624
End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624
End to-end scheduling with ibm tivoli workload scheduler version 8.2 sg246624
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli monitoring express version 6.1 sg247217
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...
White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...
White Paper: Using VMware Storage APIs for Array Integration with EMC Symmetr...
EMC
 
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide[1]
gerdev
 
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guideV sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide
V sphere 5-upgrade-best-practices-guide
gerdev
 
Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...
Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...
Deployment guide series tivoli provisioning manager for os deployment v5.1 sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 

Similar to Bews command line_en (20)

Eclipse plugin userguide
Eclipse plugin userguideEclipse plugin userguide
Eclipse plugin userguide
Khúc Vũ
 
IBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation Guide
IBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation GuideIBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation Guide
IBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation Guide
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...
Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...
Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...
Monty Poppe
 
IBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and Technology
IBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and TechnologyIBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and Technology
IBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and Technology
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Implementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex System
Implementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex SystemImplementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex System
Implementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex System
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Implementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex System
Implementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex SystemImplementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex System
Implementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex System
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer Advanced Technical Design Guide
Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer  Advanced Technical Design Guide Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer  Advanced Technical Design Guide
Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer Advanced Technical Design Guide
aktivfinger
 
HRpM_UG_731_HDS_M2
HRpM_UG_731_HDS_M2HRpM_UG_731_HDS_M2
HRpM_UG_731_HDS_M2
Nicholas Pierotti
 
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+GuideS Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
guestd2fe1e
 
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+GuideS Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
guestd2fe1e
 
Db2 virtualization
Db2 virtualizationDb2 virtualization
Db2 virtualization
bupbechanhgmail
 
OE Application Server Administratoion
OE Application Server AdministratoionOE Application Server Administratoion
OE Application Server Administratoion
tawatchai.psp
 
Moving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 Migration
Moving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 MigrationMoving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 Migration
Moving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 Migration
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062
Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062
Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Getting Started with KVM for IBM z Systems
Getting Started with KVM for IBM z SystemsGetting Started with KVM for IBM z Systems
Getting Started with KVM for IBM z Systems
Mark Ecker
 
Windows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdf
Windows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdfWindows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdf
Windows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdf
LokeshSainathGudivad
 
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Eclipse plugin userguide
Eclipse plugin userguideEclipse plugin userguide
Eclipse plugin userguide
Khúc Vũ
 
IBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation Guide
IBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation GuideIBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation Guide
IBM Flex System p260 and p460 Planning and Implementation Guide
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...
Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...
Redbook: Running IBM WebSphere Application Server on System p and AIX: Optimi...
Monty Poppe
 
IBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and Technology
IBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and TechnologyIBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and Technology
IBM PureFlex System and IBM Flex System Products and Technology
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Implementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex System
Implementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex SystemImplementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex System
Implementing Systems Management of IBM PureFlex System
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Implementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex System
Implementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex SystemImplementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex System
Implementing IBM SmartCloud Entry on IBM PureFlex System
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Implementing ibm tivoli omegamon xe for web sphere business integration v1.1 ...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer Advanced Technical Design Guide
Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer  Advanced Technical Design Guide Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer  Advanced Technical Design Guide
Book VMWARE VMware ESXServer Advanced Technical Design Guide
aktivfinger
 
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+GuideS Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
guestd2fe1e
 
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+GuideS Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
S Pii Plus+C+Library+Programmer+Guide
guestd2fe1e
 
OE Application Server Administratoion
OE Application Server AdministratoionOE Application Server Administratoion
OE Application Server Administratoion
tawatchai.psp
 
Moving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 Migration
Moving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 MigrationMoving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 Migration
Moving to IBM PureFlex System x86-to-x86 Migration
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062
Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062
Tivoli and web sphere application server on z os sg247062
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Getting Started with KVM for IBM z Systems
Getting Started with KVM for IBM z SystemsGetting Started with KVM for IBM z Systems
Getting Started with KVM for IBM z Systems
Mark Ecker
 
Windows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdf
Windows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdfWindows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdf
Windows Internals Part 2_6th Edition.pdf
LokeshSainathGudivad
 
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Deploying rational applications with ibm tivoli configuration manager redp4171
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

Complete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdf
Complete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdfComplete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdf
Complete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdf
Software Company
 
Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...
Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...
Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...
BookNet Canada
 
Technology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data Analytics
Technology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data AnalyticsTechnology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data Analytics
Technology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data Analytics
InData Labs
 
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond SparkRusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
carlyakerly1
 
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
Daniel Lehner
 
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk
 
TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...
TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...
TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...
TrustArc
 
tecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdf
tecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdftecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdf
tecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdf
fjgm517
 
Heap, Types of Heap, Insertion and Deletion
Heap, Types of Heap, Insertion and DeletionHeap, Types of Heap, Insertion and Deletion
Heap, Types of Heap, Insertion and Deletion
Jaydeep Kale
 
Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)
Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)
Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)
Ortus Solutions, Corp
 
AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...
AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...
AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...
SOFTTECHHUB
 
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi ArabiaMobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Steve Jonas
 
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdfSAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
Precisely
 
Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in Business
Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in BusinessGenerative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in Business
Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in Business
Dr. Tathagat Varma
 
Linux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded Developers
Linux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded DevelopersLinux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded Developers
Linux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded Developers
Toradex
 
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For DevsBuild Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Brian McKeiver
 
Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...
Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...
Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...
Noah Loul
 
Manifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In France
Manifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In FranceManifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In France
Manifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In France
chb3
 
The Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdf
The Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdfThe Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdf
The Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdf
Abi john
 
UiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager API
UiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager APIUiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager API
UiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager API
UiPathCommunity
 
Complete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdf
Complete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdfComplete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdf
Complete Guide to Advanced Logistics Management Software in Riyadh.pdf
Software Company
 
Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...
Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...
Transcript: #StandardsGoals for 2025: Standards & certification roundup - Tec...
BookNet Canada
 
Technology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data Analytics
Technology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data AnalyticsTechnology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data Analytics
Technology Trends in 2025: AI and Big Data Analytics
InData Labs
 
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond SparkRusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
Rusty Waters: Elevating Lakehouses Beyond Spark
carlyakerly1
 
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
How Can I use the AI Hype in my Business Context?
Daniel Lehner
 
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk Security Update | Public Sector Summit Germany 2025
Splunk
 
TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...
TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...
TrustArc Webinar: Consumer Expectations vs Corporate Realities on Data Broker...
TrustArc
 
tecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdf
tecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdftecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdf
tecnologias de las primeras civilizaciones.pdf
fjgm517
 
Heap, Types of Heap, Insertion and Deletion
Heap, Types of Heap, Insertion and DeletionHeap, Types of Heap, Insertion and Deletion
Heap, Types of Heap, Insertion and Deletion
Jaydeep Kale
 
Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)
Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)
Into The Box Conference Keynote Day 1 (ITB2025)
Ortus Solutions, Corp
 
AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...
AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...
AI EngineHost Review: Revolutionary USA Datacenter-Based Hosting with NVIDIA ...
SOFTTECHHUB
 
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi ArabiaMobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Mobile App Development Company in Saudi Arabia
Steve Jonas
 
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdfSAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
SAP Modernization: Maximizing the Value of Your SAP S/4HANA Migration.pdf
Precisely
 
Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in Business
Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in BusinessGenerative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in Business
Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) in Business
Dr. Tathagat Varma
 
Linux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded Developers
Linux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded DevelopersLinux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded Developers
Linux Support for SMARC: How Toradex Empowers Embedded Developers
Toradex
 
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For DevsBuild Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Build Your Own Copilot & Agents For Devs
Brian McKeiver
 
Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...
Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...
Noah Loul Shares 5 Steps to Implement AI Agents for Maximum Business Efficien...
Noah Loul
 
Manifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In France
Manifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In FranceManifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In France
Manifest Pre-Seed Update | A Humanoid OEM Deeptech In France
chb3
 
The Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdf
The Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdfThe Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdf
The Evolution of Meme Coins A New Era for Digital Currency ppt.pdf
Abi john
 
UiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager API
UiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager APIUiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager API
UiPath Community Berlin: Orchestrator API, Swagger, and Test Manager API
UiPathCommunity
 
Ad

Bews command line_en

  • 1. SymantecTM Backup Exec 2010 Command Line Applet
  • 2. Symantec Legal Notice Copyright © 2009 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, Backup Exec, and the Symantec logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Symantec Corporation and its licensors, if any. THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation” as defined in FAR Sections 12.212 and DFARS Section 227.7202. Symantec Corporation 20330 Stevens Creek Boulevard Cupertino, CA 95014 http://www.symantec.com 2 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 3. Table of Contents Updating scripts for use with this release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Command Line Applet requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the Command Line Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using command line switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Switches used with all operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Backup job operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operations and switches for administrating jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Restore job operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Operations and switches for viewing and responding to alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Operations and switches for error-handling rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Operations and switches for managing media and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Backup Exec services commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Logon account operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Report operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Operations for displaying network interface information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Database management operations and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Setting default options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Using job script files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Creating a backup job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Creating a restore job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating a catalog job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Creating a discovery job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Creating a duplicate backup job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Creating a test run job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Creating a copy job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Saving and launching the job script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Using scripts and selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Creating a selection list script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 3
  • 4. Using Policy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Creating a policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Using job template script files within a policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Creating a backup job template script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Creating a duplicate backup job template script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Creating a synthetic full job template script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Using a schedule script with device and media operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Understanding job status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 4 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 5. Symantec Backup Exec - Command Line Applet The Backup Exec Command Line Applet is a convenient way to access some of the most useful features of Backup Exec from a command prompt. The Command Line Applet allows management of only one media server at a time, but allows for remote management of media servers within an enterprise. However, if the Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed, you can administer all servers managed by the central administration server. Backup Exec must be installed and running on a media server in order for the Command Line Applet to target it, but the Command Line Applet does not have to be run from a media server. The Command Line Applet uses functional command switches typed in a command prompt window to perform most Backup Exec functions and utilities. Note Backup Exec Command Line Applet is only backwards compatible for a previous release and dot releases of the same version of Backup Exec. Updating scripts for use with this release This release of the Backup Exec Command Line Applet provides improved output from command switches and includes support for new features and capabilities in Backup Exec. Symantec strongly recommends that you use the latest release of the Command Line Applet. You may need to update existing job scripts to take advantage of the improved command switch output. While you update and test your job scripts with this release of Backup Exec Command Line Applet, you can continue to use the previous version of the Command Line Applet. 5
  • 6. Command Line Applet requirements Command Line Applet requirements The Backup Exec Command Line Applet works with a local or remote Backup Exec server installation. Minimum system requirements include: Command Line Applet requirements Operating System You can find a list of compatible operating systems, platforms, and applications at the following URL: http://entsupport.symantec.com/umi/V-269-1 Processor Pentium system Memory Required 16 MB RAM Disk Space A minimum of 1 MB of hard disk space after Microsoft Windows is installed Other Hardware DVD-ROM Using the Command Line Applet The Backup Exec Command Line Applet is installed with Backup Exec. After installation, to run the applet on another computer, copy bemcmd.exe to a computer that meets the minimum requirements and is running Windows RPC services. If you copy bemcmd.exe to another computer, the following files must exist on that computer: ■ beclass.dll ■ becluster.dll ■ BECrypto.dll ■ besocket.dll ■ bestdutl.dll ■ libvxsigcomp2.dll ■ msvcp71.dll ■ msvcr71.dll ■ serdll.dll ■ vxcrypto.dll 6 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 7. Using command line switches If these files do not already exist, copy them to the computer along with bemcmd.exe. To use the Command Line Applet, type bemcmd followed by a series of command switches in a command prompt window. The Command Line Applet will attempt to complete the requested task, and then return a value to the command prompt indicating success or failure. Backup Exec functions and utilities that you can run using the Command Line Applet include: ■ Run or cancel a previously created jobs. ■ Create and run jobs for local or remote file selections, including databases on Microsoft Exchange, SQL, Lotus Domino, Oracle, UNIX, and SharePoint installations. ■ Create selection lists. ■ Create protection policies that include job templates and rules. ■ Create, run, and monitor utility jobs. Note This release of the Command Line Applet does not support submission of verify or rewind jobs. ■ Set default options for all jobs. ■ Obtain job status and the number of scheduled, active, and completed jobs. ■ Create media sets and drive pools. ■ Perform drive utilities and get information about the status of drives. ■ Start and stop Backup Exec system services. ■ Retrieve information on and respond to job alerts. ■ Determine if the media server is available on the network. ■ View and print Backup Exec reports. Note The Command Line Applet can target clustered media servers. The only limitation is that the Command Line Applet can target a device pool, but not a specific device in that device pool. Using command line switches To use the Command Line Applet on your computer, type the appropriate command line switch and any additional information required. For example, to run a previously created backup job named Operations Weekly, type the following at the command prompt: 7
  • 8. Using command line switches bemcmd -o1 -j"Operations Weekly" In this example, -o1 is the operation to submit the backup job. The command line switch -j specifies the name of the backup job. Because the job name contains spaces, quotation marks are required around the job name. The job “Operations Weekly” was previously created through the Backup Exec administration console. By default, the backup will be done on the computer where the Command Line applet is executed. To run this same job on a remote computer named Genesis, type the following at the command prompt: bemcmd -cGenesis -o1 -j"Operations Weekly" The command line switch -c specifies the name of the media server where the job is to be run. When connecting to a remote server, if you are required to provide a user name and password, type the following at the command prompt, substituting the text appearing in italics with the correct names: bemcmd -cGenesis -nuser_name -ppassword -o1 -j"Operations Weekly" If the value contains a space or a colon, enclose the value with quotation marks. If the switch contains more than one letter a colon must appear immediately after the switch or the switch itself must be enclosed in quotation marks. Switches that consist of only a single character do no require a colon after the switch. In each of the previous examples, a -1 is returned if the job fails. You can also track the status of the job submission by including the Verbose Output command line switch -v. Substitute the text that appears in italics next to the command, such as job name, with a value, such as the correct job name. For commands using Job IDs, this version of Backup Exec uses a globally unique identifier (GUID) in a 16-byte hex string format for each job. Note Command line switches appearing in BOLD are required. 8 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 9. Using command line switches Switches used with all operations The following command line switches can be used with all operations. Command line switches for all operations Item Description -? Displays help on all command line operations, usage, and special switches. -?operation number Displays help about a command line operation. -ooperation number -? -cmedia server Specifies the name of the media server where the operation is to be performed. If a media server name is not specified, the local computer name is used by default. -llogfile Directs all output to a specified logfile and to the console. You must specify the logfile name where the output is to be written. -la:logfile Appends all output to the specified logfile and to the console. You must specify the logfile name where the output is to be written. -nuser name Specifies the user name credential for logging on to a remote Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current credential is used. -ppassword Specifies the password credential for logging on to a remote Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current password credential is used. -tBackup Exec server Specifies the type of OS the server is running. The default is type Windows. To specify a NetWare server, type -tNW. To specify a Windows server, type -tNT. -v Displays information detailing what has occurred while running the Command Line Applet and the specified option. This command is useful when tracing the sequence of events using the command line applet. -w Waits for the job to complete before exiting the program. The commands with switch -w return a 1 if successful or -1 on failure. 9
  • 10. Using command line switches Command line switches for all operations (continued) Item Description --deprecation Displays commands that are deprecated in Backup Exec. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds, a -1 if the command fails, or a 0 if the command partially succeeds. --category Displays category numbers that you append to the -? switch. Backup job operations and switches You can run a previously created job or submit a new backup job using the commands presented in the following table. You can also create a backup job script file that the Command Line Applet can use instead of command line switches. Backup job commands Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o1 Run backup job Runs a backup job that has been previously defined. Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the previously defined job that Backup Exec should run. Note If there are jobs with the same name, only one of the jobs will run. To ensure that the correct job runs, you should use the job ID instead of the job name to specify which job will run. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. 10 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 11. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o2 Create backup Creates and runs a backup job for a specified job list of files. This operation returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name Specifies the name Backup Exec will assign to this job. If you do not specify a name, a default name is generated. -ddevice name Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec should use for backup. When backing up a remote server, the device name will be the name of the remote server. -sd:device name Use this switch instead of the -d switch to indicate that this device name should be checked against the devices (and device pools) on the target server, and the job should only run if the device exists. If the device does not exist, and if the -v (verbose) switch is used, the following message appears: Device or Device Pool specified does not exist. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name 11
  • 12. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. 12 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 13. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -sfile list or Required. Specifies a path to a group of files, -sf:file name the name of a file that contains a list (one per or line) of files, or an existing selection list name -sl:selection to be backed up. list name The list should be comma delimited. Selections that end with a backslash indicate the selection is a directory. Selections that do not end with a backslash indicate the selection is a file. To back up System State, type "server nameSystem?State*.*" after -s. Note To back up Shadow Copy Components on a Windows 2003 computer, type "server nameShadow?Copy ?Components*.*" after -s. By default, subdirectories will be recursed; to skip subdirectories during backup, the characters /n should appear before the comma separating the entries, and the last quotation mark. Include a space between the list of files and the /n entry. For example, "c:winnt*.* /n". If Unix files are included in the selections, the characters /u should appear before the comma separating the entries, and the last quotation mark. If the sudirectories are skipped during backup, the /n characters must precede the /u characters. If the /n characters are in the entry, include a space between the list of files and the /n entry. For example, "c:winnt*.* /n/u". The order in which resource selections are specified is the order in which the resources will be backed up. Note the following about the order in which selections can be backed up: 13
  • 14. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches ◆ You can order resources within a server, but you cannot alternate selections across servers. For example, you can select C: and D: from Server A followed by selections from Server B. However, you cannot order selections as C: from Server A and then C: from Server B and then D: from both servers. ◆ For any given server, System State or shadow copy components must be ordered last. -mmedia set Specifies the name of the media set Backup Exec should target. -mp:media Specifies the media protection level: protection ◆ 0 = Overwrite level ◆ 1 = Append to media, overwrite if not available ◆ 2 = Append to media, terminate if not available -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the command line or the Backup Exec administration console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -e or -ef:file Specifies a list of items or the name of a file name that contains a list of items to exclude from the backup job. -rl: List of server Specifies the server name and logon account and logon GUIDs. The list should be comma delimited. accounts 14 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 15. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -rf: File name of Specifies the name of the file that contains server and logon the server name and logon account GUIDs. accounts The list should be comma delimited with a blank line at the end of the list. -o3 Back up server Creates and runs a backup job to back up the drive specified drive on the media server. Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -ddrive name Specifies the drive letter of the drive that Backup Exec should backup. If no drive letter is specified, the job will default to C: drive. When backing up a remote server, the device name will be the name of the remote server. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. 15
  • 16. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the command line or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o6 Back up Creates and runs a backup job for Exchange Exchange Server Server. Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. Note The Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server must be enabled from the media server in order for this command to work. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -sg:storage Required. Specifies the storage group to back group up. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. 16 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 17. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the Command Line Applet or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o8 Back up SQL Creates and runs a backup job for SQL server. server Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. Note The Agent for Microsoft SQL Server must be enabled on the media server in order for this command to work. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -db:database Specifies the name of the database to back name up. Enter -db:*.* to back up the default instance on the local machine. -ni:named Specifies the named instance to back up. instance -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -svr:server name Specifies the name of the remote SQL server to back up. 17
  • 18. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the command line or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -lo:database Places a Microsoft SQL Server database in mode either standby mode or in a loading state. Values are: 0 = None. 1 = Standby. Place database in standby mode. 2 = No recover. Place database in a loading state. -o17 Back up Lotus Creates and runs a backup job of the Lotus Notes server Notes server. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -ddrive name Required. Specifies the drive letter where Lotus Notes is installed. 18 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 19. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -tl:path Specifies the complete path to the transaction log file. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the command line or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o18 Back up Oracle Creates and runs a backup job of the Oracle server server. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or -1 if the command fails. Note Only one SID can be specified per command. Use -si to indicate the SID name to back up. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -si:SID name Required. Specifies the SID name to back up. 19
  • 20. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the Command Line Applet or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -ddevice name Specifies the name of the device that Backup Exec should use for the alias backup. 20 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 21. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o24 Back up a Creates and runs a backup job for the Microsoft Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2003. SharePoint Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if Portal Server the command succeeds or a -1 if the 2003 command fails. The Agent for Microsoft SharePoint must be enabled on both the media server and the server on which SharePoint Portal Server is installed in order for this command to work. You must specify either the -wb switch or the -fm switch. If you specify either switch, the other is optional -wb:web server Required. Specifies the name of a Web name server that belongs to the farm. -fm:farm name Required. Specifies the SharePoint Portal Server farm to back up. -cf Includes the Configuration database in the backup job. -ss Includes the Single sign-on database in the backup job. -ds Includes the Document Library store in the backup job. -ps:portal site Specifies a list portal sites to back up. This name list should be comma delimited. If you do not specify a list of portal sites, then all portal sites in the farm are backed up. You can display a list of portal sites if you use the -o26 switch. 21
  • 22. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ws:Windows Specifies a list of Windows SharePoint SharePoint Services site name to back up. This list should Services sites be comma delimited. If you do not specify a list of Windows SharePoint Services sites, then all Windows SharePoint Services sites in the farm are backed up. You can display a list of Windows SharePoint Services site names if you use the -o26 switch. -dl:document Specifies a list of backward compatible library names document libraries to back up. This list should be comma delimited. If you do not specify a list of backward compatible document libraries, then all backward compatible document libraries in the farm are backed up. You can display a list of document library names if you use the -o26 switch. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -ddevice name Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec should use for backup. When backing up a remote server, the device name will be the name of the remote server. 22 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 23. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the command line or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a run now job), the -w is ignored. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -o28 Use Oracle Use RMAN to create and run a backup job for Recovery an Oracle database. Returns a job instance ID. Manager Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a (RMAN) to back -1 if the command fails. up an Oracle database -svr:server name Required. Specifies the name of a server on which Oracle runs. -sid:Oracle SID Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID. -a Backup up all archived logs. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -ddevice name Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec should use for backup. When backing up a remote server, the device name will be the name of the remote server. 23
  • 24. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a run now job), the -w is ignored. -o52 Back up a Creates and runs a backup job for the Microsoft Microsoft SharePoint Server 2007. Returns a SharePoint job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the Server 2007 command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. The Agent for Microsoft SharePoint must be enabled on both the media server and the server on which SharePoint server is installed in order for this command to work. You must specify either the -wb switch or the -fm switch. If you specify either switch, the other is optional -wb:web server Required. Specifies the name of a web name server that belongs to the farm. -fm:farm name Required. Specifies the SharePoint server farm to back up. -cf: Includes the Configuration database in the backup job. -ss: Includes the Single sign-on database in the backup job. -ca Backs up the central administration site. -wa:Web Specifies the name of the Web application. application You can list multiple names. name -sp: shared Specifies the name of the shared server service provider. You can list multiple names. provider name or -ssp shared service provider name 24 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 25. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -si Backs up the shared instance. -gs Backs up the global settings. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the previously defined job that Backup Exec should run. Note If there are jobs with the same name, only one of the jobs will run. To ensure that the correct job runs, you should use the job ID instead of the job name to specify which job will run. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -ddevice name Specifies the name of the device Backup Exec should use for backup. When backing up a remote server, the device name will be the name of the remote server. -r Replace existing Instructs Backup Exec to replace a previously job defined job with this new one. You can replace a job that was created either through the command line or the Backup Exec Administration Console, as long as that job has already been created and saved. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a run now job), the -w is ignored. 25
  • 26. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -e Enables Backup Exec Granular Recovery Technology (GRT), which lets you restore individual items from tape. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name -o90 Launch job Executes a job based on the contents of a using job script script file. Return values depend on the type file of script. Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. For more information about Backup Job Script Files, see “Using job script files” on page 127. -fscript file Required. Specifies the name of the Backup Exec job script file. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a run now job), the -w is ignored. -o99 Manage an Creates and maintains encryption keys. encryption key -kkey name Required. Specifies the name of the encryption key. -pp:pass phrase Required when creating a new key. Specifies a pass phrase for this key. For 128-bit AES encryption, the pass phrase must be at least eight characters. For 256-bit AES encryption, the pass phrase must be at least 16 characters. 26 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 27. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -em:encryption Specifies the encryption method to use. method Values are as follows: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Software ◆ 2 = Hardware ◆ 3 = Hardware if available, otherwise software Use this switch with the -dk parameter to configure the default encryption method for new backup or duplicate backup set jobs. To specify the encryption method, you must first set a default encryption key. If you type 2 or 3, the default key must be 256-bit encryption. If you enter the -dk parameter but not the -em parameter, then the encryption method defaults to software. -et:encryption Specifies the encryption type to use for this type (128 or key. Your choices are 128-bit AES or 256-bit 256-bit) AES. The 256-bit AES encryption provides a stronger level of security than 128-bit AES encryption. However, backup jobs may process more slowly with 256-bit AES encryption than with 128-bit AES encryption. -kt:key type Specifies the key type for the encryption key. Enter 1 for a common key; otherwise, enter 0 for a restricted key. If a key is common, any Backup Exec user can use the key to back up and restore data. If a key is restricted, any Backup Exec user can use the key to back up data, but only the key owner or a user who knows the pass phrase can use the key to restore the encrypted data. 27
  • 28. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -dk: Specifies the encryption key as the default key for new backup or duplicate backup set jobs. To clear the default key, specify the -dk: parameter with the key name “None.” -d Deletes an encryption key. If you do not specify the -d switch, an encryption key will be created. -o220 Create selection Creates a list of resource selections to be used list when creating a backup job. -sselection Required. Specifies the name of the selection name list. -ddescription A brief description of the selection list. -fscript file Required. Specifies the selections to be contained in this selection list. Format for scripts is [MACHINE] MACHINE1=machine name|logon GUID Each path must be on a separate line. For example: PATH1=C:test*.*|{1950A99C-2423-451E-B9 77-225717870CEE} PATH2=C:test2*.* An example script is available in the selectionscript.txt file in the WINNTUTILSI386 directory on the Backup Exec DVD. -sn:media Specifies a preferred server name or media server name or server pool name for the job. -pn:media server pool name 28 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 29. Using command line switches Backup job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pi:pool ID Specifies a preferred server pool ID for the job. -o601 Displays Displays the live updates you have installed. installed hot fixes and service packs -o999 Error code Displays an error message for an error code. lookup -eerror code Specifies the error code for the error message you want to display. Operations and switches for administrating jobs Several command switches allow you to administer your jobs. These switches, which allow you to obtain information about the jobs, view job histories, and cancel a job, include: Job monitoring switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o15 Get job state Displays one of many predefined job states if the command was successful. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID -ijob ID that contains the job statuses to display. 29
  • 30. Using command line switches Job monitoring switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o16 Dump job status Copies to the console the job information and for scheduled descriptive headings for each item associated and active job with the job ID. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the job to cancel. -o20 Cancel job Cancels a job. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the job to cancel. -o21 Dump Displays completed job status. Returns a 1 if completed job the command succeeds or a -1 if the status command fails. -j job name -ijob Specifies the job ID or job history ID that ID or -hi:job contains the job statuses to display. history ID -e Use this switch with -ijob ID to display details for the last instance of the job. -o22 Jobs on hold Displays all the jobs that have the on hold status. If you do not specify -j or -i only the number of jobs on hold appears. -i Use this switch to display job IDs. -j Use this switch to display job names. -o23 Query job Displays information about all job states and job types in the Job Monitor. -sjob state Specifies the state of the job you want to query. -qjob type Specifies the type of job you want to query. -i Use this switch to display job IDs. 30 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 31. Using command line switches Job monitoring switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -j Use this switch to display job names. -js: Use this switch to display a list of available job states that you can use with the -s switch. -jt: Use this switch to display a list of available job types that you can use with the -q switch. -dj: Use this switch to display a list of jobs that delete after the job completes. -o30 Dump job log Copies to the console the job log name that is name of associated with the specified job ID or job completed job name. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the job. -o31 Dump job log Copies to the console the contents of the job contents log specified on the command line. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ffile name Required. Specifies the job log name. -soutput style Specify a 0 for text output or 1 for HTML output. -o35 Rename a job Renames a job. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ijob id Rename job Required. Instructs Backup Exec to rename associated with the job associated with the job IDs. the job ID. -jjob name Current name of Required. Instructs Backup Exec to rename the job to the job. rename. -jn:new job name New name for Required.Provides the new name for the job. the job. 31
  • 32. Using command line switches Job monitoring switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o200 Place job on hold Places the specified job on hold. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. You must specify either the -j switch or the -f switch. -jjob name Required. Specifies the name of the job to be placed on hold. -ffilename Required.Specifies a file that contains a list of jobs (one per line) to place on hold. -o201 Take job off hold Takes the specified job off hold. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. You must specify either the -j switch or the -f switch. -jjob name Required. Specifies the name of the job to be taken off hold. -ffilename Required. Specifies a file that contains a list of jobs (one per line) to place on hold. -o202 Delete Deletes a scheduled job. scheduled job You must specific the -j switch. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the job to cancel. -ds: Delete the If the scheduled job is not deleted, the selection list if selection list is not deleted, and a -1 is no other jobs are returned. using it If the scheduled job is deleted, the selection list will be deleted, and a 1 is returned. If the selection list is not deleted, a 0 is returned. 32 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 33. Using command line switches Job monitoring switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o221 Delete a backup Deletes the specified backup selection list. selection list -sselection Required. Specifies the name of the selection list name or list or filename to delete. -ffilename -o222 Exclude all selections in an existing selection list from backup. -e Use this switch to exclude every entry in the specified selection list from backup. -o251 List all backup Displays all available backup selection lists. selection lists. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -o280 List preferred Lists all existing preferred server server group configurations. -o281 Create preferred Lets you create a new preferred server server group configuration. Preferred server configurations give you more control over your backup jobs by letting you specify a preferred server from which Backup Exec backs up replicated data. -o282 Delete preferred Deletes the selected preferred server server group configuration. You can delete a preferred server configuration if you no longer need it. -o283 Set default Designates a default preferred server preferred server configuration for all of your backup jobs that group contain the appropriate replication data. When you designate a default preferred server configuration, it is not applied to existing selection lists. It is considered the default preferred server configuration for any subsequent selection lists you create. 33
  • 34. Using command line switches Job monitoring switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o290 List resources in Lets you view any servers and sites that make preferred server up the preferred server configuration. group -o291 Add resource to Lets you add a server or site to the preferred preferred server server group. You must specify the type of group resource that you want to add. -i:group id or Specifies the ID or name of the preferred -g:group name server configuration to which you want to add a resource. You can specify either the group ID or the group name. -r:resource Specifies the resource you want to add to the preferred server group. -rt:resource Required. Specifies the type of resource you type are adding to the preferred server configuration. Resource types include: 1 = Site 2 = Server 3 = Exchange 2010 forest 4 = Exchange 2010 DAG -o292 Remove Lets you remove a server or site from the resources from preferred server configuration. preferred server group -o312 Disable error Disables an error-handling rule. handling rule -irule ID Required.Specifies the ID of the rule being disabled. 34 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 35. Using command line switches Job monitoring switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o506 Dump job Displays job, selection, and schedule information information stored on this server. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name Specifies the name of the job that contains information that you want to be dumped. -ddisplay type Display type of Specifies the type of job information to job information display. Enter one of the following values: 1 = Display only the job information. Do not display the selection list or schedule information. 2 = Display only the selection list information. Do not display the job or schedule information. 3 = Display only the schedule information. Do not display the job or selection list information. If you do not use the -d switch, all job information is displayed. -o507 Dump selection Displays the contents of the specified lists selection list. If a selection list is not specified, all selection lists will be dumped. -sselection Specifies the name of the selection list. list name -o509 Dump policy Displays the contents of the specified policy. information If a policy is not specified, all policies will be dumped. -ipolicy ID Required. Specifies the GUID for the policy. To find the ID for a policy, use operation -o263 to display the policies on a computer. -j Instructs Backup Exec to display policy name. 35
  • 36. Using command line switches Restore job operations and switches You can run a previously created restore job or launch a restore job script file through the following command line switches: Restore job commands Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o7 Run a restore job Runs a restore job that has been previously defined for a media server. Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -jjob name or Required. Specifies the name or the job ID of -ijob ID the previously defined job that Backup Exec should run. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o27 Restore Creates and runs a restore job of a Microsoft Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2003 through a SharePoint server farm. Portal Server 2003 job -fm:farm name Required. Specifies the SharePoint Portal Server farm to restore. -cf Includes the Configuration database in the restore job. 36 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 37. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ss: Includes the Single sign-on database in the restore job. -ds: Includes the Document Library store in the restore job. -ps:portal site Specifies a list of portal sites to restore. This name list should be comma delimited. You can display a list of portal sites if you use the -o26 switch. -ws:Windows Specifies a list of Windows SharePoint SharePoint Services sites to restore. This list should be Services sites comma delimited. You can display a list of Windows SharePoint Services sites if you use the -o26 switch. -dl:document Specifies a list of backward compatible library names document libraries to restore. This list should be comma delimited. You can display a list of document libraries if you use the -o26 switch. -ne:no earlier Specifies the earliest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. -nl:no later Specifies the latest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. 37
  • 38. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o29 Use Oracle Use RMAN to create and run a restore for an Recovery Oracle database. Manager (RMAN) to restore an Oracle database -svr:server name Required. Specifies the name of a server on which Oracle runs. -sid:Oracle SID Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID. -act:logon Specifies the logon account name to log on to account name connect to the server on which Oracle runs. You should specify this switch if the current logon account name is not valid to log on to the server. -tb:tablespace Specifies a list of tablespace names to restore. names This list should be comma delimited. -ne:no earlier Specifies the earliest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. -nl:no later Specifies the latest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. 38 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 39. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -r Recover using Recovers up to the last committed redo logs transaction that is available from online and archived redo logs. -ro Open database Ensures that the database is opened as soon after recovery as the recovery is finished. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o36 Create a SQL Creates and runs a restore job of a SQL server. server restore job -db:named Required. Specifies the named instance of instance and SQL server the databases are in. Enter database name the named instance and database name in the serverinstance+database format. You should separate the multiple names with a comma. You can specify *.* to restore all databases in the instance. Note Database names are case sensitive. -dt:backup date Restores the most recent backup job no later than the specified date. 39
  • 40. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -jjob name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -o38 Search catalog Searches the catalog for protected resources. -vn:volume name Specifies the name of the volume that you want to search. -mn:media name Specifies the name of the media that you want to search. -ne:no earlier Specifies the earliest date range to perform a than date point-in-time search. -nl:no later Specifies the latest date range to perform a than date point-in-time search. -fn:filename Specifies the type of file by which you want to search. You can use a type of filename such as doc. -pa:path name Specifies the path by which you want to search. -sn:server name Specifies the server name by which you want to search. -d Search by directories only. -s Include subdirectories in the search. 40 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 41. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o39 Create a restore Runs a restore of NTFS volumes that include job of NTFS system state and shadow copy components. volumes -pa:selection Required. Specifies the selection to restore. path You must enter the path name in the serverpathfile format. You can enter multiple paths, however, the list should be comma delimited. For example, pa:"server1path1file1, server2path2file2" You can use a pipe to specify multiple selections under the same server. For example, -pa:"server1path1file1|path2file2|path 3file3" You can use a plus sign to specify multiple files under the same path. For example, -pa:"server1path1file1+file2+file3" You can specify *.type to restore the same type of file to be restored. For example, -pa:"serverpath1*.doc". To restore everything under a directory, use use *.* as the filename, or end the path with . If the selection is a directory, but the selection text does not end with , the folder name will be specified as the filename. The file will be restored instead of the directory. -ne:no earlier Specifies the earliest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. -nl:no later Specifies the latest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. 41
  • 42. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o54 Restore Creates and runs a restore job of a Microsoft Microsoft SharePoint Server 2007 through a server SharePoint farm. Server 2007 job -fm:farm name Required. Specifies the SharePoint server farm to restore. -cf Includes the Configuration database in the restore job. -ss: Includes the Single sign-on database in the restore job. -ca Restores the central administration site. -wa:Web Specifies the name of the Web application. application You can list multiple names. name -sp: shared Specifies the name of the shared server service provider. You can list multiple names. provider name or -ssp shared service provider name 42 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 43. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -gs Restores the global settings. -ne:no earlier Specifies the earliest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. -pw: Preserve Enter 1 to preserve the existing IIS web site existing Internet and application pool for the specified Information SharePoint web application. Enter 0 to create Services (IIS) a new IIS web site and application pool with web site and settings from the backup. application pool -nl:no later Specifies the latest date range to perform a than date point-in-time restore. -j job name Specifies the name that Backup Exec will assign to this job. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. 43
  • 44. Using command line switches Restore job commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o90 Launch job Executes a job based on the contents of a using job script script file. Return values depend on the type file of script. Returns a job instance ID. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. For more information about Backup Job Script Files, see “Using job script files” on page 127. -fscript file Required. Specifies the name of the Backup Exec script file. If the job is a scheduled job (not a run now job), the -w is ignored. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. If the job is a scheduled job (not a run now job), the -w is ignored. See also: “Using job script files” on page 127 Operations and switches for viewing and responding to alerts Alerts are events that require administrator attention. Several command switches allow you to view and respond to alerts. These include: Managing alerts switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o40 Get number of Displays the number of alerts on the alerts computer. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Dump alert IDs Displays all the alert IDs on the screen. -tl: Show titles Displays titles of alerts. 44 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 45. Using command line switches Managing alerts switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -jserver name Displays alerts generated from the specified server only. -h Displays history alerts. -s Displays the name of the server that generated the alert. -d Displays the date the alert was generated. -o42 Dump alert text Dumps the alert title and message to the console. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ialert ID or -a Required. Use -i to display a specific alert or -a to display active alerts. -w Wait for alert Instructs the Command Line Applet to response prompt for a response to the alert. -o43 Get number of Displays the number of non-critical information (information only alerts) on the computer. only alerts Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Dump all alert If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs IDs will be displayed on the screen. -tl: Show titles Displays alert titles. -jserver name Displays alerts generated from the specified server only. -s Displays the name of the server that generated the alert. -d Displays the date the alert was generated. 45
  • 46. Using command line switches Managing alerts switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o44 Get number of Displays the number of user intervention user alerts on the computer. Also returns a 1 if the intervention command succeeds or a -1 if the command (critical) alerts fails. -i Dump all alert If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs IDs will be displayed on the screen. -tl: Show titles Displays alert titles. -jserver name Displays alerts generated from the specified server only. -s Displays the name of the server that generated the alert. -d Displays the date the alert was generated. -o45 Clear all Clears all current information only alerts. information Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if only alerts the command fails. -o46 Respond to alert Allows you to respond to an alert. Returns 1 if the command succeeds, 0 if the alert was already responded to, or -1 if the command fails. -ialert ID Required. Specifies the alert ID that you want to respond to. -rresponse or -w Required. Specifies a response. Responses are OK, YES, NO, CANCEL, RETRY,or IGNORE or instructs the Command Line Applet to prompt for a response. -arespond to Specifies an OK response to informative all alerts. If you specify the -a switch you cannot informative use the -w switch. alerts 46 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 47. Using command line switches Managing alerts switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o47 Get all warning Displays the number of warning alerts on the alerts computer. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Dump all alert If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs IDs display on the screen. -tl: Show titles Displays alert titles. -jserver name Displays alerts generated from the specified server only. -s Displays the name of the server that generated the alert. -d Displays the date the alert was generated. -o48 Get all error Displays the number of error alerts on the alerts computer. Also returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Dump all alert If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs IDs display on the screen. -tl: Show titles Displays alert titles. -jserver name Displays alerts generated from the specified server only. -s Displays the name of the server that generated the alert. -d Displays the date the alert was generated. -o49 List alert Displays alert categories. Returns a 1 if the categories command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Dump all alert If -i is used with this command, all alert IDs IDs will be displayed on the screen. 47
  • 48. Using command line switches Managing alerts switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -j Display alert Displays alert names on screen. category name -ac: Display event Displays the alert category on screen. category -o50 Dump alert Displays the configuration for alerts on configuration screen. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ialert Required. Specifies an alert ID to display category ID configuration information for. -o51 Set alert Modifies the alert configuration. configuration -ialert Required. Specifies an alert ID to display category ID configuration information for. -e or -d Enable alert or Enables or disables the specified alert for disable alert reporting by Backup Exec. Some alerts types, such as error and attention required, are always enabled. -no: or -nn: Enable Enables or disables the sending of a notification or notification when the alert occurs. Recipients disable must be configured to use this option. notification -jl: or -nj: Enable inclusion Sends the job log or disables the inclusion of of job log or the job log to the alert recipient that is disable inclusion configured for notification. of job log -s or -ns: Enable sending Enables or disables the sending of alert of SNMP notifications through SNMP. notifications or disable sending of SNMP notifications 48 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 49. Using command line switches Managing alerts switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -rl: or -nr: Enable event Enables or disables the logging of events in logging or the Windows event log. disable event logging -ac:timeout or Set time for Sets the time in days, hours, or minutes for -na: automatic Backup Exec to automatically clear the alert clearing of alert or disables the automatic clearing of alerts. or disable Set the time as D=days, H=hours, or automatic alert M=minutes. clearing The length of time entered cannot be more than seven days. -ar:response Set the Sets the automatic response for an alert. The automatic possible responses are Yes, No, and Cancel. response for an alert. -o150 Dump Displays the recipients that have defined notification notification methods. Returns a 1 if the recipients command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. Operations and switches for error-handling rules Backup Exec has system-defined error-handling rules that determine how job errors are handled. They apply to all backup jobs and are defined based on the cause of the failure. The rules can be configured to automatically perform operations such as retry, pause, or cancel a job after a failure occurs. Error-handling rules are disabled by default. Error-Handling Rules switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o310 Display Displays the error-handling rules. error-handling rules 49
  • 50. Using command line switches Error-Handling Rules switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o311 Enable error handling rule -irule ID Required. ID of the rule that is to be enabled. -mr:maximum Indicates that the job should be retried and retries the number of times the job is to be retried. The range for maximum retries is 1 to 99. -ri:retry Indicates that the job should be retried and interval the number of minutes to wait before the job is retried. The range for the retry interval is 1 to 1,440. -pj: Pause job on Indicates the job is to be paused until the user error has taken action to clear the error. If this switch is absent, the job will be cancelled until its next scheduled run. -cj: Cancel job on Indicates the job is to be cancelled if an error error occurs. -no:notes Specifies miscellaneous information for the error-handling rule. -o312 Disable error Disables the specified error-handling rule. handling rule -irule ID Required. Specifies the error-handling rule that is to be disabled. 50 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 51. Using command line switches Operations and switches for managing media and devices Through the Command Line Applet, you can manage the storage devices attached to your media server, manage media in these devices, launch utility operations, and obtain the status of your media server. You can also use commands to stop and start Backup Exec system services and create logon accounts for accessing systems. The device and media management switches available include: Device and media management switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o62 Is drive paused Returns a 1 if the drive is paused, a 0 if the drive is not paused, and a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name or Required. Specifies the name or the ID of the -idrive ID drive. -o63 Get number of Displays the number of managed drives. drives Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays drive IDs for all drives. -j Displays names for all drives. -o64 Get number of Displays the number of managed drives that drives available are online and not paused. Drives that are being used are considered online and are included in the number displayed. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays drive IDs for all drives. -j Displays names for all drives. -o65 Get number of Displays the number of managed drives that drives paused are paused. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays drive IDs for all drives. -j Displays names for all drives. 51
  • 52. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o66 Get number of Displays the number of managed drives that drives offline are offline. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays drive IDs for all drives. -j Displays names for all drives. -o67 Dump drive Displays general properties of a drive. properties Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name or Required. Specifies the name or the ID of the -idrive ID drive. -o68 Query devices -o69 Get number of Displays the number of media sets. Returns a media sets 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays the media set IDs for all media sets. -j Displays the names of all media sets. -o70 Dump media set Displays properties of the media set. Returns properties a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -imedia set ID Required. Specifies the media set ID or or -jmedia set media set name. name -o71 Dump media Displays properties of the media label. label properties Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -imedia set ID Required. Specifies the media set ID or or -jmedia set media set name. name 52 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 53. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o78 Set robotic Sets properties for a robotic library. library properties -drobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library to library target for this operation. -nd:new robotic Specifies the name for the robotic library. library name -ps:pause or Enter 1 to pause the robotic library; resume drive otherwise, enter 0 to resume. -e:enable or Enter 1 to enable the robotic library; disable otherwise, enter 0 to disable the robotic robotic library. library -es:enable or Enter 1 to enable the startup initilization; disable otherwise, enter 0 to disable the startup startup initilization. initialization -er:enable or Enter 1 to enable the removable storage; disable otherwise, enter 0 to disable the removable startup storage. initialization -eb:enable or Enter 1 to enable bar code rules; otherwise, disable bar enter 0 to disable bar code rules. code rules -sb:slot base Specifies the starting slot. Some robotic libraries have slots starting at "0"; others start at "1". -o79 Set device Sets properties for a device. properties -ddevice name Required. Specifies the device to target for this operation. 53
  • 54. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ndnew device Specifies the name for the device. name -ps:pause or Enter 1 to pause the device; otherwise, enter resume device 0 to resume. -e:enable or Enter 1 to enable the device; otherwise, enter disable device 0 to disable the device. -m:enable or Enter 1 to enable compression; otherwise, disable enter 0 to disable compression. compression -bkblock size Specifies the size of the blocks of data written to the device. -bfbuffer size Specifies the amount of data sent to the device on each read or write request. The buffer size must be an even multiple of the block size. -bcbuffer count Specifies the number of buffers allocated for this device. -hwhigh water Specifies the number of buffers to be filled count before data is first sent to the device, and any time after that if the device underruns. -rsRead single Specifies that this device read only one block block mode of data at a time. -wsWrite single Specifies that this device write only one block block mode of data at a time. -rpRead SCSI Specifies that this device read data without pass-through going through a Microsoft tape device API. mode Selecting this check box allows the data to pass directly through the device and allows more detailed information if device errors occur. 54 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 55. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -wpWrite SCSI Specifies that his device write data without pass-through going through the Microsoft tape device API. mode Selecting this check box allows data to pass directly through the device driver and allows more detailed information if device errors occur. -r Resets the preferred configuration settings to the default. -s Resets the cleaning statistics. -o80 Import drive Imports a list of backup tapes. Returns job ID slots and 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library to library target for this operation. -ai: Instructs Backup Exec to auto inventory all slots. -sslot numbers Specifies the slots in the robotic library to target. This list should be comma delimited. If no slots are specified, then all will be targeted by default. -fschedule file Schedules the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. 55
  • 56. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o81 Export drive Exports a list of backup tapes. Returns the job slots ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library to library target for this operation. -sslot numbers Specifies the slots in the robotic library to target. This list should be comma delimited. If no slots are specified, then all will be targeted by default. -fschedule file Schedules the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. 56 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 57. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -x Specifies the export of expired media only. -xc Includes cleaning media in the export of expired media. -xi Imports new media to the slot after the export expired media operation completes. -o82 Designate Designates a slot to be a cleaning slot. cleaning slot Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library and library and the slot in the robotic library to target for this -sslot number operation. -o83 Reset slot to be Designates a slot to be a non-cleaning slot. non-cleaning Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if slot the command fails. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library and library and the slots in the robotic library to target for -sslot number this operation. -o84 Get number of Displays the number of managed robots. robots Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. 57
  • 58. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -i Displays the robot IDs. -o85 Dump robot Displays property information for the properties specified robotic library. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -irobot ID or Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the -drobot name robotic library to display properties for. If both -i and -d are provided, the -d parameter is used. -o86 Dump slot Displays the slot information with header content descriptions. -irobot ID or Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the -drobot name robotic library to display properties for. If both -i and -d are provided, the -d parameter is used. -sslot numbers List the slot number to display information for. The list should be comma delimited. If the slot number is not specified, the contents of all slots for the robotic library are displayed. -o87 Dump robot Displays partition information for the partitions specified robotic library. -jrobot name Required. Specifies the name of the robotic library for which to display partition information. -o100 Create cleaning Creates and runs a cleaning job on the job specified drive. Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name Required. Specifies the name of the robotic library drive you want to target. 58 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 59. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -fschedule file Schedules the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o101 Create media set Creates a media set with the specified name. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -mmedia set Required. Specifies the name of the new name media set. -op:overwrite Specifies the overwrite protection period for protection the new media set. Enter the length of time in period hours. Enter the value -1 to set the overwrite protection level to infinite. -ap:append Specifies the append period for the new media set. Enter the length of time in hours. 59
  • 60. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o102 Create drive pool Creates a drive pool with the specified name and assigns the given drives to it. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds, a 0 if one or more specified drives cannot be found, or a -1 if the command fails. -dp:drive pool Required. Specifies the name of the new drive pool. -ddrives Specifies a list of drives to add to the drive pool. The list should be comma delimited. -o103 Create inventory Creates an inventory job on a specified job for robotic robotic library. library Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. When using this command, you must also use the -arobotic library switch, which inventories all slots and drives on a specified robotic library. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library to library target for this operation. -jjob name Specifies a name for the job. -fschedule file Schedules the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. -sslot numbers Specifies the slots in the robotic library to target. This list should be comma delimited. If no slots are specified, then all will be targeted by default. 60 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 61. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o104 Lock library Locks the specified robotic library door. door Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. When using this command, you must also use the -arobotic library switch. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library to library target for this operation. -fschedule file Schedules the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. 61
  • 62. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o105 Unlock library Unlocks the specified robotic library door. door Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. When using this command, you must also use the -arobotic library switch. -arobotic Required. Specifies the robotic library to library target for this operation. -fschedule file Schedule the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. 62 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 63. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o106 Set media Specifies the media overwrite level and overwrite overwrite options. protection Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if period the command fails. When using this command, you must also use the -o1 and -o0 switches. If no switches are specified, the default overwrite level is 1=None. -ol:overwrite Required. Specifies the overwrite level; for level example, -o1:4. Overwrite Levels include: 1 = None 2 = None with prompt 3 = Partial 4 = Partial with prompt 5 = Full -oo:recyclable Required. Specifies the overwrite options; for example, -o0:0. Overwrite options include: 0 = Use scratch media first 1 = Use recyclable media first 63
  • 64. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o111 Erase media Erases the tape in the specified drive according to the specified erase type (-e). Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. Note If you use -m, you can only erase backup-to-disk media. If you use -s, you can only erase robotic libraries. You cannot use both switches. -ddevice name Required. Specifies the drive name you want <loader or to target. If -s is used, -ddrive name will be drive> the name of the robotic library. -eerase type Required. Specifies the erase type. Erase types are: 1 = quick erase 3 = long erase -jjob name Specifies a name for the job. -fschedule file Schedule the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w option is ignored. See “Using a schedule script with device and media operations” on page 256. -sslot numbers Specifies the slot numbers containing the media to be erased. If this switch is used, -d will represent the robotic library name. -mn:media name Specifies the new name of the media. -mmedia name Required. Specifies the backup-to-disk folder to erase. You must specify the media in the backup-to-disk folder to erase. 64 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 65. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o112 Retension media Retensions the tape in the specified drive. Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name Required. Specifies the drive name. If -s is used, -ddrive name will be the name of the robotic library. -sslot numbers Specifies the slot numbers containing the media to be retensioned. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. 65
  • 66. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o113 Label media Labels the tape in the specified drive. Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. -dlibrary name Required. Specifies the name of the robotic library. -mmedia name Required. Specifies the media name. -sslot numbers Specifies the slot numbers containing the media to be labeled. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o114 Format media Formats the tape in the specified drive. Returns the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name Required. Specifies the drive name. If -s is used, -ddrive name will be the name of the robotic library. -sslot numbers Specifies the slot numbers containing the media to be formatted. 66 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 67. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Low ◆ Lowest ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest If this switch is absent, the priority is set to medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. -o115 Eject media Ejects the tape in the specified drive. Returns from drive the job ID and a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name Required. Specifies the drive name. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to wait completion for the operation to complete before returning. 67
  • 68. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o116 Create a backup Creates a Backup Folder. Backup Exec allows folder you to create virtual devices called Backup Folders on the hard disk. These Backup Folders are used as destination devices for backup jobs. When you direct a backup job to a Backup Folder, the data is saved on disk as backup files. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -r Makes the backup folder being created into a removable backup-to-disk folder. Otherwise, the folder will be a fixed (non-removable) folder. -ffolder name Specifies the folder name. When you create a Backup Folder, Backup Exec initially assigns a name and path to it. You can rename a Backup Folder as long as you use a unique name. Renaming a Backup Folder changes the way it appears in Backup Exec, but does not change the location of the Backup Folder on the disk. -sfile size Specifies the maximum size for each backup-to-disk file contained in this folder. The file size can be from 1 MB to 4096 GB. The default is 1 GB. -nbackup sets Specifies the maximum number of backup sets to be written to each backup-to-disk file in this folder. The maximum number can range from 1 to 8192. The default is 100. -pdisk space Specifies the amount of disk space to reserve reserve on the disk. When this threshold is reached, Backup Exec cannot submit jobs for processing that are targeted to this backup-to-disk folder, but jobs that are running will finish. 68 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 69. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -edevice Specifies the device setting for the setting backup-to-disk folder. Devices settings include: 0 = Auto detect settings. Backup Exec automatically detect the preferred settings for this device. 1 = Buffered reads. The device allows buffered reads, which is the reading of large blocks of data. 2 = Buffered writes. The device allows buffered writes, which is the writing of large blocks of data. -mconcurrent Specifies the number of concurrent jobs operations that you want to allow to this folder. This number can range from 1 to 16. -ddirectory Specifies the location for the folder. If you use the -r switch in the command, the device that you specify must be a drive letter followed by a colon, such as "C:". Backup jobs submitted to a Backup Folder cannot span disks. If the size of a backup job exceeds the amount of free space on the disk where the Backup Folder is located, the job will fail. Make sure that there is sufficient free space on a disk for a backup job before submitting it. Use the software data compression option to maximize the amount of data that can be stored on a disk. If the backup job fails because of insufficient disk space, the data backed up before the job fails can still be restored. -o117 Inventory a Creates an inventory job on a specified stand-alone stand-alone drive. Displays the job instance drive ID. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ddrive name Required. Specifies the drive name. 69
  • 70. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -jjob name Specifies a name for the job. -fschedule file Schedules the job. If -fschedule file represents a scheduled job (not a run now job), then the -w switch is ignored. -pr:priority Specifies the priority for the job. Priority options include: ◆ Highest ◆ High ◆ Medium ◆ Low ◆ Lowest If this switch is absent, the priority will be set as Medium. -x Uses media auxiliary memory for inventory, which allows the media to be identified without having to be mounted. -w Wait for job Instructs the Command Line Applet to completion prompt for a response. -0118 Delete Deletes a list of backup-to-disk folders. backup-to-disk folders -ffolder name Required. Specifies the name of the backup-to-disk folders to delete. -o119 Set Sets properties for a backup-to-disk folder. backup-to-disk properties -ffolder name Required. Specifies the name of the backup-to-disk folder to target for this operation. 70 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 71. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -smaximum Specifies the maximum size for each backup-to-disk backup-to-disk file contained in this folder, file size and then select either MB or GB as the unit of size. The file size can be from 1 MB to 4096 GB. The default is 1 GB. -qmaximum Specifies the maximum number of backup number of sets to be written to each backup-to-disk file backup sets in this folder. The maximum number can range from 1 to 8192. The default is 100. -kreserve disk Specifies the amount of disk space to reserve size on the disk. When this threshold is reached, Backup Exec cannot submit jobs for processing that are targeted to this backup-to-disk folder, but jobs that are running will finish. The backup-to-disk status displays Low Disk Space. -edevice Specifies the device setting for the setting backup-to-disk folder. Devices settings include: 0 = Auto detect settings. Backup Exec automatically detect the preferred settings for this device. 1 = Buffered reads. The device allows buffered reads, which is the reading of large blocks of data. 2 = Buffered writes. The device allows buffered writes, which is the writing of large blocks of data. -mnumber of Specifies the number of concurrent concurrent ops operations that you want to allow to this folder. This number can range from 1 to 16. -o120 Delete media set Deletes the specified media set. Returns 1 if the command is successful or -1 if it failed. -mmedia set Required. Specifies the name of the media set. 71
  • 72. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o121 Delete drive pool Deletes the specified drive pool. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -dp:drive pool Required. Specifies the name of the drive pool. -o122 Create media This operation is only available if the Central server pool Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Creates a media server pool with the specified name. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -nm:pool name Required. Specifies the name of the media server pool. -pd:pool Specifies a description for the media server description pool. -si:server IDs or Specifies the media server IDs or names to -sn:server names add to the media server pool. -o123 Delete media This operation is only available if the Central server pool Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Deletes the media server pool with the specified name. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. Note Use only one of the required switches for this command. -ipool IDs or Required. Specifies the IDs or the names of -nm:pool names the media server pool to be deleted. -o124 Rename a media This operation is only available if the Central server pool or Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. set a new media Renames the specified media server pool or pool description specifies a new media pool description. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. Note Use only one of the required switches for this command. 72 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 73. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ipool ID or Required. Specifies the ID of the media -onm:old pool server pool or the name of the media server name pool to be renamed. -nm:new pool Specifies the new name of the media server name pool. -pd:pool Specifies a description of the media server description pool. -o125 Get media This operation is only available if the Central server pools Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Displays the media server pools. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Instructs Backup Exec to display the media server pool ID. -j Instructs Backup Exec to display the media server pool name. -si:server ID or Instructs Backup Exec to only display the -sn:server name media server pools associated with the media server ID or media server name specified. -o126 Add a media This operation is only available if the Central server to a Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. media server Adds a media server to the specified media pool server pool. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -pi:pool ID or Required. Specifies the ID of the media -pn:pool name server pool or the name of the media server pool. -si:server IDs or Specifies the media server IDs or names to -sn:server names add to the media server pool. 73
  • 74. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o127 Remove a media This operation is only available if the Central server from a Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. media server Removes a media server from the specified pool media server pool. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -pi:pool ID or Required. Specifies the ID of the media -pn:pool name server pool or the name of the media server pool. -si:server IDs or Specifies the media server IDs or names to -sn:server names remove from the media server pool. -o128 Get media This operation is only available if the Central servers in a Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. media server Displays the media servers in the media pool server pools. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -pipool ID or Required. Specifies the ID of the media -pn:pool name server pool or the name of the media server pool. -i Instructs Backup Exec to display the media server ID. -j Instructs Backup Exec to display the media server name. -o129 Delete media -m: media label Specifies the label name of the media that name you want to delete. The media must be in the Retired Media set before you can delete it. -o130 Move media Moves the specified media. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i or -jmedia Required. Specifies the ID of the media or the name media server name to be moved. 74 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 75. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ms:media set Required. Specifies the media set ID to which ID you want to move the media. -o131 Rename media Renames the specified media. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -imedia ID Required. Specifies the name of the media to be renamed. -mn:media name Required. Specifies the new name of the media. -o132 List media label Lists the media labels contained in a specified media set. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -imedia set ID Required. Specifies the ID of the media or the or -jmedia set media set name to be moved. name -o133 Create media Creates a media vault with the specified vault name to track media stored in specific sites. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -vn:vault name Required. Specifies the name of the media vault. -vd:vault Specifies a description for the media vault. description -o134 Delete media Deletes the specified media vault. Returns a 1 vault if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ivault ID or Required. Specifies the ID of the media vault -vn: vault name or the name of the media vault to be deleted. 75
  • 76. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o135 Create robotic Creates a partition consisting of one or more library slots on the specified robotic library. Returns partitions a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -irobot ID or Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the -drobot name robotic library on which the partitions will be created. -sslot numbers Specifies the slots in the robotic library to include in the partition. This list should be comma delimited. If no slots are specified, then all will be targeted by default. -o136 Get list of media Displays the managed media vaults. Returns vaults a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays the IDs for all media vaults. -j Displays the names of all managed media vaults. -o137 Add media to a Adds media to the specified media vault. media vault Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -imedia set ID Required. Specifies the ID of the media or the or -jmedia set media set name to be moved. name -mv:media vault Required. Specifies the ID of the media vault ID or -vnmedia or the name of the media vault that the media vauilt name will be added to. -o140 Get number of Displays the managed media servers. Returns media servers a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -i Displays the media server IDs for all media servers. 76 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 77. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -j Displays the names of all managed media servers. -o531 Dump physical Outputs the properties for a specified disk properties physical disk on a storage array. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -si:storage Specifies the ID or the name of the storage array ID or array. You must separate multiple entries -sn:storage with a comma. array name -pi:physical Specifies the ID or the name of the physical disk ID or disk on the storage array. You must separate -pn:physical multiple entries with a comma. disk name -pl:enclosuresl Specifies the enclosure that the physical disk ot is in and the slot that the physical disk occupies. Enter the name of the enclosure and slot in the enclosure1slot1 format. You must separate multiple names with a comma. -hot: Enter 1 to view the properties of a hot spare; otherwise, enter a 0. -cf: Enter 1 to view the properties of a physical disk that is configured for use with a storage array; otherwise, enter a 0. -ucf: Enter 1 to view the properties of a physical disk that is unconfigurable; otherwise, enter a 0. -o532 Dump storage Outputs the properties for a specified storage array properties array. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -sa: Lists all the storage arrays. 77
  • 78. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -si:storage Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the array ID or storage array. You must separate multiple -sn:storage entries with a comma. array name -vd: Lists all the virtual disks. -vi:virtual disk Specifies the ID or the name of the virtual ID or disk on the storage array. You must separate -vn:virtual multiple entries with a comma. disk name -o533 Configure a Configures a storage array for use with the storage array Backup Exec Storage Provisioning Option. -si:storage Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the array ID or storage array. -sn:storage array name -pl:enclosuresl Required. Enter the enclosure number and ot or the slot number of the physical disks that you -hl:enclosures want to configure. lot or You can specify the enclosure number and -uhl:enclosures the slot number to do the following: lot ◆ Use -pl: to add a physical disk to create a disk group. You must specify at least three physical disks to create a disk group. ◆ Use -hl: to add a hot spare. ◆ Use -uhl: to remove a hot spare. The physical disk becomes available. Enter the name in the enclosure1slot1 format. You must separate the multiple names with a comma. You must use at least one switch. You can use all of the switches in the same operation. -vn:number of Specifies the number of virtual disks that you virtual disks want to create for this disk group. 78 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 79. Using command line switches Device and media management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ms:media Specifies the name of the media server. server name -o534 Configure a Configures a virtual disk on a storage array to virtual disk on a use with Backup Exec. Returns a 1 if the storage array command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -vi:virtual disk Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the ID or virtual disk on the storage array. -vn:virtual disk name -o535 Rename a Renames a virtual disk or a storage array. virtual disk or a Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if storage array the command fails. You must specify either a storage array or a virtual disk to rename; you cannot specify both. -si:storage Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the array ID or storage array. -sn:storage array name -vi:virtual disk Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the ID or virtual disk on the storage array. -vn:virtual disk name -nn:new device Required.Provides the new name for the name device. -o536 Detect a new Runs a scan operation to find new storage storage array arrays, virtual disks, or physical disks. 79
  • 80. Using command line switches Backup Exec services commands Several command line switches allow you to monitor and manage the Backup Exec services. These commands include: Backup Exec service switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o107 Set wizards as Sets the registry so that the startup wizards run do not run. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -dv:<0-1> Enter a 0 to specify that the startup wizards have not been run and should display. Enter a 1 to specify that the startup wizards have been run and should not display. -o500 Is Backup Exec Checks if the Backup Exec server is available. server available Returns 1 if the Backup Exec Server is available on the network, 0 if the server is not available, or -1 if the command fails. -cserver_name Required. Specifies the name of the media server. -o501 Are Backup Exec Checks if the Backup Exec system services are system services running. Returns 1 if the Backup Exec running services are running on the computer. If the system services are not running, a 0 is displayed. If the command fails, a -1 is displayed. -o502 Start Backup Starts all Backup Exec services on the Exec system specified computer. Returns a 1 if all services services start, a 0 if any services fail, or a -1 if the command fails. -o503 Stop Backup Stops all Backup Exec services on the Exec system specified computer. Returns 1 if all services services stop, a 0 if any services fail, or a -1 if the command fails. 80 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 81. Using command line switches Backup Exec service switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o504 Dump Backup Copies to the console each Backup Exec Exec system system service name and status. Returns a 1 services status if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -o505 Dump Backup Outputs properties for a specified Backup Exec server Exec server. Returns a 1 if the command properties succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -o530 Dump server Outputs the Backup Exec server type. Server type types are: 0 = stand-alone media server 1 = central administration server 2 = managed media server 3 = unknown server type Logon account operations and switches The following switch and subswitches enable you to create and modify logon accounts used for accessing specific systems: Logon Account switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o210 Create logon Creates a logon account for accessing specific account systems being backed up or restored. This operation returns a logon account ID and a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -nl:user name Required. Specifies the user name for this logon account. -pl:password Specifies the password for this logon account. -daccount name Required. Provides a name for this logon account. 81
  • 82. Using command line switches Logon Account switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pa:account Specifies if the logon account is restricted or type common. -dl: Specifies the logon account as the default account to use to browse, make sections, or restore data on your local and remote resources. When you use this switch to set a logon account as the default, the default only applies to the specified user. Use -o211 to display the default logon account or log in to Backup Exec when you are logged in as the specified user. -o211 Dump logon Displays the logon account information on accounts the console. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -o212 Delete logon Deletes the specified logon account. Returns account 1 if the command is successful or -1 if it failed. -ilogon account Required. Specifies the GUID, the user name, GUID or -nl:user or the account name of the logon account to name or -d be deleted. account name -o213 Modify logon Modifies properties for a specific logon account account. The changes apply immediately and all resources that use the Backup Exec logon account are automatically updated. Changes made to a Backup Exec logon account are applied immediately. Returns 1 if the command is successful or -1 if it failed. -ilogon account Required. Specifies the GUID, the user name, GUID or -nl:user or the account name of the logon account to name or -d be modified. account name -pw:password Specifies the current password for this logon account. 82 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 83. Using command line switches Logon Account switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -pl:password Specifies the new password for this logon account. -daccount name Required. Provides a name for this logon account. -pa:account Specifies if the logon account is restricted or type common. Enter 1 for a common key; otherwise, enter 0 for a restricted key. -dl: Specifies the logon account as the default account to use to browse, make sections, or restore data on your local and remote resources. When you use this switch to set a logon account as the default, the default only applies to the specified user. Use -o211 to display the default logon account or log in to Backup Exec when you are logged in as the specified user. 83
  • 84. Using command line switches Report operations and switches The following switch and subswitches allow you to view and manage Backup Exec reports from the command line: Report switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o400 Display report Displays the report on the screen. -i Lists all available report IDs. -rreport ID Specifies the report ID to view. -j Lists available parameter names. -ps:paramstr Specifies parameters and values to use in the form ’@param1name=value, =value..., @param2name=value, =value...’. -o401 Print report Prints the report on the default printer. -i Lists all available report IDs. -rreport ID Specifies the report ID to view. -j Lists available parameter names. -ps:paramstr Specifies parameters and values to use in the form ’@param1name=value, =value..., @param2name=value, =value...’. -o402 Copy report to Copies the report to a selected file format. selected file format -i Lists all available report IDs. -rreport ID Specifies the report ID to view. -j Lists available parameter names. 84 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 85. Using command line switches Report switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -ps:paramstr Specifies parameters and values to use in the form ’@param1name=value, =value..., @param2name=value, =value...’. -ffilename Fully qualified filename for the storage location of the output file. Not valid for -ft:1 (HTML) file types. -ddirectory Fully qualified directory name for storage location of output files. Only valid for -ft:1 (HTML) file types. -ft:format Use: ◆ -ft:1 for HTML file type. ◆ -ft:2 for XML file type. ◆ -ft:3 for Microsoft Excel file type. ◆ -ft:4 for Comma Separated Variables (CSV) type. ◆ -ft:5 for Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) -o403 Insert report Adds a report to the available file list. -i or -ffilename Required. Lists all available report IDs or the fully qualified filename for storage location of report file. Operations for displaying network interface information The command line operation -o510 lets you view information about the available network interface cards that you can specify as the default for every Backup Exec job. You can use this command line operation when you create a backup job script file, a restore job script file, and a backup job template script file. 85
  • 86. Using command line switches Backup Exec supports versions 4 and 6 of the Internet Protocol (IP), which are commonly referred to as IPv4 and IPv6. You can use IPv4 and IPv6 in backup and restore networks. Support for IPv6 is dependent upon operating system support for the protocol, as well as proper network configuration. You can use Backup Exec in a mixed IPv4/IPv6 environment or an IPv4-only environment. Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address for a computer anywhere that you can enter a computer name in Backup Exec, except in the following locations: ■ User-defined selections ■ Clusters Microsoft Windows does not support an IPv6 address as a clustered resource. A Remote Agent that supports IPv6 can be backed up or restored using IPv6 only from a media server that is IPv6-compliant. The command line operation -o510 provides the following information: Network interface information Item Description Friendly Name The name of a network interface card that can connect the media server to the network you want to use for the backup network. MAC Address The Media Access Control (MAC) address Description The adapter description Type The adapter type Available Indicates if the network interface card is available. If the value is 1, then the network interface card is available and usable. If the value is 0, then the network interface card is not available and not usable. Subnet Prefix 1 The subnet prefix of the network interface card. IP Address 1 The IP address of the network interface card. Number of Objects The number of network interface cards that were found. Return Value The command returns a 1 if the command succeeds, or a -1 if the command fails. 86 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 87. Using command line switches Database management operations and switches The following switch and subswitches allow you to manage databases that use Backup Exec: Database management switches Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o25 Manage a Attach, delete, and rename a Microsoft Microsoft SharePoint server farms. SharePoint Server Farm -wb:web server Required. Specifies the name of a Web name server that belongs to the farm. -fm:farm name Specifies the SharePoint server farm to manage. If you attempt to attach to a new farm and you do not specify a farm name, Backup Exec defaults to Server Farm x. -a Attaches to a new server farm -d Deletes a server farm. -nf:new farm Renames an existing farm. name -e Enter 1 to enable the specified Web server in the farm; otherwise, enter 0 to disable the specified Web server. -r Replaces a previously defined Microsoft SharePoint server farm with a new server farm. -o26 Lists Microsoft Displays a the components of the specified SharePoint 2003 Microsoft SharePoint 2003 server farm. server farms When you specify additional switches, displays only the applicable components of the specified server. -wb:web server Type the name of a Web server that belongs name to the farm. 87
  • 88. Using command line switches Database management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -i: logon Specifies the logon account ID to use to account or -act: display remote SharePoint servers, or account name specifies the logon account name to logon to connect to the remote server on which SharePoint runs. You should specify this switch if the current logon account name is not valid to log on to the server. -fm:farm name Displays components of a specified server farm. -cf: Displays configuration database component names. -ss: Displays Single-sign on database component names. -ds: Displays Document Library store component names. -ps:portal site Displays the portal sites and the components name in the server farms. When you specify the name of a portal site, which also requires the -fm switch, displays only the components of the specified portal site. -ws:Windows Displays the Windows SharePoint Services SharePoint sites and the components in the server farms. Services site When you specify the name of a Windows SharePoint Services site, which also requires the -fm switch, displays only the components of the specified Windows SharePoint Services site. -dl:document Displays the full name of the backward library names compatible document library names. 88 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 89. Using command line switches Database management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches Specifies a list of backward compatible document libraries to back up. This list should be comma delimited. If you do not specify a list of backward compatible document libraries, then all backward compatible document libraries in the farm are backed up. You can display a list of document library names if you use the -o26 switch. -o32 List Oracle Displays a list of Oracle instance information. instance information -svr:server name Required. Specifies the name of a server on which Oracle runs. -sid:Oracle SID Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID. -act:logon Specifies the logon account name to log on to account name connect to the server on which Oracle runs. You should specify this switch if the current logon account name is not valid to log on to the server. -tb:tablespace Displays tablespace names. names -a Displays all archived logs. -o53 Lists Microsoft Displays a the components of the specified SharePoint 2007 Microsoft SharePoint 2007 server farm. server farms When you specify additional switches, displays only the applicable components of the specified server. -wb:web server Type the name of a Web server that belongs name to the farm. 89
  • 90. Using command line switches Database management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -i: logon Specifies the logon account ID to use to account ID or display remote SharePoint servers, or -act: account specifies the logon account name to logon to name connect to the remote server on which SharePoint runs. You should specify this switch if the current logon account name is not valid to log on to the server. -fm:farm name Displays components of a specified server farm. -cf: Displays configuration database component names. -ss: Displays Single-sign on database component names. -ca Displays the central administration site name. -wa:Web Displays information about the Web application application. You can list multiple names. name -sp: shared Displays information about the shared server service provider. You can list multiple names. provider name or -ssp shared service provider name -si Displays the search instance. -gs Displays the global settings. -o32 List Oracle Displays a list of Oracle instance information. instance information -svr:server name Required. Specifies the name of a server on which Oracle runs. 90 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 91. Using command line switches Database management switches (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -sid:Oracle SID Required. Specifies the Oracle server ID. -act:logon Specifies the logon account name to log on to account name connect to the server on which Oracle runs. You should specify this switch if the current logon account name is not valid to log on to the server. -tb:tablespace Displays tablespace names. names -a Displays all archived logs. 91
  • 92. Using command line switches Setting default options The command line switch -o300 allows you to set default options to be used for Backup Exec operations. After setting the default options, you can use the -o301 switch to retrieve the value of the default options set. To retrieve the value using the -o301 operation, specify the option name or file name after the command. If you do not specify an option name or file name, all the default options set will be retrieved. To retrieve a list of available default options and the values, use the -o301 operation with the -f switch. The default options can be set through a series of -do parameters and the use of a -dv parameter followed by the default value. For example, to set the job priority default to high using the -do parameter, enter: -o300 -do:DO_JOB_PRIORITY -dv:3 You can also set the default options through the use of the -f parameter followed by the name of a file. Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a file that contains all the default options. Each entry must be typed on separate line and include the name of the parameter typed in capital letters and then followed by an equal (=) or a colon (:) sign. The value for the entry must follow the equal sign and contain no quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to set the job priority default to high and set the default backup to full using the -f parameter, create a text file that contains the following parameters: DO_JOB_PRIORITY=3 DO_BACKUP_TYPE=0 After you complete the file, enter: -o300 -f:filename 92 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 93. Using command line switches The default parameters set through the -o300 switch can be overridden when creating an individual job. The following default options can be set using the -o300 switch: Default option parameters Option Name Function Description General Default Options DO_GENERAL_ Display progress Enter 1 to display the percent ENABLESTATS indicators for backup jobs complete number and gauge while a backup job is processing; otherwise, enter 0. These indicators allow you to monitor the progress of the job. Backup jobs may take a little longer to complete when this option is set because the target device must be scanned to determine the amount of data to be backed up. Note Due to the time required to scan the target device, selecting this option when backing up remote devices is not recommended. DO_GENERAL_ Inventory all drives on Enter 1 to inventory all of the media STARTUPINVENTORY Backup Exec services in the storage devices when Backup startup Exec services are starting; otherwise, enter 0. Depending on the number of storage devices attached to the system, this process may take a few minutes. If you are using a robotic library, all of the robotic library’s slots are inventoried. 93
  • 94. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Job Default Options DO_JOB_PRIORITY Set job priority Specifies the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Priority options include: ◆ 0 = Low ◆ 1 = Lowest ◆ 2 = Medium ◆ 3 = High ◆ 4 = Highest DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL Limit availability to a Enter 1 to enable the availability daily time window window, which specifies when the selection list is available for backup each day; otherwise, enter 0. DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL_DATE First available date for Enter the first date when the selection availability window list should be available to be backed up. Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format. DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL_ Begin time for Enter the earliest time when the BEGINTIME availability window selection list is available for backup. Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, enter 21:30:00 to specify 9:30 PM. DO_JOB_LIMITAVAIL_ End time for availability Enter the latest time when the ENDTIME window selection list is available for backup. Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, enter 23:00:00 to specify 11:00 PM. DO_JOB_ Run job only if the Enter 1 to run the job only if the RUNJOBIFPRESUCCESS pre-job command is pre-job command is successful; successful. otherwise, enter 0. If the pre-job command is not successful, the job does not run, and is marked as failed. 94 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 95. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_JOB_ Run post-job command Enter 1 to run the post-job command RUNPOSTIFJOBFAILS even if the job fails. even if the job fails; otherwise, enter 0. DO_JOB_RUNPOST Run post-job command if Enter 1 to run the post-job command pre-job command is only if the pre-job command is successful successful; otherwise, enter 0. DO_JOB_CMDTIMEOUT Specify time interval for Specifies the amount of time before or command after the job in which the pre- or post-command should run. DO_JOB_FAILIFCMDFAILS Mark job as failed if Enter 1 to have the job marked as either command fails failed if either the pre-job or post-job command fails; otherwise, enter 0. DO_JOB_RUNPOSTAFTER Run post-command after Enter 1 to run the post-command after job verification completes the job verification completes; otherwise, enter 0. DO_JOB_RUNON Specifies where the Enter one of the following options: command is to be run ◆ 0 = On this media server ◆ 1 = On each server backed up or restored to DO_JOB_ Cancel the job if not Specifies the amount of time Backup CANCELTHRESHOLD completed within the Exec should wait for the job to specified time. complete before cancelling the job. This value should be provided in minutes. DO_JOB_ Set default device for job Specifies the drive pool or stand-alone DEVICEGUID drive to be used for processing the backup. DO_JOB_ Set the default media set Specifies the media set for the job. MEDIASETGUID 95
  • 96. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Backup Default Options DO_BACKUP_TYPE Select default backup Specifies the backup method to be method used. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full ◆ 1 = Copy ◆ 2 = Differential – changed files ◆ 3 = Incremental – changed files ◆ 4 = Daily ◆ 5 = Working set ◆ 6 = Incremental – modified time ◆ 7 = Differential – modified time ◆ 8 = Full – modified time If 5 is entered as the value, a value must also be entered for DO_BACKUP_ LASTACCCESSEDDAYS DO_BACKUP_ Enable single instance Enter 1 to ensure that only one SINGLEBACKUPNTFS backup for NTFS volumes instance of the backing file for NTFS volumes will be backed up regardless of the number of single instance store (SIS) links that point to it; otherwise, enter 0. DO_BACKUP_ Set last access date Note If 5 was entered as the value for LASTACCESSEDDAYS DO_BACKUPT_TYPE, the DO_BACKUP_ LASTACCESSEDDAYS entry must be completed. Enter the number of days during which files that you want to include in the backup were last accessed. For example, to specify a working set backup to include all files last accessed within 30 days, type: -do:DO_BACKUP_ LASTACCESSEDDAYS -dv:30 96 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 97. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_BACKUP_ Set media overwrite Specify one of the following values: MEDIAOVERWRITE protection ◆ 0 = Overwrite ◆ 1 = Append, overwrite if no media available ◆ 2 = Append, no overwrite DO_BACKUP_ Set compression method Enter a number from 0 to 3 that COMPRESSIONTYPE corresponds with the type of compression to use. Options include: ◆ 0 = Hardware compression ◆ 1 = Software compression ◆ 2 = Hardware if available, otherwise software ◆ 3 = None DO_BACKUP_COLLECTINFO Collect additional Enter 1 to collect information about information for synthetic files and directories that have been backup and for true moved, renamed, or newly installed image restore since the last backup job. These files and directories are included in the backup. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_BACKUP_AUTOVERIFY Verify after backup Enter 1 to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify operation to make sure the media can be read after the backup has been completed; otherwise, enter 0. Verifying all backups is recommended. DO_BACKUP_ Calculate checksums Enter 1 if the checksums are to be INSERTCHECKSUMS calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream immediately following the data stream. If 0 is entered, backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape. 97
  • 98. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_BACKUP_ Back up local mount Enter 1 to back up mount points that TRAVERSEPOINTS points direct a file or directory to a local disk or directory path; otherwise, enter 0. Using this option allows you to back up data that is linked to local files, but stored on another device without having to actually select the data. DO_BACKUP_HSM Back up data in remote Enter 1 to back up data that has been storage migrated from primary storage to secondary storage; otherwise, enter 0. When using this option, the data will not be recalled to its original location; it will be backed up directly to the backup media. This option should not be used if: ◆ A single device containing one drive is used for secondary storage and backups because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for use of the drive. ◆ You want to run a backup of the entire system because Backup Exec attempts to access all data that has been migrated to secondary storage and this may take a considerable amount of time. DO_BACKUP_ Use change journal Enter 1 to use Windows NTFS Change USECHANGEJOURNAL Journal to determine which files have been modified since the last full backup; otherwise, enter 0. This option can only be used with NTFS volumes and only when the backup method selected is either DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time or INCREMENTAL - Using modified time. 98 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 99. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_BACKUP_ Back up open files if Open Enter a number from 0 to 3 to specify OPENFILEMETHOD File Option is not how to back up open files if the Open available File Option is not available. Values include: ◆ 0 = Never ◆ 1 = With a lock ◆ 2 = Without a lock ◆ 3 = If closed within x seconds DO_BACKUP_ Back up open file if closed If 3 was entered for the value for OPENFILESKIPSECS within x seconds DO_BACKUP_OPENFILEMETHOD, enter a number from 1 to 999 to specify the number of seconds Backup Exec is to wait for an open file to close before continuing the backup. If the files do not close during the specified interval, they are skipped. DO_BACKUP_GRTPATH If Backup Exec Granular Enter the path to an NTFS volume on Recovery Technology the local media server where Backup (GRT) is enabled for Exec can stage temporary data. Backup backup, enter a path on Exec deletes the data when the backup the NFTS volume of the completes. local media server where At least 1 GB of disk space is required. Backup Exec can stage temporary data Restore Default Options DO_RESTORE_ Restore over existing files Enter 1 to overwrite files on the target EXISTINGMETHOD device that have the same name as files that are being restored; otherwise, enter 0. DO_RESTORE_CORRUPT Restore corrupt files Enter 1 to allow Backup Exec to restore corrupted files during the restore process; otherwise, enter 0 to allow Backup Exec to automatically exclude corrupt files from the restore process. 99
  • 100. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_RESTORE_ Restore junction points Enter 0 if you want to restore the JUNCMETHOD method information for the junction points and the files and directories to which they are linked, overwriting existing junction points on your system. Enter 1 if you want to restore files and directories backed up from junction point links while retaining the system’s current junction points. DO_RESTORE_TEMPPATH Path on media server for Type the path on the media server staging temporary where you want to stage temporary restore data restore data when using Backup Exec Granular Recovery Technology (GRT) to restore individual items from tape. Network and Security Default Options DO_NIC_ Enter 1 to enable selection of Windows ENABLEDSHARESELECTION user shares; otherwise, enter 0. DO_NIC_AGENTPORTRANGE Enter a port range to allow remote agents to use a range of ports for communications. DO_NIC_ Enter 1 display the 32-bit number that AUTOOBTAINSUBNET determines the subnet to which the network interface card belongs; otherwise, enter 0. DO_NIC_ Enter 1 to select the name of the ANYAVAILABLE network interface card that connects the media server to the network you want to use for the backup network; otherwise, enter 0. DO_NIC_PROTOCOL Enter one of the following values to select the protocol you want to use: ◆ 0 = any available protocol ◆ 1 = Use IPv4 ◆ 2 = Use IPv6 100 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 101. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_NIC_MACADDRESS Enter 1 to display the Media Access Control (MAC) address, Adapter type, Description, IP addresses, and subnet prefixes of the network interface you selected for the backup network; otherwise, enter 0. DO_NIC_SUBNETADDRESS Enter a subnet address to ensure that the data from a remote system you select for backup is backed up or restored over any available network. DO_ENCRYPTION_TYPE Specify the encryption Enter a number from 0 through 3 to method to use specify the encryption type. Selections are as follows: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Software ◆ 2 = Hardware ◆ 3 = Hardware if available. Otherwise, use software. To set an encryption type, you must first set a default encryption key by using -o99. If you set the encryption type to 2 or 3, the default key must be 256-bit encryption. DO_SAV_ Set Symantec ThreatCon Enter a number from 0 through 4 to THREATLEVELTRIGGER Level specify the Symantec ThreatCon Level at which backup jobs should run immediately. Selections are as follows: ◆ 0 = Disabled ◆ 2 = Level 2: Elevated ◆ 3 = Level 3: High ◆ 4 = Level 4: Extreme Trial Job Default Options DO_TRIAL_ Check logon credentials Enter 1 to verify that the logon CHECKCREDENTIALS for trial run job account is correct for the volumes being backed up; otherwise, enter 0. 101
  • 102. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_TRIAL_ Check media capacity for Enter 1 to test whether enough tape is CHECKCAPACITY trial run job available to complete the job; otherwise, enter 0. Note During the test run job, the number of scheduled jobs in the queue is not checked; therefore, jobs that are scheduled before the test run job may use the media that was available when the test run job was performed. DO_TRIAL_CHECKMEDIA Check media for trial run Enter 1 to test whether the media is job online and overwritable for a trial run job; otherwise, enter 0. DO_TRIAL_ Select method for Enter 0 if you want to determine job DETERMINESIZEMETHOD determining trial run job size from a previous job history, or size enter a 1 if you want to perform a pre-scan. DO_TRIAL_ Place job on hold if trial Enter 1 to have the scheduled job HOLDONFAILURE job fails placed on hold if any failures are detected during the test run; otherwise, enter 0. Advanced Open File Options DO_OPENFILE_METHOD Enter one of the following values: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Use the Advanced Open File Option 102 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 103. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_OPENFILE_ Specify the open file Enter a number from 0 through 4 to CONFIGURATION=0-4 technology to back up specify the open file technology to open files back up open files. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Do not use the open file technology ◆ 1 = Automatically select open file technology ◆ 2 = Use Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service ◆ 3 = Use VERITAS Volume Snapshot Provider ◆ 4= Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows FlashSnap Option DO_SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER= Specify the snapshot Enter a number from 0 through 3 to 0-3 provider for the selected specify the snapshot provider for the volume selected volume. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Automatic - Allows VSS to select the snapshot provider ◆ 1 = System - Use Microsoft software shadow copy provider ◆ 2 = Software - Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows ◆ 3 = Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer DO_USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_ Process logical volumes Enter 1 to process logical volumes for SNAPSHOT=0 or 1 for backup one at a time backup one at a time; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SELECTIONLIST_CREATE Specify separate ◆ Enter a number from 0 through 2 selection lists for to specify separate selection lists resources or computers for resources or computers. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Single backup selection list for all selections ◆ 1 = Separate backup selection list for each computer ◆ 2 = Separate backup selection list for each resource 103
  • 104. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Advanced Disk-based Backup Default Options DO_DISKBACKUP_OFFHOST Use offhost backup to Enter 1 if you want to enable offhost move backup processing backup; otherwise, enter 0. If you enter from the remote 1, an offhost backup of all volumes is computer to the media performed if all requirements are met. server DO_DISKBACKUP_ Specify snapshot Enter one of the following values: SNAPSHOT provider ◆ Automatic - Use hardware if available; otherwise use software. Select this option to enable VSS to select the best provider for the selected volume. ◆ Software - Use Veritas Storage Foundation for Windows. ◆ Hardware - Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer: If you select Software or Hardware as the snapshot provider, then the following information applies: ◆ The provider must support transportable snaps. ◆ If multiple volumes are selected, then all volumes must be snappable by the same type of provider. Software and hardware providers cannot both be used to snap different volumes in the same job. You must either create another job, or make sure that the following option is selected: Process logical volumes for offhost backup one at a time. 104 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 105. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_DISKBACKUP_OFFHOST_ Specify the job Enter one of the following values: NOTSUPPORTED disposition, if any, of the ◆ 0 = Continue the backup job selected resources do not (offhost backup is not used) support offhost backup ◆ 1 = Fail the backup job (further selections are not backed up after failure occurs) DO_DISKBACKUP_PROCESS Process logical volumes Enter 1 if you want to enable the for offhost backup one at backup of multiple volumes in one job. a time This method creates a snapshot of only one logical volume at a time. Otherwise, enter 0. To ensure database integrity, or if a volume contains mount points, multiple volumes may need to be snapped at one time. After the logical volume is snapped and backed up, the snapshot is deleted before the next logical volume is snapped. This option increases the ability to meet the minimum quiet time that is needed to complete a snapshot. A logical volume can comprise multiple physical volumes. A single logical volume can encompass all of the volumes on which databases reside. Job Log Default Options DO_LOG_SUMMARYLEVEL Select summary level for Enter one of the following values for job log the job log summary level: ◆ 0 = Summary only ◆ 1 = Summary and directories ◆ 2 = Summary, directories, and files ◆ 3 = Summary, directories, files, and details. 105
  • 106. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_LOG_FILEBASE Specify job log name Specify a job log name FILENAME#.txt. The # starts at 00. The default is BEX#.txt. DO_LOG_ATTACH Attach job log as html Enter 1 to attach the job logs in an html format when an email notification is sent; otherwise, enter 0. SQL Default Options DO_SQL_BACKUPMETHOD Select the SQL backup Select the backup method to be used method for SQL databases by entering one of the following values: ◆ 0 = full ◆ 1 = log ◆ 2 = log no truncate ◆ 3 = differential DO_SQL_ Consistency check before Select a consistency check to run CHECKBEFOREBACKUP backup before a backup. Values are as follows: ◆ 0 = none ◆ 1 = full ◆ 2 = full with indexes ◆ 3 = physical DO_SQL_ Continue with backup if Enter 1 if you want the backup job to CONTINUEIFCHECKFAILS consistency check fails continue if the consistency check fails; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SQL_ Consistency check after Select a consistency check to run after CHECKAFTERBACKUP backup a backup. Values are: ◆ 0 = none ◆ 1 = full ◆ 2 = full with indexes ◆ 3 = physical 106 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 107. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_SQL_ CHECKSUM Use checksums on Enter 1 if you want to have SQL 2005 backup (SQL 2005 only) add checksums to the SQL 2005 database data that is backed up by Backup Exec; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SQL_KEEPSNAPSHOTS Specifies the number of Enter the number of database database snapshots to snapshots to keep on disk. As the keep threshold is met, older database snapshots are deleted, which are then replaced with new shapshots. Database snapshots continue to grow as the SQL 2005 database is updated. If you limit the number of snapshots, you minimize both the disk space and SQL Server processing time that is required when the snapshots are updated. DO_SQL_CREATECOPIES Create on-disk copies of Enter 1 if you want to create an SQL backups to be placed on-disk copy of the SQL database that on the SQL server where is backed up; otherwise, enter 0. If you the database is located enter 1, you can simultaneously back up a SQL database to storage media and write a copy of the database to a disk path you specify with the DO_SQL_SAVEPATH option. DO_SQL_SAVEPATH Specify the path in which Enter the path for the on-disk copy of to save on-disk copies of the SQL backup. To use this option, SQL backups you must enter 1 for DO_SQL_CREATECOPIES. DO_SQL_RESTOREMETHOD SQL restore method Select the default restore method for SQL databases. Values include: ◆ 0 = no recover ◆ 1 = recover ◆ 2 = standby 107
  • 108. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_SQL_REPLACE Replace database or Enter 1 if you want to replace a filegroups Microsoft SQL Server database or filegroup, even if another database or filegroup with the same name already exists on the server. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_SQL_ Consistency check after Select a consistency check to run after CHECKAFTERRESTORE restore a restore. Values include: ◆ 0 = none ◆ 1 = full ◆ 2 = full with indexes ◆ 3 = physical DO_SQL_ Enable filegroup support Enter 1 if you want to enable filegroup ENABLEFGSUPPORT support; otherwise, enter 0. Exchange Default Options DO_XCH_ENABLE Enable Exchange support Enter 1 if you want to enable Exchange support; otherwise, enter 0. DO_XCH_BACKUPMETHOD Exchange backup method Select the default backup method to use for Exchange databases. Values include: ◆ 0 = full ◆ 1 = copy ◆ 2 = differential ◆ 3 = incremental DO_XCH_ Exchange mailbox Select the default method for backing MBOXBACKUPMETHOD backup method up Exchange mailboxes. Values are: ◆ 0 = full ◆ 1 = copy ◆ 2 = differential ◆ 3 = incremental DO_XCH_ Enable single instance Enter 1 if you want to enable single SINGLEINSTANCEBACKUP backup for message instance backup for message attachments attachments; otherwise, enter 0. 108 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 109. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_XCH_NOLOSS No loss restore Enter 1 to restore without deleting existing job logs; otherwise, enter 0. DO_XCH_PUBLIC Restore public folder Enter 1 to restore a public folder; otherwise, enter 0. DO_XCH_PRIVATE Restore private Enter 1 to restore private mailboxes; mailboxes otherwise, enter 0. DO_XCH_LOGPATH Select temporary location Enter the temporary location for log for log and patch files and patch files. DO_XCH_ Automatically recreate Enter 1 to have Backup Exec AUTOCREATEMAILBOX user accounts and automatically recreate user accounts mailboxes and mailboxes if they do not already exist on the server; otherwise, enter 0. DO_XCH_ENABLE_ Use Granual Recovery Enter 1 to enable the restore of GRANULAR_RESTORE Technology to enable the individual mailboxes, mail messages, restore of individual and folders from Information Store mailboxes, mail backups; otherwise, enter 0. messages, and public Incremental backups are supported folders with policy-based jobs only. DO_XCH_OVERWRITE Restore over existing Enter 1 to restore over existing messages and folders messages and folders when you restore individual mail messages and folders. Otherwise, enter 0. Microsoft SharePoint Default Options DO_SPPS2_BACKUPMETHOD Select the default method for backing up SharePoint databases. Values include: ◆ 0 = Full - Back up entire database ◆ 1 = Differential - Backup up database changes only DO_SPPS2_ENABLE_ Enter 1 to enable the restore of GRANULAR_RESTORE individual documents from database backups; otherwise, enter 0. 109
  • 110. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_SPPS2_PRE_DBCC Enter 1 to perform a consistency check before the backup of Microsoft SQL databases Microsoft SharePoint uses; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SPPS2_CONT_ON_DBCC_ Continue with backup job Enter 1 to continue with the backup ERROR even if consistency check operation even if the consistency fails check fails; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SPPS2_RECNT_DB_ON_ Bring restore databases Enter 1 to bring the databases online RESTORE online after a restore job; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SPPS2_RECONNECT Reconnect previous Enter 1 to re-establish the link database links between the restored databases and their corresponding sites when you restore portal sites or Windows SharePoint Services sites; otherwise, enter 0. You must set the DO_SPPS2_RECNT_DB_ON_RESTORE value to 1 in order to use this option. DO_SPPS2_OVERWRITE Restore over existing Enter 1 if you want to replace existing documents documents with documents of the same name in the restore job; otherwise, enter 0. Microsoft Active Directory Default Options DO_AD_RECREATE Recreate deleted options Enter 1 if you want to recreate deleted that cannot be restored objects; otherwise, enter 0. from the Active Directory You should enter 1 if both of the Deleted Objects container following have occurred: ◆ The object’s tombstone lifetimes have passed. ◆ The objects were purged from the Active Directory Deleted Objects container. 110 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 111. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_AD_RESTORE Use Backup Exec Enter 1 to enable the restore of Granular Recovery individual objects from Active Technology (GRT) to Directory backups. With this option, enable the restore of you can restore of individual items individual objects from from full backups of the Active the Active Directory Directory or ADAM/ AD LDS. backups Otherwise, enter 0. Symantec recommends that if you select this option, you should select a backup-to-disk folder on a local NTFS volume as the destination device. If data must be restored from a tape, then the media server must stage the restore of the entire database to a temporary path to extract individual items. DO_AD_CONSISTENCY_ Checks snapshots for Enter 1 to enable the consistency CHECK data corruption check. This option applies only to snapshots that are performed by the Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Services (VSS). You must have Windows 2008 to use this option. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_AD_CONSISTENCY_ Enables the backup job to Enter 1 to enable the backup job to CHECK_FAILS continue even if the continue even if the consistency check consistency check fails fails. Otherwise, enter 0. You may want the job to continue if a backup of the database in its current state is better than no backup at all. Or you may want the job to continue if you back up a large database that may have only a small problem. 111
  • 112. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Lotus Domino Default Options DO_DOMINO_ Lotus Domino backup Select the default method for backing BACKUPMETHOD method up Lotus Domino databases. Values include: ◆ 0 = full ◆ 1 = differential ◆ 2 = incremental DO_DOMINO_ Mark archive logs for Enter 1 to mark archive logs for RECYCLELOGS recycling recycling; otherwise, enter 0. DO_DOMINO_ Seconds to wait for Specify the number of seconds for the SECONDSTOWAIT database restore process to wait for a database that is in use by entering a value from 0 to 999. DO_DOMINO_ Database identification Select the default option for handling RECOVEROPTION database IDs during a restore. Values include: ◆ 0 = retain original IDs ◆ 1 = assign new database ID ◆ 2 = assign new database ID and replica ID Oracle Default Options 112 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 113. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_ORACLE_ Select backup method Select the default method to back up BACKUPMETHOD Oracle databases. Values are as follows: ◆ 0 = Full - Back up selections. This method is the equivalent of the Oracle RMAN Incremental: Level 0 backup. Select this method to perform a full backup of Oracle selections. ◆ 1 = Differential - Back up changes since last full. This method is the equivalent of the Oracle RMAN Cumulative Incremental: Level 1 backup. Select this method to back up all database changes since the last full backup. A full backup is performed of all archived redo logs since log files are never partially backed up. ◆ 2 = Incremental - Back up changes since last full or incremental. This method is the equivalent of the Oracle RMAN Incremental: Level 1 backup. Select this method to back up all database changes since the last full or incremental backup. A full backup is performed of all archived redo logs since log files are never partially backed up. DO_ORACLE_DELETELOGS Delete backed up archive Enter 1 to have Backup Exec delete the log files archived log files automatically after the backup job. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_ORACLE_DONT_ Do not back up archive Enter 1 to have Backup Exec skip any REBACKUP_LOGS log files that have already archived log files that were backed up been backed up previously; otherwise, enter 0. DO_ORACLE_ Perform the backup Enter 1 to have Backup Exec take the BACKUPOFFLINE offline database offline before you start the backup job; otherwise, enter 0. 113
  • 114. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description NetWare SMS Default Options DO_SMS_ Back up compressed files Enter 1 to have Backup Exec BACKUPASEXPANDED in decompressed form decompress, or expand, compressed files as they are backed up; otherwise, enter 0. DO_SMS_ Restore volume Enter 1 to restore NetWare volume RESTOREVOLRESTRICT restrictions restrictions; otherwise, enter 0. Linux, Unix, and Macintosh Default Options DO)UNIXMAC_ Preserve change time Enter 1 to prevent the Remote Agent PRESERVETIME from changing an object’s (files and directories) attributes when a backup occurs; otherwise, enter 0. DO_UNIXMAC_FOLLOW_ Follow local mount points Enter 1 to have Backup Exec follow LOCALMOUNT local mount points during backup jobs; otherwise, enter 0. DO_UNIXMAC_FOLLOW_ Follow remote mount Enter 1 to have Backup Exec follow REMOTEMOUNT points remote mount points during backup jobs; otherwise, enter 0. DO_UNIXMAC_SOFTLINKED Back up contents of Enter 1 to back up the contents of soft-linked directories directories that are linked with soft links. You must also select the directory that contains the soft link. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_UNIXMAC_LOCK_ Lock remote files Enter 1 if the Remote Agent requires REMOTEFILES exclusive access to the files on remote systems that are connected through the Network File System; otherwise, enter 0. 114 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 115. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description NDMP Default Options DO_NDMP_NETAPP_ Backup method for Enter a number 0 through 9 to specify BACKUPMETHOD NDMP resources the backup level. Level 0 provides a full backup. Levels 1 through 9 provide various levels of incremental backups. Level 1 backup method backs up new or modified files since the level 0 backup, level 2 backup method backs up new or modified files since the level 1 backup, and so on. DO_NDMP_NETAPP_ Back up Access Control Enter 1 to back up NetApp Access BACKUP_CONTROLLISTS Lists Control Lists; otherwise, enter 0. This option applies to NetApp filers only. DO_NDMP_NETAPP_ Disable file history Enter 1 to prevent the generation of DISABLEHISTORY file history data; otherwise, enter 0. File history is used to optimize recovery of selected subsets of data from the backup image. File history generation and processing increase the backup time. To improve backup time, enter 0 for this option. If file history is made unavailable and you must later restore data, restore the entire backup image. DO_NDMP_RESTORE_ Restore Access Control Enter 1 to restore NetApp Access CONTROLLISTS Lists Control Lists; otherwise, enter 0. DO_NDMP_NETAPP_ Enable Direct Access Enter 1 to have Backup Exec use Direct DIRECTRECOVERY Recovery Access Recovery (DAR) during the restore job; otherwise, enter 0. With DAR-enabled recovery, Backup Exec can specify the exact location of a file in a backup data stream. The NDMP server can then read the data applicable to the single file being restored. DAR reduces the amount of information that is processed and significantly reduces recovery time. If DAR is not available, the restore may take significantly longer. 115
  • 116. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_NDMP_NETAPP_ Restore without writing Enter 1 to test the validity of the data RESTORE_WITHOUT_ data to disk (Verify data that you selected for the restore job; WRITING without doing a restore) otherwise, enter 0. Backup Exec does not restore the data. For NetApp/IBM filers, you should use this option to verify data instead of Backup Exec's verify backup job option. DO_NDMP_EMC_BACKUP_ Backup method Enter a number 0 through 9 to specify METHOD (EMC) the backup level. Level 0 provides a full backup. Levels 1 through 9 provide various levels of incremental backups. Level 1 backup method backs up new or modified files since the level 0 backup. Level 2 backup method backs up new or modified files since the level 1 backup, and so on. DO_NDMP_EMC_BACKUP_ Backup Type Enter one of the following values: TYPE ◆ 0 = VBB (EMC only) ◆ 1 = Dump DO_NDMP_EMC_SNAPSURE Back up with integrated Enter 1 to enable Backup Exec to checkpoints (SnapSure) create a backup set that uses the EMC SnapSure feature; otherwise, enter 0. This feature applies only to EMC. For more information about SnapSure, see your EMC documentation. DO_NDMP_EMC_ Disable file history (EMC) Enter 1 to prevent the generation of DISABLEHISTORY file history data otherwise; enter 0. File history allows for the recovery of selected subsets of data from the backup history. File history is used to optimize recovery of selected subsets of data from the backup image. File history generation and processing increase the backup time. To improve backup time, enter 0 for this option. If file history is made unavailable and you must later restore data, restore the entire backup image. 116 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 117. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_NDMP_EMC_ Enable tape silvering Enter 1 to enable Backup Exec to TAPESILVERING create a backup set that you can use to replicate data by using tape silvering; otherwise, enter 0. This feature applies only to EMC. For more information about tape silvering, see your EMC documentation. DO_NDMP_EMC_ Enable Direct Access Enter 1 to have Backup Exec use Direct DIRECTRECOVERY Recovery Access Recovery (DAR) during the restore job; otherwise, enter 0. With DAR-enabled recovery, Backup Exec can specify the exact location of a file in a backup data stream. The NDMP server can then read the data applicable to the single file being restored. DAR reduces the amount of information that is processed and significantly reduces recovery time. If DAR is not available, the restore may take significantly longer. DO_NDMP_NETAPP_ Restores data with Enter 1 to restore the data with its PRESERVETREE original directory original directory structure intact. structure intact Enter 0 to restore all data in the directories and subdirectories to the path you specify in the File Redirection dialog box. This option affects restore jobs for NetApp/IBM data only. DO_NDMP_EMC_ Restores data with Enter 1 to restore the data with its PRESERVETREE original directory original directory structure intact. structure intact Enter 0 to restore all data in the directories and subdirectories to the path you specify in the File Redirection dialog box. This option affects restore jobs for EMC data only. 117
  • 118. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Storage Provisioning Default Options DO_SPO_MAXBACKUPSETS Maximum number of Enter the maximum number of backup backup sets per file sets to write to a file on a virtual disk. The value can be between one and 8192. The default value is 100. If you specify fewer rather than more backup sets in a file, Backup Exec may be able to reclaim disk space faster. For example, you specify 100 backup sets per file. Backup Exec cannot reclaim any disk space until the overwrite protection period expires for all of the backup sets. If you specify one backup set per file, Backup Exec can reclaim disk space as soon as the overwrite protection period expires for that set. DO_SPO_MAXFILESIZE Maximum size for files Type the maximum size for each file that this virtual disk contains. The file size can be from 1 MB to 4194304 MB. The default is 4 GB. Note 1024 MB is equal to 1 GB. DO_SPO_MAXCONCURRENT Allow x concurrent jobs Enter the number of concurrent operations that you want to allow to this virtual disk. The value can be between one and 16. DO_SPO_THRESHOLD1 Threshold 1 Enter the low disk space threshold at which you want Backup Exec to send the first of three alerts. The default threshold is 75%, which is a percentage of the total available disk space on this virtual disk. The value can be between one and 100. The amount you enter must be equal to or less than threshold 2. 118 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 119. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_SPO_THRESHOLD2 Threshold 2 Enter the low disk space threshold at which you want Backup Exec to send the second of three alerts. The default threshold is 85%, which is a percentage of the total available disk space on this virtual disk. The value can be between 1 and 100. The amount you enter must be equal to or less than threshold three, but greater than or equal to threshold 1. DO_SPO_THRESHOLD3 Threshold 3 Enter the low disk space threshold at which you want Backup Exec to send the last of three alerts. The default threshold is 95%, which is a percentage of the total available disk space on this virtual disk. The value can be between 1 and 100. The amount you enter must be greater than or equal to threshold 2. Schedule Default Option DO_SCHEDULE_DELETION Job deletion for run once Enter one of the following values: jobs ◆ 0 = Delete the job if the job successfully completes ◆ 1 = Delete the job after the job completes ◆ 2 = Do not delete the job Job Status and Recovery Default Options DO_STATUSRECOVERY_ Time before job status Enter the number of seconds before STALLED becomes stalled the statuses of active jobs are changed to Stalled when the Backup Exec engine service fails to respond. 119
  • 120. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_STATUSRECOVERY_ Time before job status Enter the number of seconds before RECOVERED becomes recovered jobs are failed and then recovered by Backup Exec. A custom error-handling rule named Recovered Jobs is applied to recovered jobs. If this rule is disabled, then any other error- handling rules that are enabled will apply to the recovered jobs. If there are no error-handling rules that apply to the job, then the job fails. Catalog Default Options DO_CAT_MEDIA_ Request all media in the Enter 1 to catalog media starting with INSEQUENCE sequence for catalog the lowest known tape number in the operations tape family. For example, if you don’t have tape one, the catalog begins with tape two. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_CAT_USECATALOGS Use storage media-based Enter 1 to use the catalog information catalogs from the media; otherwise, enter 0. DO_CAT_TRUNCATEFLAG Truncate catalogs Enter 1 to retain only the header information and to remove all file and directory details after the specified number of days; otherwise, enter 0. If you select this option, you must enter a value for DO_CAT_TRUNCATEDAYS. DO_CAT_TRUNCATEDDAYS Amount of days before Enter the amount of days before file truncating catalogs and directory details are removed from the catalogs. The value can be between 1 and 999. DO_CAT_REMOVEFLAG Remove unused catalogs Enter 1 to remove unused catalogs after a specified number of days; otherwise, enter 0. If you select this option, you must enter a value for DO_CAT_REMOVEDAYS. DO_CAT_REMOVEDAYS Amount of days before Enter the amount of days before removing unused unused catalogs are removed. The catalogs value can be between 1 and 999. 120 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 121. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_CAT_PATH Set catalog path Specify a path on the volume for the catalog files. Media Default Options DO_MEDIA_B2DLOCATION Backup-to-Disk default Specify a path on the volume for the folder location Backup-to-Disk folder. DO_MEDIA_ Set media overwrite Enter one of the following values: OVERWRITELEVEL protection level ◆ 1 = None ◆ 2 = None with prompt ◆ 3 = Partial ◆ 4 = Partial with prompt ◆ 5 = Full DO_MEDIA_ Set the media overwrite Enter one of the following values: OVERWRITEOPTIONS options ◆ 0 = Overwrite scratch media before overwriting recyclable media contained in the targeted media set ◆ 1 = Overwrite recyclable media contained in the targeted media set before overwriting scratch media DO_MEDIA_DEFAULTVAULT Specify the default media Enter the default vault that you want vault media moved to when a job is run to move media to a vault or to export media. Intelligent Disaster Recovery Default Options DO_DISASTER_DATAPATH Disaster recovery data Specify a path where a copy of the DR path files for the protected computers will be stored. DO_DISASTER_ Alternate disaster Specify an alternate data path where a ALTERNATEPATH recovery data path second copy of the DR files can be stored. 121
  • 122. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Backup-to-Disk Default Options DO_B2D_MAXBACKUPSETS Maximum number of Type the maximum number of backup backup sets per sets to be written to each backup-to-disk file backup-to-disk file. The maximum number can range from 1 to 8192. The default is 100. Fewer backup sets in a backup-to-disk file may allow the overwrite protection period to expire sooner, and the disk space to be reclaimed faster. DO_B2D_MAXFILESIZE Maximum size for Type the maximum size for each backup-to-disk files backup-to-disk file. The file size can be from 1 MB to 4194304 MB. The default is 4 GB. Note 1024 MB is equal to 1 GB. DO_B2D_ALLOCATEMAXSIZE Allocate the maximum Enter 1 to create the backup-to-disk size when creating the file at the maximum size to reduce disk backup-to-disk file fragmentation; otherwise, enter 0. This default does not apply to removable backup-to-disk folders. DO_B2D_CONCURRENTJOBS Allow concurrent jobs for Type the number of concurrent this backup-to-disk folder operations that you want to allow to this folder. This number can range from 1 to 16. DO_B2D_RESERVESIZE Disk space reserve Enter an amount of disk space to reserve on a backup-to-disk folder. When this threshold is reached, Backup Exec cannot submit jobs for processing that are targeted to this backup-to-disk folder, but jobs that are running will finish. DO_B2D_FOLDERLOCATION Specify backup-to-disk Type the default path for new folder location backup-to-disk folders. 122 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 123. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DB2 Default Options DO_DB2_BACKUPMETHOD Select backup method Specifies the backup method to be used for DB2 backup jobs. Methods are as follows: ◆ 0 = Full - Back up selections. Select this method to perform a full backup of DB2 selections. ◆ 1 = Differential - Back up changes since last full backup. ◆ 2 = Incremental - Back up changes since last full or incremental backup. DO_DB2_BACKUPOFFLINE Perform backups offline Enter 1 if you want Backup Exec to take the database offline before you start the backup job; otherwise, enter 0. If you enter 1, Backup Exec brings the database online after the backup job is complete. DO_DB2_QUIESCE Quiesce the database Enter 1 if you want Backup Exec to before offline backup force users off the database before it brings the database offline for the backup job. Otherwise, enter 0. Database Maintenance Default Options DO_DB_GROOM Remove old data from the Enter 1 if you want Backup Exec to Backup Exec database automatically delete old data from its database, using specified criteria. Otherwise, enter 0. DO_DB_TIME Time to perform database Enter the time you want to perform maintenance database maintenance. All the maintenance occurs once a day at the time you specify. 123
  • 124. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_DB_ENABLE_ Keep job history Select one of the following options for JOBHISTORYDAYS keeping job history data: ◆ 0 = Keep job history for data on media that have current overwrite protection periods. ◆ 1 = Keep job history for a specified number of days. This option is used with the DO_DB_JOBHISTORYDAYS option. DO_DB_JOBHISTORYDAYS Number of days to keep Enter the number of days for job job history data history data to remain on the Backup Exec database. DO_DB_ Number of days to keep Enter the number of days for alert ALERTHISTORYDAYS alert history data history data to remain on the Backup Exec database. DO_DB_JOBLOGDAYS Number of days to keep Enter the number of days for job logs job logs to remain on the Backup Exec database. DO_DB_REPORTDAYS Number of days to keep Enter the number of days for report report data data to remain on the Backup Exec database. DO_DB_AUDITLOGDAYS Number of days to keep Enter the number of days for audit audit logs logs to remain on the Backup Exec database. DO_DB_CONSISTENCY Perform database Enter 1 if you want to perform a consistency check database consistency check; otherwise, enter 0. DO_DB_COMPACT Compact the Backup Exec Enter 1 if you want to compact the database Backup Exec database; otherwise, enter 0. DO_DB_DUMP Dump contents of Backup Enter 1 if you want to dump the Exec database contents of the Backup Exec database to the Backup Exec data directory so that it can be backed up; otherwise, enter 0. 124 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 125. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description Reports DO_REPORTS_ Use company logo image Enter 1 if you want to use a company COMPANYLOGO file logo in the report header; otherwise, enter 0. DO_REPORTS_IMAGEFILE Specify image file path Type the path to the logo that you want to use in all custom reports. DO_REPORTS_ Specify the color to use Type the numbers that correspond to BANNERCOLOR for the report banner the values for red, green, and blue that you want to use for the banner color. Use the following format: <value for red>. <value for green>, <value for blue> Values can range from 0 through 255 DO_REPORTS_FOOTERTEXT Specify text to appear in Type the text you want to appear in the the report footer report footer. DO_REPORTS_FOOTERTIME Include time in footer Enter 1 if you want to include the time the report ran in the report footer; otherwise, enter 0. LiveUpdate DO_LU_ENABLED Lets you schedule Enter 1 to have Backup Exec download automatic updates, and and install all updates that are then choose the available without prompting you first. frequency of the updates Enter 2 to have Backup Exec alert you when updates are available. Updates are not downloaded or installed. Enter O to disable automatic updates. 125
  • 126. Using command line switches Default option parameters (continued) Option Name Function Description DO_LU_FREQUENCY Lets you select the Enter O to have Backup Exec check for frequency with which new updates only on the date and time Backup Exec checks for that you specify. updates Enter 1 to have Backup Exec check for new updates every day at the time you specify. Enter 2 to have Backup Exec check for new updates once a week on the day and time that you specify. Enter 3 to have Backup Exec check for new updates once a month at the time you specify. DO_LU_DAY Lets you select the day on Enter one of the following: which you want Backup ◆ 0 = Sunday Exec to check for updates ◆ 1 = Monday ◆ 2 = Tuesday ◆ 3 = Wednesday ◆ 4 = Thursday ◆ 5 = Friday ◆ 6 = Saturday DO_LU_DATE Lets you enter the Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY specific date on which format. For example, enter you want Backup Exec to 12/13/2010 to run the job on check for updates December 13, 2010. DO_LU_TIME Lets you enter the time at Enter the time in 24 hour format. For which you want Backup example, enter 21:30:00 to run the Exec to check for updates. job at 9:30 PM. 126 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 127. Using job script files Using job script files A job script file is a text (.txt) file that the Command Line applet can use with command line switch -o90 to create and launch jobs. The job script file can contain all of the switches you would normally specify on the command line when using the Command Line Applet as well as additional switches that you set when creating the job script file. The job script file can also be used in conjunction with some of the switches. Sample script files are included in the UTILS directory on the installation DVD. To activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//) at the beginning of the line. The following are the sample script files included: ■ Backup jobs - bjscript.txt ■ Restore jobs - rjscript.txt ■ Catalog jobs - catalogscript.txt ■ Discovery resource jobs - discoveryscript.txt ■ Duplicate backup jobs - djscript.txt ■ Test run jobs - testrunscript.txt ■ Copy job - cjscript.txt Creating a backup job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a backup job script file that contains the following sections, and entries for each section: ■ [General] ■ [Backup_Options] ■ [Media_Options] ■ [Miscellaneous] ■ [Schedule] ■ [Machine] ■ [Selections] ■ [Media_Server] Each entry included for the various sections must be typed in capital letters and be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Backups and the job type is backup, the script file for the [General] section would appear as: 127
  • 128. Using job script files [General] JOB_TYPE=Backup JOB_NAME=Workstation Backups All possible entries for a Backup Job Script File are described in the following table. In creating a script file, you would not want to include all entries. Possible backup job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=job type This entry must be completed with a value of Backup. JOB_PRIORITY=priority Enter the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest JOB_NAME=job name Type the name of the backup job. SERVER=server name Type the name of the Backup Exec server where the operation is to be performed. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. USERNAME=username Type the user name for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. PASSWORD=password Enter the password for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current password is used. 128 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 129. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [Backup_Options] BK_SET_NAME=backup set name Type the name of the backup set to be used by the job. BK_METHOD=0 - 9, 11 Enter a number from 0 through 9 or 11 that corresponds to the backup method you want. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full ◆ 1 = Copy ◆ 2 = Differential – changed files ◆ 3 = Incremental – changed files ◆ 4 = Daily ◆ 5 = Working set ◆ 6 = Incremental – modified time ◆ 7 = Differential – modified time ◆ 8 = Full – modified time ◆ 9 = Archive - Delete files after successful copy backup ◆ 11 = Synthetic full backup If 5 is entered as the value, a value must also be entered for WORKING_SET_DAYS. DEVICE_NAME=device name Type the name of the device to be used for the backup. DEVICE_ID=device GUID Type the GUID of the device to use for the backup. 129
  • 130. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description OPEN_FILES_METHOD=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 through 3 to specify how to back up open files. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Never ◆ 1 = If closed within a specified number of seconds. If this method is selected, use the flag OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME to set the number of seconds for Backup Exec to wait; otherwise, the value set for default options will be used. ◆ 2 = With a lock ◆ 3 = Without a lock Note If 1 is entered as the value, Backup Exec will wait the number of seconds specified in OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME for the file to close before continuing the backup. If the files do not close during the specified interval, they are skipped. OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME=# Specifies the number of seconds Backup Exec is to wait for a file to close before continuing with the backup. RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to retension the media before backup; otherwise, enter 0. PRESERVE_TREE_ON_ARCHIVE= Enter 1 to retain the directory 0 or 1 structure of the files that were backed up in an archive job on the hard drive; otherwise, enter 0. SINGLE_INSTANCE_FOR_NTFS=0 or 1 Enter 1 if single instance store is being used, and you want to ensure that only one instance of a file for NTFS volumes will be backed up regardless of the number of single instance store (SIS) links that point to it. Otherwise, enter 0. 130 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 131. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description REMOTE_AGENT_PRIORITY=# Select the number of CPU cycles the media server will use to maintain optimal server performance while Remote Agent backups are running. The higher the priority, the more the protected server’s CPU processing power is used during backup operations. Note Allocating fewer CPU cycles to a backup job results in slower backup performance. This entry contains the following options: ◆ MEDIUM. Select this option to allocate the default number of CPU cycles the protected server will use during a Remote Agent backup. ◆ LOW. Select this option to allocate fewer server CPU cycles to the backup job. ◆ LOWEST. Select this option to allocate the fewest number of CPU cycles to the backup job. SAV_THREATLEVELTRIGGER=0, 2 - 4 Select the ThreatCon level at which you want automatic backups to run. You can select from the following: ◆ 0 = Disabled ◆ 2 = Elevated ◆ 3 = High ◆ 4 = Extreme 131
  • 132. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description WORKING_SET_DAYS=# Note If 5 was entered as the value for the BK_METHOD=# entry, the WORKING_SET_DAYS entry must be completed and included in the Backup Job Script File. Enter the number of days during which files that you want to include in the backup were last accessed. For example, if you want to specify for a working set backup to include all files last accessed within 30 days, type WORKING_SET_DAYS=30. BACKUP_LOCAL_MOUNT_POINTS= Enter a value of 1 to back up mount 0 or 1 points, which direct a file or directory to a local disk or directory path. Using this command allows you to back up data that is linked to local files, but is stored on another device without having to actually select the device. BACKUP_REMOTE_STORAGE_HSM= Enter a value of 1 to back up data that 0 or 1 has been migrated from primary storage to secondary storage. The data will not be recalled to its original location; it will be backed up directly to the backup media. This command should not be used if: ◆ A single device is used for secondary storage and backups and it contains one drive because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for use of the drive. ◆ You want to run a backup of your entire system because Backup Exec attempts to access all data that has been migrated to secondary storage and this may take a considerable amount of time. [AOFO] 132 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 133. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description USE_OPEN_FILE_OPTION=0 or 1 Enter 1 to enable the Advanced Open File Option (AOFO) for the backup job. Enter 0 to disable AOFO. If you do not enable this option, jobs saved before you installed the Advanced Open File Option continue to use the previous settings for backing up files. OPEN_FILE_CONFIGURATION=1-4 Lets you select the open file configuration you want to use for the Advanced Open File Option. You have the following options: ◆ 1 = Automatically select open file technology ◆ 2 = Symantec Volume Snapshot Provider (Windows 2000 only) You can only use VSP on computers that have Windows 2000/XP 32-bit. ◆ 3 = Veritas Storage Foundation for Windows FlashSnap Option (Windows 2000 and 2003 only) You can only use Veritas Storage Foundation on computers that have Windows 2000/2003. ◆ 4 = Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service (Windows 2003 and later) Allows third-party hardware and software vendors to create snapshot add-ins for use with Microsoft’s technology. See your software documentation for information about VSS Writers that may be provided by the application software vendor. If you turn off Active Directory, Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) is not available. Jobs that require VSS fail. 133
  • 134. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=0-3 Indicates the snapshot provider to use for jobs. You have the following options: ◆ 0 = Automatic - Allow VSS to select the snapshot provider The order in which a snapshot provider is selected is hardware provider, software provider, and then the system provider. ◆ 1 = System - Use Microsoft Software Shadow Copy Provider ◆ 2 = Software - Use Veritas Storage Foundation for Windows ◆ 3 = Hardware - Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer If you select Software or Hardware, then the following information applies: ◆ If multiple volumes are selected, then all volumes must be snappable by the same type of provider. ◆ Software and hardware providers cannot both be used to snap different volumes in the same job. You must either create another job, or select the option Process logical volumes for backup one at a time. 134 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 135. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_SNAPSHOT=0 or Enables the backup of multiple 1 volumes in one job, while creating a snapshot of only one logical volume at a time. To ensure database integrity, or if a volume contains mount points, multiple volumes may need to be snapped at one time. A volume with mount points to other volumes is considered a logical volume for snapshot purposes. Therefore, that volume and the mount point volumes will be snapped together simultaneously. If this option is not selected, then a snapshot for all volumes in the backup job is created simultaneously. All volumes must meet the minimum quiet time. This option is only available for Symantec Volume Snapshot Provider (VSP) and Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) jobs for logical volumes. [Exchange] EXCHANGE_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up an Exchange server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 3 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the Exchange database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Backup All ◆ 1 = Backup Copy ◆ 2 = Backup Log Differential ◆ 3 = Backup Log Incremental EXCHANGE_ENABLE_GRANULAR_ Enter 1 to enable the restore of RESTORE=0 or 1 individual documents from database backups. This option is only available when performing full backups; otherwise enter 0. 135
  • 136. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EXCHANGE_CONTINUOUS_ Enter 1 to enable continuous backup of PROTECTION=0 or 1 Exchange transaction logs with Backup Exec Continuous Protection Server; otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_MBOX_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up an Exchange server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 3 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the Exchange database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full - Back up messages. Reset archive bit. ◆ 1 = Copy - Back up messages. ◆ 2 = Differential - Back up changed messages. ◆ 3 = Incremental - Back up changed messages. Reset archive bit. EXCHANGE_SINGLE_INSTANCE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to back up only a single copy of all identical message attachments; otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_CONSISTENCY_ Enter 1 to perform a consistency check CHECK=0 or 1 and determine if possible data corruption exists when using the Backup Exec - Advanced Disk-based Backup Option (ADBO) or the Advanced Open File Option (AOFO); otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_CONTINUE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to continue the backup job even if the consistency check fails; otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_RECOVERY_POINTS_ Enter the interval in days, hours, or INTERVAL=xD (days) or xH (hours) minutes for making recovery points or xM (minutes) when continuously backing up Exchange transaction logs with Backup Exec Continuous Protection Server. 136 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 137. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [SharePoint Portal Server] SPPS2_METHOD=0 or 3 If you are backing up a SharePoint Portal Server. Enter a number 0 or 3 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the SharePoint Portal Server. ◆ 0 = Full - Back up entire database. ◆ 3 = Differential - Back up database changes only. Select this to back up only the changes made to the database since the last full backup. Note The differential backup method cannot be used to back up Index databases or Document Libraries. The Full backup method will be used to back up these resources. SPPS2_ENABLE_GRANULAR_RESTORE=0 Enter 1 to enable the restore of or 1 individual documents from database backups. This option is only available when performing full backups; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_PRE_DBCC=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run a full consistency check (including indexes) of the Microsoft SQL databases used by Microsoft SharePoint before backing up the databases; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_CONT_ON_CC_FAILURE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to continue with the backup operation even if the consistency check fails; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_RELEASE_LOCK= 0 or 1 Enter 1 to release the lock on the SharePoint farm topology before backing up data; otherwise, enter 0. 137
  • 138. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SPPS3_FARMx=Farm name Change x to the lowest number that is not already used, and specify the name of the Microsoft SharePoint 2007 Portal 2 server farm that you want to back up. You should start with the number 1 and continue sequentially. SPPS3_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Required. Specifies the Web server name that belongs to the server farm. SPPS3_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Configuration database in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_SSOx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Single Sign-on database in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_CAx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the central administration site in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_WAxNAMEy=Web application Specify the name of the Web name application. You can list multiple names. SPPS3_SSPxNAMEy=Shared service Specify the name of the shared server provider name provider. You can list multiple names. SPPS3_SIx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the shared instance in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_GSx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the global settings in the backup; otherwise enter 0. 138 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 139. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [SQL Server] SQL_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up a SQL server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 2 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the SQL database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Backup All ◆ 1 = Backup Log ◆ 2 = Backup Log No Truncate ◆ 3 = Differential [Lotus Domino Server] LOTUS_DOMINO_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up a Lotus Domino server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 2 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the Lotus Domino database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full ◆ 1 = Differential ◆ 2 = Incremental LOTUS_DOMINO_RECYCLE_LOGS= If you are backing up a Lotus Domino 0 or 1 server, use this entry to indicate that the Lotus Domino server will reuse the transaction log after it has been backed up. ◆ 1 = Recycle logs ◆ 0 = Do not recycle logs NW_BK_MIGRATED=0 or 1 Enter 1 to back up migrated NetWare SMS files; otherwise, enter 0. This switch can only be used with versions prior to Backup Exec 10.x. 139
  • 140. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description NW_BK_DECOMPRESS_FILES= If you are backing up NetWare shares 0 or 1 or volumes, include this entry in the Backup Job Script File. If you want to back up compressed files in decompressed form, enter 1 as the value; otherwise, enter 0. OVERWRITE_JOB=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want Backup Exec to overwrite a duplicate job if one exists; otherwise, enter 0. CONTINUE_ON_DBCC=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you are backing up a SQL server, have specified that a database consistency check is to be performed before the backup, and want the job to continue if the pre-backup database consistency check failed. PRE_BK_DBCC=0 - 3 If you are backing up a SQL server, include this entry. Enter a value from 0 to 3 that corresponds to an option for performing a pre-backup database consistency check. Options are: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = No Index ◆ 2 = Full ◆ 3 = Physical only POST_BK_DBCC=0 or 3 If you are backing up a SQL server include this entry. Enter a value from 0 to 3 that corresponds to an option for performing a post-backup database consistency check. Options are: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = No Index ◆ 2 = Full ◆ 3 = Physical only 140 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 141. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [SQL log] SQL_STANDBY_OPTION=0 or 1 Select the Standby value to put the database in standby mode when the job log backup completes. Select the No Recover value to put the database in a loading state when the job log backup completes. Users cannot connect to or query the database while it is in a loading state. Values are: ◆ 0 = Standby ◆ 1 = No Recover [Offhost provider] OFFHOST_PROVIDER=0 or 3 Enter a value from 0 to 3 that corresponds to the snapshot provider options for an offhost backup jobs. Options are: ◆ 0 = Disable offhost backup ◆ 1 = Automatic – Use hardware if available ◆ 2 = Software – Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows ◆ 3 = Hardware – Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer OFFHOST_DISPOSITION=0 or 1 Enter 1 to allow the backup job to complete even if any of the volumes selected do not support offhost backup; otherwise, to fail the backup job, enter 0. OFFHOST_SINGLESNAP=0 or 1 Enter 1 to process logical volumes for offhost backup one at a time; otherwise, enter 0. 141
  • 142. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description USE_OPEN_FILE_OPTION=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to use the Advanced Open File Option if available; otherwise, enter 0. If Advanced OFO is unavailable, the OPEN_FILES_METHOD specified will be used. OPEN_FILE_CONFIGURATION=1-4 Enter a number from 1 through 4 to specify the open file technology to back up open files. Selections include: ◆ 1 = Automatically select open file technology ◆ 2 = Use Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service ◆ 3 = Use VERITAS Volume Snapshot Provider ◆ 4 = Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows FlashSnap Option SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=0-3 Enter a number from 0 through 3 to specify the best provider for the selected volume. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Automatic - Allows VSS to select the snapshot provider ◆ 1 = System - Use Microsoft software shadow copy provider ◆ 2 = Software - Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows ◆ 3 = Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_SNAPSHOT=0 or Enter 1 if you want to process logical 1 volumes for backup one at a time; otherwise, enter 0. [Data Encryption Setting] ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name Specify a name for the encryption key. 142 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 143. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of encryption to use. The following options are available: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Software ◆ 2 = Hardware ◆ 3 = Hardware if available, otherwise software If 2 or 3 are entered, the default encryption key must be 256-bit encryption. [Media Options] MEDIA_SET=Media Set Name Enter the name of the media set to be used for the backup. MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media Password If the media has a password, specify the password. APPEND=0 or 1 To append the job to the media set specified in the MEDIA_SET entry or overwrite if no appendable media is available, enter 1 as the value. If you want the job to overwrite the media set specified in the MEDIA_SET entry, enter 0 as the value. If you do not enter a value, by default the job will be an overwrite job. APPEND_NO_OVERWRITE=0 or 1 If you want the job to either append to the media set specified in the MEDIA_SET entry, or if no appendable media is available then to terminate, enter 1. To have the job append to the media set, or overwrite if no appendable media is available, enter 0. 143
  • 144. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description VERIFY=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify operation to make sure the media can be read once the backup has been completed; otherwise, enter 0. Verifying all backups is recommended. COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of compression to use. Options include: ◆ 0 = Hardware compression ◆ 1 = Software compression ◆ 2 = Hardware if available, otherwise software ◆ 3 = None Note To use the default Backup Exec compression type, do not include this entry in the script. CHECKSUM=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if checksums are to be calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream immediately following the data stream. If 0 is entered as the value, backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape. EJECT_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to eject the media when the job completes; otherwise, enter 0. WORM_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use write once, read many (WORM) media for this backup job; otherwise, enter 0. [Miscellaneous] PRE_JOB_COMMAND=command Specify a .exe or batch file command that is to run on the media server before the backup operation starts. 144 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 145. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description POST_JOB_COMMAND=command Specify a .exe or batch file command that is to run after the backup operation completes. COMMAND_RUN_POST_IF_ Enter 1 to execute the post-job PRE_SUCCESS=0 or 1 command only if the pre-job command is successful; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_RUN_JOB_IF_PRE_SUCCESS= Enter 1 to execute the job only if the 0 or 1 pre-job command is successful; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_RUN_POST_ Enter 1 to execute the post-job IF_JOB_FAILS=0 or 1 command even if the job fails; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_FAIL_JOB_IF_FAILS= Enter 1 to allow the pre- and post-job 0 or 1 commands to be successful only if completed with a return code of zero. Otherwise, enter 0. An return code of zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or post-job command is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job completed successfully. A non-zero return code is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job ended with an error. After checking the return codes, Backup Exec continues processing according to selections you made for running the pre- and post-job commands. If you enter 0, the success of the pre- and post-job commands is not determined based on the return code. COMMAND_AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes Backup Exec should wait before cancelling a command that did not complete. 145
  • 146. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description COMMAND_RUN_OPTION=0 or 1 Enter 0 to run the command on this media server or 1 to run the command on each server being backed up. USE_JOB_DEFAULTS=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use the job defaults from the Backup Exec Administration Console for this job. All other options will be overwritten. Enter 0 if you do not want to use the job defaults. PRINT_LOG_FILE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the job log with a notification to an email or printer recipient; otherwise, enter 0. NIC_ENABLED=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use the MAC address specified with the NIC_ADDRESS entry, or the name specified with the NIC_NAME entry. Enter 0 to clear previous settings for the network interface, and to use any available network adapter. “Operations for displaying network interface information” on page 85 NIC_ADDRESS=00-00-00-00-00-00 Enter the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the network interface you selected. To use this setting, NIC_ENABLED must be set to 1. NIC_NAME=name Type the name of a network interface card when NIC_ENABLED=1. NIC_PROTOCOL=0 - 2 Enter 0 to use any available Internet Protocol. Enter 1 to use IPv4. Enter 2 to use IPv6. “Operations for displaying network interface information” on page 85 NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=0 or 1 Enter 0 to use any available subnet prefix. Enter 1 to use a specific subnet prefix. 146 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 147. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description NIC_SUBNET=00.000.00.000 Specify a subnet prefix when NIC_ENABLED=1 and NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=1. NIC_ANY_AVAILABLE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use any available network interface card. Enter 0 to use only the network interface card that you specify. [Schedule] Note You must enter values when you select to use either SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL, SCHED_DAYSOF MNTH, SCHED_DAYSOF WEEK, or DATE before the job is created. SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. 147
  • 148. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 148 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 149. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is cancelled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to schedule the job on hold; otherwise, enter 0. DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 2 that corresponds to job deletion. Options include: ◆ 0 = Do not delete the job ◆ 1 = Delete the job after the job completes ◆ 2 = Delete the job if the job successfully completes [Machine] MACHINEx=machine name|logon GUID Specify the logon account used to log on to remote machines and back up remote data and databases. 149
  • 150. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [Selections] PATHx=string Specify which files or directories get backed up. For example, PATH1=Myserver1Myshare1Mydir 1*.* or PATH2=Myserver2Myshare2Mydir 2*.* Selections that end with a backslash indicate the selection is a directory. Selections that do no end with a backslash indicate the selection is a file. For example, PATH1=c:example (indicates that example is the name of a file on drive C. PATH2=c:example (indicates that example is a directory on drive C. The order in which resource selections are specified is the order in which the resources will be backed up. To back up System State, use the string server nameSystem?State*.* Note To back up Shadow Copy Components on a Windows 2003 computer, type "server nameShadow?Copy ?Components*.*" after -s. To use a separate logon account for backup selections, type a comma after PATHx=string. Then, type the logon account that you want to use for that selection. INCLUDEx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include this item in the backup job; otherwise, enter 0. SUBDIRSx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include all subdirectories; otherwise, enter 0. 150 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 151. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description UNIXx=x Change x to the number that corresponds to the path that contains the Unix files or directories to be backed up. Enter a 1 if it is a Unix selection. EV_SERVERx=Enterprise Vault Change x to a unique number and server name specify the name of the Enterprise Vault Server to back up. EV_PREFIXx=Enterprise Vault Change x to the unique number that selection prefix corresponds to the Enterprise Vault Server that you want to back up. Then specify the Enterprise Vault selection prefix. EV_DIRECTORYx=Enterprise Vault Change x to the unique number that directory corresponds to the Enterprise Vault Server that you want to back up. Then specify the directory that contains the file that you want to back up. EV_FILEx=Enterprise Vault file Change x to the unique number that corresponds to the Enterprise Vault server that you want to back up. Then specify the file that you want to back up. You can back up the following: ◆ Enterprise Vault sites ◆ Audit databases ◆ FSA Reporting databases ◆ Directory databases ◆ Monitoring databases EXCHANGEx=Exchange Server name Change x to a unique number and specify the name of the Exchange Server to back up. 151
  • 152. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EXCH2ROOT?=Exchange Server name Specifies the name of the Exchange server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in a sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. Each selection must specify at least the server name and the storage group. See the example in “EXCH2DB?=Exchange Server database name.” EXCH2SG?=Exchange Server storage Specifies the name of the Exchange group name Server storage group that you want to back up, or that contains the database you want to back up. Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the Exchange Server. See the example in “EXCH2DB?=Exchange Server database name.” 152 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 153. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EXCH2DB?=Exchange Server Specifies the name of the Exchange database name Server database you want to back up. Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the Exchange Server and storage group. In the following example, SERVER_NAME is an Exchange server name, and it is the same server in all of the selections. The first selection backs up the First Storage Group, the second selection backs up the Mailbox database in the Second Storage Group, and the third selection backs up the Users database in the Second Storage Group. EXCH2ROOT1=SERVER_NAME EXCH2SG1=First Storage Group EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME EXCH2SG2=Second Storage Group EXCH2DB2=Mailboxes EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME EXCH2SG3=Second Storage Group EXCHDB3=Users EXCH2010_SERVERx=Exchange 2010 Specifies the name of the Exchange Server name 2010 server you want to back up. Change x to a unique number to identify the Exchange 2010 server. To back up an Exchange 2010 server, you should use either EXCH2010_SERVER or EXCH2010_DAG, but not both. 153
  • 154. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EXCH2010_DAGx=Exchange 2010 Specifies the name of the Exchange Database Availability Group name 2010 Database Availability Group (DAG) you want to back up. Change x to a unique number to identify the DAG. To back up an Exchange 2010 Server, you should use either EXCH2010_SERVER or EXCH2010_DAG, but not both. EXCH2010_DBx=Exchange 2010 Specifies the name of the Exchange database name 2010 database that you want to back up. It refers to the Exchange 2010 server or Database Availability Group (DAG) that you want to back up. Change x to the unique number that corresponds to the Exchange 2010 server or DAG that you want to back up. EXCH2010_DB is required for Exchange 2010 backups. SQL2S? =SERVER_NAME Specifies the name of the SQL server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in a sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. See the example in “SQL2NI?=SQL server named instance name.” SQL2DB?=SQL server database name Specifies the name of the SQL server database to back up. Type *.* to back up all the databases. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. 154 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 155. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SQL2NI?=SQL server named instance Specifies the named instance on the name SQL server to back up. Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the SQL server. For example, to back up the named instance ONE, the named instance TWO, and the SQL server itself, the entries would be: SQL2S1=SERVER_NAME SQL2NI1=ONE SQL2S2=SERVER_NAME SQL2NI2=TWO SQL2S3=SERVER_NAME LNSERVER?=SERVER_NAME Specifies the name of the Lotus Notes server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in a sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. See the example in “LNDRIVE?=Drive letter.” 155
  • 156. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description LNDRIVE?=Drive letter Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the Lotus Notes server. In the following example, SERVER_NAME is a Lotus Notes server name, and it is the same server in all of the selections. To back up the D drive and the E drive on the Lotus Notes server SERVER_NAME, the entries would be: LNSERVER1=SERVER_NAME LNDRIVE1=D LNSERVER2=SERVER_NAME LNDRIVE2=E ORCLSRV?=SERVER_NAME Specifies the name of the Oracle server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in a sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. See the example name in “ORCLSID?=System identifier for database.” 156 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 157. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ORCLSID?=System identifier for Specifies the SID (System Identifier) database for the Oracle database to back up. Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the Oracle server. In the following example, SERVER_NAME is an Oracle server name, and it is the same server in all of the selections. To back up the databases SID1 and SID2 on the Oracle server, the entries would be: ORCLSRV1=SERVER_NAME ORCLSID1=SID1 ORCLSRV2=SERVER_NAME ORCLSID2=SID2 SPPS2_FARMx=farm name Change x to the lowest number that is not already used, and specify the name of the Microsoft SharePoint 2003 Portal server farm that you want to back up. For example, SPPS2_FARM1=farm name. You should start with number 1 and continue sequentially. The order in which the farm names are specified is the order in which the farms will be backed up. SPPS2_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Specify the name of a Web server that belongs to the farm. Note This item is not required if the farm name is specified. SPPS2_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Configuration database in the backup job; otherwise, enter 0 or leave it blank. SPPS2_SSOx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Single sign-on database in the backup job; otherwise, enter 0 or leave it blank. 157
  • 158. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SPPS2_DLSx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Document Library store in the backup job; otherwise, enter 0 or leave it blank. SPPS2_PORTALxNAMEy=portal site Specify the name of the portal site name belongs to the farm. Since each farm may have more than one portal, you must use the same format that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx. For example: SPPS2_FARM1=farm name SPP2_PORTAL1NAME1=portal1 SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal2 SPPS2_TEAM_SITExNAMEy=Windows Specify the name of the Windows SharePoint services site name SharePoint services site that belongs to the farm. Since each farm may have more than one Windows SharePoint services site, you must use the same format that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx. For example: SPPS2_FARM1=farm name SPP2_TEAM_SITE1NAME1=team site1 SPP2_TEAM_SITE1NAME2=team site2 SPPS2_DOC_SITExNAMEy=document Specify the name of the backward libary compatible document library that belongs to the farm. Since each farm may have more than one document library, you must use the same format that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx. For example: SPPS2_FARM1=farm name SPP2_DOC_SITE1NAME1=document libary1 SPP2_DOC_SITE1NAME2=document library2 158 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 159. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description APATHx=String Specify which files or directories are backed up and aliased when running an alias backup. The order in which resource selections are specified is the order in which the resources will be backed up. Change x to a unique number for each device aliasing backup selection. An alias backup allows you to specify a share to back up, and then specify another share from which the backup will appear to have originated. This type of backup is useful when the location of the data to be backed up is temporary. For example, a share may be cloned and placed on another device while it is backed up in order to off-load traffic from a busy device. If a temporary share is backed up, the restore path for the share may not exist if a restore becomes necessary. Instead, you can specify an alias to a location where you want the share to appear to have been backed up from. For example: APATH1=MachineAC$*.* AINCLUDE1=1 ASUBDIRS1=1 AALIAS1=MachineBD$ indicates that MachineAC$*.* and all its subdirectories should be backed up and aliased as MachineBD$. Alias jobs support both UNC and local devices. However, both the target and the source must be the same, either both UNC or both local devices. You cannot mix them. Note The schedule option RUN_IMMEDIATE=1 must be included or the alias selection will be ignored. 159
  • 160. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description AINCLUDEx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include this item in the backup job when running an alias backup; otherwise, enter 0. Change x to a unique number for each alias backup selection. ASUBDIRSx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include all subdirectories when running an alias backup; otherwise, enter 0. Change x to a unique number for each device aliasing backup selection. AALIASx=String Specify the share from which the backup will appear to have originated, when running an alias backup. Change x to a unique number for each device aliasing backup selection. For example: AALIAS1=MachineBD$ See also the example for APATHx=String [Media_server] PREFERRED_SERVER_NAME=Media This operation is only available if the server name Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the preferred media server on which backup jobs run. PREFERRED_SERVER=Media server This operation is only available if the GUID Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the GUID for the preferred media server on which backup jobs run. 160 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 161. Using job script files Possible backup job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description MEDIA_SERVER_POOL_NAME=Media This operation is only available if the server pool name Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the media server pool to use for the backup job. MEDIA_SERVER_POOL=Media server This operation is only available if the pool GUID Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the media server pool to use for the backup job. 161
  • 162. Using job script files Creating a restore job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a restore job script file that contains entries for the restore job options. The restore job script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the backup job script file. Sections of a Restore Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [Restore_Options] ■ [Selections] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included in the restore job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Restore and the job type is restore, the script file would appear as: [General] JOB_TYPE=Restore JOB_NAME=Workstation Restore All possible entries for a restore job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries Note The Job History GUID is required for bemcmd -o90 restores. To obtain the Job History GUID, first use -o23 and /or -o506 to obtain the Job Instance GUID. Then use the Job Instance GUID with -o21 to obtain the Job History GUID. Possible restore job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=Job type This field must be completed with a value of Restore. JOB_NAME=Job name Type the name of the restore job. SERVER=Server name Type the name of the media server where the operation is to be performed. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. 162 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 163. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description USERNAME=User name Type the user name for logging into the system being restored. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. PASSWORD=Password Type the password for logging into the system being restored. If a password is not specified, the current password is used. JOB_PRIORITY=Priority Enter the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority set determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest [Restore Options] RESTORE_CORRUPT_FILES=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you do not want Backup Exec to automatically exclude corrupt files from the restore process; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_EXISTING=0, 1, or 3 Enter a number to specify how Backup Exec should treat existing files: 0 = Skip if file exists 1 = Restore over existing 3 = Skip if existing file is more recent 163
  • 164. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description RESTORE_SECURITY=0 - 2 Enter a number from 0 through 2 to specify the security information: ◆ 0 = Restore all information for files and directories ◆ 1 = Restore file level security ◆ 2 = Restore all information except security for files and directories RESTORE_PRESERVE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore the data with its original directory structure intact. Enter 0 to restore all data (including the data in subdirectories) to the path specified in SHARE_REDIRECT_PATH. DEVICE_NAME=Device name Type the name of the device, such as a drive or backup-to-disk folder, containing the data to be restored. SHARE_REDIRECT_DRIVE=Drive Type a destination drive, other than letter where the data was originally backed up, to which the data is to be restored. SHARE_REDIRECT_PATH=Path name Type the target path on the drive specified in SHARE_REDIRECT_DRIVE. To retain the original directory structure, make sure that the value for RESTORE_PRESERVE=1. SHARE_REDIRECT_SERVER_ Type the GUID of the Backup Exec ACCOUNT=GUID logon account to use to access the SharePoint data. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. SHARE_REDIRECT_PATH_ Type the GUID of the Backup Exec ACCOUNT=GUID logon account to use to access the path to which you want to redirect the restore. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. 164 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 165. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SQL_REDIRECT_SERVER= If you are redirecting SQL data, type SQL Server name the name of the SQL server where the data is to be restored. SQL_REDIRECT_INSTANCE= If you are redirecting SQL data to a Instance name named instance, specify the instance name. Otherwise, the data is restored to the default instance. SQL_REDIRECT_DATABASE= If you are redirecting this restore to a Database name different database on the target server, specify the target database name. If you are restoring a differential or log backup, and the associated database backup was restored to a renamed database, the new database name must be entered. SQL_REDIRECT_SERVER_ Type the GUID of the Backup Exec ACCOUNT=GUID logon account that stores the credentials of a Windows user account. The Windows user account must have been granted the System Administrator role on the SQL instance. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. SQL_REDIRECT_ Type the GUID of the Backup Exec ACCOUNT=GUID logon account that stores the credentials of the SQL user account if you are using SQL Server Authentication. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. XCH_REDIRECT_SERVER=Exchange If you are redirecting Exchange data, Server name specify the Exchange server where the data is to be restored. 165
  • 166. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description XCH_REDIRECT_SERVER_ Type the GUID of the Backup Exec ACCOUNT=GUID logon account that stores the credentials of a Windows user account. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. XCH_REDIRECT_MAILBOX=Exchange If you are redirecting an Exchange mailbox name mailbox, specify the name of the target mailbox. The mailbox must already exist before you can restore to it. XCH_REDIRECT_MAILBOX_ Type the GUID of the logon account ACCOUNT=GUID that has rights to the target mailbox. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. SP_REDIRECT_SETS_SERVER= Specify whether server sets or Server/Documents document sets are being restored. SP_REDIRECT_DRIVE=Drive name Enter the name of the local drive or the UNC path to which you want to redirect the restore. If you type a UNC path, use the format server nameshare name. SP_REDIRECT_PATH=Path Type the folder location on the drive to which you want to redirect the restore. SP_REDIRECT_SERVER=server name Type the name of the computer to which you want to redirect the restore. Use the format server name. SP_REDIRECT_WORKGROUP= Type the name of the workspace to Workspace name which you want to redirect the restore. Note You must type an entry in this field, even if you are restoring the data to the original workspace. You cannot redirect the restore to a different folder in the workspace. 166 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 167. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SP_REDIRECT_SERVER_ Type the GUID of the Backup Exec ACCOUNT=GUID logon account to use it to access the SharePoint data. To obtain the GUID, use operation -o211 to display the logon account information. RESTORE_RSM_DATA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore the Removable Storage database; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_DISK_QUOTA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore disk quota data; otherwise, enter 0. Disk quotas track and control disk usage on a per user, per volume basis; the values can be restored to the limits that were set before the backup. RESTORE_TERMINAL_SERVICES= Enter 1 to restore the Terminal 0 or 1 Services database, which contains licensing data for client licenses; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_WMI=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore the Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) respository, which provides support for monitoring and controlling system resources and provides a consistent view of your managed environment; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_CLUSTER_DB=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore the cluster configuration; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_FORCE_RECOVERY= Enter 1 to force the recovery of the 0 or 1 cluster quorum even if other nodes are online the and/or disk signatures do not match option; otherwise, enter 0. 167
  • 168. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description RESTORE_PRIMARY_REPLICA=0 or 1 Enter 1 if all the domain controllers in the domain are being restored and you want to designate this server as the primary arbitrator. If you enter 0, replication may not function. Use this option when you perform a restore of a domain controller in a domain that does not have any other domain controllers. RESTORE_REGISTRY=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore registry information if it exists in the selected data; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_PNP_MERGE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to merge existing hardware configuration and registry services with the data to be restored when restoring registry information; otherwise, enter 0. RESTORE_JUNCSASDIRS=0 or 1 Enter 1 to preserve existing junction points and restore files and directories from backup media. Enter 0 to restore junction points, files and directories from backup media. PRE_JOB_COMMAND=Command Specify a .exe or batch file command to run on the media server before the restore operation starts. POST_JOB_COMMAND=Command Specify a .exe or batch file command to run after the restore operation completes. COMMAND_RUN_POST_IF_ Enter 1 to execute the post-job PRE_SUCCESS=0 or 1 command only if the pre-job command is successful; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_RUN_JOB_IF_PRE_SUCCESS= Enter 1 to execute the job only if the 0 or 1 pre-job command is successful; otherwise, enter 0. 168 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 169. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description COMMAND_RUN_POST_ Enter 1 to execute the post-job IF_JOB_FAILS=0 or 1 command even if the job fails; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_FAIL_JOB_IF_FAILS= Enter 1 to allow the pre- and post-job 0 or 1 commands to be successful only if completed with a return code of zero. Otherwise, enter 0. An return code of zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or post-job command is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job completed successfully. A non-zero return code is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job ended with an error. After checking the return codes, Backup Exec continues processing according to selections you made for running the pre- and post-job commands. If you enter 0, the success of the pre- and post-job commands is not determined based on the return code. COMMAND_AUTO_CANCEL_ Enter the number of minutes Backup TIME=# Exec should wait before cancelling a command that did not complete. COMMAND_RUN_OPTION=0 or 1 Enter 0 to run the command on this media server or 1 to run the command on each server being restored to. SQL_DATABASE_RECOVER=0 - 3 Enter one of the following values for recovering the database: ◆ 0 = Create a standby database ◆ 1 = Recover the database ◆ 2 = Do not recover the database 169
  • 170. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SQL_REPLACE_DATABASE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to replace a database or file group, even if another database or filegroup with the same name already exists on the server; otherwise, enter 0. SQL_AUTOMASTER=0 or 1 Enter 1 to enable Backup Exec to stop SQL so that the master can be restored; otherwise, enter NO. If you enter 1, all existing users are logged off, and the master is put into single-user mode. SQL_POSTRESTORE_DBCC=0 - 3 Enter one of the following values for performing a consistency check after restore: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Full check, excluding indexes ◆ 2 = Full check, including indexes ◆ 3 = Physical check only SQL_DEFAULT_DRIVE=Drive letter Enter the drive letter for an alternate drive to which SQL database files will be restored. SQL_USE_ALLDEFAULT=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore all SQL Server database files to the alternate drive specified in SQL_DEFAULT_DRIVE even if the drive where they originally resided exists. Enter 0 to restore SQL database files to the alternate drive specified in SQL_DEFAULT_DRIVE only when the drive where they originally resided does not exist. SQL_USE_DEFAULT_INSTDIR=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore all database files to the target instance’s data location; otherwise, enter 0. 170 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 171. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SQL_POINTINTIME=MM/DD/YYYY, Enter the date and time to restore HH:MM:SS transactions for a transaction log up to and including a point in time in the transaction log. After the point in time, recovery from the transaction log is stopped. SQL_LOGMARK_NAME=Named Enter the named transaction to transaction include in the recovery of the transaction log. Recovery will be stopped after this named transaction is restored. SQL_LOGMARK_INCLUDE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to restore transactions from a transaction log up to a named transaction in the transaction log. After the named transaction, recovery from the transaction log is stopped. Otherwise, enter 0. SQL_LOGMARK_TIME=MM/DD/YYYY,HH: Enter the date and time after which MM:SS the restore operation is to search for the named transaction. SPPS2_RECNT_DB_ON_ Enter 1 to bring the databases online RESTORE=0 or 1 after a restore job; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_RECONNECT=0 or 1 Enter 1 to re-establish the link between the restored databases and their corresponding sites; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_RELEASE_LOCK=0 or 1 Enter 1 to release the lock on the SharePoint farm topology before restoring data; otherwise, enter 0. XCH_AUTOCREATE_MAILBOX=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you are restoring Exchange data and want Backup Exec to automatically recreate user accounts and mailboxes; otherwise, enter 0. 171
  • 172. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description XCH_OVERWRITE=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you are restoring Exchange data and you want Backup Exec to overwrite an existing item with the message or folder. A new object ID is not created for the message or folder; only the contents and properties are replaced. Otherwise, enter 0. ESE_NOLOSS_RESTORE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to preserve the existing transaction logs on the Exchange 2000 or later server. Enter 0 to purge some or all of the existing transaction logs, depending on the value of ESE_RECOVERY_POINTINTIME. If you enter 1, transaction logs from the storage media are then restored and added to the existing set of transaction logs on the Exchange server. When the restore operation finishes, Exchange automatically updates its databases with the uncommitted transactions found in the existing and newly-restored transaction logs. This option is selected by default. 172 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 173. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ESE_RECOVERY_POINTINTIME=MM/DD/Y Enter a date and time to restore YYY,HH:MM:SS Exchange 2000 and later transactions from the transaction log. Transaction logs after this time are skipped. Transactions up to and including this date and time are restored provided all of the following conditions are met: ◆ The ESE_NOLOSS_RESTORE value is set to 0. ◆ The backup set that is being restored is from a continuous protection backup. ◆ The value is a valid date and time. Note If the ESE_NO_LOSS_RESTORE value is set to 0 but the other conditions are not met, the value of ESE_RECOVERY_POINTINTIME is ignored and a loss restore job runs. 173
  • 174. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ESE_TEMPLOG_PATH=Path Enter a location where the associated log and patch files are to be kept until the database is restored. The default location is temp. If storage groups are being restored, a subdirectory in temp is created for each storage group. The log and patch files for each storage group are kept in the corresponding subdirectory. After the Exchange 2000 or later database is restored, the log and patch files in the temporary location are applied to the database, and then the current log files are applied. After the restore is complete, the log and patch files are automatically deleted from the temporary location (including any subdirectories). Make sure the temporary location for log and patch files is empty before you start a restore job. If a restore job fails, check the temporary location (including subdirectories) to make sure any previous log and patch files from a previous restore job were deleted. ESE_COMMIT_AFTER=0 or 1 Enter 1 to enable the Exchange 2000 or later restore operation to replay log files and roll back any uncompleted transactions if your selection contains the last backup set to be restored. If you enter 0, the database is left in an intermediate state and is not yet usable. If this option is selected when an intermediate backup is being applied, you cannot continue to restore backups. You must restart the restore operation from the beginning. 174 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 175. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ESE_MOUNT_AFTER=0 or 1 Enter 1 to mount the Exchange 2000 or later database so that it is available to users; otherwise, enter 0. This checkbox is only available if EXE_LASTSET is set to 1. ESE_DISMOUNT_BEFORE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to automatically take the Exchange 2000 or later database offline before the restore job runs; otherwise, enter 0. LOTUS_WAIT_MSECS=x Specify the number of seconds for the restore process to wait for a database that is in use. When a Lotus database is restored it must first be taken offline. This will ensure that the database is not being accessed, closed, or deleted while the restore operation is being processed. If the database is still in use and cannot be taken offline after the specified wait time, the restore will fail. LOTUS_DBRECOVER_OPTION=0 - 3 Enter one of the following options for recovering a Lotus Domino database: ◆ 0 = Retain original IDs ◆ 1 = Assign new database IDs ◆ 2 = Assign new database IDs and replica IDs LOTUS_POINTINTIME=MM/DD/YYYY,HH: Enter a date and time from which to MM:SS restore the Lotus Domino database. RESTORE_VOL_RESTRICT=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you are restoring NetWare data and want to restore volume restrictions; otherwise, enter 0. 175
  • 176. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description NIC_ENABLED=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use the MAC address specified with the NIC_ADDRESS entry, or the name specified with the NIC_NAME entry. Enter 0 to clear previous settings for the network interface, and to use any available network adapter. “Operations for displaying network interface information” on page 85 NIC_ADDRESS=00-00-00-00-00-00 Enter the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the network interface you selected. To use this setting, NIC_ENABLED must be set to 1. NIC_NAME=name Type the name of a network interface card when NIC_ENABLED=1. NIC_PROTOCOL=0 - 2 Enter 0 to use any available Internet Protocol. Enter 1 to use IPv4. Enter 2 to use IPv6. “Operations for displaying network interface information” on page 85 NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=0 or 1 Enter 0 to use any available subnet prefix. Enter 1 to use a specific subnet prefix. NIC_SUBNET=00.000.00.000 Specify a subnet prefix when NIC_ENABLED=1 and NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=1. NIC_ANY_AVAILABLE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use any available network interface card. Enter 0 to use only the network interface card that you specify. 176 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 177. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [Selections] JOBHISTORY_GUID=Job History GUID Required or SELECTIONx is required. Specifies the GUID of the backup job that has already run. To obtain the Job History GUID, first use -o23 and /or -o506 to obtain the Job Instance GUID. Then use the Job Instance GUID with -o21 to obtain the Job History GUID. SELECTIONx=file selection to Required or JOBHISTORY_GUID is restore required. Specifies the file selection to restore. If you specify the file selection, use the following format: machinenamepath1file1+file2+ file3|path2filex+filey+filez Note You must use the SELECTIONx to restore encrypted backup jobs. START_DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Specifies the earliest date range to perform a point-in-time restore. Enter the start date in MM/DD/YYYY format for this job. END_DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Specifies the latest date range to perform a point-in-time restore. Enter the end date in MM/DD/YYYY format for this job. [Schedule] SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. 177
  • 178. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set the job up to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format the interval is calculated from. SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x In a comma delimited string, enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 178 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 179. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, if you want the job to run the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, if you do not want the job to run on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to schedule the job on hold; otherwise, enter 0. 179
  • 180. Using job script files Possible restore job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 2 that corresponds to job deletion. Options include: ◆ 0 = Do not delete the job ◆ 1 = Delete the job after the job completes ◆ 2 = Delete the job if the job successfully completes 180 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 181. Using job script files Creating a catalog job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a catalog job script file that contains entries for the catalog job options. The catalog job script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Catalog Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [Catalog_Options] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included in the catalog job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Catalog and the job type is catalog, the script file would appear as: [General] JOB_TYPE=Catalog JOB_NAME=Workstation Catalog All possible entries for a catalog job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries. Possible catalog job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=Job type This entry must be completed with a value of Catalog. JOB_PRIORITY=Priority Enter the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest 181
  • 182. Using job script files Possible catalog job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description JOB_NAME=Job name Type the name of the catalog job. If a name is not provided, one will automatically be generated. SERVER=Server name Type the name of the Backup Exec server where the operation is to be performed. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. USERNAME=Username Type the user name for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. PASSWORD=Password Enter the password for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current password is used. [Catalog_Options] MEDIA_ID=Media ID Specifies the ID of the media to be cataloged. The format of the media ID should be in the following format: MEDIA_ID={GUID} MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media password If the media has a password, specify the password. [Schedule] SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. 182 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 183. Using job script files Possible catalog job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 183
  • 184. Using job script files Possible catalog job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule values are not entered, then the DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used to set the TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run the catalog job immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section.If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. 184 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 185. Using job script files Possible catalog job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. To specify hours, enter a value divisible by 60. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you want the job to be submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0. DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 2 Enter a number from 0 to 2 that corresponds to job deletion. Options include: ◆ 0 = Do not delete the job ◆ 1 = Delete the job after the job completes ◆ 2 = Delete the job if the job successfully completes 185
  • 186. Using job script files Creating a discovery job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a discovery job script file that contains entries for the discovery job options. The discovery job script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Discovery Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [Discovery_Options] ■ [Selections] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included in the discovery job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Resource Discovery and the job type is discovery, the script file would appear as: [General] JOB_TYPE=Discovery JOB_NAME=Workstation Resource Discovery All possible entries for a discovery job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries. Possible discovery job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=Job type This entry must be completed with a value of Discovery. 186 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 187. Using job script files Possible discovery job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description JOB_PRIORITY=Priority Enter the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest JOB_NAME=Job name Type the name of the discovery job. If a name is not provided, one will automatically be generated. SERVER=Server name Type the name of the Backup Exec server where the operation is to be performed. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. USERNAME=Username Type the user name for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. PASSWORD=Password Enter the password for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current password is used. [Discovery_Options] DISCOVER_ADMINISTRATIVE_SHARES=0 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for or 1 new administrative network shares or volumes; otherwise, enter 0. DISCOVER_USER_SHARES=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for new user-defined shares; otherwise, enter 0. 187
  • 188. Using job script files Possible discovery job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description DISCOVER_SQL_DATABASES=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for new SQL databases; otherwise, enter 0. DISCOVER_EXCHANGE_DATABASES=0 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for or 1 new Exchange databases; otherwise, enter 0. Backup Exec searches for Information Store, Exchange Directory, or Storage Groups; it does not discover individual databases under storage groups. DISCOVER_DOMINO_DATABASES=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for new Lotus Domino databases; otherwise, enter 0. DISCOVER_SYSTEMSTATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for new System State resources; otherwise, enter 0. DISCOVER_SHAREPOINT=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec search for new SharePoint servers; otherwise, enter 0. NOTIFY_SEPARATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec send separate notifications when each new resource is found; otherwise, enter 0. NOTIFY_INCLUDE_PREVIOUS=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec send a notification that includes all resources previously found during resource discovery jobs; otherwise, enter 0. 188 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 189. Using job script files Possible discovery job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [Selections] DOMAINx Specifies the domains you want Backup Exec to search for new resources. You can also specify the logon account GUID for the domain. If logon account credentials are not entered, the current logged on user’s default logon account is used. Each entry must be comma delimited string. For example, DOMAIN1, DOMAIN2 or DOMAIN1=domain1, {10011001-1001-1001-0101-01010101 01} EXCLUDEx Specifies the domains you want to exclude from the discovery job. If you specify multiple domains, the list must be in a comma delimited string. [Schedule] SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. 189
  • 190. Using job script files Possible discovery job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 190 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 191. Using job script files Possible discovery job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule values are not entered, then the DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used to set the TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run the discovery job immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. To specify hours, enter a value divisible by 60. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you want the job to be submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0. 191
  • 192. Using job script files Creating a duplicate backup job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a duplicate backup job script file that contains entries for the duplicate backup job options. The duplicate backup job script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Duplicate Backup Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [Setcopy_Options] ■ [Selections] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included in the duplicate backup job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Duplicate Backup and the job type is setcopy, the script file would appear as: [General] JOB_TYPE=SetCopy JOB_NAME=Workstation Duplicate Backup All possible entries for a duplicate backup job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries. Possible duplicate job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=Job type This entry must be completed with a value of Setcopy. 192 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 193. Using job script files Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description JOB_PRIORITY=Priority Enter the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest JOB_NAME=Job name Type the name of the duplicate job. If a name is not provided, one will automatically be generated. JOB_DESCRIPTION=Description Type a description of the information you are backing up. PREFERRED_SOURCE_DEVICE_GUID= Enter the GUID of the device used as Source device guid the destination device for the original backup job. Use operation -o63 to display managed drives. SERVER=Server name Type the name of the Backup Exec server where the operation is to be performed. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. USERNAME=Username Type the user name for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. PASSWORD=Password Enter the password for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current password is used. 193
  • 194. Using job script files Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [Setcopy_Options] DEVICE_NAME=Device name Type the name of the device to be used for the duplicate job. MEDIA_SET_GUID=Media set GUID Enter the GUID of the media set to be used for the duplicate job. Use operation -o69 to display media sets. OVERWRITE_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want Backup Exec to overwrite the media; otherwise, enter 0. APPEND_OVERWRITE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to append this backup to the media set. If there is no appendable media available, the job is appended to overwritable media that will then be added to the media set; otherwise enter 0. APPEND_TERMINATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to append to this backup to the media set. If there is no appendable media available, the job is terminated; otherwise, enter 0. EJECT _MEDIA_AFTER_COMPLETES=0 or Enter 1 to have Backup Exec 1 automatically eject the media in the drive when the operation completes. CHECKSUM=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if checksums are to be calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream immediately following the data stream. If 0 is entered as the value, backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape. RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to retension the media before backup; otherwise, enter 0. 194 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 195. Using job script files Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media password If the media has a password, specify the password. AUTO_VERIFY=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify operation to make sure the media can be read after the backup has been completed; otherwise, enter 0. COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to select hardware compression; otherwise, enter 0. ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name Specify a name for the encryption key. ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of encryption to use. Options are as follows: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Software ◆ 2 = Hardware ◆ 3 = Hardware if available, otherwise software If 2 or 3 are entered, the default encryption key must be 256-bit encryption. [Selections] JOBHISTORY_GUID=Job History GUID Specifies the backup job that has already run to obtain the Job History GUID, first use -o23 and /or -o506 to obtain the Job Instance GUID. Then use the Job Instance GUID with -o21 to obtain the Job History GUID. [Schedule] SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. 195
  • 196. Using job script files Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 196 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 197. Using job script files Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule values are not entered, then the DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used to set the 197
  • 198. Using job script files Possible duplicate job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run the duplicate backup job immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. To specify hours, enter a value divisible by 60. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you want the job to be submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0. DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 2 that corresponds to job deletion. Options include: ◆ 0 = Do not delete the job ◆ 1 = Delete the job after the job completes ◆ 2 = Delete the job if the job successfully completes 198 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 199. Using job script files Creating a test run job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a test run backup job script file that contains entries for the test run job options. The test run backup job script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Test Run Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [TestRun_Options] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included in the test run job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Test Run and the job type is TestRun, the script file would appear as: [General] JOB_TYPE=TestRun JOB_NAME=Workstation Test Run All possible entries for a test run job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries.. Possible test run job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=Job type This entry must be completed with a value of TestRun. JOB_PRIORITY=Priority Enter the priority for the job. If another job is scheduled to run at the same time as this job, the priority determines which job runs first. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest 199
  • 200. Using job script files Possible test run job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description JOB_NAME=Job name Type the name of the test run job. If a name is not provided, one will automatically be generated. SERVER-Server name Type the name of the Backup Exec server where the operation is to be performed. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. USERNAME=Username Type the user name for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. PASSWORD=Password Enter the password for logging into a remote Backup Exec server. If a password is not specified, the current password is used. [TestRun_Options] JOBINSTANCE_GUID=Job GUID Specifies the job ID of the existing job to use for the test run job. CREDENTIALS_CHECK=0 or 1 Enter 1 to verify that the logon account is correct for the resources being backed up; otherwise, enter 0. MEDIA_CAPACITY_CHECK=0 or 1 Enter 1 to test whether enough tape is available to complete the job; otherwise, enter 0. Note During the test run job, the number of scheduled jobs in the queue is not checked; therefore, jobs that are scheduled before the test run job may use the media that was available when the test run job was performed. MEDIA_CHECK=0 or 1 Enter 1 to test whether the media is online and overwritable for a trial run job; otherwise, enter 0. 200 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 201. Using job script files Possible test run job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description JOBSIZE_METHOD=0 or 1 Enter 0 if you want to determine job size from a previous job history, or enter a 1 if you want to perform a pre-scan. HOLD_ON_FAILURE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have the scheduled job placed on hold if any failures are detected during the test run; otherwise, enter 0. [Schedule] SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. 201
  • 202. Using job script files Possible test run job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 202 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 203. Using job script files Possible test run job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule values are not entered, then the DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used to set the TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run the test run job immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. To specify hours, enter a value divisible by 60. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you want the job to be submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0. DELETE_JOB_AFTER=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 2 that corresponds to job deletion. Options include: ◆ 0 = Do not delete the job ◆ 1 = Delete the job after the job completes ◆ 2 = Delete the job if the job successfully completes 203
  • 204. Using job script files Creating a copy job script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a copy job backup job script file that contains entries for the copy job options. The copy job backup job script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Copy Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [Job] ■ [Selection List] ■ [Policy] ■ [Login Account] ■ [Configuration] Each entry included in the copy job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the job name is Workstation Copy and the job type is Copy, the script file would appear as: [General] JOB_TYPE=Copy JOB_NAME=Workstation Copy All possible entries for a copy job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries.. Possible copy job script file entries Section Entry Description [General] JOB_TYPE=Job type This entry must be completed with a value of Copy. [Job] JOB_NAME=Job name Type the name of the copy job. If a name is not provided, one will automatically be generated. 204 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 205. Using job script files Possible copy job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SERVERx=Server name Type the destination server where you want to copy the job. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login Type the login account name for account name logging into the destination server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. OVERWRITE_JOB=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want Backup Exec to overwrite the job that has the same name; otherwise, enter 0. OVERWRITE_LOGIN_ACCOUNT=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite a logon account that has the same account name; otherwise, enter 0. [Selection List] SELECTION_LIST_NAMEx=selection Type the name of the selection list to list name to be copied be copied. SERVERx=Server name Type the destination server where you want to copy the selection list. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login Type the login account name for account name logging into the destination server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. OVERWRITE_SELECTION=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite a selection list that has the same name; otherwise, enter 0. [Policy] POLICY_NAMEx=policy name to be Type the name of the policy to be copied copied. 205
  • 206. Using job script files Possible copy job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SERVERx=Server name Type the destination server where you want to copy the policy. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login Type the login account name for account name logging into the destination server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. OVERWRITE_POLICY=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite a policy that has the same name; otherwise, enter 0. [Login Account ACCOUNT_NAMEx=login account Type the name of the logon account to name be copied. SERVERx=Server name Type the destination server where you want to copy the logon account. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. OVERWRITE_ACCOUNT=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite a logon account that has the same name; otherwise, enter 0. [Configuration] DEFAULT_JOB_OPTIONS=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite the default job options; otherwise, enter 0. DEFAULT_SCHEDULE=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite the default schedule options; otherwise, enter 0. ERROR_HANDLING _RULES=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite the default error handling rules; otherwise, enter 0. 206 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 207. Using job script files Possible copy job script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ALERT_CONFIGURATION=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to overwrite the default alert options; otherwise, enter 0. SERVERx=Server name Type the destination server where you want to copy the configuration information. If a server is not specified, the local server is used by default. LOGINACCOUNT_NAMEx=login Type the login account name for account name logging into the destination server. If a user name is not specified, the current user name is used. Saving and launching the job script file After creating the job script file, save it as a plain text file. When launching the job script file, specify the directory where the file resides along with the filename. To launch a script file, type the following at the command prompt: bemcmd -o90 -f"drive letterdirectoryscript name" For example, suppose you created a directory for your scripts called Scripts and named a script for differential backups of workstations DIFFBKWORK. To launch this script with the verbose command, type: bemcmd -o90 -v -f”c:scriptsdiffbkwork.txt” 207
  • 208. Using scripts and selection lists Using scripts and selection lists Selection lists provide a quick and easy way of selecting files that you back up often. After you choose devices, directories and files, you can save the selections as a selection list script that you can use in regularly scheduled operations or once-only operations. A sample selection script file (selectionscript.txt) is included in the UTILS directory on the installation DVD. To activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//) in the line. The selection list script is used with command -o220 to create a selection list. Creating a selection list script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a selection list script file that contains all data selections for the backup job. Each entry included in the selection list script file must be typed in capital letters and must be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. All possible entries for a selection list script file are described in the following table. Do not include all entries in a script file. Values for selection list script Section Entry Description [Machine] MACHINEx=machine name,logon GUID Specify the logon account used to log on to remote machines and back up remote data and databases. [Selections] SCRIPT_PRIORITY=priority Enter the priority for the script. If a priority is not entered, the priority will be Medium. Options are: ◆ Lowest ◆ Low ◆ Medium ◆ High ◆ Highest 208 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 209. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description PATHx=String Specify which files or directories get backed up. For example, PATH1=MyserverMyshareMydir*. * The order in which resource selections are specified is the order in which the resources will be backed up. Please note the following about the order in which selections can be backed up: ◆ You can order resources within a server, but you cannot alternate selections across servers. For example, you can select C: and D: from Server A followed by selections from Server B. However, you cannot order selections as C: from Server A and then C: from Server B and then D: from both servers. ◆ For any given server, system state or shadow copy components must be last. To use a separate logon account for backup selections, type a comma after PATHx=string. Then, type the logon account that you want to use for that selection. INCLUDEx=0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if you want to include this item in the backup job; otherwise, enter 0. SUBDIRSx-0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if you want to include all subdirectories; otherwise, enter 0. EV_SERVERx=Enterprise Vault Change x to a unique number and server name specify the name of the Enterprise Vault Server to back up. 209
  • 210. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description EV_PREFIXx=Enterprise Vault Change x to the unique number that selection prefix corresponds to the Enterprise Vault Server that you want to back up. Then specify the Enterprise Vault selection prefix. EV_DIRECTORYx=Enterprise Vault Change x to the unique number that directory corresponds to the Enterprise Vault Server that you want to back up. Then specify the directory that contains the file that you want to back up. EV_FILEx=Enterprise Vault file Change x to the unique number that corresponds to the Enterprise Vault server that you want to back up. Then specify the file that you want to back up. You can back up the following: ◆ Enterprise Vault sites ◆ Audit databases ◆ FSA Reporting databases ◆ Directory databases ◆ Monitoring databases EXCHANGEx=Exchange Server name Change x to a unique number and specify the name of the Exchange Server you want to back up. 210 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 211. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description EXCH2ROOTx=Exchange Server name Specifies the name of the Exchange server that contains this selection. Change x to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in a sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. Each selection must specify at least the server name and the storage group. See the example in “EXCH2DBx=Exchange Server database name.” EXCH2SGx=Exchange Server storage Specifies the name of the Exchange group name Server storage group that you want to back up, or that contains the database you want to back up. Change x to the same number used to identify the selection for the Exchange Server. See the example in “EXCH2DBx=Exchange Server database name.” 211
  • 212. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description EXCH2DBx=Exchange Server Specifies the name of the Exchange database name Server database you want to back up. Change x to the same number used to identify the selection for the Exchange Server and storage group. In the following example, SERVER_NAME is an Exchange server name, and it is the same server in all of the selections. The first selection backs up the First Storage Group, the second selection backs up the Mailbox database in the Second Storage Group, and the third selection backs up the Users database in the Second Storage Group. EXCH2ROOT1=SERVER_NAME EXCH2SG1=First Storage Group EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME EXCH2SG2=Second Storage Group EXCH2DB2=Mailboxes EXCH2ROOT3=SERVER_NAME EXCH2SG3=Second Storage Group EXCHDB3=Users EXCH2010_SERVERx=Exchange 2010 Specifies the name of the Exchange Server name 2010 server you want to back up. Change x to a unique number to identify the Exchange 2010 server. To back up an Exchange 2010 server, you should use either EXCH2010_SERVER or EXCH2010_DAG, but not both. 212 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 213. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description EXCH2010_DAGx=Exchange 2010 Specifies the name of the Exchange Database Availability Group name 2010 Database Availability Group (DAG) you want to back up. Change x to a unique number to identify the DAG. To back up an Exchange 2010 Server, you should use either EXCH2010_SERVER or EXCH2010_DAG, but not both. EXCH2010_DBx=Exchange 2010 Specifies the name of the Exchange database name 2010 database that you want to back up. It refers to the Exchange 2010 server or Database Availability Group (DAG) that you want to back up. Change x to the unique number that corresponds to the Exchange 2010 server or DAG that you want to back up. EXCH2010_DB is required for Exchange 2010 backups. SQL2S?=SERVER_NAME Specifies the name of the SQL server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. See the example in “SQL2NI?=SQL server named instance name.” 213
  • 214. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description SQL2NI?=SQL server named instance Specifies the named instance on the name SQL server to back up. Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the SQL server. For example, to back up the named instance ONE, the named instance TWO, and the SQL server itself, the entries would be: SQL2S1=SERVER_NAME SQL2NI1=ONE SQL2S2=SERVER_NAME SQL2NI2=TWO SQL2S3=SERVER_NAME SQL2DB?=SQL server database name Specifies the name of the SQL server database to back up. Type *.* to back up all the databases. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. LNSERVER?=SERVER_NAME Specifies the name of the Lotus Notes server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. See the example in “LNDRIVE?=Drive letter.” 214 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 215. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description LNDRIVE?=DRIVE_LETTER Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the Lotus Notes server. In the following example, SERVER_NAME is a Lotus Notes server name, and it is the same server in all of the selections. To back up the D drive and the E drive on the Lotus Notes server SERVER_NAME, the entries would be: LNSERVER1=SERVER_NAME LNDRIVE1=D LNSERVER2=SERVER_NAME LNDRIVE2=E ORCLSRV?=SERVER_NAME Specifies the name of the Oracle server that contains this selection. Change ? to a number that corresponds to the number of the selection. The selections must be in sequential order. Increase the number by one for each new selection. For example, the first selection would be 1, the second selection would be 2, etc. If the selections are out of sequence, they are not processed. See the example name in “ORCLSID?=System identifier for database.” 215
  • 216. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description ORCLSID?=System identifier for Specifies the SID (System Identifier) database for the Oracle database you want to back up. Change ? to the same number used to identify the selection for the Oracle server. In the following example, SERVER_NAME is an Oracle server name, and it is the same server in all of the selections. To back up the databases SID1 and SID2 on the Oracle server, the entries would be ORCLSRV1=SERVER_NAME ORCLSID1=SID1 ORCLSRV2=SERVER_NAME ORCLSID2=SID2 SPPS2_FARMx=Farm name Change x to the lowest number that is not already used, and specify the name of the Microsoft SharePoint 2003 Portal server farm that you want to back up. For example, SPPS2_FARM1=farm name. You should start with number 1 and continue sequentially. The order in which the farm names are specified is the order in which the farms will be backed up. SPPS2_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Required. Specifies the Web server name that belongs to the server farm. SPPS2_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Configuration database in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_SSOx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Single Sign-on database in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. 216 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 217. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description SPPS2_DLSx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Document Library store in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_PORTALxNAMEy=Portal name Specify the name of the Portal Site that belongs to the farm. Since each farm may have more than one portal, you must use the same format that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx. For example: SPPS2_FARM1=farm name SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal1 SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal SPPS2_TEAM_SITExNAMEy=Windows Specify the name of the Windows SharePoint services site name SharePoint services site that belongs to the farm. Since each farm may have more than one Windows SharePoint services site, you must use the same format that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx. For example: SPPS2_FARM1=farm name SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal1 SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal SPPS2_DOC_SITExNAMEy=document Specify the name of the backward library compatible document library that belongs to the farm. Since each farm may have more than one document library, you must use the same format that you specify for SPPS2_FARMx. For example: SPPS2_FARM1=farm name SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal1 SPP2_PORTAL1NAME2=portal 217
  • 218. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description SPPS3_FARMx=Farm name Change x to the lowest number that is not already used, and specify the name of the Microsoft SharePoint 2007 Portal 2 server farm that you want to back up. You should start with the number 1 and continue sequentially. SPPS3_WEBSERVERx=Web server name Required. Specifies the Web server name that belongs to the server farm. SPPS3_CONFIGDBx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Configuration database in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_SSOx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the Single Sign-on database in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_CAx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the central administration site in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_WAxNAMEy=Web application Specify the name of the Web name application. You can list multiple names. SPPS3_SSPxNAMEy=Shared service Specify the name of the shared server provider name provider. You can list multiple names. SPPS3_SIx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the shared instance in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS3_GSx=0 or 1 Enter 1 to include the global settings in the backup; otherwise, enter 0. Note Alias selections will be ignored unless RUN_IMMEDIATE=1 in the [Schedule] section of backup job or backup job template. [Availability] 218 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 219. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description USEWINDOW=0 or 1 Enter 1 to specify when the selection list will be available for backup each day; otherwise, enter 0. EFFECTIVEDATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the beginning date when the selection list should be available to be backed up in MM/DD/YYYY format. The list will be available every day from this date onward. STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the earliest time when the selection list will be available for backup in HH:MM:SS format. ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time when the selection list will be available for backup in HH:MM:SS format. [Media_server] PREFERRED_SERVER_NAME=Media This operation is only available if the server name Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the preferred media server on which backup jobs run. PREFERRED_SERVER=Media server This operation is only available if the GUID Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the preferred media server on which backup jobs run. MEDIA_SERVER_POOL_NAME==Media This operation is only available if the server pool name Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the media server pool to use for the backup job. 219
  • 220. Using scripts and selection lists Values for selection list script (continued) Section Entry Description MEDIA_SERVER_POOL=Media server This operation is only available if the pool GUID Central Admin Server Option (CASO) is installed. Specify the media server pool to use for the backup job. 220 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 221. Using Policy Commands Using Policy Commands You can create policies that enable you to manage backup jobs and strategies. Policies contain job templates, which are job attributes that define how and when Backup Exec processes a job. Templates specify the devices, settings, and schedule for a job, but do not include the selections to be backed up. The policy switches available include: Policy Commands Operation Additional Function Description Switches -o260 Create new Executes a policy based on the contents of a policy file. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -fpolicy file Required. Specifies the name of the policy script file to be executed. -o261 Delete a policy Deletes the specified policy. Returns 1 if the command is successful or -1 if it failed. -ipolicy ID or Required. Specifies the ID or the name of the -j:policy name policy to be deleted. -o262 Update a policy Update an existing policy. -jpolicy name Required. Specifies the name of the policy to apply to the selection list. -fpolicy file Required. Specifies the name of the policy script file to be executed. -o263 Get number of Displays the number of policies created on a policies computer. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. If -tl: or -r is specified, -i or -j is required -i Instructs Backup Exec to display policy IDs. -j Instructs Backup Exec to display policy name. -tl: Instructs Backup Exec to display templates for the specified policy ID or policy name. 221
  • 222. Using Policy Commands Policy Commands (continued) Operation Additional Function Description Switches -r Instructs Backup Exec to display templates rules for the specified policy ID or policy name. -o264 Apply policy to Applies the specified policy to selection lists. selection lists The selection list IDs or names must be separated by a comma. Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ipolicy ID or Required. Specifies the ID or name of the -j:policy name policy to apply to the selection list. -si:selection Required. Specifies the selection list IDs or list IDs or names to apply to the policy. -sj:selection list names -ffilename Specifies a file that contains a lists of selection lists (one per line). -o265 Remove policy Removes the specified policy from a script. from script Returns a 1 if the command succeeds or a -1 if the command fails. -ipolicy ID or Required. Specifies the ID or name of the -j:policy name policy to remove from the script. -si:selection Required. Specifies the selection list IDs or list IDs or names to remove from the script. -sj:selection list names -ffilename Specifies a file that contains a lists of selection lists (one per line). 222 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 223. Using Policy Commands Creating a policy Command line switch -o260 creates a policy by reading a policy script file, such as the example script file policy.txt. The policy contains a set of required and optional entries for creating a policy. The FILEx entries specify the names of separate template script files and the TYPEx entries specify the type of template. A sample policy script file (policy.txt) is included in the UTILS directory on the installation DVD. To activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//) at the beginning of the line. Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a policy that contains three sections, and entries for each section. The sections of a policy file are: ■ [General] ■ [Templates] ■ [Rules] Policy file values Section Entry Description [General] NAME Required. Specifies the name of the policy being created. DESCRIPTION Specifies a description of the policy being created. [Template] NAMEx=Name of template Required. Specifies the name of the template. Multiple entries can be entered. For example, NAME1=, NAME2=ID, and so on. FILEx=Name of job template file Required. Specifies the name of a file that contains a job template. Note The FILEx entry is not required for Export media templates. 223
  • 224. Using Policy Commands Policy file values (continued) Section Entry Description TYPEx=Template type Required. Specifies the type of template specified by the FILEx entry. Values for TYPEx are: ◆ 0 = Backup template ◆ 1 = Duplicate backup sets template ◆ 2 = Export media template ◆ 3 = Synthetic full template [Rules] RULE_FIRST_TEMPLATEx=Name of Specifies the name of the template in first template the [Template} section with the highest precedence. RULE_SECOND_TEMPLATEx=Name of Specifies the name of the template in second template the [Template} section with the lowest precedence. 224 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 225. Using Policy Commands Policy file values (continued) Section Entry Description RULE_TYPEx=0 - 8, 10, or 11 Specifies rules for handling the template job start times. Rules to handle conflicting job start times include: ◆ 0 - If start times conflict, <First Template> supersedes <Second Template>. ◆ 7 - If start times conflict, <First Template> will start and upon completion, starts <Second Template> Rules to link jobs together: ◆ 1 - After <First Template> starts, also start <Second Template> ◆ 2 - After <First Template> completes, start <Second Template>. ◆ 3 - If <First Template> successfully completes, start <Second Template>. ◆ 4 - If <First Template> fails, start <Second Template>. Rules to duplicate backup sets: ◆ 5 - After <First Template> completes, start <Second Template> to duplicate the backup sets. ◆ 6 - After <First Template> completes, start <Second Template> to duplicate the backup sets. 225
  • 226. Using Policy Commands Policy file values (continued) Section Entry Description Rules to limit when jobs run: ◆ 8 - <First Template> must complete at least once before any other templates will be allowed to start. ◆ 11 - Run <First Template> only once. Rules to export media: ◆ 10 - After <First Template> completes, start <Second Template> to export media. 226 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 227. Using Policy Commands Using job template script files within a policy When creating a policy, you can define or create a job template script files to use with the policy. A job template script file includes the destination, settings, and schedule options. After the policy is created, you can use -o264 with a selection script to quickly create jobs based on the job templates. When using -o264, a policy and selection lists can only be associated with each other once. To use the same policy and selection lists to create another job, run -o265 before using -o264. Sample script files are included in the UTILS directory on the installation DVD. To activate an entry in this sample file, delete the forward slashes (//) at the beginning of the line. Examples of the template script files are given in the following files: ■ Backup template - bjtemplatescript.txt ■ Duplicate backup sets template - djtemplatescript.txt ■ Synthetic full backup job template - sftemplatescript.txt Note The duplicate backup sets template cannot be set to run now. Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a job template script file that contains all settings and options for a job, except for the data selections. Each entry included in the job template script file must be typed in capital letters and must be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces unless they are part of the value itself. For example, to specify in the script that the backup method is working set and that the device name is Backup-to-Disk Folder 1, the script should appear as: BK_METHOD=1 DEVICE_NAME="Backup-to-Disk Folder 1" 227
  • 228. Creating a backup job template script file Creating a backup job template script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a backup job template script file that contains the following sections, and entries for each section: ■ [Backup_Options] ■ [Miscellaneous] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included for the various sections must be typed in capital letters and be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. All possible entries for a duplicate backup template job script file are described in the following table. In creating a script file, you would not want to include all entries. Possible backup job template script file entries Section Entry Description [Backup_Options] BK_SET_NAME=backup set name Type the name of the backup set to be used by the job. BK_METHOD=0 - 9, 11 Enter a number from 0 through 9 and 11 that corresponds to the backup method you want. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full ◆ 1 = Copy ◆ 2 = Differential – changed files ◆ 3 = Incremental – changed files ◆ 4 = Daily ◆ 5 = Working set ◆ 6 = Incremental – modified time ◆ 7 = Differential – modified time ◆ 8 = Full – modified time ◆ 9 = Archive - Delete files after successful copy backup ◆ 11 = Synthetic full backup If 5 is entered as the value, a value must also be entered for WORKING_SET_DAYS. 228 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 229. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description BACKUP_LOCAL_MOUNT_POINTS= Enter a value of 1 to back up mount 0 or 1 points, which direct a file or directory to a local disk or directory path. Using this command allows you to back up data that is linked to local files, but is stored on another device without having to actually select the device. BACKUP_REMOTE_STORAGE_HSM= Enter a value of 1 to back up data that 0 or 1 has been migrated from primary storage to secondary storage. The data will not be recalled to its original location; it will be backed up directly to the backup media. This command should not be used if: ◆ A single device is used for secondary storage and backups and it contains one drive because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for use of the drive. ◆ You want to run a backup of your entire system because Backup Exec attempts to access all data that has been migrated to secondary storage and this may take a considerable amount of time. 229
  • 230. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description COLLECT_INFO_FOR_SYNTHETIC_BK=0 When you select this option, Backup or 1 Exec compares path names, file names, modified times, and other attributes with those from the previous full and incremental backups. If any of these attributes are new or changed, then the file or directory is backed up. Note This option displays only for templates. Enter 1 to have Backup Exec do the following: ◆ Collect the information that is required to detect files and directories that have been moved, renamed, or newly installed since the last backup. ◆ Include those files and directories in the backup jobs. Enter 0 to have Backup Exec skip the files and directories that have unchanged archive bits. Backup jobs that have this option selected require more disk space, and take more time to run, than backups that do not. You must select this option for the baseline and incremental backup template in the synthetic backup policy. DEVICE_NAME=device name Type the name of the device to be used for the backup. 230 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 231. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description OPEN_FILES_METHOD=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 through 3 to specify how to back up open files. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Never ◆ 1 = If closed within a specified number of seconds. If this method is selected, use the flag OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME to set the number of seconds for Backup Exec to wait; otherwise, the value set for default options will be used. ◆ 2 = With a lock ◆ 3 = Without a lock Note If 1 is entered as the value, Backup Exec will wait the number of seconds specified in OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME for the file to close before continuing the backup. If the files do not close during the specified interval, they are skipped. OPEN_FILE_WAIT_TIME=# Specifies the number of seconds Backup Exec is to wait for a file to close before continuing with the backup. RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to retension the media before backup; otherwise, enter 0. PRESERVE_TREE_ON_ARCHIVE= Enter 1 to retain the directory 0 or 1 structure of the files that were backed up in an archive job on the hard drive; otherwise, enter 0. SINGLE_INSTANCE_FOR_NTFS=0 or 1 Enter 1 if single instance store is being used, and you want to ensure that only one instance of a file for NTFS volumes will be backed up regardless of the number of single instance store (SIS) links that point to it. Otherwise, enter 0. 231
  • 232. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description REMOTE_AGENT_PRIORITY=# Select the number of CPU cycles the media server will use to maintain optimal server performance while Remote Agent backups are running. The higher the priority, the more the protected server’s CPU processing power is used during backup operations. Note Allocating fewer CPU cycles to a backup job results in slower backup performance. This entry contains the following options: ◆ MEDIUM. Select this option to allocate the default number of CPU cycles the protected server will use during a Remote Agent backup. ◆ LOW. Select this option to allocate fewer server CPU cycles to the backup job. ◆ LOWEST. Select this option to allocate the fewest number of CPU cycles to the backup job. WORKING_SET_DAYS=# Note If 5 was entered as the value for the BK_METHOD=# entry, the WORKING_SET_DAYS entry must be completed and included in the Backup Job Script File. Enter the number of days during which files that you want to include in the backup were last accessed. For example, if you want to specify for a working set backup to include all files last accessed within 30 days, type WORKING_SET_DAYS=30. 232 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 233. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EXCHANGE_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up an Exchange server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 3 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the Exchange database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Backup All ◆ 1 = Backup Copy ◆ 2 = Backup Log Differential ◆ 3 = Backup Log Incremental EXCHANGE_ENABLE_GRANULAR_ Enter 1 to enable the restore of RESTORE=0 or 1 individual documents from database backups. This option is only available when performing full backups; otherwise enter 0. EXCHANGE_MBOX_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up an Exchange server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 3 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the Exchange database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full - Back up messages. Reset archive bit. ◆ 1 = Copy - Back up messages. ◆ 2 = Differential - Back up changed messages. ◆ 3 = Incremental - Back up changed messages. Reset archive bit. EXCHANGE_SINGLE_INSTANCE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to back up only a single copy of all identical message attachments; otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK=0 or Enter 1 to perform a consistency check 1 and determine if possible data corruption exists when using the Backup Exec - Advanced Disk-based Backup Option (ADBO) or the Advanced Open File Option (AOFO); otherwise, enter 0. 233
  • 234. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EXCHANGE_CONTINUE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to continue the backup job even if the consistency check fails; otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_CONTINUOUS_ Enter 1 to enable continuous backup of PROTECTION=0 or 1 Exchange transaction logs with Backup Exec Continuous Protection Server; otherwise, enter 0. EXCHANGE_RECOVERY_POINTS_ Enter the interval in days, hours, or INTERVAL=xD (days) or xH (hours) minutes for making recovery points or xM (minutes) when continuously backing up Exchange transaction logs with Backup Exec Continuous Protection Server. SPPS2_METHOD=0 or 3 If you are backing up a SharePoint Portal Server. Enter a number 0 or 3that corresponds to the backup method you want for the SharePoint Portal Server. ◆ 0 = Full - Back up entire database. ◆ 3 = Differential - Back up database changes only. Select this to back up only the changes made to the database since the last full backup. Note The differential backup method cannot be used to back up Index databases or Document Libraries. The Full backup method will be used to back up these resources. SPPS2_ENABLE_GRANULAR_RESTORE=0 Enter 1 to enable the restore of or 1 individual documents from database backups. This option is only available when performing full backups; otherwise, enter 0. 234 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 235. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SPPS2_PRE_DBCC=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run a full consistency check (including indexes) of the Microsoft SQL databases used by Microsoft SharePoint before backing up the databases; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_CONT_ON_CC_FAILURE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to continue with the backup operation even if the consistency check fails; otherwise, enter 0. SPPS2_RELEASE_LOCK=0 or 1 Enter 1 to release the lock on the SharePoint farm topology before backing up data; otherwise, enter 0. SQL_METHOD=0 - 3 If you are backing up a SQL server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 2 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the SQL database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Backup All ◆ 1 = Backup Log ◆ 2 = Backup Log No Truncate ◆ 3 = Differential LOTUS_DOMINO_METHOD=0 - 2 If you are backing up a Lotus Domino server, use this entry. Enter a number from 0 through 2 that corresponds to the backup method you want for the Lotus Domino database. Methods are: ◆ 0 = Full ◆ 1 = Differential ◆ 2 = Incremental LOTUS_DOMINO_RECYCLE_LOGS= If you are backing up a Lotus Domino 0 or 1 server, use this entry to indicate that the Lotus Domino server will reuse the transaction log after it has been backed up. ◆ 1 = Recycle logs ◆ 0 = Do not recycle logs 235
  • 236. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description NW_BK_MIGRATED=0 or 1 Enter 1 to back up migrated NetWare SMS files; otherwise, enter 0. This switch can only be used with versions prior to Backup Exec 10.x. NW_BK_DECOMPRESS_FILES= If you are backing up NetWare shares 0 or 1 or volumes, include this entry in the Backup Job Script File. If you want to back up compressed files in decompressed form, enter 1 as the value; otherwise, enter 0. OVERWRITE_JOB=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want Backup Exec to overwrite a duplicate job if one exists; otherwise, enter 0. CONTINUE_ON_DBCC=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you are backing up a SQL server, have specified that a database consistency check is to be performed before the backup, and want the job to continue if the pre-backup database consistency check failed. PRE_BK_DBCC=0 - 3 If you are backing up a SQL server, include this entry. Enter a value from 0 to 3 that corresponds to an option for performing a pre-backup database consistency check. Options are: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = No Index ◆ 2 = Full ◆ 3 = Physical only 236 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 237. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description POST_BK_DBCC=0- 3 If you are backing up a SQL server include this entry. Enter a value from 0 to 3 that corresponds to an option for performing a post-backup database consistency check. Options are: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = No Index ◆ 2 = Full ◆ 3 = Physical only SQL_STANDBY_OPTION=0 or 1 Select the Standby value to put the database in standby mode when the job log backup completes. Select the No Recover value to put the database in a loading state when the job log backup completes. Users cannot connect to or query the database while it is in a loading state. Values are: ◆ 0 = Standby ◆ 1=No Recover USE_OPEN_FILE_OPTION=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to use the Advanced Open File Option if available; otherwise, enter 0. If Advanced OFO is unavailable, the OPEN_FILES_METHOD specified will be used. OPEN_FILE_CONFIGURATION=1-4 Enter a number from 1 through 4 to specify the open file technology to back up open files. Selections include: ◆ 1 = Automatically select open file technology ◆ 2 = Use Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service ◆ 3 = Use VERITAS Volume Snapshot Provider ◆ 4 = Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows FlashSnap Option 237
  • 238. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SNAPSHOT_PROVIDER=0-3 Enter a number from 0 through 3 to specify the best provider for the selected volume. Selections include: ◆ 0 = Automatic - Allows VSS to select the snapshot provider ◆ 1 = System - Use Microsoft software shadow copy provider ◆ 2 = Software - Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows ◆ 3 = Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer USE_SINGLE_VOLUME_SNAPSHOT=0 or Enter 1 if you want to process logical 1 volumes for backup one at a time; otherwise, enter 0. OFFHOST_PROVIDER=0 - 3 Enter a value from 0 to 3 that corresponds to the snapshot provider options for an offhost backup jobs. Options are: ◆ 0 = Disable offhost backup ◆ 1 = Automatic – Use hardware if available ◆ 2 = Software – Use VERITAS Storage Foundation for Windows ◆ 3 = Hardware – Use technology provided by hardware manufacturer OFFHOST_DISPOSITION=0 or 1 Enter 1 to allow the backup job to complete even if any of the volumes selected do not support offhost backup; otherwise, to fail the backup job, enter 0. OFFHOST_SINGLESNAP=0 or 1 Enter 1 to process logical volumes for offhost backup one at a time; otherwise, enter 0. ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name Specify a name for the encryption key. 238 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 239. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of encryption to use. Options are as follows: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Software ◆ 2 = Hardware ◆ 3 = Hardware if available, otherwise software If 2 or 3 are entered, the default encryption key must be 256-bit encryption. SAV_THREATLEVELTRIGGER=0, 2 - 4 Select the ThreatCon level at which you want automatic backups to run. You can select from the following: ◆ 0 = Disabled ◆ 2 = Elevated ◆ 3 = High ◆ 4 = Extreme [Media Options] MEDIA_SET=Media Set Name Enter the name of the media set to be used for the backup. MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media Password If the media has a password, specify the password. APPEND=0 or 1 To append the job to the media set specified in the MEDIA_SET entry or overwrite if no appendable media is available, enter 1 as the value. If you want the job to overwrite the media set specified in the MEDIA_SET entry, enter 0 as the value. If you do not enter a value, by default the job will be an overwrite job. 239
  • 240. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description APPEND_NO_OVERWRITE=0 or 1 If you want the job to either append to the media set specified in the MEDIA_SET entry, or if no appendable media is available then to terminate, enter 1. To have the job append to the media set, or overwrite if no appendable media is available, enter 0. VERIFY=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify operation to make sure the media can be read once the backup has been completed; otherwise, enter 0. Verifying all backups is recommended. COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of compression to use. Options include: ◆ 0 = Hardware compression ◆ 1 = Software compression ◆ 2 = Hardware if available, otherwise software ◆ 3 = None Note To use the default Backup Exec compression type, do not include this entry in the script. CHECKSUM=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if checksums are to be calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream immediately following the data stream. If 0 is entered as the value, backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape. EJECT_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to eject the media when the job completes; otherwise, enter 0. 240 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 241. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description [Miscellaneous] PRE_JOB_COMMAND=command Specify a .exe or batch file command that is to run on the media server before the backup operation starts. POST_JOB_COMMAND=command Specify a .exe or batch file command that is to run after the backup operation completes. COMMAND_RUN_POST_IF_ Enter 1 to execute the post-job PRE_SUCCESS=0 or 1 command only if the pre-job command is successful; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_RUN_JOB_IF_PRE_SUCCESS= Enter 1 to execute the job only if the 0 or 1 pre-job command is successful; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_RUN_POST_ Enter 1 to execute the post-job IF_JOB_FAILS=0 or 1 command even if the job fails; otherwise, enter 0. COMMAND_FAIL_JOB_IF_FAILS= Enter 1 to allow the pre- and post-job 0 or 1 commands to be successful only if completed with a return code of zero. Otherwise, enter 0. An return code of zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or post-job command is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job completed successfully. A non-zero return code is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job ended with an error. After checking the return codes, Backup Exec continues processing according to selections you made for running the pre- and post-job commands. If you enter 0, the success of the pre- and post-job commands is not determined based on the return code. 241
  • 242. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description COMMAND_AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes Backup Exec should wait before cancelling a command that did not complete. COMMAND_RUN_OPTION=0 or 1 Enter 0 to run the command on this media server or 1 to run the command on each server being backed up. NIC_ENABLED=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use the MAC address specified with the NIC_ADDRESS entry, or the name specified with the NIC_NAME entry. Enter 0 to clear previous settings for the network interface, and to use any available network adapter. “Operations for displaying network interface information” on page 85 NIC_ADDRESS=00-00-00-00-00-00 Enter the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the network interface you selected. To use this setting, NIC_ENABLED must be set to 1. NIC_NAME=name Type the name of a network interface card when NIC_ENABLED=1. NIC_PROTOCOL=0 - 2 Enter 0 to use any available Internet Protocol. Enter 1 to use IPv4. Enter 2 to use IPv6. “Operations for displaying network interface information” on page 85 NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=0 or 1 Enter 0 to use any available subnet prefix. Enter 1 to use a specific subnet prefix. NIC_SUBNET=00.000.00.000 Specify a subnet prefix when NIC_ENABLED=1 and NIC_SUBNET_ENABLED=1. 242 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 243. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description NIC_ANY_AVAILABLE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use any available network interface card. Enter 0 to use only the network interface card that you specify. [Schedule] Note You must enter values when you select to use either SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL, SCHED_DAYSOF MNTH, SCHED_DAYSOF WEEK, or DATE before the job is created. SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. 243
  • 244. Creating a backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 244 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 245. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Possible backup job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to schedule the job on hold; otherwise, enter 0. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a duplicate backup job template script file that contains entries for the duplicate backup template job options. The duplicate backup job template script file has similar entries, or values, as those used in the other job script file. Sections of a Duplicate Backup Job Script include: ■ [General] ■ [Setcopy_Options] ■ [Schedule] 245
  • 246. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Each entry included in the duplicate backup job script file must be typed in capital letters and immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. All possible entries for a duplicate backup template job script file are described in the following table. When creating a script file, do not include all entries. Possible duplicate job template script file entries Section Entry Description [General] BACKUP_SET_DESCRIPTION= Type a description of the information Description you are duplicating. PREFERRED_SOURCE_DEVICE_GUID= Enter the GUID of the device used as Source device guid the destination device for the original backup job. Use operation -o63 to display managed drives. [Setcopy_Options] DEVICE_NAME=Device name Type the name of the device to be used for the duplicate job. MEDIA_SET_GUID=Media set GUID Enter the GUID of the media set to be used for the duplicate job. Use operation -o69 to display media sets. OVERWRITE_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want Backup Exec to overwrite the media; otherwise, enter 0. APPEND_OVERWRITE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to append this backup to the media set. If there is no appendable media available, the job is appended to overwritable media that will then be added to the media set; otherwise enter 0. APPEND_TERMINATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to append to this backup to the media set. If there is no appendable media available, the job is terminated; otherwise, enter 0. 246 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 247. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description EJECT _MEDIA_AFTER_COMPLETES=0 or Enter 1 to have Backup Exec 1 automatically eject the media in the drive when the operation completes. WRITE_CHECKSUMS=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if checksums are to be calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream immediately following the data stream. If 0 is entered as the value, backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape. RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to retension the media before backup; otherwise, enter 0. MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media password If the media has a password, specify the password. AUTO_VERIFY=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify operation to make sure the media can be read after the backup has been completed; otherwise, enter 0. COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to select hardware compression; otherwise, enter 0. ENCRYPTION_KEY_NAME=key name Specify a name for the encryption key. 247
  • 248. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description ENCRYPTION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of encryption to use. Options are as follows: ◆ 0 = None ◆ 1 = Software ◆ 2 = Hardware ◆ 3 = Hardware if available, otherwise software If 2 or 3 are entered, the default encryption key must be 256-bit encryption. [Schedule] SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=x Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. 248 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 249. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 249
  • 250. Creating a duplicate backup job template script file Possible duplicate job template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. If schedule values are not entered, then the DATE==MM/DD/YYYY and TIME=hh:mm:ss entries will be used to set the TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run the duplicate backup job immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. To specify hours, enter a value divisible by 60. RUN_ACCORDING_RULE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to run the job based on a template rule. For example, with the After <Template A> completes, start <Template B> rule, <Temaplate B> will run whenever <Template A> completes. Otherwise, enter 0. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you want the job to be submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0. 250 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 251. Creating a synthetic full job template script file Creating a synthetic full job template script file Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a backup job script file that contains the following sections, and entries for each section: ■ [General] ■ [Synthetic_Options] ■ [Schedule] Each entry included for the various sections must be typed in capital letters and be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. All possible entries for a Backup Job Script File are described in the following table. In creating a script file, you would not want to include all entries. Possible synthetic full template script file entries Section Entry Description [General] BACKUP_SET_DESCRIPTION= Type a description of the information Description you are duplicating. PREFERRED_SOURCE_DEVICE_GUID= Enter the GUID of the device used as Source device guid the destination device for the original backup job. Use operation -o63 to display managed drives. [Synthetic_Options] DEVICE_NAME=device name Type the name of the device to be used for the backup. MEDIA_SET=Media Set Name Enter the name of the media set to be used for the backup. OVERWRITE_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want Backup Exec to overwrite the media; otherwise, enter 0. 251
  • 252. Creating a synthetic full job template script file Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description APPEND_OVERWRITE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to append this backup to the media set. If there is no appendable media available, the job is appended to overwritable media that will then be added to the media set; otherwise enter 0. APPEND_TERMINATE=0 or 1 Enter 1 to append to this backup to the media set. If there is no appendable media available, the job is terminated; otherwise, enter 0. EJECT _MEDIA_AFTER_COMPLETES=0 or Enter 1 to have Backup Exec 1 automatically eject the media in the drive when the operation completes. WRITE_CHECKSUM=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if checksums are to be calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream immediately following the data stream. If 0 is entered as the value, backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape. RETENSION_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to retension the media before backup; otherwise, enter 0. WORM_MEDIA=0 or 1 Enter 1 to use write once, read many (WORM) media for this backup job; otherwise, enter 0. MEDIA_PASSWORD=Media Password If the media has a password, specify the password. AUTO_VERIFY=0 or 1 Enter 1 to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify operation to make sure the media can be read after the backup has been completed; otherwise, enter 0. 252 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 253. Creating a synthetic full job template script file Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description COMPRESSION_TYPE=0 - 3 Enter a number from 0 to 3 that corresponds with the type of compression to use. Options include: ◆ 0 = Hardware compression ◆ 1 = Software compression ◆ 2 = Hardware if available, otherwise software ◆ 3 = None Note To use the default Backup Exec compression type, do not include this entry in the script. [Schedule] Note You must enter values when you select to use either SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL, SCHED_DAYSOF MNTH, SCHED_DAYSOF WEEK, or DATE before the job is created. SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. 253
  • 254. Creating a synthetic full job template script file Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1/3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, enter a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 254 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 255. Creating a synthetic full job template script file Possible synthetic full template script file entries (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=# Enter the number of minutes after which the job is canceled if it is not completed. Backup Exec starts timing the job when the job is queued, not when the job begins. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 as the value if you want to schedule the job on hold; otherwise, enter 0. 255
  • 256. Using a schedule script with device and media operations Using a schedule script with device and media operations Use a text editor, such as Notepad, to create a schedule script file that contains all settings and options for a device and media operation, such as cleaning a robotic library drive, that can be scheduled as a recurring job. Each entry included in the schedule script file must be typed in capital letters and must be immediately followed by an equal (=) sign. The value for the entry must immediately follow the equal sign and contain no spaces or quotes unless they are part of the value itself. All possible entries for a schedule script file are described in the following table. Do not include all entries in the script file. The following values are in the schedule script file: Values for schedule script file Section Entry Description [Schedule] SCHED_STARTTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS format for this job. SCHED_ENDTIME=HH:MM:SS Enter the latest time this job can start in HH:MM:SS format. SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=HH:MM:SS Enter the interval in HH:MM:SS format for the job to restart on each run day. For example, if you have set up the job to run every seven days, you can also set it up to run every four hours on its run day by entering SCHED_RESTART_INTERVAL=04:00:0 0. SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=X Enter the interval in days in which the job is to run. For example, if you want the job to run every seven days, enter SCHED_REPEAT_INTERVAL=7. SCHED_ANCHOR=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, from which the interval is calculated. 256 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 257. Using a schedule script with device and media operations Values for schedule script file (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_EFFECTIVE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, that the schedule becomes effective. SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=x Enter the days of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. The value is 1 through 32 with 32 being the last day of the month. For example, to run the job on the first and 15th of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFMONTH=1,15 SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=x Enter the day of the week, a forward slash, and the week of the month you want the job to run in a comma delimited string. Enter a value of 1-7 for the day of the week with 1 equaling Sunday, 2 equaling Monday, and so on. For the week of the month, values can be 1 for the first week, 2 for the second week, 3 for the third week, 4 for the fourth week, and 5 for the last week. For example, to run the job on Sunday for the first three weeks of the month, type: SCHED_DAYSOFWEEK=1/1,1/2,1 /3 SCHED_INCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date when the job should run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, if you want the job to run on the first and 15th of August, type: SCHED_INCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_INCLUDEDATE2=08/15/2002 257
  • 258. Using a schedule script with device and media operations Values for schedule script file (continued) Section Entry Description SCHED_EXCLUDEDATEx=MM/DD/YYYY Enter a specific date, such as a holiday, when the job should not run. For this field, x is a number starting at 1, which allows you to specify multiple dates. For example, if you want to prevent the job from running on the first and 25th of August, type: SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE1=08/01/2002 SCHED_EXCLUDEDATE2=08/25/2002 DATE=MM/DD/YYYY Enter the start date for the job in MM/DD/YYYY format. Note The start date month, day, and year must be separated by forward slashes. TIME=hh:mm:ss Enter the start time for the job in hh:mm:ss format. Note The hour, minutes, and seconds must be separated by colons. RUN_IMMEDIATE=0 or 1 Enter a value of 1 if the job is to run immediately; otherwise, enter 0. Note This entry should be used only if no other entries are specified under the schedule section. If no other scheduling options have been selected and this entry is not set, the default value is 1. AUTO_CANCEL_TIME=XMINUTES/HOURS Enter a number and select either MINUTES or HOURS to specify to cancel a job if not completed with the selected time. HOLD=0 or 1 Enter 1 if you want the job to be submitted on hold; otherwise, enter 0. 258 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 259. Understanding job status messages Understanding job status messages The Command Line Applet displays job statuses as numeric values. Descriptions of possible job status return values are: Possible job statuses Job Status Code Description JOB_STATE_CANCELED = 1 The job has been terminated because it was canceled. JOB_STATE_COMPLETED = 2 The job has completed and is waiting for final disposition. JOB_STATE_SUCCESS_WITH_ The job has completed successfully with some EXCEPTIONS = 3 exceptions. JOB_STATE_DISPATCHED = 4 The job has been dispatched. JOB_STATE_HOLD = 5 The job is on hold. JOB_STATE_ERROR = 6 The job has completed with an error. JOB_STATE_INVALID SCHEDULE = 7 The schedule for the task is invalid. The job will never run. JOB_STATE_NOT_IN_WINDOW = 10 The job’s scheduled time window closed before the job could be dispatched. There may not have been an available device during the time window. JOB_STATE_READY_BUT_PAUSED = 11 The job is ready, but the media server is paused. JOB_STATE_PENDING = 12 The job is in a transitional state. JOB_STATE_RECOVERED = 13 During startup, Backup Exec detected that a job was active when the server was shut down, and that the Checkpoint restart option was not enabled for this job. The job history log has been marked JOB_STATE_RECOVERED, and the job has been scheduled to restart immediately. 259
  • 260. Understanding job status messages Possible job statuses (continued) Job Status Code Description JOB_STATE_RESUMED = 15 During startup, Backup Exec detected that a job was active when the server was shut down, and that the Checkpoint restart option was enabled for this job. The job history log has been marked JOB_STATE_RESUMED, the job has been scheduled to restart immediately, and the job flag has been set to indicate checkpoint restart. JOB_STATE_ACTIVE = 16 The job is currently running on the server. JOB_STATE_READY = 17 The job is eligible for dispatch. JOB_STATE_SCHEDULED = 18 The job has a due date in the future. JOB_STATE_SUCCESS = 19 The job has been completed successfully. JOB_STATE_SUPERCEDED = 20 The job is ready, but another higher precedence task is eligible to run. JOB_STATE_THRESHOLD_AUTO_ The job was canceled because it was not completed ABORT = 21 within the number of hours or minutes that were set for the Enable automatic cancellation option on the job schedule. JOB_STATE_TO_BE_SCHEDULED = 22 The job needs to have the due date calculated. JOB_STATE_LINKED_JOB = 23 The job is linked to another job, and will not start until that job is finished. 260 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 261. Index A for SQL server, 235 ADBO, offhost backup, 105 backup-to-disk folders agent switches, 87 creating, 68 alert configuration, setting, 48 deleting, 70 alert switches, 44 viewing properties, 70 alerts bemcmd command, 7 display, 44 bjscript.txt, 127 respond to, 46 bjtemplatescript.txt, 227 view text, 45 C alias backup, in backup job script file, 159 catalog job AOFO, setting default options, 102 creating using script file, 181 B script file, creating and using, 181 Backup Exec Command Line Applet, catalog job script file, creating, 181 about, 5 catalogscript.txt, 127 Backup Exec services cleaning job, creating, 58 commands, 80 cleaning slot, designating, 57 managing, 80 command line applet, using, 6 backup job command line switches alias backup in script file, 159 administrating jobs, 29 creating, 11 backup job, 10 creating using script file, 127, 251 restore job, 36 running previously created job, 10 used with all operations, 9 script file, creating and using, 127 D switches, 10 default options backup job script file Active Directory, 110 creating, 127, 251 ADBO, 104 using for alias backup, 159 AOFO, 102 backup job switches, 10 backup-to-disk, 122 backup job template script catalog, 120 batch file commands, 241 database maintenance, 123 Exchange server settings, 233 DB2, 123 Lotus Domino server settings, 235 display progress indicators for job, 93 media options, 239 Exchange server, 108 NetWare server settings, 236 for backup jobs, 96 open file settings, 231 for restore jobs, 99 SharePoint Portal Server settings, 234 IDR, 121 SQL server settings, 235 job default options, 94 backup selection list, deleting, 33 job log, 105 backup template script job status and recovery, 119 contents, 228 Linux, UNIX, and Macintosh, 114 creating, 228 Lotus Domino, 112 for Exchange server, 233 media, 121 for Lotus Domino server, 235 Microsoft SharePoint, 109 for NetWare, 236 NDMP, 115 for SharePoint Portal Server, 234 261
  • 262. NetWare SMS, 114 I network and security, 100 inventory job Oracle server, 112 robotic library, 60 reports, 125 stand-alone drive, 69 schedule, 119 J setting, 92 job setting general options, 93 administrating, 29 setting job priority, 94 canceling, 29 setting startup inventory option, 93 job log, copying to console, 31 SQL server, 106 job monitor switches, 29 storage provisioning, 118 job priority, specifying, 10, 25 trial job, 101 job status messages, 259 device management switches, 51 devices, managing, 51 L discovery job label media, 66, 75 creating using script file, 186 logon account switches, 81 script file, creating and using, 186 Lotus Domino Agent discovery job script file backup job script method, using, 139, creating, 186 235 setting discovery options, 187 setting default options, 112 setting general options, 186 using for backup, 18 setting schedule options, 189 M specifying domains, 189 media discoveryscript.txt, 127 erasing, 64 djscript.txt, 127 formatting, 66 djtemplatescript.txt, 227 label, 75 drive pool labeling, 66 creating, 60 moving, 74 deleting, 72 renaming, 75 duplicate backup job, creating using script retension tape, 65 file, 192 media management switches, 51 duplicate backup template script media options creating, 245 backup job template script, 239 setting device and media options, 194 default, 121 setting general options, 192 media overwrite protection period, duplicate job script file, creating, 192 setting, 63 E media protection level, setting for backup eject media job, 67 job, 14 encryption keys, creating and media server pool maintaining, 26 adding server to, 73 error-handling rules switches, 49 creating, 72 Exchange server deleting, 72 restore job script file entries, 165 displaying ID, 73 Exchange Server, backing up, 16 removing server from, 74 renaming, 72 G media sets global command line switches, 9 creating, 59 deleting, 71 262 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet
  • 263. media vault script file adding media to, 76 about, 127 creating, 75 backup, 228 deleting, 75 duplicate backup job, 245 displaying, 76 restore job, 44 media, managing, 51 saving and launching, 207 move media, 74 synthetic full, 251 updating for this release, 5 O selection lists offhost backup, choosing single volume creating, 28 snap, 105 creating using script file, 208 online help, 9 script file Oracle Agent, backing up, 19 using in command line applet, 208 P values for, 208 policy job server drive, backing up, 15 creating using script file, 221 sftemplatescript.txt, 227 template script files, 227 SQL 7.0 policy values, 223 backing up, 18 pre/post commands placing in standby mode or load restore job script file, 168 state, 18 using backup job template script SQL Server file, 241 backing up, 17 priority, specifying for backup job, 12 restoring, 39 properties storage array physical disk on storage array, 77 configure, 78 storage array, 77 configure virtual disk, 79 R detect, 79 rename media, 75 rename, 79 report switches, 84 Storage Provisioning Option requirements, 6 default options, 118 restore job synthetic full job template script, creating using script file, 162 creating, 251 running previously created, 36 T script file, creating and using, 162 templates restore job script file backup script, 228 creating, 162 duplicate backup job script, 245 running, 36 synthetic full job script, 251 rjscript.txt, 127 using script files, 227 RMAN test run job restoring Oracle database, 38 creating using script file, 199, 204 using for backup job, 23 script file, creating and using, 199, 204 robotic library partitions, creating, 76 test run script file, 199, 204 S testrunscript.txt, 127 schedule script file V using with device and media virtual disk operations, 256 configure, 79 values, 256 rename, 79 Index 263
  • 264. 264 Symantec Backup Exec Command Line Applet